Home

SIGNAL GENERATOR SME02 SME03 SME03E

1. Fig 2 44 Submenu DIGITAL MOD QPSK CLOCK preset setting CLOCK Opens a window to set the clock parameters The current settings are displayed CLOCK EDGE Selection of the active clock edge POS The positive clock edge is active NEG The negative clock edge is active IEC bus command SOUR DM CLOC POL NORM CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source INT The internal clock generator is also used with an external data source The CLOCK socket is switched to form an output COUPLED The CLOCK input output is switched in accordance with the DATA input output IEC bus command SOUR DM CLOC SOUR COUP CLOCK MODE Selection of the clock pulse for the CLOCK input output SYMBOL The CLOCK input output is set to symbol clock pulse BIT The CLOCK input output is set to bit clock Note Using XMEM option SMIQ B12 requires CLOCK BIT to be set IEC bus command SOUR DM CLOC MODE SYMB LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction OFF The level reduction is switched off NORM level reduction corresponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB MAX The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV MODE NORM
2. Command SCPI Page info SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or 3 31 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to1 MHz SOURce AM POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 31 SOURce AM SOURce EXT INT1 2 EXT INT1 2 3 31 SOURce AM STATe ON OFF 3 31 SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF 3 32 SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog not SCPI 3 32 SOURce CORRection CSET SELect Name of table not SCPI 3 32 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 2 2 3 6 GHz not SCPI 3 33 5 kHz to 1 5 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 40dB to 6dB 40dB to 6dB not SCPI 3 33 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete Name of table not SCPI 3 33 SOURce DM MGRoup not SCPI 3 35 SOURce DM BASic TYPE GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK FSK4 not SCPI 3 36 FFSK SOURce DM BASic STATe ON OFF 3 36 SOURce DM BASic SOURce EXTernal PRBS DATA 3 36 SOURce DM BASic CLOCk MODE BIT SYMBol not SCPI 3 36 SOURce DM BASic CLOCk POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 36 SOURce DM BASic CLOCk SOURce INTernal COUPled not SCPI 3 37 SOURce DM BASic DATA CATalog not SCPI 3 37 SOURce DM BASic DATA DELete Name not SCPI 3 37 SOURce DM BASic DATA DELete ALL not SCPI 3 37 SOURce DM BASic DATA FREE not SCPI 3 37 SOURce DM BASic DATA SELect Name not SCPI 3 37 SOURce DM BASic DATA
3. enne nnns 2 1 2d Display rnt t e Ure e hee bee i eerie teta ee ede 2 1 211 2 Control iu ll amd eame ri edet delet 2 3 24 123 Inp ts OUtpUls td ri e P Recon 2 11 2 1 2 Elements of the Rear Panel eee eene ener 2 13 2 2 Operating Concept eeclesie rue ize a ar 2 18 2 2 d Display deae os N ii RERUM ien eR ns sini T 2 18 2 2 8 Basic Operating Steps ccecceceseeceseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseaneesaeeeaesseaaessenees 2 19 2 2 3 1 Calling the M nuS ccecececeeeeceeeeeeeee scence ceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseaeeesaeeesaaesseneeesaees 2 19 2 2 3 2 Selection and Change of Parameters 2 20 2 2 3 3 Triggering Action miii denke rene eadeni 2 21 2 2 8 4 Quick Selection of Menu QUICK 2 21 2 2 8 5 Use of FREQ and LEVEL 2 22 2 2 3 6 Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ON OFF 2 22 2 2 3 7 Changing Unit of Level sess 2 22 1039 1856 12 3 E 13 Contents SME 2 2 3 8 Correction of Input cathe ce e d e Pn HERR n e 2 23 2 2 4 Sample Setting for First nnns 2 23 2 2 4 2 LIStEGIUOT ono Eee tee eee de e
4. Fig 2 68 Menu UTILITIES PROTECT preset setting LOCK LEVEL x Activating deactivating the lock out ON The lock out is activated OFF The cursor automatically wraps to the input of the password After the password has been entered the lock out is deactivated IEC bus short command SYST PROT1 ON PASSWORD LEVEL x Input of the password termination with ENTER key IEC bus short command SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 1038 6002 02 2 157 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 8 Calibration CALIB For servicing the following menus offer access to calibrating routines and correction values UTILITIES CALIB VCO SUM LEV PRESET PULSE GEN REF OSC cf service manual QPSK LEVEL cf service manual Internal calibration routines LEV PRESET VCO SUM QPSK and PULSE GEN are protected by a password They can only be executed if the lock out in the UTILITIES PROTECT menu has been unlocked The password is PASSWORD LEVEL 1 123456 Caution X Execute calibration routines only when the instrument has warmed up Calibration routines LEVEL and REF OSC are described in the service manual stock no 1039 1856 24 Calibration VCO SUM To synchronize the summing loop the frequency the oscillator generates must be so close to the rated frequency that the phase control can lock in This is effected by means of presetting values The presetting values are stored in a table and can be renewed using
5. 3 137 ETI External Traffic Indicator Bit 2 104 3 54 Event status enable register ESE 2 9 1897 EXPO p 3 9 EXT1 2 coupling 2 54 2 56 2 59 3 30 3 63 3 82 Inpede A 2 11 External dala recordlhgss eet ida cti re reo 3 40 dOlU NO esis ons inim ED emen 2 155 modulation tr eere ete recreate 2 50 referenc d Lo NEL oed o AM Lite a LUNES 2 155 3 99 trigger LIST iiu eeu 2 144 3 126 memory extension 2 82 3 40 MSEQ itte p PULSE input active edge pulse modulation essen SWOOD io ace eter TA 3 124 TRIGGER input active edge 2 83 3 40 3 128 E 13 SME F Fast Restore Mode sss 3 143 FFSK modulation 2 100 3 49 testing iie oe a 5 37 Filler data ERMES iiA uud Ni A 2 105 2 113 POGSAQ rera eed 2 130 2 131 Filter 4FSK modulation sss 2 99 3 49 FSK modulation Aye GFSK modulation esses 2 90 3 44 GMSK modulation sss 2 88 3 43 QPSK modulation Fitting option essen FLEX Flexible High Speed Paging 2 78 radio communication service 2 107 3 55 Radio netWork i ii aer tico ei tesa gn Pay de a 2 86 FM
6. Fig 2 20 Menu LEVEL ALC preset setting STATE ON Normal state Internal level control is permanently switched on IEC bus command SOUR POW ALC ON OFF Internal level control is deactivated In this state no AM and no digital modulation with AM content is possible IEC bus command SOUR POW ALC OFF SEARCH ONCE Manual short time switching on of the level control for level calibration in the ALC STATE OFF operating mode IEC bus command SOUR POW ALC ON ALC OFF 1038 6002 02 2 46 E 13 SME RF Level 2 5 4 Internal Level Control Bandwidth Selection BANDWIDTH Selection of the bandwidth of the level control AUTO The bandwidth is automatically adapted to the operating conditions IEC bus command SOUR POW ALC BAND AUTO ON 100 kHz Bandwidth narrow This setting improves AM noise with carrier offset gt 100 kHz However the AM bandwidth is restricted IEC bus command SOUR POW ALC BAND 100kHz BAND AUTO OFF 500 kHz Full bandwidth IEC bus command SOUR POW ALC BAND 500kHz BAND AUTO OFF 2 5 5 User Correction UCOR Function User Correction can be used to create and activate lists in which arbitrary RF frequencies are assigned level correction values Up to 10 lists with a total of 160 correction values can be compiled For frequencies which are not included in the list the level correction is determined by means of interpolation of the nearest correction values When user cor
7. 2 68 3 69 5 s 2 70 3 71 LOC default 2 74 8 74 localizer modulation 2 72 3 72 transmitting 2 70 Incompatible csse 2 51 Indertations aa da 3 12 Indication attenuator circuits 2 157 2 164 counter indication 2 164 error messages 2 operating hours 2 164 3 22 serial number eee 2 157 2 164 software version 2 164 3 22 suppressed 2 154 3 22 Initial Status inei Risdon dE 1 2 INMARSAT M International Maritime Satellite 2 78 Radio network sii D fte 3 130 BURST aca CLOCK 2 11 2 86 2 92 3 37 3 41 CONT OCUON ERE EROS 2 23 DATA 2 11 2 86 3 36 onte etel eed 2 11 modulatioris eH odii et 2 50 PULSE 2 15 2 60 3 128 REFS suu iB EEG 2 15 TOSISTAN Clic A qa c einen eee eae 2 11 TRIGGER ti e ada 2 13 2 82 2 136 2 144 2 150 2 166 3 128 ee 2 15 2 155 Insert niry ai 2 34 Installation MARKER 2 168 Instrument states reset 3 120 Instrument seen 2 69 2 73
8. AM DEPTH SOURCE INT SOURCE EXT EXT COUPLING POLARITY LFGEN1 FREQ LF GEN2 LF GEN2 FREQ SHAPE 30 0 LFGEN1 LFGEN2 OFF EXT1 AGr DE NORM INV 3k 15k Hz 1 000 0 kHz SQR TRI NOI Fig 2 24 Menu MODULATION AM preset setting fitted with option SM B2 LF generator LFGEN2 AM DEPTH AM SOURCE INT AM SOURCE EXT AM EXT COUPLING 1038 6002 02 Input value of the modulation depth IEC bus command SO Selection of the internal source IEC bus command SO Selection of the external source IEC bus command SO Selection of the kind of coupling IEC bus command SO 2 54 UR AM 30PCT UR AM SOUR INT1 STAT ON UR AM SOUR EXT STAT ON AC or DC with external supply input EXT 1 UR AM EXT COUP AC E 13 SME AM POLARITY LFGEN1 FREQ LFGEN2 FREQ LFGEN2 SHAPE 1038 6002 02 Analog Modulations Selection of the polarity of amplitude modulation NORM A positive modulation voltage generates a higher output level INV The AM polarity is inverted IEC bus command SOUR AM POL NORM Selection of the frequency of the 1st LF generator IEC bus command SOUR AM INT1 FREQ 1kHz Input value of the frequency of the 2nd LF generator IEC bus command SOUR AM INT2 FREQ 1kHz Selection of the waveform of the 2nd LF generator IEC bus command SOUR2 FUNC SIN
9. Fig 2 70 Menu UTILITIES CALIB LEV PRESET CALIBRATE gt Triggers the calibration for level preset IEC bus short command CAL LPR FREQUENCY RANGE Selection of the correction values displayed by VIEW NORM Correction values with the exception of the mixer range MIXER Correction values of the mixer range 1038 6002 02 2 159 E 13 Utilities SME LEVEL Selection of the level for which the correction values are indicated VIEW gt The cursor wraps to index 1 of the list The list can be executed using the rotary knob This index can be directly obtained by entering the index value on the digit block IEC bus short command CAL LPR DATA Calibration PULSE GEN A programmable oscillator determines the accuracy of the pulse width and the pulse delay of the pulse generator To compensate for the temperature dependence of the oscillator approx 0 2 degree an internal calibration is offered The adjustment accuracy is approx 0 5 The calibration routine is to be executed even after a data loss in the RAM or after an exchange of modules Function The frequency of the oscillator is measured using a counter which is synchronized with the crystal reference The oscillator is readjusted until the deviation is minimized The calibration value thus achieved is stored Menu selection UTILITIES CALIB PULSE GEN 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATE g
10. List of Commands SME Command Parameter SCPI Page info SOURce FSWeep FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 3 76 SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to F 3 6 GHz SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep STATe ON OFF 3 77 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep AOFF not SCPI 3 77 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep POWer 144 dBm to 16 dBm not SCPI 3 77 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 77 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 77 SOURce MBEacon COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 78 SOURce MBEacon COMid FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz not SCPI 3 78 SOURce MBEacon COMid STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 78 SOURce MBEacon MARKer DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 78 SOURce MBEacon MARKer FREQuency 400 Hz 1300 Hz 3000 Hz not SCPI 3 78 SOURce MBEacon STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 78 SOURce PHASe ADJust 360 deg to 360 deg not SCPI 3 79 SOURce PHASe REFerence not SCPI 3 79 SOURce PM1 2 DEViation 360 to 360 deg 3 80 SOURce PM1 2 EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC 3 80 SOURce PM1 2 INTernal F REQuency 400 kHz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or 3 81 0 1 Hz to500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to1 MHz SOURce PM1 2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal1 EXTernal2 3 81 SOURce PM1 2 STATe ON OFF 3 81 SOURce POCSag BRATe 512bps 1200bps 2400bps not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag DEViation 1 5 2 0 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5 kHz not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 not SCPI 3 83 SOUR
11. SOURce DM BASic DATA ATTenuate POINts This command queries the length in bits of the ATTenuate list presently selected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR DM BAS DATA ATT POIN Answer 200 1038 6002 02 3 38 E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM BASic DATA BURSt 0 1 0 1 The command transmits the burst data output at the BURSt output socket List XMEM DM memory extension can only be written into with BURSt data if DM BAS DATA XMEM MODE is set to ALL Only numbers 0 or 1 are permissible 1 corresponds to high level at the burst socket The data can also be transmitted as block data cf DATA RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA BURS 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 SOURce DM BASic DATA BURSt POINts This command queries the length in bits of the BURSt list presently selected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR DM BAS DATA BURS POIN Answer 200 SOURce DM BASic DATA ALEVel 0 to 60 dB This command Attenuate LEVel specifies the value in dB by which the level is reduced if a 1 occurs in the ATTenuate list presently active The command is only active in the setting DM BAS DATA ALEVel MODE NORM Note The command also specifies the level reduction of the complex modulation POCSAG Example SOUR DM BAS DATA ALEV RST value is 0 dB SOURce DM BASic DATA ALEVel MODE
12. 2 169 Fig 2 81 ERROR page iine E etu dad M E tial dae eee ee 2 170 Fig 3 1 Tree structure of the SCPI command systems esee 3 6 Fig 3 2 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus 3 130 Fig 3 3 The status register model crac necia car canada 3 133 Fig 3 4 Overview of the status register oo eee eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeesaeesaesnaeeeaeeeaeeeaeee 3 135 Fig 4 1 Shielding cover of controller and front panel 4 3 Fig 4 2 Position of the RAM battery on the 4 3 Fig 4 3 Position of the XMEM battery ssssesseeeneenenenne enne nnne tenens 4 5 Fig 4 4 UTIEITIES TEST menu noie ciet e at ete i cd eae get 4 5 Fig 5 1 Spectrum with tte 5 29 Fig 5 2 Spectrum with QPSK e e I ette tts 5 33 Fig 5 3 Spectr m With GMSK ple a nd eio reet gta ed 5 34 1039 1856 12 12 E 13 Before putting the product into operation for the first time make sure to read the following Safety Instructions Rohde amp Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer its customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are d
13. 2 89 DIGITAL MOD QPSK essen 2 91 DIGITAL MOD ReFLEX PHEQUENQOY eor esses rm oes cate seem 241 E 13 SME HELP iiss enano canis wide se IRE 2 169 LEVEL AEQ cte ees 2 46 LEVELS EME aisi oH er HIR 2 49 LEVEL LEVEL eee dt iere 2 43 LEVEE COR nium 2 47 LF OUTPUT 2 132 LIST enana eee 2 145 MEM 2 150 MODULATION 2 58 MODULATION 2 61 MODULATION 2 63 MODULATION 2 54 MODULATION ILS LOC oooonccinccinncononicanccinnninanccnanonano 2 72 MODULATION 2 76 MODULATION FM esses enean 2 56 MODULATION ILS GS seen 2 68 MODULATION VOR essent 2 65 path eit ets 2 18 quick selection ad id 2 21 IU NEMPE 2 169 we 2 21 2 40 SWEEPeFREQY rei err tta rare renes 2 138 SWEEP EEVEL iieri ecu riter eec 2 140 SWEEP LF GEN2 2 141 TILITIES DIAG TPOINT 2 163 TILITIES YSTEM PIB 2 152 UTILITIES AUX l O 2 166 UTILITIES 2 167 UTILITIES CALIB LEV PRESET 2 159 UTILITIES CALIB 2 161 UTILITIES CALIB VCO SUM 2 158 UTILITIES
14. FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONFIG LEVEL REF OSC TPOINT REFSS MODULATION PHASE PARAM DSYN DIGITAL MOD PROTECT SUM LF OUTPUT CALIB OPUL SWEEP DIAG LIST TESI ROSC MEM SEQ oo md LFGEN UTILITIES BREDER FMOD HEDE INSTALL PUM3 DCOD Fig 2 73 Menu UTILITIES DIAG CONFIG 1038 6002 02 2 162 E 13 SME Utilities 2 11 10 Voltage Indication of Test Points DIAG TPOINT Submenu DIAG TPOINT offers access to internal test points If a test point is switched on the voltage indication is displayed in a window in the header field For greater detail see service manual stock no 1039 1856 24 Menu selection UTILITIES DIAG TPOINT AA 2227 100 000 0000 os FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONFIG STATE LEVEL REF OSC TPOINT POINT MODULATION PHASE PARAM DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX 1 0 HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 74 Menu UTILITIES DIAG TPOINT STATE Switching on off the voltage indication in the headerfield POINT Input value of the test point IEC bus short command DIAG POINxx 1038 6002 02 2 163 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 11 Indications of Service Data DIAG PARAM Submenu DIAG PARAMETER offers access to different parameters such as serial number software version operating hours
15. 2 153 Fig 2 65 Menu UTILITIES 2 154 Fig 2 66 Menu UTILITIES REF OSC preset 2 155 Fig 2 67 Menu UTILITIES PHASE preset setting sse 2 156 Fig 2 68 Menu UTILITIES PROTECT preset setting ssseeene 2 157 Fig 2 69 Menu UTILITIES CALIB VCO SUM 2 158 Fig 2 70 Menu UTILITIES CALIB LEV PRESET seen 2 159 Fig 2 71 Menu UTILITIES CALIB PULSE GEN sse 2 160 Fig 2 72 Menu UTILITIES CALIB 2 161 Fig 2 73 Menu UTILITIES DIAG CONFIG seen nnns 2 162 Fig 2 74 Menu UTILITIES DIAG TPOINT 2 163 Fig 2 75 Menu UTILITIES DIAG PARAM sese enne nnne neis 2 164 Fig 2 76 Menu UTILITIES MOD KEY preset setting 2 165 Fig 2 77 Menu UTILITIES AUX nadaan 2 166 Fig 2 78 Menu UTILITIES BEEPER 0 ccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesaeeseaeeeeeees 2 167 Fig 2 79 Menu UTILITIES INSTALL fitted with options 2 168 Fig 2 80 Menu STATUS
16. 420 000 000 0 MHz 0 0 Hz 12 500 0 kHz DECIMAL Muss ON OFF Fig 2 6 Display after pattern setting 1038 6002 02 2 27 E 13 List Editor SME 2 2 4 List Editor The SME offers the possibility to generate lists Lists are used for setting sequences LIST mode or memory sequence as data source for digital modulations or for level correction which can be defined by the user UCOR They consist of elements which are defined by an index and at least one parameter per index Each list is marked by a separate name and can be selected via this name The lists are accessed in the menus assigned in each case e g to the settings sequences of frequency and level value pairs in the LIST menu However the lists are always generated and processed in the same way and the procedures are hence explained in detail by the example of the memory sequence mode menu MEM SEQ in this section A pattern setting at the end of this section allows the user to become familiar with the operation of the list editor Setting menus providing list processing are structured in two pages The first page called OPERATION page in the following contains the general configuration parameters for processing a list Further the general list functions such as selecting and deleting the list as well as calling an editing mode are provided The second page the EDIT page is automatically displayed when calling an edit function and serve
17. RF output frequency FREQ in the header field FREQUENCY in the FREQUENCY menu Fig 2 17 Example of a circuit with frequency offset 1038 6002 02 2 42 E 13 SME RF Level 2 5 RF Level The RF output level can be set directly using the LEVEL key cf Section 2 2 2 5 or by accessing the LEVEL menu In the LEVEL LEVEL menu the set RF output level is indicated under AMPLITUDE A two line level display appears for digital modulation or digital standard The upper line indicates the average power LEVEL the lower line the peak envelope power PEP of the modulated RF output signal The input value of level settings effected in the LEVEL LEVEL menu directly corresponds to the RF output level The input value of the level settings opened using the LEVEL key mathematically considers the offset of an attenuation amplification element which is possibly series connected cf Section 2 5 1 This offers the possibility of entering the desired level at the output of series connected instruments the SMIQ then alters the RF output level correspondingly The offset can also be entered in the LEVEL LEVEL menu dBm dBuV mV and uV can be used as level units The 4 unit keys are directly labeled with these units In order to change to another level unit simply press the desired unit key Notes The message ERROR is displayed in the status line if the level set in the overrange is not reached For digital modulation or digi
18. Opens a window to edit one of the alphanumeric messages USER1 to USERS The message to be processed must be selected using ALPHANUM MESSAGE IEC bus command SOUR ERM MESS ALPH DATA Test The SME offers the possibility of providing a 30 bit word of the message transmitted with bit errors for test purposes The parameters of this section determine the faulty bits and their position Input of the faulty bits into a 30 bit field The decimal number transmitted 0 to 1073741823 is converted into a 30 bit binary number internally and thus determines the 30 bits These bits are XORed with the word of the message to be corrupted and thus determine which bits of this word are transmitted correctly or wrongly IEC bus command SOUR ERM ERR MASK 0 Input value of the batch in which the faulty word is to be IEC bus command SOUR ERM ERR BATC A Input value of the faulty word 0 to 153 are valid values 0 to 189 for a long batch IEC bus command SOUR ERM ERR WORD 1 The SME always sends complete cycles from five subsequences Two types of subsequence are generated In the message subsequence fill data and message data are mixed the fill subsequence only contains fill data The message subsequences of a cycle only differ in the subsequence number contained they cannot be configured differently l e the settings under BATCH are valid for all message subsequences of a cycle The fill
19. essent 3 11 COM ID signal communication identification signal 2 66 2 70 IES GS ii inei oa eae 2 70 3 69 E 13 Index IESO CAR RE 2 74 3 72 Marker Beacon 2 76 3 80 jo p EE 2 66 3 108 Command addressed parameter recognition seperates Sequence structure synchronization hs ees ese ears n eo tr ee 3 132 syntax elements eee ettet tnnt 3 11 universal Common commands Condition register esses 3 134 Contrast display o aeaaee ee 1 2 2 9 Counter indication ES Country code ERMES sse 3 53 Coupling EXTIA e iie d e ete eid 3 30 PM irc citri terrere den de ed 2 59 3 82 Course Sector ILS LOQC sese 2 74 CTX Cordless 2 78 Radio network sss 2 86 Current of the ILS indicating instrument 2 69 2 73 3 70 3 73 D Data generator DM is 2 79 3 37 2 11 2 86 3 36 INIGINOIY Er 2 79 3 38 OUI DUT ie een a eae 2 11 2 79 3 36 sequence length 2 83 3 39 source DM 2 86 3 36 Data bits RS232 seen 2 153 5 Data lines IEC IEEE bus eene A6 1 Data source DM DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation 2 69
20. 15 20 AUTO CURRENT EXT PRBS POS COUPLED NORM MAX GSM SLOPE DATA 23 bit 0 0 dB SINGLE GSM PCN B T 0 3 270 833 kbps OFF ON NORM NV CURRENT DLIST1 FILL INSERT DELET Fig 2 41 Menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK preset setting fitted with option SME B11 DM coder SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for GMSK OFF GMSK is switched off EXT GMSK with external data signals PRBS GMSK with pseudo random binary sequence DATA GMSK with internally stored data sequence IEC bus command SOUR DM TYPE GMSK SOUR EXT STAT ON PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence IEC bus command SOUR DM PRBS 9 CLOCK Opens a window to set the clock parameters The current settings are displayed cf Section QPSK modulation LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction OFF The level reduction is switched off NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of gt 800B GSM SLOPE rise and fall time of the level reduction correspond to GSM power ramping SOUR DM DATA ALEV MODE NORM IEC bus command 1038 6002 02 2 87 SOUR DM GMSK GS L ON E 13 Digital Modulation LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE SE
21. 2 72 2 6 2 7 4 Marker Bea O re a e e e A 2 76 2 6 3 Digital Modulation e Ea jaa bi 2 78 2 6 3 1 Data Generator iiir ee ceci eee ti ener uestes eet e RE cannes 2 79 2 6 3 2 PRBS 2 80 2 6 3 8 Memory Extension Option 5 12 2 81 2 6 3 3 1 Recording a Data Sequence from an External Source 2 84 2 6 3 4 External Data OOU A eee ethnic Rh 2 86 26035 GMSIKIMOdulation orte ette teet tet chine lider cies nied edn 2 87 2 6 3 6 Modulation eese ener nnne dedana 2 89 2037 QPSKModQdUlaltiGn i sura p ee 2 91 1039 1856 12 4 E 13 SME 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 12 2 13 2 14 Contents 2 6 3 8 ESK Modulation ee Uere t ine t rebates 2 94 2 6 3 9 4FSK Modulation sse nnne tenens 2 97 2 6 3 10 FFSK Modulation sssssssssssss esent nennen 2 100 2 6 3 11 Radiocommunication Service 2 102 2 6 3 12 Radiocommunication Service FLEX 2 107 2 6 3 13 Radiocommunication Service ReFLEX25 2 116 2 6 3 14 Radiocommunication Service POCSAG 2 127 o Len 2
22. 6 OPERATING Move cursor SELECT Next menu RETURN Previous menu VERSION 33 QUICK SELEC 9 8 Fig 2 1 0 Front panel view controls 1038 6002 02 2 6 MAX 50 REVERSE POWER MADE IN GERMANY ES E 13 SME 3 MENU VARIATION Rotary knob will 4 The rotary knob moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level to choose from varies the value of a parameter The variation is either effected in steps of or in a step width that be specified at See Section 2 1 1 3 page 2 11 Inputs Outputs RF ON OFE MOD ON OFF DET PRESET ERROR STATUS HELP LOCAL Switches on off the RF signal Switches on off the modulation selected in the UTILITIES MOD KEY menu Establishes a defined instrument status Indicates error and caution messages Indicates the instrument status Indicates context sensitive auxiliary text Switches the instrument from the REMOTE mode remote control to the LOCAL mode manual control Exit the menus using the RETURN key 1038 6002 02 2 7 Front Panel See as well Section 2 2 2 Basic Operating Steps Section 2 2 3 Sample Setting for First Users See as well Section 2 2 2 6 Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ON OFF Keys See as well Section 1 1 7 Preset Setting Section 2 12 Help System Section 2 13 Status Sec
23. 2 55 E 13 Analog Modulations SME 2 6 2 3 Frequency Modulation Menu MODULATION FM offers access to settings for frequency modulation Note The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another FM and PM FM2 and STEREO FM2 SOURCE LFGEN2 and VOR ILS MKR BCN Menu selection MODULATION FM EA AAA aN 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY FM1 DEVIATION 10 0 kHz LEVEL FM1 SOURCE LFGEN1 EXT1 EXT2 ODULATION LFGEN1 FREQ 0 4k 1k 3k 15k Hz DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT FM2 DEVIATION 10 0 kHz SWEEP FM2 SOURCE LFGEN2 EXT1 EXT2 LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 1 000 0 kHz MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI UTILITIES HELP EXT1 COUPLING AC JDC EXT2 COUPLING AC IDC PREEMPHASIS 50 75 Fig 2 25 Menu MODULATION FM preset setting fitted with option SM B2 LF generator LFGEN2 and option SM B5 FM PM modulator FM1 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for FM1 IEC bus command SOUR FM1 10kHz FM1 SOURCE Switching on and off FM1 and selection of the modulation source IEC bus command SOUR FM1 SOUR INT STAT ON LFGEN1 FREQ Selection of the frequency of the 1st LF generator EC bus short command SOUR FM1 INT FREQ 1kHz FM2 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for FM2 EC bus short command SOUR FM2 10kHz FM2 SOURCE Swit
24. 7B 3 RS 232 C INTACTA dapre auraa 7B 4 Intertace characteriStOS o dedere ache Sots id heed ke 7B 4 Signal EM 7B 4 Transmission parameters Skansena E 7B 5 Interface TUMCtIONS ete heec t her uS UU tes LE La be Me tes E Ud 7B 5 imc inier PR RE ooo boa 7B 6 1039 1856 12 9 E 13 Contents SME i 8C 1 List of Error M ssages 2 once ust genet Ede ep a de De ea ROB decns 8C 1 SCPI Specific Error Messages cnn 8C 1 SME Specific Error Messages ooonmcccnnconnocononcccconccnnoncnnnncnnnnc 8C 5 ANNEX Diana ada ha LO GRE Fa ER CR ELI Fb e EC E P EE iia 9D 1 J Including IEC Bus Library for QuickBasic seen 9D 1 2 Initialization and Default Status nennen 9D 1 2 1 Mtae Cone eR 9D 1 2 2 Initiate Iristr ment TEE TN 9D 1 3 Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands ccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeneeteaees 9D 2 4 Switchover to Manual Control neret 9D 2 5 Reading out Instrument Settings essent 9D 2 6 List Management 35 3 died eate RR Dd aa 9D 3 Command synchronization 90 3 8 ROQUES Saa 90 4 1039 1856 12 10 13 SME Tables Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Tabl
25. ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted Data elements comprising more than one byte are transmitted with the byte being the first which was specified by SCPI command FORMat BORDer The format of the binary files within the block depends on the IEC bus command The commands SOURce LIST DWELI SOURce LIST FREQuency SOURce LIST POWer SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer SYSTem MSEQuence DWELI SYSTem MSEQuence RCL use the IEEE 754 format for double precision floating point numbers Each number is represented by 8 bytes Example ait 125 345678E6 bit 127 876543E6 CALL IBWRT generators SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 216 MKDS af MKDS b in the command string introduces the binary block 2 indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next 16 is the length of the binary block in bytes here 2 double precision floating pooint number with 8 bytes each The actual binary data follow now As the function IBWRT requires a text string MKD is used for the type conversion The
26. 2 64 Trigger Eee E 2 21 active edge PULSE ceo neun 2 62 3 128 TRIGGER 2 83 2 166 3 40 3 128 DM dete e e 2 95 2 101 E 13 Index elI E 2 13 2 62 2 82 2 83 2 136 2 144 2 150 2 166 3 40 3 128 BIS T s se d e i rd 2 144 3 126 memory extension XMEM 2 82 3 40 tenen 2 150 3 127 ceret eet d ede 2 136 pulse modulation 2 62 3 127 SWOep 2 136 3 124 TOC ge 2 136 Tr th val s A P PI REPETI eres 3 8 TUNE IDDUL riter tere Yan 2 15 2 155 User correction UCOR essen 2 47 3 32 V VAR signal VOR sse 2 66 3 107 VCO summing loop calibration 2 159 3 20 Ventilation ducts sessi 1 4 MEE niente teni e hte 2 66 VIDEO 2 15 2 60 Voltage external modulation signal essen 2 51 EFSQUIDUL ie REDI 2 132 3 28 VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range 2 65 2 67 3 106 3 108 Ww Waveform LF 2 56 2 58 3 111 White Space ecrit EE eee reg 3 11 X XCAXISOUIDUE 2 13 2 136 XMEM memory extension 2 81 3 39
27. Fig 2 27 Menu MODULATION PM preset setting fitted with option SM B2 LF generator LFGEN2 and option SM B5 FM PM modulator PM1 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for PM1 IEC bus command SOUR PM1 1RAD PM1 SOURCE Switching on and off PM1 and selection of the modulation source IEC bus command SOUR PM1 SOUR INT STAT ON LFGEN1 FREQ Selection of the frequency of the 1st LF generator IEC bus command SOUR PM1 INT FREQ 1kHz PM2 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for PM2 IEC bus command SOUR PM2 1RAD PM2 SOURCE Switching on and off PM2 and selection of the modulation source IEC bus command SOUR PM2 SOUR INT STAT ON LFGEN2 FREQ Input value of the LFGEN2 frequency IEC bus command SOUR PM2 INT FREQ 1kHz LFGEN2 SHAPE Selection of the waveform of the 2nd LF generator IEC bus command SOUR SOUR2 FUNC SIN 1038 6002 02 2 58 E 13 SME Analog Modulations EXT1 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC with external supply for PM1 input EXT1 IEC bus command SOUR PM EXT1 COUP AC EXT2 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC with external supply for PM2 input EXT2 IEC bus command SOUR PM EXT2 COUP AC 2 6 2 4 1 PM Deviation Limits The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set cf Fig 2 28 It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be set In thi
28. Activating Deactivating the generation of roaming information in the telegram sent OFF None the roaming bits in the frame information word have the value 0 SSID BIWOOO for all frames each one phase BIW111 in the first four frames each in one phase NID in all frames which comply with the formula specified in the FLEX standard The cycle value is however fixed to the value of START IN CYCLE consists of a network address and a short message vector no BIW and no message body is generated ALL the information of NID and SSID together If ROAMING is not set to OFF the following additional information is included in the telegram TIME INFO a BIWO10 in phases 0 and 2 of frame 0 and a BIW001 in phases 1 and 3 of frame 0 As the SME is not able to differentiate between cycles the contents of the phases does not rotate over both BIWs moreover no BIWO001 is sent for 1600 bps because only one phase is present CHANNEL SETUP INSTRUCTION in one phase in each of the first four frames for 1600 bps not in the first frame as there is no space consists of a BIW101 has no address no vector and no message body SYSTEM EVENT NOTIFICATION starting from frame 0 for a collapse cycle i e 2 where sc denotes the value set under SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE consists of an operator message address and a short instruction vector has no message body and no BIW101 MESSAGE FOR ALL SUBSCRIBERS is generated depend
29. SOUR2 FREQ CW 1038 6002 02 EQ 3 30 E 13 SME SOURce AM SOURce AM INTernal1 2 FREQuency 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz option SM B2 or 0 1 Hz to 1MHz option SM B6 The command sets the modulation frequency Only certain specified ranges are permissible depending on the equipment of the instrument If neither SM B2 nor SM B6 are fitted only INT1 is permissible and values 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz and 15 kHz are true With option SM B2 the specified range from 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz is true with SM B6 from 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz RST value is 1 kHz Example SOUR AM INT FREQ 15kHz SOURce AM POLarity NORMal INVerted The command selects the polarity of the AM NORMal A positive modulation voltage generates a higher output level INVerted The AM polarity is inverted Example SOUR AM POL NORM RST value is NORMal SOURce AM SOURce EXT INT1J2 EXT INT1 2 The command selects the modulation source INT1 is LF generator 1 INT2 LF generator 2 option SM B2 or SM B6 An external and an internal modulation source can be indicated at the same time see example RST value is INT1 Example SOUR AM SOUR INT1 EXT SOURce AM STATe ON OFF The command switches amplitude modulation on or off RST value is OFF Example SOUR AM STAT ON 1038 6002 02 3 31 E 13 SOURce CORRection SME 3 6 11 2 SOURce CORRection Subsystem The CORRection subsystem permits a correction of the output level T
30. 500 250 4 125 62 5 7 0 005 93 75 130 187 5 375 750 1500 3000 6000 RF frequency MHz Fig 2 26 Dependency of the FM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set 2 6 2 3 2 Preemphasis Preemphasis results in a preemphasis of the modulation signal with time constants 50 us or 75 us The higher frequencies of the modulation signal are preemphasized When preemphasis is switched on only 1 4 of the maximal deviation is permissible The highest permissible modulation frequency is 15 kHz Exceeding the permissible modulation frequency can lead to overmodulation 1038 6002 02 2 57 E 13 Analog Modulations SME 2 6 2 4 Phase Modulation Menu MODULATION PM offers access to settings for phase modulation Note The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another PM and FM PM and STEREO PM2 SOURCE LFGEN2 and VOR ILS BCN Menu selection MODULATION PM 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY PM1 DEVIATION 1 0 LEVEL PM1 SOURCE LFGENI EXT1 EXT2 ODULATION LFGEN1 FREQ 0 4k Ik 3k 15k DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT PM2 DEVIATION 10 0 SWEEP PM2 SOURCE LFGEN2 1 EXT2 LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 1 000 0 MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SOR TRI OI UTILITIES HELP EXT1 COUPLING AC DC EXT2 COUPLING AC IDC
31. STATus OPERation register amp 1 r3 RQS MSS amp ESB zi MAV WHO not used vacant vacant vacant vacant vacant vacant CALibration MODulation frei FREQuency vacant vacant vacant vacant VOLTage SRE STB 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IST flag Response to parallel poll Power on User Request Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error Query Error Request Control amp logical AND amp O logical OR of all bits Error Queue Output buffer 0 gt O Operation Complete ESE ESR Fig 3 4 Overview of the status register 1038 6002 02 3 135 E 13 SME Status Reporting System 3 8 3 Description of the Status Registers 3 8 3 1 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers It can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command STB or a serial poll The STB implies the SRE It corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers as to its function Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associat
32. WAI Executing the next command Sending the next command Note The IEC bus handshake is not stopped An example as to command synchronization can be found in annex D Program Examples 1038 6002 02 3 132 E 13 SME Fast Restore Modus 3 8 Status Reporting System The status reporting system cf Fig 3 4 stores all information on the present operating state of the instrument e g that the instrument presently carries out an AUTORANGE and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus The information is of a hierarchical structure The register status byte STB defined in IEEE 488 2 and its associated mask register service request enable SRE form the uppermost level The STB receives its information from the standard event status register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated mask register standard event status enable ESE and registers STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument The IST flag Individual STatus and the parallel poll enable register PPE allocated to it are also part of the status reporting system The IST flag like the SRQ combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request The output buffer cont
33. da 2 11 2 79 3 36 E 13 Index level RF er ot net ri ai sani ans 2 43 I 2 11 2 13 2 132 3 28 MARKER 2 13 2 137 2 144 2 166 3 79 3 112 senes 2 15 2 155 reflection coefficient priere 5 17 e 2 11 3 27 3 65 2 15 VIDEO 2 15 2 60 VONMAGC a 2 132 2 13 2 136 OVEN COED s Loin e NERA E IEEE 1 2 Overlapping execution sese 3 131 Overload protection eese 2 49 Overmodulation 2 51 2 57 2 71 2 75 Overview DM modu lallons ii PET ind 2 50 radio network data ssssssssssssss 2 78 menus osi na Dno 2 40 modulation sources ssssssssssssee enne 2 50 status register 3 115 3 135 syntax elements ricccccoececoesecsesestecsessecsecetersssteaesedoneesses 3 11 Overvoltage protection 5 19 P Paging ERMES ned tesi 2 104 3 50 3 52 3 53 ect 2 108 3 58 POCSAQ estet dte diee 2 128 3 85 REFLEX cist ic ERN 2 116 3 94 3 95 Parallel poll enable register PPE 3 137 3 141 Parameter commands sss 3 9 Parity RS232 ote tiep ae 3 118 5 Pass WO iie tnt b eee 2 157 3 121 Path commands 3 6 Pattern setting list edi
34. CTS 4 nnn 9 22 Fig Wiring of data control and signalling lines for hardware handshake 1038 6002 02 6A 6 E 12 SME List of Error Messages Annex B List of Error Messages The following list contains all error messages for errors occurring in the instrument The meaning of negative error codes is defined in SCPI positive error codes mark errors specific of the instrument The table contains the error code in the left hand column In the right hand column the error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face Below the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error SCPI Specific Error Messages No Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 0 No error This message is output if the error queue does not contain entries Command Error Faulty command sets bit 5 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Command Error The command is faulty or invalid Invalid Character The command contains an invalid sign Example A header contains an ampersand SOURCE amp Syntax error The command is invalid Example The command contains block data the instrument does not accept Invalid separator The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separato
35. 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM EXT TRIGGER SLOPE NEG EITHER LEVEL REF OSC MODULATION PHASE SWEEP BLANK TIME NORM LONG DIGITAL MOD PROTECT BLANK POLARITY NORM INV LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG MARKER POLARITY NORM INV LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX I O HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 77 Menu UTILITIES AUX I O EXT TRIGGER SLOPE Selection of the active edge of the external trigger signal POS The instrument triggers on the positive edge of the external signal NEG The instrument triggers on the negative edge of the external signal EITHER The instrument triggers on both edges of the external signal IEC bus short command TRIG SLOP POS SWEEP BLANK TIME Selection of the blank duration NORM BLANK duration is set to the shortest duration possible LONG The BLANK duration is set for the PEN LIFT control of an XY recorder approx 500ms IEC bus short command SOUR2 SWE BTIM NORM BLANK POLARITY Selection of the polarity for the blank signal NORM With active BLANK the output signal is HIGH INV Polarity is inverted IEC bus short command 0UTP BLAN NORM MARKER POLARITY Selection of the polarity for the marker signal NORM The output signal is HIGH when the sweep cycle reaches the mark INV Polarity is inverted IEC bus short command SOUR MARK POL NORM 1038 6002 02 2 166 E 13 SME Utilities 2 11 15 Switching
36. 1038 6002 02 2 92 E 13 SME Digital Modulation LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE SELECT STANDARD MOD TYPE BITRATE FILTER CODING MOD POLARITY DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 Input value of the level reduction The level reduction is internally controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via connector BURST A logic 1 in the data list causes a level reduction IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV OdB Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator AUTO The data are always repeated SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO Opens a window to select one of the standard QPSK modulations see Table 2 5 By selecting a standard the parameters indented below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard If the setting of a parameter is different from the standard SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM QPSK STAN NADC Opens a window to select modulation type The following is to choose of QPSK OQPSK x AQPSK 2 4DQPSK IEC bus command SOUR DM QPSK TYPE QPSK Input value of the bit rate The specified ranges are 1 to 24 3 kbps and 27 to 48 6 kbps In the range 1 to 24 3 kbps the nonharmonic suppression is reduced cf diagram IEC bus command SOUR DM QPSK BRAT 48 6kb s Opens a window to select filtering roll off factor The
37. 1038 6002 02 3 78 E 13 SME SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep STATe OFF The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off Example SOUR MARK1 FSW STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep The commands for the markers with level sweep are under this node Power sweep The three markers are differentiated by a numeric suffix after MARKer SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep AOFF The command switches all level markers off This command is an event and thus has no RST value and no query form Example SOUR MARK PSW AOFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep POWer 144 dBm to 16 dBm The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the level indicated In this command the OFFSet value of subsystem menu POWER LEVEL is considered in correspondence with input value MARKER in the SWEEP LEVEL menu Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOURce POWer OFFSet 0 The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula cf Chapter 2 Section Level Offset as well 144 dBm OFFSet to 16 dBm OFFSet RST value for MARK1 1 dBm MARK2 2 dBm Example SOUR MARK1 PSW POW 2dBm MARKS3 3 dBm SOURce MARKer1 2 3 PSWeep STATe ON OFF The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off Example SOUR MARK1 PSW STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 POL
38. CHECKSUM c A its 3 22 4 6 sequence length 2 83 3 39 ERA tees 2 83 3 39 E 2 103 3 40 XY TOC dais Ohh pini eres 3 103 1038 6002 02 SME E 13
39. Selection of the active edge of the external trigger signal POS The sequence starts with the positive edge of the trigger signal NEG The sequence starts with the negative edge of the trigger signal IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA XMEM TRIG SLOP POS Starts the recording of data from an external source via the DATA input cf Section Recording a Data Sequence from an External Source External Loading Recording can be effected by means of both an external or internal clock The clock can be selected in the CLOCK submenu cf Section QPSK modulation During the time of recording the note RECORDING is displayed on the right side of the line When recording has been finished the note DONE is displayed for a short time Note Recording is only possible if SOURCE EXT is activated IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA XMEM REC Aborts a running recording The note ABORTED is displayed at the right margin of the line for a short time The data recorded up to the point of time of the abortion remain in the memory IEC bus command ABORt XMEM 2 83 E 13 Digital Modulation SME 2 6 3 3 1 Recording a Data Sequence from an External Source External Loading Call DM menu Select external Set the bit rate Memory extension Define memory area and memory 1038 6002 02 Mark one of the digital modulations using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Mark parameter SOURCE using the menu c
40. The SWEEP function of LF generator 2 can be activated in menu SWEEP LF GEN2 Key G n dBu switches the unit of the display LF level output voltage setting to dBu Menu selection LF OUTPUT SO 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY OFF ON LEVEL VOLTAGE 1 000 ODULATION SOURCE LFGEN2 DIGITAL MO LF OUTPUT LFGEN1 1 0 4 fik 3k 15k SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ LFGEN2 FREQ 1 000 0 UTILITIES LFGEN2 SHAPE SOR TRI NOI HELP Fig 2 52 Menu LF OUTPUT preset setting fitted with option SM B6 multifunction generator STATE Switching on off the LF output Parameter LF STATE has no influence on the modulation settings IEC bus short command OUTP2 ON VOLTAGE Input value of the output voltage of the LF output The input is effected in the form of a peak voltage If no LF generator option is fitted the constant output voltage of the standard generator Vs 1 V is indicated IEC Bus short command OUTP2 VOLT 1V 1038 6002 02 2 132 E 13 SME LF SOURCE LFGEN1 FREQ LFGEN1 SHAPE LFGEN2 FREQ LFGEN2 SHAPE STEREO OUTPUT 1038 6002 02 LF Output Notes If LF generator 2 LFGEN2 is selected as source and STEREO operating mode is activated the voltage of the LF output depends on the setting of the wanted and the pilot deviation and cannot be changed in this menu The output voltage is 6 dBu 1 55 VR
41. CONFIG XMEM START ADDRESS 59 CONFIG XMEM LENGTH 4 Vary the bit rate in the menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK from 30 kbps to 48 kbps in 1 kbps steps At 900 MHz BITRATE 4 there should be a spectral line exceeding the level at 900 MHz by 4 dB 2 aB Test setup Feed in a positive pulse at the input TRIGGER rear connector pulse duration gt 100 ns Tap signal at the DATA output Measurement gt 1038 6002 02 Settings at the SME Level 0 dBm RF frequency 900 MHz in menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK SOURCE DATA CLOCK MODE BIT SELECT LIST XMEM CONFIG XMEM START ADDRESS 59 CONFIG XMEM LENGTH 4 CONFIG XMEM EXT TRIGGER ON After triggering the DATA output should change from HIGH to LOW for approx 3 7us 5 43 E 13 Performance Test SME 5 3 Performance Test ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIGNAL GENERATOR SME 1038 6002 Serial number Person testing Date Signature Table 5 3 Test report Measurem Actual Max Unit acc to Section Item Characteristic Display and keyboard checked 2 Frequency setting checked 3 Setting time 5 2 3 lio 10 ms 4 Reference frequency 5 2 4 A 5 Harmonics 5 2 5 Level lt 10 dBm 30 dBc Level without overrange gt 26 dBc Subharmonics f gt 1 5 GHz f gt 3 0 GHz 6 Spuriae 5 2 6 RF gt 3 0 GHz SMEO6 sso lam 68 dBc RF gt 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06
42. Character Status Frame contents display 1 IDLE ReFLEX25 frame without addresses and message contents A ALPH ReFLEX25 frame with alphanumeric message and address N NUM ReFLEX25 frame with numeric message and address T TONE ReFLEX25 frame with tone only message and address S SCI SCI frame R RSYN Emergency resynchronization frame B BER ReFLEX25 frame with a message that switches the receiver to the bit error test mode F FPAT ReFLEX25 test filler pattern according to section 10 1 of the ReFLEX25 standard OTH Simulated data of another radiocommunication service contains no ReFLEX structures at all 1 9 CUS1 to 9 Custom frames freely definable by the user see operating instructions at the end of this section Notes A cycle can also be reduced to less than 128 frames Each time the lt key is pressed a frame character is deleted and the cycle thus reduced by one frame Hatched areas are displayed In this case the SME starts the next cycle earlier FRAME CONTENTS can also be varied while ReFLEX25 is active For using the frame types BER and FPAT see also section Bit Error Rate Test In the modes MODE SINGLE and MODE EXT SINGLE all ALPH NUM und TONE frames are replaced by IDLE frames as long as no trigger event has arrived or EXECUTE SINGLE has not been triggered IEC bus command IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 FCON SAAAAAAAAAAAAAA abbreviated If AUTO ADAPTATION is set to ON the followi
43. The list is divided up into 3 columns for list index memory location number Memory and dwell time Dwell The beginning of the list has index 1 Table 2 7 MEMORY SEQUENCE Example of a list Index Memory Dwell 001 09 50 0 ms 002 02 50 0 ms 003 01 75 0 ms 004 10 75 0 ms i Up to 10 sequence lists can be created The total number of possible list elements is maximally 256 l e a list can have 256 entries at the most or less if several lists have been created Each list is identified by a separate name and selected via this name A detailed description how to process the lists can be found in Section 2 2 4 List Editor Note Frequently changing the level in the operating mode MEMORY SEQUENCE can stress the mechanically switched attenuator The attenuator is also actuated when AM is switched on or off For this reason we recommend that you make use of the non interrupting level setting as much as possible and that you use the setting AM 0 instead of switching AM off Operating Modes MODE The following operating modes are available AUTO Run from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at the beginning If another mode was activated prior to the AUTO operating mode continuation is made from the current index IEC bus short command SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE AUTO TRIG MSEQ SOUR AUTO 1038 6002 02 2 148 E 13 SME SINGLE STEP EX
44. 1350 2 MHz 1351 4 MHz 751 MHz 2200 MHz SMEOSE 751 MHz 3000 MHz SMEOS3 751 MHz 6000 MHz SMEO6 Quick Basic program for the controller cLS iecadresse 28 IEC bus address of the SME 28 CALL IBFIND DEV1 generators Open DEV1 and obtain access number CALL IBPAD generator iecterm amp HA CALL IBEOS generator CALL IBWRT generator iecadresse Set IEC bus address of the DEV1 to 28 Set EOS to LINE FEED iecterm amp H800 POW OdBm INPUT Start frequency in MHz F1 INPUT Stop frequency in MHz F2 DO CALL IBWRT generator FREQ F1 MHZz PRINT frequency F1 MHz DO kbd INKEYS LOOP UNTIL LEN kbd SWAP F1 F2 Wait for key LOOP UNTIL kbd CHR 27 Exit using ESCAPE INPUT Repeat y n LOOP UNTIL NOT UCASESS wS y END 1038 6002 02 WS 5 9 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 4 Reference Frequency Caution X Allow the SME to warm up for at least 2 hours before measurement Test equipment Frequency counter Section 5 1 item 1 Test setup Connect a calibrated frequency counter to output REF socket at the rear Measurement gt Measure frequency Relative frequency error in the rated temperature range with Eo lt 1E 6 per year of service period 2E 6 with option SM B1 lt 1E 9 per year of service period 5E 8 5 2 5 Harmonics Suppression Subharmonics Note As subharmon
45. E 3 126 oe eS 2 29 operating 2 143 3 75 3 77 3 90 A A o io 2 29 M 2 31 Load external Catal iuter 2 83 3 40 Long form commands sse 3 7 Lower case commands esses 3 7 M Maintenance inia tt 4 1 MantiS 8 cn Lada edv ble 3 9 Marker ito it C PD SA o fs 2 57 MC9 French Communication network 2 78 Radio netWork neo e eerta 2 86 MDxxx Standards nach ETS Spezifikationen Radio netWorK ert rrr rri e ieee tebe 2 86 Memory capacity data generator DM 2 79 Memory delet 2 5 nee aie 2 154 Memory extension 1 11 3 39 checksum 3 22 4 6 memory depth 2 81 3 40 sequence length 2 83 3 39 start adaress 2 82 3 39 lesting i nee m a As 5 42 trigger 2 82 3 40 m Leer Ec TO NM 3 120 Memory location nnn 2 35 Memory sequence 2 148 3 119 Menu Calls EE 2 21 GUIS OM RUE TEE EHE 2 18 DIGITAL MOD 4FSK 2 97 DIGITAL MOD 2 102 DIGITAL MOD FFSK DIGITAL MOD FSK DIGITAL MOD 5
46. Example CAL ROSC DATA 2048 CALibration VSUMmation The commands to determine the support values for the frequency setting are under this node CALibration VSUMmation MEASure The command triggers a calibration measurement The command triggers an event and thus has no default setting value Example CAL VSUM MEAS Response 0 CALibration VSUMmation OFFS CALibration VSUMmation DAC CALibration VSUMmation KOS The commands query the calibration data refer to service manual 1039 1856 24 They output all calibration data in the format set in FORMat system Example CAL VSUM OFFS 1038 6002 02 3 20 E 13 SME DIAGnostic 3 6 5 DIAGnostic System The DIAGnostic system contains the commands for diagnostic test and service of the instrument SCPI does not define DIAGnostic commands the commands listed here are SME specific All DIAGnostic commands are queries which are not influenced by RST Hence no default setting values are stated Command Parameter Default Remark Unit DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt ATTenuator1 2 3 4 5 6 Query only POWer Query only MODules Query only OTIMe Query only SDATe Query only MEASure POINt Query only CHECksum CALCulate TOTal Query only DATA Query only ATTenuate Query only BURSt Query only DIAGnostic INFO The commands which can be used to query all information which does not require hardware measurement are under this n
47. Example SOUR CORR CSET SEL UCOR1 1038 6002 02 3 32 E 13 SME SOURce CORRection SOURce CORRection CSET DATA The commands to edit the UCOR tables are under this node SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SMEOSE 03 06 to 2 2 3 6 GHz The command transmits the frequency data for the table selected using SOURce CORRection CSET RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz 102MHz 103MHz to SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 400B to 6dB 40dB to The command transmits the level data the table selected using SOURce CORRection CSET RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA POWer 1dB 0 8dB 0 75dB to SOURce CORRection CSET DELete Name of table The command deletes the table indicated from the instrument memory This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET DEL UCOR2 1038 6002 02 3 33 E 13 SOURce DM SME 3 6 11 3 SOURce DM Subsystem In this subsystem the types of digital modulation are checked A difference is made between basic modulations GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK 4FSK and FFSK and complex modulations ERMES FLEX POCSAG The common characteristics of all basic modulations are set under node BASic the common characteristics of all complex modulations under COMPlex An external input an internal pseud
48. ILS GS SODepth ILS GS DDM 100 Example SOUR ILS GS MODE ULOB RST value is NORM SOURce ILS GS GSLope COMid The commands to set the Comld content communication identification signal of the ILS GS signal are under this node 1038 6002 02 3 69 E 13 SOURce ILS SME SOURce ILS GS GSLope COMid STATe ON OFF The command activates or deactivates the Comld signal RST value is OFF Example SOUR ILS GS COM STAT ON SOURce ILS GS GSLope COMid FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz The command sets the frequency of the Comld signal RST value is 1020 Hz Example SOUR ILS GS COM FREQ 1020 SOURce ILS GS GSLope COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The command sets the AM modulation depth of the Comld signal Example SOUR ILS GS COM DEPT 10 PCT RST value is 10 PCT SOURce ILS GS GSLope DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation The commands to set the modulation depth difference between the signal of the upper lobe 90 Hz and the lower lobe 150 Hz are under this node SOURce ILS GS GSLope DDM CURRent 685 uA to 685 uA The command enters the DDM value alternatively as a current by means of the ILS indicating instrument This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS GS DDM DEPTh and LOGarithmic Example SOUR ILS GS DDM CURR 0 RST value is 0 A SOURce ILS GS GSLope DDM DEPTh 0 8 to 0 8 The command sets the difference of the modulation depth This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS G
49. 0 3 dB Frequency resp up to 500 kHz 0 5 dB Stereo Crosstalk attenuation 60 dB Distortion factor gt 0 1 Pilot tone level 0 693 gt eme 0 721 V 40 Memory extension 5 2 40 option SME B12 Read in read out checked Dibit synchronization checked E External triggering checked 1038 6002 02 5 49 E 13 SME IEC IEEE Bus Interface Annex A IEC IEEE Bus Interface The instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus connection as a standard The mating connector according to IEEE 488 is at the rear of the instrument A controller for remote control can be connected via the interface The connection is effected using a shielded cable Characteristics of the Interface 8 bit parallel data transfer bidirectional data transfer three line handshake high data transfer rate of max 350 kByte s upto 15 devices can be connected maximal length of the connecting cables 15 m single connection 2m wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel ATN IFC NRFD EO DIO1 shield SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 SUENA A A A logic GND GND 10 GND 11 GND 9 GND 7 DIO8 DIO6 DIO5 Fig A 1 Contact Assigment of the IEC bus socket Bus Lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DIO1 is the bit of lowest order DIOS the bit of highest order 1038 6002 02 6A
50. 30 0 asx Fig 2 43 SOURCE PRBS 1038 6002 02 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY GMSK LEVEL GFSK PRBS ODULATION QPSK CLOCK DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL LF OUTPUT AFSK LEVEL SWEEP FFSK MODE LIST SELECT MEM SEQ MOD UTILITIES d HELP os COD OD SELEC DELETE FUNCT ATTENUATION ATTENUATION STANDARD TYPE RATE TER ING POLARITY x MODE FIIL OFF EXT 9 T5 POS COUP PRBS 20 LED OFF DATA 21 23 SYMBOL NORM MAX 0 0 Bit dB AUTO SINGLE CURR ENT NADC ADOPSK 48 6k bps NCOSINE 0 35 CURRENT INSERT Selection of the modulation source for QPSK IEC bus command SOUR DM TYPE QPSK Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence SOUR DM PRBS 9 IEC bus command 2 91 NADC DELETE SOUR DLIST3 EDIT VIEV Menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK preset setting fitted with option SME B11 DM coder EXT STAT ON Digital Modulation SME 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE CLOCK EDGE POS LEVEL GFSK PRBS CLOCK SOURCE INT CO ODULATION eee CLOCK CLOCK MODE SYMBOL DIGITAL MOD LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION SWEEP FFSK MODE BEST SELECT STANDARD MEM SEQ OD UTILITIES HELP
51. CLOCk SOURce INT EXT GMSK STANdard GSM PCN CDPD MC9 MOBitex DSRR MD24 to No query MD192 BRATe 2 4 to 1000kb s b s FILTer 0 2 0 25 0 3 0 4 0 5 DCODer ON OFF GSLope ON OFF POLarity NORMal INVerted GFSK STANdard DECT CT2 CT3 No query BRATe 10 to 585 kb s 640 to 1170 kb s b s FiLTer 0 4 0 5 0 6 DEViation 14 14 4 18 20 25 2 160 180 202 259 288 Hz 317 403 kHz DSLope ON OFF POLarity NORMal INVerted QPSK STANdard NADC PDC TFTS APCO TETRa INMarsat No query TYPE MSAT BRATe QPSK OQPSk PI4Qpsk Pl Dqpsk b s CODing 1to 24 3 kbps 27 0 to 48 6 kbps FILTer NADC TFTS PDC APCO TETRa INMarsat POLarity MSAT FSK COS SCOS 0 35 0 4 0 5 0 6 COS 0 2 STANdard NORMal INVerted No query POCSag512 POCSag1200 POCSag2400 BRATe ClTY ruf512 CITYruf1200 CITYruf2400 FLEX1600 b s DEViation FLEX3200 Hz FILTer 0 05 to 1900 kb s 0 05 to 90 kb s POLarity 0 01 to 400 kHz FSK4 GAUSs 2 73 BESSel 1 22 2 44 OFF STANdard NORMal INVerted No query CODing BRATe ERMes MODacom FLEX3200 FLEX6400 DEViation ERMes APCO MODacom FLEX Hz FILTER 1 to 24 3 kb s 27 0 to 48 6 kb s POLarity 0 01 to 400 kHz FFSK BESSel 1 22 1 25 2 44 COS SCOS 0 2 STANdard NORMal INVerted No query DEViation Hz BRATe POCSag b s E 13 SOURce DM SME SOURce DM MGRoup The command queries the selected type of
52. Calibration is questionable Output level is questionable Read operation status register Preallocate blanks to text variable Read event status register Preallocate blanks to text variable Read ESR KKKKKKKKKKKK x kk ko k Output error message IF VAL Ques AND 128 0 THEN PRINT Calibration IF VAL Ques AND 1 0 THEN PRINT Voltage RETURN Operationstatus Oper SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator STATus OPERation EVENt CALL IBRD generator Oper IF VAL Oper AND 1 gt 0 THEN PRINT Calibration IF VAL Oper AND 2 0 THEN PRINT Settling IF VAL Oper AND 8 0 THEN PRINT Sweeping IF VAL Oper AND 32 gt 0 THEN PRINT Wait for trigger RETURN Esrread Esr SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator ESR CALL IBRD generator Esr IF VAL Esr AND 1 0 THEN PRINT Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 4 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 8 gt 0 THEN PRINT Device dependent error IF VAL Esr AND 16 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 32 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 64 gt 0 THEN PRINT User request IF VAL Esr AND 128 gt 0 THEN PRINT Power on RETURN REM Dk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KK KK kc ck ck ck ck ck KAKA KA KA ck ko ko ko Sk kv ko ko kx ko ko ko REM e 4 n cn essBL RT Error routine Error handling PRINT ERROR STOP 1038 6002 02 9D 5 Stop software SME Index
53. DIAG CONFIG 2 162 UTILITIES DIAG PARAM 2 164 UTILITIES INSTALL 2 168 UTILITIES MOD KEY 2 165 UTILITIES PHASE 2 156 UTILITIES PROTECT 2 157 UTILITIES REF 2 155 UTILITIES SYSTEM 5232 2 153 UTILITIES SYSTEM LANGUAGE 2 155 UTILITIES SYSTEM SECURITY 2 154 UTILITIES TEST o eee 4 5 2 5 Message ERMES iret ee 2 104 2 105 3 51 FLEX st enne ae epe etae d 2 111 3 58 POCSAG 2 128 3 85 REFLEX eren ee ER tata 2 120 3 94 remote control i i dao t e 3 4 Minimum value commands sess 3 8 MKR BCN Marker Beacon modulation 2 76 3 80 MOBITEX Mobile data system 2 78 Radio network esses eene nennen 2 86 MODACOM Mobile Data Communication 2 78 Radio network esses 2 86 Modulation AFSK seiten E en 2 97 3 48 AM iei i E ERROR RR 2 54 3 30 ot ve tsi ied 2 100 3 49 EM tel id em 2 56 3 63 ESK fas sector gener H 2 94 3 47 generators 2 50 5 23 5 25 CESAR wei DeL ITI neces 2 89 3 43 GMSK ia ee itio pta 2 87 3 41 IES QS eem 2 68 2 75 3 68 IE SEQQ uu naaa Fe 2 72 3 72 InCOmpalible dene rti rnt Reo ineas aida 2 51 2
54. SOUR POCS STAT ON OFF Switch off of POCSAG IEC bus command SOUR POCS STAT OFF 1038 6002 02 2 127 E 13 Digital Modulation MODULATION DEVIATION MOD POLARITY LEVEL ATTENUATION BITRATE MESSAGE ADDRESS CATEGORY 1038 6002 02 SME Selection of used modulation Two types are available FSK The is directly modulated with the data signal FFSK An LF is first modulated which is then used as the modulation signal for the RF IEC bus command SOUR POCS MOD FSK Input value of frequency deviation of modulation For FSK 4 0 kHz and 4 5 kHz are possible for FFSK 1 5 kHz 2 0 kHz 3 0 kHz 3 5 kHz 4 0 kHz and 4 5 kHz The instrument stores two independent deviation values one for each type of modulation The value which is displayed and used depends on the modulation setting IEC bus command SOUR POCS DEV 4 5kHz Selection of the polarity of the modulation NORM Polarity of modulation according to standard POCSAG INV Polarity of modulation inverted IEC bus command SOUR POCS POL NORM Input value for the level attenuation According to FTZ 171TR1 section 4 5 4 2 the levels of the batches no 2 up to no 5 are reduced by the value set here Notes This setting has an impact only when a message or filler batches are transmitted in any of the batches 2 to 5 The unmodulated carrier emitted between the end of the message and the beginning of the next call is not attenuated Usually the messa
55. ULOBe FREQuency PHASe PRESet SODepth LOCalizer MODE COMid STATe FREQuency DEPTh DDM CURRent DEPTh DIRection LOGarithmic LLOBe FREQuency RLOBe FREQuency PHASe PRESet SODepth 1038 6002 02 Parameter ON OFF INT2 INT2 EXT GS GSLope LOCalizer NORM ULOBe LLOBe ON OFF 0 1 to 20 000 Hz 0 to 100 PCT 685 uA 6850 0 8 to 40 8 UP DOWN 999 9 to 999 9 100 to 200 Hz 60 to 120 Hz 0 to 120 deg 0 to 100 PCT NORM LLOBe RLOBe ON OFF 0 1 to 20 000 Hz 0 to 100 PCT 387 to 387 uA 0 4 to 40 4 LEFT RIGHt 999 9 to 999 9 60 to 120 Hz 100 to 200 Hz 0 to 120 deg 0 to 100 PCT 3 68 Default Remark Unit Option SM B6 Hz PCT Hz Hz rad No query PCT Hz PCT Hz Hz rad No query PCT E 13 SME SOUR ce ILS SOURce ILS STATe ON OFF The command switches the generation of ILS signals on or off STATe ON is only possible if no amplitude modulation is switched on Modulation generator 2 must not be switched simultaneously as a source for PM or FM either Example SOUR ILS STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce lILS SOURce INT2 INT2 EXT This command determines the signal sources of the test signal INT2 The test signal used for ILS is generated internally by LF generator 2 INT2 EXT A signal from input EXT1 is added to the internal signal in addition Switching off the internal source is not p
56. gt Sene 19 lt 1 5 GHz ice ll anan odd dBc 7 SSB phase noise 5 2 7 RF 90 MHz 129 dBc 1 Hz RF 125 MHz 140 dBc 1 Hz RF 250 MHz ae tas 137 dBc 1 Hz RF 500 MHz sor meses 132 dBc 1 Hz RF 1000 MHz 20 Do 126 dBc 1 Hz RF 2000 MHz SME03E 03 06 zc esses 120 dBc 1 Hz RF 3000 MHz SME03 06 200 o xem 110 dBc 1 Hz RF 6000 MHz SME06 ie os 116 dBc 1 Hz 8 Broadband noise 5 2 8 oes 140 dBc 1 Hz 9 Residual FM with RF 1 GHz 5 2 9 4 Hz 10 Residual AM 5 2 10 E 0 02 1038 6002 02 5 44 E 13 SME Performance Test Characteristic Measurem Min Actual Max Unit acc to Section 11 Output level Frequency response 1 dB Deviation from the rated value RF lt 3 GHz 1 dB RF gt 3 GHz 1 dB 12 Output reflection coefficient Test level lt 0 dBm f lt 3 GHz 1 5 VSWR Test level lt 0 dBm f gt 3 GHz 2 0 VSWR Test level gt 0 dBm 2 0 VSWR Test level gt 0 dBm f gt 5 GHz with SM 2 5 VSWR B9 13 Interrupt free level setting 5 dB 10 dB 3 4 8 15 dB 9 6 20 dB 14 4 dB 19 2 dB 14 Overvoltage protection SME02 03 only D c voltage 7 V RF supply 1 15 Level monitoring EXT1 5 2 15 lower limit 0 99 V upper limit TOV Wy acide 1 03 16 AM modulation depth 5 2 16 80 75 8 84 2 30 27 8 32 2 96 17 AM frequency response 20 Hz to 50 kHz 1 dB 18 AM distortion
57. x1 Js a MENU VARIATION SELECT MENU VARIATION AM SOURCE INT 1038 6002 02 2 24 acknowledge The menu cursor is reset to AM DEPTH Select AM SOURCE INT The menu cursor marks the current 1 out of n selection E 13 SME List Editor Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select LF generator 1 as modulation The selection mark marks LFGEN1 LFGEN1 AM is faded in the status line as a hint that AM is switched on Reset menu cursor to AM SOURCE RETURN INT MENU VARIATION Select parameter LFGEN1 FREQ The menu cursor marks the current frequency selection LFGEN1 FREQ DATA INPUT Set the frequency of LF generator 1 k to 3 kHz an The selection mark marks 3 kHz The indications on the display are represented in Fig 2 5 The AM modulation setting is completed 250 000 000 0 10 0 FREQUENCY DEPTH LEVEL SOURCE INT LFGENI ODULATION SOURCE EXT OFF DIGITAL MOD EXT COUPLING Ep QUTP UT POLARITY SWEEP LIST LFGEN1 FREQ E 3k MEM SEQ UTILITIES LFGEN2 FREQ 1 000 0 HELP LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SOR TRI NOI Fig 2 5 Display after AM setting 1038 6002 02 2 25 E 13 List Editor SME Subsequently to the above setting 420 MHz as new RF frequency and 12 5 kHz as the step width
58. 1GHz unmodulated Level 8 1dBm gt Settings at the analyzer FM RMS value Unwanted deviation in the case of CCITT filtering 1Hz and with a measuring bandwidth of 30Hz to 23 2 lt 4Hz 5 14 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 10 Residual AM Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 1 Measurement See Section 5 2 9 but demodulation AM Residual AM with a measuring bandwidth of 30 Hzto 29 KH27 eoi etre eet tieu 0 02 5 2 11 Output Level Test equipment Power meter Section 5 1 item 8 Precision attenuator Section 5 1 item 9 Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 Low noise preamplifier Section 5 1 item 10 Test Methods for Level in the Measuring Range of the Power Meter Test setup Connect power meter to the RF output socket Measurement Setting at the SME RF level to be measured see below unmodulated gt Measure the level at output frequencies of 5 kHz to 1500 MHz 2200 3000 6000 MHz with SMEOSE 03 06 Deviation of the output level from the rated value at frequency lt 3 GHz sse max lt 1 dB at frequency gt 9 GHZ init Eee max x2 dB Frequency response at 0 dBm difference between the lowest and the highest level ssseee max lt 1 dB Recommended test level 13 10 8 7 9 5 0 5 10 20 30 dBm Test Methods for Low Levels Test principle Levels below the measuring range of the power meter can be carried out by means of a comparison
59. 236 SYSTem MSEQuence MODE AUTO STEP The command indicates in which way the memory sequence is to be processed by analogy with SOURce SWEep MODE AUTOEach trigger event triggers a complete cycle of the memory sequence selected STEP Each trigger event only triggers one step in processing the memory sequence Example SYST MSEQ MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO SYSTem MSEQuence RCL 1 to 50 1 to 50 The command transmits the list of the instrument states to be assumed successively The list contains integers denoting the states stored by means of SAV These instrument states are set successively using a simulated RCL thus the name of the list The length of the list is not limited The values of the list are between 1 and 50 number of memory locations to be called Lists are not influenced by RST Example SYST MSEQ RCL 30 31 32 32 32 33 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL POINts The command queries the length of the RCL list selected The RCL list is user defined and of variable length The maximal length of the list can be queried by means of SYSTem MSEQence FREE addition of the two values Example SYST MSEQ RCL POIN Response 17 SYSTem MSEQuence SELect Name of sequence The command selects a memory sequence The name of the sequence may be an arbitrary character string of up to 7 letters If there is no memory sequence of the name indicated the command c
60. 27 28 29 30 Informaciones de seguridad Baterias y acumuladores no deben de ser expuestos a temperaturas altas al fuego Guardar baterias y acumuladores fuera del alcance de los ni os Si las bater as o los acumuladores no son cambiados con la debida atenci n existir peligro de explosi n atenci n celulas de Litio Cambiar las bater as o los acumuladores solamente por los del tipo R amp S correspondiente ver lista de piezas de recambio Bater as y acumuladores son deshechos problem ticos Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes especiales para este f n Por favor tengan en cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada pa s referente al tratamiento de deshechos Nunca sometan las bater as o acumuladores a un corto circuito Tengan en consideraci n de que en caso de un incendio pueden escaparse gases t xicos del producto que pueden causar da os a la salud Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de un incendio pueden desprenderse del producto agentes venenosos gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptas para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras por ejemplo paredes y estantes 1171 0000 42 02 00 31 32 33 Las asas instaladas en los pro
61. 3 48 GFSK modulation 2 90 3 45 GMSK modulation 2 88 3 43 marker 5 1 2 166 pulse modulation 2 62 3 91 QPSK modulation 2 93 3 46 IUE ai an rat 2 166 Power 1 1 1 1 5 PPE Parallel poll enable register 3 137 PRBS 2 80 3 40 Preemphasis E AE EE 2 57 3 64 5 24 stereo modulation Programming Examples sees 9D 1 Protection level nsp 2 itd 3 121 Protective circuit PTRansition register Pulling range x up Pulse delay son REO E generator 1 7 2 60 3 92 CONDON x oot ta 2 160 3 20 5 38 Der 2 60 modulation 2 60 3 91 2 62 3 91 1 7 2 61 5 28 period 2 62 3 92 A ch ree e v Rede 2 62 3 92 PULSE input 2 15 3 128 Putting into operation essen 1 1 Q QPSK calibration 2 161 3 18 Modulada 2 91 5 32 FOSPONSOS EN 3 8 Question 3 11 Quick selection tena eee ELE o YR naciona 2 21 parameter Quotation marks R PACK TO AS OPERE e
62. 3 kHz 15 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency There are different specified ranges depending on the equipment of the instrument If neither SM B2 nor SM B6 are fitted only FM 1 is permissible and values 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz and 15 kHz are valid With option SM B2 the specified range from 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz is valid with SM B6 from 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz RST value is 1 kHz Example SOUR FM INT FREQ 10kHz SOURce FM1 2 PREemphasis 0 50us 75us The command selects the preemphasis 0 No preemphasis 50 us 50 us European standard 75 us 75 us American standard RST value is 0 Example SOUR FM PRE 50us SOURce FM1 2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal1 EXTernal2 The command selects the modulation source A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1 LF generator 1 is INT for FM1 LF generator2 for FM2 option SM B5 Several modulation sources can be active at the same time cf example RST value for FM1 INT Example SOUR FM SOUR INT1 EXT2 for FM2 EXT2 SOURce FM1 2 STATe ON OFF The command switches the frequency modulation on or off RST value is OFF Example SOUR FM STAT OFF 1038 6002 02 3 64 E 13 SME SOURce FREQuency 3 6 11 7 SOURce FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings of the RF source including the sweeps Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce FREQuenc
63. 4 1 pos 2 can remain plugged in gt Screw off cover 6 screws Fig 4 1 pos 1 and lift off The computer PCB is now accessible from the top The position of the battery on the computer PCB is evident from Fig 4 2 gt Detach jumper X300 cf Fig 4 2 pos 2 Cut off cable tie Unsolder battery Detach cable at plug connector X312 cf Fig 4 2 pos 1 The remaining cable connections can remain plugged in Remove 2 fastening screws cf Fig 4 2 pos 5 on the computer PCB Lift computer PCB and thread new battery clamp Screw on computer PCB cf Fig 4 2 pos 5 establish plug connection X312 cf Fig 4 2 pos 1 Fix new battery in position using cable tie Caution Observe the polarity when fixing and soldering the battery cf Fig 4 2 and marking on the PCB A wrong polarity will lead to the destruction of components gt Shorten connection wires to the necessary length and solder battery Plug jumper X300 cf Fig 4 2 pos 2 Closing the instrument is effected in the reverse order as opening it Caution Ensure that the braided cord in the casing slots is fitted correctly 4 2 E 13 SME Maintenance and Troubleshooting 1 5x 2 3 1 Fastening screws X312 3 Cable connection IEC bus 2 Cable connection motherboard 4 Cable connection RS 232 4 Fig 4 1 Shielding cover of controller and front panel modulel 1 Plug in connection
64. 5 2 36 EFSK Modu lation s eio diete cete 5 37 5 237 LF Generator Option SMCEB2 er i mper in 5 37 512 371 Fr quency ELO audiet etel edat tient Rn tes 5 37 5 2 37 2 Frequency Response 5 38 5 2 38 Pulse Generator Option SM B4A sss enne nnne 5 38 5 2 39 Multi Function Generator Option 5 6 5 40 5 2 39 1 Frequency Error Distortion Factor and 5 40 5 2 39 2 Frequency Response sternere 5 40 5 2 39 3 Distortion Factor and Crosstalk Attenuation Stereo 5 41 5 2 39 4 Pilot Tone LEevel ne o da 5 41 5 2 40 Memory Extension Option 12 5 42 5 2 40 1 Read Write Check via the IEC IEEE 5 42 5 2 40 2 Dibit enne 5 43 5 2 40 3 External Triggering 5 43 5 3 Performance LOSE TON 5 44 ANNEX E oue tto our 7B 1 IEC IEEE B s INteraCe iiionminananica ri 7B 1 Characteristics Of the Meta iia ii AAA ad 7B 1 BUSHINGS 7B 1 Interface MESSAGES edi eed ied inn i e adopte
65. 5 kHz to 3 6 GHz Answer 2400 200 The command fills the FREQuency part of the list selected with data The data can either be indicated as a list of numbers separated by commas of arbitrary length or as binary block data In the case of block data transmission always 8 4 bytes are interpreted as a floating point number of double accuracy cf command FORMat DATA RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR LIST FREO 1 4GHz 1 3GHz SOURce LIST FREQuency POINts The command queries the length in items of the FREQuency part of the list presently selected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST FREQ POIN SOURce LIST LEARn Answer 327 The command learns the list selected l e it determines the hardware setting for the entire list The data thus determined are stored together with the list The command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST LEAR Caution This command has to be given after every creating and changing of a list 1038 6002 02 3 76 E 13 SME SOURce LIST SOURce LIST MODE AUTO STEP The command indicates the mode in which the list is to be processed by analogy with SOURce SWEep MODE AUTOEach trigger event triggers a complete list run STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in processing the list Example SOUR LIST MODE STEP RST value is AUTO SOURce LIST POWer 144 to 16 dB
66. Cut out provided to relocate the data input output at the front to the rear of the instrument Cut out provided to relocate the clock input output at the front to the rear of the instrument 2 13 Rear Panel See as well Section 2 8 Sweep Section 2 9 LIST Mode See as well respective section as to menus and Section 2 11 14 Input Output Settings AUX I O See as well Section 2 6 3 Digital Modulation E 13 SME Rear Panel 16 14 15 12 11 10 4 gt e z 0 I e IEC625 488 Rear panel view Fig 2 2 E 13 2 14 1038 6002 02 SME REF Output of the internal 10 MHz reference signal with reference internal Source resistance 50 Q reference external Adjustable to external reference frequencies from 1 MHz to 16 MHz in 1 MHz steps Input resistance 200 TUNE Tuning input for the internal reference frequency Voltage range 10 V pulling range 1 1 0 6 15 PULSE Input to trigger the pulse generator or to directly control the pulse modulation Level TTL Input resistance 50 Q 10kQ selectable Max permissible overvoltage 15 V SYNC Level TTL VIDEO The signal is synchronous with the RF pulse Level TTL Power switch On when pressed at the top Power supply connection RS 232 RS 232 interface used for software update the loading of calibration data and remote control The
67. DEVIATION and MOD POLARITY Nd Menu selection DIGITAL MOD FSK 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY EXT PRBS DATA LEVEL 1 5 15 20 21 23 bit ODULATION CLOCK ous POS COUPLED DIGITAL MOD E LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX LE QUTPUT 1 LEVEL ATTENUATION 0 0 SWEEP Fl MODE AUTO SINGLE LIST MEM SEO SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER UTILITIES DEVI LON 4 50 HELP BIT TE 20 FILTER OFF OD POLARITY NORM INV SELECT LIST CURRENT DLIST4 DELETE LIST FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEV Fig 2 45 Menu DIGITAL MOD FSK preset setting fitted with option DM coder SME B11 1038 6002 02 2 94 E 13 SME Digital Modulation SOURCE PRBS CLOCK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE EXECUTE SINGLE MODE SELECT STANDARD DEVIATION BIT RATE 1038 6002 02 Selection of the modulation source for FSK IEC bus command SOUR DM TYPE FSK SOUR EXT STAT ON Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence IEC bus command SOUR DM PRBS 9 Opens a window to set the clock parameters The current settings are displayed cf Section QPSK modulation Selection of the operating mode for level reduction OFF The level reduction is switched off NORM The level reduction corre
68. DM BASic DATA XMEM LENGth AUTO ON OFF This command switches the automatic length identification in recording the data on or off The command is only effective with a data transmission via IEC bus however if the data are recorded from an external source it is not ON The transmitted data specify the length of the data sequence The instrument adjusts the value of LENGth accordingly OFF LENGth specifies the length of the sequence The instrument ignores surplus data if the data quantity is too small it copies as many data from the beginning of the sequence as is necessary to achieve the specified sequence length Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM LENG AUTO OFF RST value is ON SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM MODE DATA ALL This command specifies the memory space allocation DATA The memory is 1 bit broad and only contains DATA data The memory depth is 8 MBit ALL The memory is 3 bits broad and contains lists of all three types of data DATA ATTenuate and BURSt The memory depth is 1 MBit Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM MODE DATA Not changed by RST SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM RECord This command starts the recording of external data The data are directly transferred to the memory extension list XMEM The recording automatically stops when the end address is reached The recording can be aborted using command ABORt XMEM The setting under DM BAS DATA XMEM LENG AUTO has no influence The ex
69. Hierarchy Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and one or several parameters if any Examples RST RESET resets the device ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register Device specific commands are of hierarchical structure see Fig 3 1 The different levels are represented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SOURce This key word denotes the command system SOURce For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC This command lies in the fourth level of the SOURce system It sets the coupling of the external signal source to AC Fig 3 1 Tree structure of the SCPI command systems using the SOURce system by way of example 1038 6002 02 3 6 E 13 SME Optional key words Long and short form Parameter Numeric suffix 1038 6002 02 Structure and Syntax of the Messages Some key words occur in several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command that is to say at which position in the header of a command they are inserted Example SOU
70. Instrument settings Callie ou rbi A a 2 39 3 14 OO ETT o RUE CODES 2 37 3 19 SU e eiii ce rte e core Eee der oe a ai 2 39 3 16 Interface functions IEC DUS sse A6 2 functions RS232 seen A6 5 messages IEC A6 3 Intermodulation 2 46 13 Index Intetf pt 3 136 Interrupt free level setting 2 45 5 18 IST flags iH 3 15 K Key Se ASSIGN 5 itte Se se oS 2 21 MENU1 2 MOD ON OFF Key words commands Keyboard disabling cesse 3 1 1 9 L LEARN LIST mode sse 2 143 3 76 Length bit sequence 2 78 3 41 data sequence XMEM 2 83 3 39 SWOOP se viscera REESE eia 3 103 LEV ATT memory 2 79 3 38 Level calibration ai eener aere re neni ig 2 159 3 19 2 46 3 88 correction list 2 47 3 32 p Em 2 18 EMP tant tun ete ete ie 2 49 TeSOlUliQn tie CAs Oi 2 44 suppressed 2 154 3 19 RA 2 44 3 90 c A MH 2 143 3 77 ERE 2 136 3 79 monitoring 2 71 5 19 5 22 iP 2 43 3 89 presetting calibration 2 159 3 19 reduction DM o ta ires
71. LFGEN2 SHAPE EXT1 COUPLING LFGEN2 SIN 2 000 0 kHz EXT1 EXT2 SQR 27 500 0 kHz TRI NOI DC EXT2 COUPLING AC DC Main menu Submenu Setting menu Menu cursor 8 Digit cursor Select mark 1 Header field 2 Status line 3 Menu fields Fig 2 3 Design of the display Header field 1 The header field of the display indicates frequency and level of the RF output signal In the RF sweep operating mode the start and stop frequencies are displayed in two lines one above the other The start and stop levels are indicated in the LEVEL sweep operating mode correspondingly Status line 2 The status line below describes operating mode and operating state of the instrument Error messages and notes for caution are also displayed in the status line Menu fields 3 The indication fields below the header field are reserved for the menu representations The image contents of these fields change as a function of the menu selected The field at the left hand display margin is occupied with the main menu the topmost level of the menu structure The main menu is always faded in Each further field adjacent at the right contains submenus The field ending with the right hand display margin shows the setting menu In this menu all setting values and setting states connected with the menu selected are indicated When accessing submenus the hig
72. MSEQuence IMMediate No query SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO PULSe SOURce EXTernal AUTO SLOPe POSitive NEGative SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger1 2 SWEep All commands to trigger a sweep are under this node The settings here act on level and frequency sweeps for RF generator TRIG1 and LF generator TRIG2 TRIGger1 2 SWEep IMMediate The command immediately starts a sweep Which sweep is executed depends on the respective MODE setting e g SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep The command corresponds to manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP This command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG SWE IMM 1038 6002 02 3 124 E 13 SME TRIGger TRIGger1 2 SWEep SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal The command specifies the trigger source The naming of the parameters directly corresponds to the different settings with manual control SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the instrument accepts as well These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important The following table provides an overview SME designation SCPI designation Command with manual control AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO SINGle BUS MODE SINGLE or STEP EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP AUTOThe trigger is free running i e the trigger requirement is permanently met As soon as a sweep has been terminated the next one is started SINGle T
73. POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is maintained or reset in switching on PSC 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained Thus a service request can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status registers ESE and SRE PSC 0 resets the registers Query PSC reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 RCL 0 to 50 RECALL calls the instrument state which was stored under the number supplied using command SAV 50 instrument states can be stored RST RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status The command essentially corresponds to pressing the PRESET key The state of the RF output is an exception The RF output is deactivated after RST however it is activated after the RESET key has been pressed The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands SAV 1 to 50 SAVE stores the current instrument state under the number indicated cf RCL as well SRE 0 to 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered Query SRE reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always 0 STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form TRG
74. Plug jumper X2 cf Fig 4 3 pos 1 Caution Ensure that the braided cord in the casing slots is fitted correctly 4 4 E 13 SME Functional Test 1 Jumper X2 2 Lithium battery Fig 4 3 Position of the XMEM battery on option SME B12 side where the components are fitted 4 2 Functional Test The SME carries out a selftest on switching on the instrument and permanently during operation On switching on the RAM and ROM contents are checked and the batteries of the non volatile RAMs and of the memory extension are tested If an error is detected this is indicated through a corresponding error message The most important instrument functions are automatically monitored during operation If a faulty function is detected in the selftest ERROR is displayed in the status line To identify the error the ERROR menu in which the error messages are entered can be called by pressing the ERROR key cf Chapter 2 Section Error Messages The tests can additionally be called via the menu Access to the tests is offered by the UTILITIES TEST menu Menu selection UTILITIES TEST 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM TEST EPROM gt LEVEL REF OSC TEST RAM gt ODULATION PHASE RAM BATTERY gt DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LF OUTPUT CALIB TEST b SWEEP DIAG XMEM FILL PATTERN 0 LIST TEST FILL XMEM DESTRUCTIVE MEM SEQ MOD KEY GENERATE XMEM CHECKSUM 07F7F088 UT
75. SELect ALPHA USER USER not SCPI 3 57 USERS USER4 SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary BLENgth 1to 16 not SCPI 3 58 SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary CATalog not SCPI 3 58 SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary DATA 0 1 0 1 not SCPI 3 58 1038 6002 02 8C 6 E 12 SME List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce FLEX MESSage BINary TYPE LEFT RIGHt TRANsparent THEader not SCPI 3 58 SOURce FLEX MESSage BINary SELect USER1 3 58 SOURce FLEX MESSage CAPCode Capcode string not SCPI 3 57 SOURce FLEX MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric SECure BlNary not SCPI 3 57 NUMeric SNUMeric TONE SOURce FLEX MESSage MDRop ON OFF not SCPI 3 59 SOURce FLEX MESSage MNUMbering ON OFF not SCPI 3 59 SOURce FLEX MESSage NUMeric String not SCPI 3 59 SOURce FLEX MESSage REPeats 0to3 not SCPI 3 59 SOURce FLEX MESSage TONE 0107 not SCPI 3 59 SOURce FLEX MODulation 1600 FSK2 3200 FSK2 3200 FSK4 not SCPI 3 56 6400 FSK4 SOURce FLEX PHASe A B C D AB AC AD BC BD not SCPI 3 56 CD ABC ABD ACD BCD ABCD SOURce FLEX PHASe AUTO ON OFF not SCPI 3 57 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation COLLapse 0to 7 not SCPI 3 59 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation CZONe 0 to 31 not SCPI 3 60 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation DATE Year month day not SCPI 3 60 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation L CHannel 0 t
76. SOURce VOR Option SM B6 STATe ON OFF SOURce INT2 INT2 EXT MODE NORM VAR SUBCarrier FMSubcarrier BANGle 0 to 360 deg rad DIRection FROM TO VAR DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT FREQuency 20 to 40 Hz Hz SUBCarrier DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT FREQuency 5 to 15 kHz Hz REFerence DEViation 0 to 960 Hz Hz PRESet No query COMid STATe ON OFF FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz Hz DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT SOURce VOR STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the generation of VOR signals STATe ON is only possible if no amplitude modulation is switched on Modulation generator 2 must not be switched simultaneously as a source for PM or FM either RST value is OFF Example SOUR VOR STAT ON SOURce VOR SOURce INT2 INT2 EXT This command determines the signal sources of the test signal INT2 The test signal used for VOR is generated internally by LF generator 2 SOURce INT2 INT2 EXT A signal from input EXT1 is added to the internal signal in addition Switching off the internal source is not possible RST value is INT2 Example SOUR VOR SOUR INT2 1038 6002 02 3 106 E 13 SME SOURce VOR SOURce VOR MODE NORM VAR SUBCarrier The command specifies the type of VOR signal generated NORM VOR signal VAR Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the SOURce VOR VAR FREQuency signal component usually 30 Hz of the VOR signal The modulation depth is set under SOURce VOR VAR DEPTh
77. TRIGGER triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event Special trigger events can be started by command system TRIGger see section TRIGger System TST SELF TEST QUERY triggers all selftests of the instrument indicated in Chapter 4 Section Functional Test and outputs an error code in decimal form WAI WAIT to CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled cf Section 3 7 and as well 1038 6002 02 3 16 E 13 SME ABORt 3 6 3 ABORt System The ABORt system contains the commands to abort actions triggered After an action has been aborted it can be triggered again at once All commands trigger an event thus they have no RST value Further commands for the trigger system of the SME can be found in the TRIGger system Command Parameter Default Remark Unit ABORt SWEep No query LIST No query MSEQuence No query DM No query option SME B11 No query XMEM option SME B12 ABORt SWEep The command aborts a sweep Example ABOR SWE ABORt LIST The command aborts a list execution Example ABOR LIST ABORt MSEQuence The command aborts a Memory Sequence Example ABOR MSEQ ABORt DM The command aborts the single execution of a DM list The command always relates to the digital type of modulation currently set using SOURce DM TYPE Example ABOR DM ABORt XMEM T
78. Text Strings 1038 6002 02 Numerical values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano It the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SOURce FREQuency 1 5 kHz SOURce FREQuency 1 5E3 The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numerical values In the case of a query the numerical value is provided Example Setting command SOURce VOLTage MAXimum Query SOURce VOLTage Response 15 MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command UP DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command see annex C List of Commands for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respect
79. The bit errors are incorporated before the individual blocks are subjected to interleaving see ReFLEX25 documentation Input of the bits to be falsified The set decimal number is converted internally into a 32 bit binary number This binary number is XORed with the original message word Each bit of the ERROR BIT MASK set to 1 causes an inversion of the respective bit in the transmitted word IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 ERR MASK 0 Indicates the position of the erroneous word The erroneous word appears in each frame Counting starts with the first word of block 0 of each frame i e immediately after the sync partition the sync partition cannot be falsified Values from 0 to 351 can be set Depending on the modulation a frame without sync partition consists of 88 176 or 352 words If an excessive value is entered for POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD for the set modulation no bit errors are produced IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 ERR WORD 0 The SME always sends complete cycles consisting of up to 128 frames The parameters of this section specify the frame contents 2 123 E 13 SME Digital Modulation FRAME CONTENTS AUTO ADAPTATION 1038 6002 02 This function specifies the contents of the max 128 frames sent by the SME during one cycle A window is opened in which each frame is represented by one character One of the following frame types can be selected for each of the 128 frames
80. The command sets the voltage of the LF output The voltage is a characteristic of the output not the source l e itis maintained even if another LF generator is connected to the output Example OUTP2 VOLT 3 0V RST value is 1 V 1038 6002 02 3 28 E 13 SME SOURce 3 6 11 SOURce System This system contains the commands to configure the RF signal source Keyword SOURce is optional i e it can be omitted The LF signal sources options SM B2 and SM B6 are configured in the SOURce0 2 system cf Section 3 6 12 The following subsystems are realized in the instrument Subsystem Settings SOURce AM Amplitude modulation CORRection Correction of the output level DM Digital modulation ERMes ERMES signal FLEX FLEX signal Frequency modulation FREQuency Frequencies including sweep ILS Test signals for ILS Instrument Landing System LIST LIST operating mode MARKer Marker generation with sweeps MBE Marker signals Marker Beacon PHASe Phase between output signal and reference oscillator signal PM Phase modulation POCSag Post Office Code Standardisation Advisory Group POWer Output level level control and level correction Pulse modulation Pulse generator PULSe Reference oscillator ROSCillator Stereo modulation STEReo SWE Sweeps e m P Test signals for VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range VOR 1038 6002 02 3 29 E 13 SOURce AM SME 3 6 11 1 SOURce AM Subsystem Thi
81. The custom frames are not changed For reasons of space the individual fragments of the telegram are calculated and filed During the execution a so called sequencer makes sure that the individual fragments are read such that a valid and complete telegram is obtained The sequencer automatically places a sync1 portion a frame info word and a sync2 portion ahead of all frames except for the types OTH RSYN and CUS1 to CUSS9 The individual fragments are stored in the XMEM as follows Fragment Start length Sync 1 portion 3 224 1920 Frame info words FtiFto 10 301 1920 64 1920 Frame info words FtiFto 11 125001 1920 64 1920 Frame info words FtiFto 00 250001 1920 64 Sync 2 portion 375001 1920 80 OTH frame 376001 6000 RSYN frame 383001 5632 IDLE frame 390001 5632 TONE frame 397001 5632 NUM frame 404001 5632 ALPH frame 411001 5632 SCI frame 418001 5632 BER frame 425001 5632 FPAT frame 432001 5632 CUS1 frame 510001 6000 CUS2 frame 520001 6000 CUS3 frame 530001 6000 CUSA frame 540001 6000 CUS5 frame 550001 6000 CUS6 frame 560001 6000 CUS7 frame 570001 6000 CUS8 frame 580001 6000 CUS9 frame 590001 6000 Separate frame info words are stored for each combination of frame number 0 127 and cycle number 0 14 accounting for the number 128 15 1920 of the frame info words per category 1038 6002 0
82. VSUM OFFS CAL VSUM DAC CAL VSUM KOS Calibration LEV PRESET In order to hold the amplitude modulator in the optimal working point with all frequency and level settings a second control element is mounted by means of which the level before the modulator is set in such a way that the modulator always works in the best part of its characteristic The setting values for the second control element are stored in a table and can be renewed using internal calibration routine LEV PRESET The calibration routine needs only be executed in the case of a data loss in the RAM or after an exchange of modules Function By alternately adjusting the two level control elements the calibration routine determines the value for the presetting in which the amplitude modulator is operated at the attenuation demanded The calibration is executed according to a given frequency table at levels of 13dBm to 2dBm in steps of 3 dB The routine takes approx 2 min Menu selection UTILITIES CALIB LEV PRESET frm M 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATE b LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET FREQUENCY RANGE NORM MODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN LEVEL 16113 10 7 DIGITAL MOD PROTECT REF OSC VIEW b LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK 00 SWEEP DIAG LEVEL 0002 00 LLST TESI 0003 75 MEM SEQ MOD KEY 0004 00 UTILITIES AUX I O 0005 70 HELP BEEPER 0006 75 MILD 0007 50
83. esting assener enne 5 6 VAR signal VOR sse 2 66 3 107 Frequency marker LF sweep R 2 142 3 112 2 139 3 78 Frequency modulation 2 56 3 63 Frequency of the COM ID signal Marker 2 76 Frequency sweep diete d der e tacui 2 141 8 113 nz x Ed 2 138 3 103 Front 1 5 FSI Frequency Subset Indicator 2 104 3 54 FSK modulation eese 2 94 3 47 1038 6002 02 Index Functional lOs tal eI 4 5 G GET Group Execute Trigger 3 131 GFSK modulation gt gt OSO oe Ds 5 29 GMSK modulation oooocccccccooonnononooaananononnananonons 2 87 3 41 leStings ee iro es e e a RR Y We gas atus 5 34 GSM Global System for Mobile Communications Personal Communication System 2 78 Radio network essent 2 86 H Handshake 5232 2 153 3 118 6 Harmonics 5 5 10 Header commands 3 6 Header field display essen 2 18 2 57 2 59 1 IEC IEEE bus ANO SS eh REIS 2 152 3 3 3 118 interface language ILS Instrument Landing System glide slope modulation
84. first the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number last the most significant byte Example FORMat BORDer NORMal RST value is NORMal 1038 6002 02 3 25 E 13 OUTPut SME 3 6 8 MEMory System This system contains the commands for the memory management of the SME Command Parameter Default Remark Unit MEMory Query only NSTates MEMory NSTates The command returns the number of SAV RCL memories available The SME has 50 SAV RCL memories in total Example MEM NST Response 50 3 6 9 OUTPut System This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the RF output socket and the BLANK socket The characteristics of the LF socket are specified in the OUTPut2 system Command Parameter Default Remark Unit OUTPut AMODe AUTO FlXed BLANK POLarity NORMal INVerted IMPedance Query only PROTection CLEar TRIPped Query only STATe ON OFF PON OFF UNCHanged OUTPut AMODe AUTO FIXed The command switches over the operating mode of the attenuator at the RF output Attenuator MODe AUTO The attenuator is switched whenever possible FIXed The attenuator is switched when certain fixed levels are exceeded fallen below Example OUTP AMOD AUTO RST value is AUTO 1038 6002 02 3 26 E 13 SME MEMory OUTPut OUTPut BLANKk POLarity NORMal INVerted The command sets the polarity of the BLANk signal NORMal The active BLANK state is indi
85. generators Set instrument to Local state REM ke eR Kk kk kk ko Kk ke ke ko Ko kk ke ke ke ko Kok kk ke ke ko kk kk ke ke ko kk kk ke ke ke ko Kee 5 Reading out Instrument Settings The settings made in example 3 are read out here The abbreviated commands are used REM SS Reading out instrument settings lt n nen 2 iS RFfrequency SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator FREQ Request frequency setting CALL IBRD generator RFfrequency Read value RFlevel SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator POW CALL IBRD generator RFlevel Provide text variables with 20 characters Request level setting Read value AMmodulationdepth SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator AM CALL IBRD generator AMmodulationdepth Provide text variables with 20 characters Request setting of modulation depth Read value AMfrequency SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator AM INT1 FREQ CALL IBRD generator AMfrequency Provide text variables with 20 characters Request modulation frequency setting Read value Provide text variables with 20 characters Request step width setting Read value Stepwidth SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator FREQ STEP CALL IBRD generator stepwidth REM Display values on the screen PRINT RF frequency RFfrequency PRIN
86. i e 2 where sc denotes the value set under SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE consists of an operator message address and a short instruction vector has no message body and no BIW101 MESSAGE FOR ALL SUBSCRIBERS is generated depending on the contents of FRAME CONTENTS also if ROAMING is set to OFF consists of an operator message address a vector and a message body has no BIW101 IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF ROAM OFF SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation MULTiplier 1 to 7 The command sets the input value of the multiplier part of the network ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF MULT 1 RST value is 1 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation COUNTry 0 to 999 Input value of the country code IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF COUN 0 RST value is 0 1038 6002 02 3 61 E 13 SOURce FLEX SME SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation CZONe 0 to 31 This command determines the coverage zone RST value is 0 Example SOUR FLEX SI CZON 0 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation STMF 0 to 31 The command allows the entry of any input value of the four traffic management flags for SSID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF STMF 15 RST value is 15 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation DATE Year month day The command sets the date RST value is 1994 01 01 Example SOUR FLEX SI DATE 1994 01 01 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation FOFFset 0 to 63 The command sets the input value of the frame offsets IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF FOFFset 0 RST value
87. key as well Key RF ON OFF Press the RF ON OFF key The RF output signal is switched on off IEC bus command OUTP STAT ON Key MOD ON OFF Press the MOD ON OFF key The modulation is switched on off A direct IEC bus command is not available The modulations have to be Switched on and off in the respective modulation submenus 2 2 3 7 Changing Unit of Level For the level the unit of the value set can be changed without a new value input Change level unit Activate LEVEL parameter Press the LEVEL key or setthe menu cursor in the LEVEL menu to the setting value ofthe AMPLITUDE parameter Press the unit key with the desired level unit The level is indicated in the desired unit 1038 6002 02 2 22 E 13 SME Sample Setting for First Users 2 2 3 8 Correction of Input Digital entries can be corrected by one of the unit Enter keys before terminating the input Key The backspace key deletes the value entered digit by digit When the last digit is deleted the previous value is displayed Key RETURN Pressing the RETURN key deletes the entire entry and results in the previous value being indicated again For a subsequent new input in the setting menu the first digit of the new value is to be entered For a subsequent new input via the FREQ or LEVEL keys the respective key has to be pressed again Key FREQ LEVEL In the case of a frequency or level input by means of the FR
88. preset setting 2 102 Fig 2 49 Menu DIGITAL MOD FLEX options SME B41 SME B11 SM B12 2 107 Fig 2 50 Menu DIGITAL MOD ReFLEX sse entere nennen entr snnt enne 2 119 Fig 2 51 Menu DIGITAL MOD POCSAG sss eee nnne enses 2 127 Fig 2 52 Menu LF OUTPUT preset setting sssseeeeeeenne 2 132 Fig 2 53 Signal example sweep MODE AUTO BLANK TIME NORMAL 2 137 Fig 2 54 Signal example sweep MODE SINGLE BLANK TIME LONG 2 137 Fig 2 55 Menu SWEEP FREQ nte aie HR le a qud S RR dE 2 138 Fig 2 56 Menu SWEEP LEVEL nd ecce dr Pe eg ane v ee 2 140 Fig 2 57 Menu SWEEP EF GEN eed neve aaa 2 141 Fig 2 58 Signal example LIST mode MODE 2 145 Fig 2 59 Menu LIST OPERATION page ccccccssceceeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaesseneeseeeesaeeseaaesseneeenaees 2 145 Fig 2 60 Menu List EDIT page ne tnde gt edet ee etes 2 147 Fig 2 61 Menu MEM SEQ OPERATION page preset 2 150 Fig 2 62 Menu MEM SEQ EDIT page eocooccccoccccnoninononcnonoccnoncnnnn conan nc nan nc cnn nennen nennen 2 151 Fig 2 63 Menu UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB ssssssssseseenenneeeneen eene nennen 2 152 Fig 2 64 Menu UTILITIES SYSTEM RS232 sss
89. preset setting Selection of the operating mode INT Internal reference operating mode EXT External reference operating mode IEC bus short command SOUR ROSC SOUR INT 2 155 E 13 Utilities SME EXT FREQUENCY Input value of the external reference frequency 1 MHz to 16 MHz spacing 1 MHz IEC bus short command SOUR ROSC EXT FREQ 10E6 ADJUSTMENT STATE OFF Tuning value of the internal reference frequency as calibrated cf menu UTILITIES CALIB ON Tuning value according to setting value FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT Option SM B1 reference oscillator OCXO is switched off Only the standard reference oscillator is in operation IEC bus short command SOUR ROSC ADJ STAT ON FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT Input value in the range to 4095 to set the internal reference frequency Pulling range 4 10 6 IEC bus short command SOUR ROSC ADJ VAL 2048 2 11 6 Phase of the Output Signal PHASE Menu UTILITIES PHASE offers access to the phase setting of the RF output signal with respect to a reference signal of the same frequency Menu selection UTILITIES PHASE A AAA A A A Q emt 100 000 000 0 z FREQUENCY SYSTEM DELTA PHASE LEVEL REF OSC RESET DELTA PHASE DISPLAY p gt ODULATION PHASE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX I 0 HE LP BEEPER INSTALL F
90. to MSEQuence the instrument states stated in the list selected are set successively for the time stated in the time list in each case SYSTem MSEQuence CATalog The command queries the memory sequences available It returns a list the entries are separated by means of commas Example SYST MSEQ CAT Response SEQ1 DEMO SEQA SYSTem MSEQuence DELete Name of sequence The command deletes the memory sequence indicated Example SYST MSEQ DEL SEQ1 SYSTem MSEQuence DELete ALL The command deletes all memory sequences The memory sequence mode must be switched off as a selected sequence cannot be deleted SySTem MODE FIXed Example SYST MSEQ DEL ALL SYSTem MSEQuence DWELI 50 ms to 60 s 50 ms to 60 s For the memory sequence which has currently been selected the command transmits a list indicating the time for which an instrument setting is held in each case before the instrument proceeds to the next setting If DWELI indicates only one parameter every item of the instrument state list is set for the same indicated time Lists are not influenced by RST Example SYST MSEQ DWEL 15 1038 6002 02 3 119 E 13 SYSTem SME SYSTem MSEQuence FREE The command queries the space available for memory sequences It returns two values The first value indicates the space still vacant the second the space already occupied Example SYST MSEQ FREE Response 20
91. 0 113 rad with 0 3 rad 0 281 i6 0 319 rad with 1 0 rad 0 96 n 1 040 rad with 3 0 rad 2 90 ene 3 10 rad with 10 rad 9 69 A 10 31 rad 29 PhiM frequency response 5 2 29 EXT1 ae mee 3 dB EXT2 3 dB 1038 6002 02 5 46 E 13 SME Performance Test Item Characteristic Measurem Min Actual Max Unit acc to Section 30 PhiM distortion factor 1 31 Int modulation generator Frequency 400 Hz 412 Hz Frequency 1 kHz 1030 Hz Frequency 3kHz 3090 Hz Frequency 15 kHz 15 45 kHz Level 1010 mV 32 Pulse modulation 5 2 32 ON OFF ratio 80 mue dB Rising time 10 ns Fall time 10 ns Delay time 70 ns 33 GFSK modulation 5 2 33 Spectrum checked kHz Deviation external LOW 298 RB 278 kHz Deviation external HIGH 278 298 Level DATA checked kHz Frequency DATA b75 44 ss 576 6 Level BURST checked kHz Frequency BURST 5754 Suns 576 6 Level CLOCK checked kHz Frequency CLOCK 1150 85 ince 1153 15 96 Deviation error LO e 7 Square wave signal 96 Amplitude 3923 3 Overshoot fe 3 34 QPSK modulation 5 2 34 Spectrum checked Vector error mo 2 5 96 35 GMSK modulation Spectrum Phase error RMS 1 96 Phase error peak 3 1038 6002 02 5 47 E 13 Performance Test SME Item Characteristic Measurem Min Actual Max Unit acc to Section 36 FFSK modulation 5 2 36 HIGH
92. 1 The checksums for the second line D B A apply to the DATA BURST and LEV ATT memory in the MEM MODE 1M 3 Tests the XMEM battery Memory extension option SME B12 The test result is displayed in a window 4 6 E 13 SME 5 Performance Test Test Instruments and Utilities 5 1 Test Instruments and Utilities Table 5 1 Test Instruments and Utilities Item Type of instrument Specifications required Suitable R amp S R amp S order no Application instrument 1 Frequency counter 1Hz to 1 5 GHz SME02 5 2 2 included item 2 1Hz to GHz SMEO03 5 2 4 1Hz to 6 GHz SMEO6 Resolution 0 1 Hz 2 RF spectrum analyzer 100 Hz to 5 GHz SME02 03 FSB 0848 0020 52 5 2 3 100 Hz to 18 GHz SMEO6 FSM 1020 7020 52 5 2 5 synthesizer tuning 5 2 6 dynamic range gt 80 dB 5 2 7 5 2 8 5 2 11 5 2 12 5 2 32 5 2 33 5 2 34 5 2 35 3 Storage oscilloscope 100 M samples s 5 1 1 5 averaging function 5 2 3 4 Controller Industrial standard PC XT AT PSA 15 1012 1003 03 5 2 3 with IEC 625 interface 5 2 35 R amp S Basic 5 Signal generator of high 0 1 MHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 SMEO02 1038 6002 02 03 0 5 1 1 3 spectral purity 0 1 MHz to 3 GHz SMEO3 6 5 1 1 4 0 1 MHz to 6 GHz SMEO6 SME06 5 1 1 5 SSB noise level lt 126 dBc 5 2 7 with 1GHz 20 kHz 5 2 8 5 2 12 5 2 14 6 Phase noise test setup Mixer 5 2 7 10 MHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 5 2 8 10 MHz to GHz SME03 10 MHz to 6 GHz SME06 separating filter 2 MHz
93. 100 000 000 0 svi 30 0 co ENCY F RRENT MSEQ2 FILL INS ELETE EDIT VIEW LATION 1 EE 2041 LEN 2055 I DWELL DIGITAL MOD 50 ms OUTPUT 50 ms 60 ms 60 ms 85 ms 85 ms 85 ms 85 ms Fig 2 10 Edit function EDIT VIEW INDEX Position in the list FREE Space available FREE 2041 means that space for 2041 parameter elements is available in the list memory in total LEN Occupied space LEN 2055 means that the current list occupies 2055 elements in the list memory MEMORY DWELL Identification of the column below The number of parameter columns is different for the various list editors The list editor for digital modulation data possess three parameter columns DATA BURST LEVEL ATTENUATION 1038 6002 02 2 31 E 13 List Editor SME Select parameters Mark the index associated to the parameter using the rotary knob or directly enter the value of the index via the numeric keys gt Press SELECT key Parameter MEMORY is marked If the second parameter DWELL is to be marked press the SELECT key again Modify parameters Vary the value of the parameter selected using the rotary knob or enter the value directly using numeric keys Note The binary coder data of the digital modulations which cannot be varied are an exception Further all numeric keys excep
94. 2 138 3 67 Stop level level sweep 2 140 3 90 A O OCN 4 1 Store instrument settings 2 39 oy 2 31 Structure COMMANG ia 3 6 command line 38 Subcarrier VOR 2 66 Subharmonics EE 5 10 Sum bit 3 134 Sum deviation ett eee eo 2 51 Sum modulation depth sss 2 51 ILS GS signal 2 69 ILS LOC signal contents 2 73 two tone modulation esses 2 51 Summing loop OWOOD era ossi orsi pie eM UELUT LI ILIA AU 2 134 level sine diene ae 2 140 3 90 LF2 141 3 112 OUIDpUls ted ee aia 2 136 lj M EE 2 138 3 103 run level sweep s sirena ie 2 140 3 105 LF 1 1 A 2 142 3 113 RF sweep AAA Switchover to remote CONtTOl ooooocccconocicociconcccocanenicancnnnnan 3 2 Symbol o so S v eee 2 21 Symbol clock 2 92 3 36 SYNC OUP Heath reta Ancien aes 2 15 Synthesis range sse 2 57 2 59 T Temperature dependence of oscillator 2 160 TEST DONS uite eere aes 2 163 3 22 TETRA Trans European Trunked Radio 2 78 Radio network ics aids fan yr teer rte 2 86 Terrestrial Flight Telephone System 2 78 Radio NCTWOFK 2 86 Traffic area
95. 2 73 TIA riis 2 69 3 70 ILS LOC Decimal point DECT Digital European Cordless Telephony Radio networkin t cte iR 2 86 Delay calibration QPSK sss 2 161 pulse modulation esses 2 62 3 92 Delete all data stored 2 154 JiSt ntry 0 2 35 Delimiter 3 130 Delta phase 2 156 3 81 Detuning external sese 2 155 Deviation 4FSK MOQUIAtiOD ccmcococccccoconancnononoannnnnononan 2 98 3 49 FFSK modulation 2 101 3 49 FLEX esa ic pen tet ts 2 108 3 56 GFSK 2 90 3 44 pilot TONE iii ni tente 2 64 3 101 PM RIS 2 58 3 82 POCSA G iuit osi REM ANI 2 128 3 85 REF signal VOR 2 66 3 108 REEL EX a unen iio 2 116 3 93 stereo MPX 2 68 3 100 Deviation Limits 1038 6002 02 EM siena UBI OE 2 57 Difference coding 5 2 88 3 43 Difference in depth of modulation DM ILS OS ice ee hao bee 2 69 3 70 IESE OG tirita 2 73 3 73 DigIlGUFSOF estes anaiei iaee 2 18 Digital modulation DM 2 78 3 34 Digital SYntheSIS e in int nie nite ap 1 5 Disabling CANDO Ei E RH ek 2 158 3 120 indi
96. 30 0 FREQUENCY SELECT LIST CURRENT MSEQO LEVEL FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW MODULATION INDEX FREE 0246 LEN 0010 MEMORY DWELL DIGITAL MOD A 0001 LF OUTPUT 4 SWEEP 4 LIST 4 2 UTILITIES 4 HELP 2 B so 100 000 0000 FREQUENCY SELECT LIST CURRENT M3EQ2 LEVEL FUNCTLON FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW MODULATION INDEX FREE 0246 LEN 0010 MEMORY DWELL DIGITAL MOD 0001 20 LF OUTPUT 4 0002 SWEEP 4 LIST 4 4 7 UTILIES 4 HELP 2 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SELECT LIST CURRENT MSEQ2 LEVEL FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW MODULATION INDEX FREE 0246 LEN 0010 MEMORY DWELL DIGITAL MOD A 0001 20 15 00 s LF OUTPUT 0002 07 100 ms SWEEP 4 0003 LIST 4 2 UTILIES 4 HELP Z Fig 2 15 ato c Pattern setting Edition of a list 1038 6002 02 2 38 E 13 SME Save Recall 2 2 5 Save Recall Storing Calling of Instrument Settings 50 complete instrument settings can be stored in memory locations 1 to 50 Operating steps Explanations DATA INPUT Store current instrument setting in x memory location 12 TENE ENTER DATA INP UT Call instrument setting of memory ae location 12 gt ENTER The digital display during a save or recall entry is faded in a window Memory location 0 has a special function Here the instrument setting which was current prior to the last memory recall and prior to a preset setting is automatically stored This
97. 5 1 item 19 Test setup Connect the AC voltmeter to the LF socket of the SME Measurement Settings at the SME In menu LF OUTPUT SOURCE LFGEN2 Vary LFGEN2 FREQUENCY from 10 Hz to 500 kHz Frequency response difference between the smallest and largest A tive up to 100 kHz 0 3 dB to 500 kHz lt 0 5 dB Note The setting time is a mere computer time and thus need not be remeasured 1038 6002 02 5 40 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 39 3 Distortion Factor and Crosstalk Attenuation Stereo Test equipment Modulation analyzer Section 5 1 item 15 Test setup Connect modulation analyzer to the LF output of the SME Measurement gt Settings at the SME In menu MODULATION STEREO MODE R AUDIO FREQ 1kHz In menu LF OUTPUT STEREO OUTPUT MPX Read distortion factor at the modulation analyzer signal R lt 0 1 Measure the modulated signal of the right channel note down value gt Measure the demodulated signal of the left channel Difference between modulated and demodulated signal Repeat measurement using setting MODE L 5 2 39 4 Pilot Tone Level Test equipment AC voltmeter Section 5 1 item 15 Test setup Connect AC voltmeter to the LF output of the SME Measurement Settings at the SME In menu MODULATION STEREO PILOT STATE ON In menu LF OUTPUT STEREO OUTPUT PILOT LF VOLTA
98. 50 Marker enne 2 76 PM 2 58 3 82 ii oie re odere he 2 60 3 91 1038 6002 02 Index as o ia 3 45 REFLEX 2 120 3 94 SOUICOS A eR i ds 2 50 stereo 2 63 3 100 VOR aii ET 2 65 3 106 Modulation depth 30 Hz VAR signal VOR 3 107 dut ave iei EISE TRES SERRE TOS 2 54 3 30 BK aside 2 64 3 102 COW ID signal areare iai 3 70 Ik S GS tei ioi sas eii a 2 70 3 69 Dea not EP LEES 2 64 3 102 Modulation generator 5 27 Module indication oce 2 162 3 22 MSAT Mobile 2 78 Radio network ssssssssssse eene 2 86 operating 2 148 3 17 Multifunction 1 9 2 53 O A HB ER 5 40 Multi transmiltter 2 46 N North American Digital Cellular 2 78 Radio helWork ove RH RUP 2 86 Name of sequence MSEQ 9 120 OD 3 9 Network information ERMES 3 53 New Line command line esses 3 8 mE 3 9 NTRansition register essen 3 134 Numer
99. 6002 02 Set the menu cursor to the name of the parameter desired using the rotary knob e g to AM DEPTH in the AM menu Fig 2 4 Via value input or using rotary knob Press the first digit of the new value or minus sign The old value is deleted the entry is indicated in the marked field Enter further digits Terminate the input using a unit key or in the case of inputs in the base unit or in the case of inputs without unit using the 1x Enter key The menu cursor wraps back to the appropriate parameter Press the SELECT key gt The menu cursor changes from the parameter selected in the left hand column of the setting menu to the setting value on the right e g from AM DEPTH to 30 Fig 2 4 gt Set the underscore to the position of the setting value to be varied using keys gt Turn the rotary knob The position underscored is varied in steps of 1 Note HF frequency and HF level can also be varied in a step width which can be defined arbitrarily using the rotary knob In the respective setting menu FREQUENCY or LEVEL the step width is entered as KNOB STEP USER and the KNOB STEP set from DECIMAL to USER To point to the fact that the step width has been converted to the value programmed the underscore as a symbol of the digit cursor disappears in the respective value indication Select parameters Press the SELECT key The menu cursor changes from the parameter selecte
100. 87 SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 144 to 16 dBm 3 88 SOURce POWer MANual 144 to 16 dBm 3 88 SOURce POWer MODE FIXed SWEep LIST 3 88 SOURce POWer STARt 144 to 16 dBm 3 88 SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB 3 88 SOURce POWer STOP 144 to 16 dBm 3 88 SOURce PULM EXTernal IMPedance 50 Ohm 10 kOhm not SCPI 3 89 SOURce PULM INTernal FREQuency 0 01176 Hz to10 MHz not SCPI 3 89 SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 89 SOURce PULM SOURce EXTernal INTernal not SCPI 3 89 SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 89 SOURce PULSe DELay 40nsto 1s not SCPI 3 90 1038 6002 02 8C 11 E 12 List of Commands SME Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce PULSe DOUBle DELay 60 ns to 1s 3 90 SOURce PULSe DOUBle STATe ON OFF 3 90 SOURce PULSe PERiod 100 ns to 85 s 3 90 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 20 ns to 1s 3 90 SOURce REFLex25 AADaptation ON OFF not SCPI 3 96 SOURce REFLex25 DEViation 2 0 to 10 0 kHz not SCPI 3 92 SOURce REFLex25 ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 not SCPI 3 95 SOURce REFLex25 ERRor WORD 0 to 351 not SCPI 3 95 SOURce REFLex25 FCONtent IAIN T S RIB F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 not SCPI 3 96 LIIAINITISIRIBIFIOI 21314151671819 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage ALPHanumeric CATalog not SCPI 3 93 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA 3 93 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage ALPHanumeric
101. 90 kb s Example SOUR DM GFSK BRAT 1122 kb s RST value is 1170 kb s SOURce DM GFSK DEViation 14 14 4 18 20 0 25 2 160 180 202 259 288 317 403 kHz The command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation The value of SOURce DM GMSK DEViation Is adapted if necessary in order to achieve a valid setting Valid settings are DEViation FILTer DEViation FILTer 14 kHz 0 5 180 kHz 0 5 14 4 kHz 0 7 202 kHz 0 5 18 kHz 0 5 259 kHz 0 5 20 0 kHz 0 5 288 kHz 0 4 0 5 0 6 25 2 kHz 0 4 0 5 317 kHz 0 5 160 kHz 0 5 403 kHz 0 5 Example SOUR DM GMSK DEV 288E3 RST value is 288 kHz SOURce DM GFSK FILTer 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 The command specifies B x T of the filter used The value of SOURce DM GFSK DEViation is adapted if necessary in order to achieve a valid setting Valid settings are FILTer DEViation 0 4 25 2 kHz 288 kHz 0 5 14 kHz 18 kHz 20 0 kHz 25 2 kHz 160 kHz 180 kHz 202 kHz 259 kHz 288 kHz 317 kHz 403 kHz 0 6 288 kHz 0 7 14 4 kHz RST value is 0 5 Example SOUR DM GFSK FILT 0 4 1038 6002 02 3 44 E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM GFSK DSLope ON OFF The command specifies the level reduction for the modulation ON The rise and fall time of the level reduction correspond to DECT power ramping OFF Command DATA ALEVel MODE specifies the level reduction Example SOUR DM GFSK DSL ON RST value is OFF SOURce DM GFSK POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifie
102. A logic 1 means a level reduction by the value indicated in the menu under LEVEL ATTENUATION For a constant carrier either the bits of the LEV ATT list or the parameter LEVEL ATTENUATION must be set to 0 The BURST memory contains the bits to control the BURST output A logic 1 means level HIGH A logic 0 means level LOW What is to be observed is that the modulation generation is subject to a delay that must not be neglected In order to keep the level reduction or the BURST signal synchronous with the modulation these memories are to be programmed offset by the delay The delays of the different modulations are listed in table 2 5 radio network data cf Fig 2 38 signal example with respect to DM delay as well Sockets DATA CLOCK and BURST are switched to be an output if the data generator is switched on and the bit sequences can be tapped there The BURST output can be used to control the pulse modulator or to trigger the LIST mode if there is an external cable connection from the PULSE input or TRIGGER input at the rear of the unit 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY SELECT LIST CURRENT DLIST LEVEL FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT ODULATION NR FREE 6942 LEN 1250 DATA LEV ATT DIGITAL MOD 0001 00100011 11100000 LF OUTPUT 0009 01110110 00000000 SWEEP 0017 00110101 00000000 LIST 0025 11010010 00000000 MEM SEQ 0033 11010010 00000000 UTILITIES 0041 11010010 00000000 HELP 0049 1101001
103. ANGLe DEGRee DEGree RADian 3 127 UNIT POWer DBM DBW DBMW DBUW DBV 3 127 DBMV DBUV V 1038 6002 02 8C 17 E 12 SME Programming Examples Annex D Programming Examples The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more complex programming tasks QuickBASIC has been used as programming language However the programs can be translated into other languages 1 Including IEC Bus Library for QuickBasic REM cete Include IEC bus library for quickbasic SINCLUDE c NqbasicNqbdecl4 bas 2 Initialization and Default Status The IEC bus as well as the settings of the instrument are brought into a defined default status at the beginning of every program Subroutines InitController and InitDevice are used to this effect 2 1 Initiate Controller REM Initiate Instrument REM InitController iecaddress 28 IEC bus address of the instrument CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator iecaddress Inform controller on instrument address CALL IBTMO generator 11 Response time to 1 sec REM ke eR kk kk ke kk k Kk ke kk ko Kk kk kk ko Kk kk kk ko Kk 2 2 Initiate Instrument The IEC bus status registers and instrument settings of the SME are brought into the default status REM Initiate Instrument REM InitDevice CALL IBWRT generator CLS Reset
104. BIT MASK 0 iM POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0 iB MESSAGE GENERATION START IN CYCLE 0 M START IN FRAME 0 FRAME CONTENTS RECALCULATE gt 1 1 Fig 2 49 Menu DIGITAL MOD FLEX options SME B41 SME B11 SM B12 1038 6002 02 2 107 E 13 Digital Modulation STATE MODULATION DEVIATION SYSTEM INFORMATION SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE 1038 6002 02 SME ON Switch on of FLEX The RF frequency has to be set to the desired value by means of key FREQ The status line displays the word FLEX as well as the cycle and frame number and the type of output data SEC secure message INST instruction to SSID subscriber TONE tone only message NUM numeric message SNUM special numeric message ALPH alphanumeric message BIN binary hexadecimal message RSYN emergency resync FLEX frame without message OTH frame without FLEX structures If REPEATS is larger than 0 i e FLEX TD active only the first character is displayed for each phase for SNUM a P is displayed A switchover from STATE OFF to STATE ON results in a recalculation of the memory extension data and their entry into the list Changing FLEX parameters except for MESSAGE GENERATION requires a recalculation of data With radiocommunication service FLEX activated STATE ON every parameter change generates a warning FLEX setting and output signal mismatch The recalculat
105. CALibration LEVel STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off internal level correction RST value is ON Example CAL LEV STAT OFF CALibration LPReset The commands to measure the values for the level presetting table are under this node Level PReset CALibration LPReset MEASure The command triggers a calibration measurement The command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example CAL LPR MEAS Response 0 CALibration LPReset DATA The command queries the correction data It returns all correction data in the format fixed in the FORMat system Example CAL LPR DATA 1038 6002 02 3 19 E 13 CALibration SME CALibration PULSe The commands to calibrate the pulse generator are under this node option SM B4 CALibration PULSe MEASure The command triggers a calibration measurement The command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example CAL PULS MEAS Response 0 CALibration PULSe DATA The command queries the correction data It returns the correction data as two integers separated by a comma The first number indicates the fine adjustment the second the coarse adjustment Example CAL PULS DATA Response 26 2 CALibration ROSCillator The commands to calibrate the reference oscillator are under this node CALibration ROSCillator DATA 0 to 4095 The command enters the correction data For an exact definition of the calibration value cf Section 2
106. D c voltage source Section 5 1 item 12 Pulse generator Section 5 1 item 17 Test setup Connect spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the SME Connect the square wave generator to the CLOCK input and the d c voltage source to the DATA input of the SME Measurement gt Setting at the SME n menu DIGITAL MOD GFSK SOURCE EXT Settings at the pulse generator Frequency 1152 kHz TTL level Settings at the Analyzer Setresolution and video bandwidth to COUPLING DEFAULT If a LOW level at the DATA input is applied the center frequency should be 288 10 kHz under the unmodulated carrier frequency with HIGH level they should exceed the frequency by the same amount 1038 6002 02 5 30 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 33 2 Deviation Error Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 5 Measurement gt Adjust the d c voltage at the FM demodulator output to 0 V 10 mV by means of a fine adjustment of the carrier or LO frequency with GFSK modulation switched off Adjust the carrier frequency to 253 4 kHz offset to the above adjustment at the test object measure the voltage at the FM demodulator output and note down as Setthe original carrier frequency again gt Now switch on the modulation at the test object again using SOURCE DATA and enter a LOW HIGH sequence 01 using the list editor with DATA and BURST Square wave signal at the DATA output HC level IEEE frequency 576 k
107. DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The command selects the frequency of the marker signal Example SOUR MBI E MARK DEPT 95PCT SOURce MBEacon COMid STATe ON OFF The command activates or deactivates the Comld signal Example SOUR MBI E COM STAT ON SOURce MBEacon COMid FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz The command sets the frequency of the Comld signal Example SOUR MBI E COM FREQ 1020 SOURce MBEacon COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The command sets the AM modulation depth of the Comld signal Example SOUR MBI 1038 6002 02 E COM D EPT 5PCT 3 80 RST value is 400 Hz RST value is 95 PCT RST value is OFF RST value is 1020 Hz RST value is 5 PCT E 13 SME SOURce PHASe 3 6 11 12 SOURce PHASe Subsystem Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce PHASe ADJust 360 deg to 360 deg rad No query REFerence SOURce PHASe ADJust 360 deg to 360 deg The command indicates the phase between output signal and reference oscillator signal This setting is only accepted using SOURce PHASe REFerence cf below An indication in RADian is possible Example SOUR PHAS ADJ 2DEG SOUR PHAS ADJ 0 1RAD RST value is 0 0 DEG SOURce PHASe REFerence The command accepts the phase set using SOURce PHASe ADJust as new reference phase The command has no RST value Example SOUR PHAS REF 1038 6002 02 3 81 E 13 SOURce PM SME 3 6 11 13
108. DEV1 generators Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Inform controller about old address CALL IBWRT generators SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 20 Set instrument to new address CALL IBPAD generator 20 Inform controller about new address 3 3 1 2 Indications during Remote Control The state of the remote control is evident by the words IEC REMOTE or LOCAL on the STATUS page The STATUS page is always displayed in the REMOTE state LOCKED indicates that the key LOCAL is disabled i e switchover to manual operation is only possible via IEC IEEE bus With UNLOCKED indicated switchover to manual control is possible via the key LOCAL see also section 3 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 Querying the Error Status CALL IBWRT generator SYST SERR CALL IBRD generator error The string error contains the list of errors existing at the time of the query This list corresponds to the list displayed when the ERROR key is pressed in manual operation see Section 2 14 It differs from the SCPI error list in that error entries are not deleted by the query They are deleted only when the corresponding errors don t exist any more e g after a setting has been changed 3 3 1 4 Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus Manually Pressthe LOCAL key Notes Before switchover command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control i
109. DM SOUR SOUR REFL25 TACT MESS RST value is MESS STARt ONCE Example 3 98 E 13 SME SOURce ROSCillator 3 6 11 19 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the external and internal reference oscillator Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 1 to 16 MHz Hz INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF VALue 0 to 4095 SOURce INTernal EXTernal SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal The commands to set the external reference oscillator are under this node SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 1 to 16 MHz The command informs the instrument about at which frequency the external reference oscillator oscillates Example SOUR ROSC FREQ 5MHz RST value is 10 MHz SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust The commands for frequency correction fine adjustment of the frequency are under this node SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF The command switches the fine adjustment of the frequency on or off Example SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 0 to 4095 The command indicates the frequency correction value tuning value For a detailed definition cf Chapter 2 Section Reference Frequency Internal External Example SOUR ROSC INT ADJ VAL 2048 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects the reference sourc
110. ERM MESS CAT NUM RST value is TONE SOURce ERMes MESSage ALPHanumeric The commands to specify the contents of the alphanumeric message are under this node These commands are only effective if ERMes MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric is selected SOURce ERMes MESSage ALPHanumeric SELect ALPHA LONG USER1 USER2 USERS The command selects the alphanumeric message The following is available FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD to complete ERMES character set LONG Message completely filling a batcht USER1to3 Three messages which can be edited freely using command ALPHanumeric DATA Example SOUR ERM MESS ALPH SEL FOX RST value is USER3 SOURce ERMes MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA String The command permits the input of an arbitrary character string into one of the alphanumeric messages USER1 to This message must be selected before using ALPHanumeric SELect RST value is i e empty message Example SOUR ERM MESS ALPH DATA Hello SOURce ERMes MESSage NUMeric string The command specifies which character string the numeric message consists of The SME permits maximally 16 digits In addition to the 10 digits to 9 the signs forward slash upper case letter U hyphen period percent and blank can be used This command is only effective if CATegory NUMeric has been selected Example SOUR ER
111. Example SOUR STER ARI TYPE BK SOURce STEReo ARI BK The commands to specify the characteristics of the BK signal are under this node SOURce STEReo ARI BK CODE A B C D E F The command specifies the area code Traffic area code A 23 7500 Hz Traffic area code B 28 2738 Hz Traffic area code C 34 9265 Hz Traffic area code D 39 5833 Hz Traffic area code E 45 6731 Hz Traffic area code F 53 9773 Hz RST value is A Example SOUR STER ARI BK A moO gt 1038 6002 02 3 102 E 13 SME 3 6 11 21 SOURce SWEep Subsystem SOURce SWEep This subsystem contains the commands to check the RF sweep i e sweeps of the RF generators Sweeps are triggered principle The i SOURce FREQuency MODE frequency sweep activated by command SWEep the level sweep by command SOURce POWer MODE SWEep Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s MODE AUTO MANual STEP POINts Number SPACing LINear LOGarithmic STEP LINear 0 to 1 GHz LOGarithmic 0 01 to 50 PCT POWer DWELI 10msto5s MODE AUTO MANual STEP POINts Number STEP LOGarithmic to 10 dB dB SOURce SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG The command sets the blank time Blank TIMe of the sweep The setting is valid for all sweeps i e also for LF sweeps NORMal Blank time as short as possible LONG Blank time long enough to permit an XY recorder to retu
112. FSK BRATe 0 05 to 1900 kb s with FILTer OFF not SCPI 3 47 0 05 to 90 kb s with FILTer switched on SOURce DM FSK DEViation 0 to 400 kHz not SCPI 3 47 SOURce DM FSK FILTer GAUSs 2 73 BESSel 1 22 not SCPI 3 47 BESSel 2 44 OFF SOURce DM FSK POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 47 SOURce DM FSK4 STANdard ERMes APCO MODacom FLEX3200 not SCPI 3 47 FLEX6400 SOURce DM FSK4 BRATe 1 to 24 3 kb s 27 0 to 48 6 kb s not SCPI 3 48 SOURce DM FSK4 CODing ERMes APCO MODacom FLEX not SCPI 3 48 SOURce DM FSK4 DE Viation 0 01 to 400 kHz not SCPI 3 48 SOURce DM FSK4 FILTer BESSel 1 22 1 25 2 44 COS SCOS not SCPI 3 48 0 2 SOURce DM FSK4 POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 48 SOURce DM FFSK STANdard POCSag not SCPI 3 48 SOURce DM FFSK BRATe 0 05 to 90 kb s not SCPI 3 48 SOURce DM FFSK DEViation 1 5 kHz 2 0 kHz 8 0 kHz 3 5 kHz not SCPI 3 48 4 0 kHz 4 5 kHz SOURce ERMes CHANnel 0 to 15 not SCPI 3 50 SOURce ERMes ERRor BATCh A to P A to P not SCPI 3 50 SOURce ERMes ERRor MASK 0 to 1073741823 not SCPI 3 50 SOURce ERMes ERRor WORD 0 to 153 0 to 189 for long batch not SCPI 3 50 SOURce ERMes MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA String not SCPI 3 51 SOURce ERMes MESSage ALPHanumeric SELect 2FOX ALPHA USER1 to 4 3 51 1038 6002 02 8C 5 E 12 List of Commands SME Command Parameter SCPI P
113. Fi OPERATOR CODE LIST PAGING AREA MEM SEQ UTILITIES EXT TRAFFIC INDICATOR HELP BORDER AREA INDICATOR FREQ SUBSET INDICATOR DAY OF MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG ALWAYS EXECUTE SINGLE CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT INITIAL ADDRESS 0 iM CATEGORY TONE NUMERIC ALPHANUM TONE NUMBER 0 NUMERIC MESSAGE 0123456789 ALPHANUM MESSAGE CURRENT USER3 EDIT MESSAGE Sere ERRORS M ERROR BIT MASK 0 POSITION OF ERRONEOUS BATCH POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0 MESSAGE SEQUENCE BATCH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP MSG XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX f l Fig 2 48 DIGITAL MOD ERMES preset setting fitted with option SME B11 DM coder and option SM B12 memory extension 1038 6002 02 2 102 E 13 SME Digital Modulation STATE CHANNEL RECALCULATE 3 NETWORK INFORMATION ZONE COUNTRY CODE 1038 6002 02 ON Switching on ERMES The RF frequency is set to the value determined by the selection of CHANNEL The status line indicates the word ERMES the batch the number of subsequence and the type of data sent MSG indicates message data indicates fill data With every change from STATE OFF to STATE ON the data for the memory extension are recalculated and written into list XMEM Every
114. Functional Test eere iia i 1 3 1 3 4 Fitting the Ops ias 1 4 13 1 iOpening the Casing it rot roa irte chen en ented 1 4 1 9 2 Overview of the Slots scindere dat ierit e ees 1 5 1 3 8 Option SM B1 Reference Oscillator 1 5 1 3 4 Option SM B2 LF nennen nnne nens 1 6 1 3 5 Options SM B3 SM B8 and SM B9 Pulse Modulator 1 5 3 and 6 GHz 1 7 1 3 6 Option SM B4 Pulse 1 7 1 3 7 Option SM B5 FM PM Modulator essen 1 7 1 3 8 Option SM B6 Multifunction 1 9 1 3 9 Option SME B11 DM GOQbt riter Pin i PL ee EE ENDO 1 9 1 3 10 Option SME B12 DM Memory Extension ssssssseeeeee enne 1 11 1 3 11 Option SME B19 Rear Panel Connections for RF and LF 1 11 1 3 12 Options SME B41 FLEX Protocol and SME B42 POCSAG 1 11 1 3 13 Cabling of the 50 MHz Reference REF50 sees 1 12 1 4 Mounting into a 19 Rack esses esent rante nnn nnne nnn inneren 1 12 2 m 2 1 2 1 Explanation of Front and Rear Panel sees nnns 2 1 2 1 1 Elements of the Front Panel
115. Generator For internal pulse modulation the instrument can be equipped with a pulse generator option SM B4 For a more detailed description cf Section 2 6 2 5 1 Pulse Generator A PRBS generator with selectable sequence lengths and a data generator are available for the digital modulations cf Section 2 6 3 Digital Modulation External Modulation Sources The appropriate input sockets to the different modulations in the case of external supply can be taken from table 2 1 DM digital modulation stands for GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK FFSK and 4FSK External AM FM and PM can be AC or DC coupled Table 2 1 Input sockets for the different types of modulation Inputs PULSE DATA CLOCK Modulation EXT1 AM FM1 FM2 PM1 PM2 PULSE DM EXT2 BURST X gt lt X Only with option 1038 6002 02 2 50 E 13 SME Modulation Sources The external modulation signal must show a voltage of V 1 V Vas 0 707 V in order to maintain the modulation depth or deviation indicated Deviations of more than 3 are signaled in the status line by means of the following messages cf table 2 2 Table 2 2 Status messages in the case of a deviation from the rated value at the external modulation input Message Deviation EXT1 HIGH Voltage at EXT1 too high EXT1 LOW Voltage at EXT1 too low EXT2 HIGH Voltage at EXT2 too high EXT2 LOW Voltage at EXT2 too low EXT HI HI Volta
116. IEC bus command SOUR MBE STAT ON MARKER FREQ Switching on and off the marker beacon signal IEC bus command SOUR MBE FREQ 400 MARKER DEPTH Input value of the modulation depth of the marker beacon signals IEC bus command SOUR MBE DEPT 95PCT COM ID STATE Switching on and off an additional communication identification signal COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR MBE COM ON COM ID FREQUENCY Input value of the frequency of the COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR MBE COM FREQ 1020 COM ID DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR MBE COM DEPT 5PCT 1038 6002 02 2 76 E 13 SME Analog Modulations CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP Selection of the variation of the carrier frequency via the rotary knob DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position DEFINED Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized marker beacon transmitter frequencies s table val in MHz Note If DEFINED is selected the current RF frequency is automatically switched over to the next marker beacon transmitter frequency when switching on the modulation 74 625 74 700 74 775 74 850 74 925 75 000 75 075 75 150 75 225 75 300 75 375 74 650 74 725 74 800 74 875 74 950 75 025 75 100 75 175 75 250 75 325 75 400 1038 6002 02 2 77 E 13 Digital Modulation 2 6 3 Digital Modulation SME The SME offers the following digital modulations op
117. INT2 EXT Note As automatic level monitoring of the external modulation signal is switched off in this operating mode there can be an overmodulation as a function of the level of the external signal without a corresponding caution message being generated In order to avoid an overmodulation the peak value of the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of the modulation depths of the remaining 115 signal components 2 75 E 13 Analog Modulations SME 2 6 2 7 4 Marker Beacon Notes The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another MKR BCN and AM MKR BCN and PM if SOURCE PM LFGEN2 MKR BCN and FM if SOURCE FM LFGEN2 In the AM FM PM and LF output menu the note MKR BCN is displayed under LFGEN2 if the MKR BNC modulation is activated Menu selection MODULATION MKR BCN 75 000 0000 z FREQUENCY MARKER BEACON STATE LEVEL ODULATION MARKER FREQ 1300 3000 Hz DIGITAL MOD MARKER DEPTH 95 0 LF OUTPUT SWEEP ID STATE OFF ON LIST ID FREQUENCY 1020 0 Hz MEM SEQ 3 ID DEPTH 5 0 UTILITIES HELP RRIER FREO KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED Fig 2 36 Menu MODULATION MKR BON preset settings fitted with option SM B6 multifunction generator MARKER BEACON STATE Switching on and off the marker beacon signal
118. Key When selecting a certain type of modulation each pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches on or off the modulation selected In the case of selection all modulations the MOD ON OFF key has the following effect e At least one modulation is active Pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches off all active modulations Which modulations were active is stored No modulation is active Pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches on the modulations which were last switched off using the MOD ON OFF key 1038 6002 02 2 52 E 13 SME Analog Modulations 2 6 2 Analog Modulation 2 6 2 1 LF Generator The SME is equipped with a fixed frequency generator as internal modulation source as a standard The generator supplies sinusoidal signals of the frequencies of 0 4 1 3 and 15 kHz In addition to the standard equipment the SME can be equipped with the following optional LF modulation sources e F generator option SM B2 Multifunction generator option SM B6 It is possible to fit two optional modulation sources unless option SM B3 pulse modulator is fitted If two options are fitted the access to the internal standard generator is eliminated The different possibilities of modulation generator fitting are visible from table 2 4 Table 2 4 Modulation generators as component parts LF Generator 1 LF Generator 2 Standard generator Standard generator Option SM B2 LF generator Standard generator Option SM B6 m
119. LIST RRENT UCOR1 LEVEL FUNCTION FILL INSERT T VIEW ODULATION INDEX FREE 70 LEN 10 F U DIGITAL MOD 005 1 05 LF OUTPUT 006 107 SWEEP 007 108 LIST 008 109 MEM SEQ 009 111 UTILITIES 010 1412 HELP 011 113 012 114 10 e CO O Q K o Qt Y gt gt Om 0 O0 ODO O O O O O Oo o o oooooooo NNRPRPRRPRPRPpO te N N N N N N N 0 9 0 00 00 Fig 2 22 Menu UCOR LEVEL EDIT side 1038 6002 02 2 48 E 13 SME RF Level 2 5 6 EMF The signal level can also be set and indicated as the voltage of EMF open circuit voltage EMF is displayed in the header field of the display after the unit of the level indication Menu selection LEVEL EMF AA E SS 100 000 0000 z FREQUENCY STATE LEVEL ODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP Fig 2 23 Menu LEVEL EMF STATE ON Voltage value of the level is the voltage of EMF OFF Voltage value of the level is voltage at 50 preset setting 2 5 7 RF OFF Key The RF output signal is switched on and off again using the RF ON OFF key This does not influence the current menu When the output signal is switched off the message RF OFF is displ
120. LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX 1 0 HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 65 Menu UTILITIES SYSTEM SECURITY STATE Selection of the SECURITY state ON Locks the suppression of the indications Can only be set via IEC bus OFF Deactivates the interlock of the indication suppression The preset state is set in the transition ON OFF and all data stored such as settings with the exception of the DM lists are deleted Can only be set via IEC bus IEC bus short command SYST SEC OFF ANNOTATION FREQ OFF All frequency indications are suppressed ON The frequency setting is displayed IEC bus short command DISP ANN FREQ ON ANNOTATION AMPLITUDE OFF All level indications are suppressed ON The level setting is displayed IEC bus short command DISP ANN AMPL ON CLEAR MEMORY Deletion of all data stored such as settings user correction and list settings stored with the exception of the DM lists For this action two commands are necessary at the IEC bus IEC bus short command SYST SEC ON SEC OFF 1038 6002 02 2 154 E 13 SME Utilities 2 11 4 Indication of the IEC Bus Language LANGUAGE Submenu UTILITIES SYSTEM LANGUAGE indicates the IEC bus language and the current SCPI version 2 11 5 Reference Frequency Internal External REF OSC In the internal reference operating mode the internal reference signal at a fre
121. LIST mode function LEARN has to be started to ensure that the new settings are transferred to the hardware Table 2 6 LIST mode Example of a list Index Frequency Level 0001 oo vs 0002 575 MHz 18 dBm 0003 235 2 7 0100 333 MHz 5 dBm Up to 10 lists can be created The total amount of possible pairs of values including all lists may maximally be 2000 l e a list may have 2000 entries at the most or less if several lists have been created Each list is identified by a separate name and selected via this name A detailed description how to process the lists can be found in Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 9 1 Operating Modes MODE The following LIST operating modes are available AUTO Run from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at the beginning If another mode was activated prior to the AUTO operating mode continuation is made from the current index IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR AUTO SINGLE Single run from the beginning to the end of the list If SINGLE is selected the run is not yet started Function EXECUTE SINGLE LIST gt to be executed which can be used to start the run is displayed below the MODE line IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR SING 1038 6002 02 2 143 E 13 LIST Mode SME STEP Step by
122. LIST operating mode of the RF generator Processing the lists is controlled by the TRIGger LIST subsystem Each list consists of a FREQuency POWer and DWELI content The list contents must all be of the same length except for contents of length 1 This is interpreted as if the content had the same length as the other contents and all values were equal to the first value After a list has been created and changed command LIST LEARn has to be entered to have the settings transferred to the hardware The LIST mode is activated by command SOURce FREQuency MODE LIST The LIST subsystem is not valid for SMEO3E economy model Note SCPI designates the individual lists as segments Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce LIST CATalog Query only DELete Name of list ALL DWELI ims to1 s 1 ms to 1 s POINts Query only FREE FREQuency 5kHz to 1 5GHz 5kHz to 1 5GHz block data 5kHz to 3 6 GHz SME03 06 POINts Query only LEARn N MODE AUTO STEP 0 query POWer 144 to 16 dBm 144 to 16 dBm block data POINts ist Query only SELect Name of list SOURce LIST CATalog The command requests a list of the lists available separated by commas The command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR LIST CAT Answer MYLIST LIST1 LIST2 SOURce LIST DELete Name of list The command deletes the list indicated This list must not be selected RST has no influe
123. LOC signal are under this node SOURce ILS LOCalizer COMid STATe ON OFF The command activates or deactivates the Comld signal RST value is OFF Example SOUR ILS LOC COM STAT ON SOURce ILS LOCalizer COMid FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz The command sets the frequency of the Comld signal RST value is 1020 Hz Example SOUR ILS LOC COM FREQ 1020 SOURce ILS LOCalizer COMid DEPTh 0 100 PCT The command sets the AM modulation depth of the Comld signal Example SOUR ILS LOC COM DEPT 10PCT RST value is 10 PCT 1038 6002 02 3 72 E 13 SME SOUR ce ILS SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation The commands to set the modulation depth difference between the signal of the left lobe 90 Hz and the right lobe 150 Hz are under this node SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM CURRENT 387 to 387 uA The command alternatively enters the DDM value as a current by means of the ILS indicating instrument This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS LOC DDM DEPTh Example SOUR ILS LOC DDM CURR 0 RST value is 0 SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM DEPTh 0 4 to 0 4 The command sets the difference of the modulation depth This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS LOC DDM CURRent The following is true for SOURce ILS LOC DDM DIRection RIGHt ILS LOC DDM DEPTh AM 90Hz AM 150Hz 10096 and for SOURce ILS LOC DDM DIRection LEFT ILS LOC DDM DEPTh AM 150Hz AM 90Hz 10096 Example SOUR ILS LOC
124. MOD 1600 FSK2 RST value is 1600 FSK2 SOURce REFLex25 DEViation 2 0 to 10 0 kHz This command determines the frequency deviation of the modulation The deviation specifies the spacing from the carrier to the two further placed symbol in 4FSK The ReFLEX25 standard specifies 2400Hz for this value which may be varied for testing RST value is 2 4 kHz Example SOUR REFL25 DEV 5 kHz SOURce REFLex25 MESSage PADDress 16777216 to 1073741823 This command determines the address of the receiver to be called The values range from 16 777 216 to 1 073 741 823 RST value is 16777216 Example SOUR REFL25 MESS PADD 167772168 1038 6002 02 3 94 E 13 SME SOURce REFLex25 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage ALPHanumeric SELect name This command selects the alphanumeric message Valid values FOX Selection of an alphanumeric message ALPHA ABCD complete ReFLEX25 character set USER1 to 4 4 messages that can be freely varied using command REFL25 MESS ALPH DATA The parameter is not influenced by RST Example SOUR REFL25 MESS ALPH SEL FOX SOURce REFLex25 MESSage ALPHanumeric CATalog The command queries the alphanumeric messages It causes a list to be returned on which the entries are separated by commas The list contains the values FOX ALPHA USER1 USER2 USER3 USER4 This is a query it features no RST value Example SOUR REFL25 MESS ALPH CAT SOUR
125. ODULATION QPSK DEVIATION DIGITAL MOD FSK LF OUTPUT AFSK PERSONAL ADDRESS 16777216 SWEEP FFSK NUMERIC MESSAGE LIST ERMES ALPHANUM MESSAGE CURRENT USER4 MEM SEQ FLEX EDIT MESSAGE UTILITIES ReFLEX25 M RESPONSE REQUIRED HELP SUBZONE SERVICE PROVIDER FRAME CONTENTS AUTO ADAPTATION OFF ON RECALCULATE gt MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG ALWAYS EXECUTE SINGLE gt CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT FORWARD CHANNEL BASE FREQUENCY 929 MHz ASSIGNMENT NUMBER 1 REVERSE CHANNEL BASE FREQUENCY 896 MHz ASSIGNMENT NUMBER 2 SPEED 800 1600 6400 9600 FREQUENCY SPACING 6250 Hz if SCI BASE FRAME 0 SCI COLLAPSE MASK 7 i E BIT ERRORS ERROR BIT MASK 0 POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0 Fig 2 50 Menu DIGITAL MOD ReFLEX fitted with option SME B43 ReFlex option SME B1 1 DM coder and option SM B12 memory extension 1038 6002 02 2 119 E 13 SME Digital Modulation STATE MODULATION DEVIATION MESSAGE PERSONAL ADDRESS NUMERIC MESSAGE 1038 6002 02 ON Switches on ReFLEX25 The status line displays the cycle and frame number and the type of output data as well as the word RFLX see table under FRAME CONTENTS A switchover fr
126. PRESET MODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN RECALL DEFAULT p DIGITAL MOD PROTECT REF OSC OVERWRITE DEFAULT p gt LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK SWEEP DIAG LEVEL LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX I O HELP BEEPER INSTALL AMPLITUDE TRIM Fig 2 72 Menu UTILITIES CALIB QPSK CALIBRATION DATA Input value of the delay compensation IEC bus short command CAL QPSK 2 60us RECALL DEFAULT 3 Sets the DEFAULT value factory setting IEC bus short command CAL QPSK DEF OVERWRITE DEFAULT gt Overwrites the DEFAULT value in the Flash EPROM with the current DELAY value The function is protected by PASSWORD LEVEL 2 IEC bus short command CAL QPSK STOR AMPLITUDE TRIM Switches on off the service function for the adjustment of the amplitude content with QPSK Note the service function AMPLITUDE TRIM is switched on this is indicated by displaying QPSK AMPLITUDE TRIM in the status line An activated AM is deactivated by switching on AMPLITUDE TRIM 1038 6002 02 2 161 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 9 Indications of Module Variants DIAG CONFIG For service purposes the modules installed can be indicated with their variants and states of modification Submenu DIAG CONFIG offers access to the module indication IEC bus short command DIAG INFO MOD Menu selection UTILITIES DIAG CONFIG AES 100 000 000 0
127. PSK TYPE PI4Dqpsk PSK BRATe 42 kb s PSK CODing NADC PSK FILTer SCOS 0 5 PSK POLarity NORM O10 IO IO IO 1038 6002 02 3 45 E 13 SOURce DM SOURce DM QPSK STANdard DM QPSK STANdard TETRa DM QPSK TYPE PI4Dqpsk DM QPSK BRATe 36 kb s DM QPSK CODing NADC DM QPSK FILTer SCOS 0 35 DM QPSK POLarity NORM DM QPSK STANdard TFTS DM QPSK TYPE 4 DM QPSK BRATe 44 2 kb s DM QPSK CODing TFTS DM QPSK FILTer SCOS 0 4 DM QPSK POLarity NORM DM QPSK STANdard MSAT DM QPSK TYPE QPS DM QPSK BRATe 6 75 kb s DM QPSK CODing MSAT DM QPSK FILTer SCOS 0 6 DM QPSK POLarity NORM DM QPSK STANdard INMarsat DM QPSK TYPE OQPSk DM QPSK BRATe 8 kb s DM QPSK CODing INMarsat DM QPSK FILTer SCOS 0 6 DM QPSK POLarity NORM Example SOUR DM OQPSK STAN PDC SOURce DM QPSK TYPE QPSK OQPSk Pl4Qpsk Pl4Dapsk The command specifies the used QPSK modulation type in detail Example SOUR DM QPSK TYPE QPSK RST value is Pl4Dqpsk SOURce DM QPSK BRATe 1 to 24 3 kb s and 27 0 to 48 6 kb s The command indicates the bit rate for the modulation in bits per second The resolution is 100 b s RST value is 48 6 kb s Example SOUR DM QPSK BRAT 42kb s SOURce DM QPSK CODing NADC PDC TETRa MSAT INMarsat The command specifies the coding between the binary data and the generated signal difference coding Example SOUR DM
128. SINGLE and EXT STEP operating modes The polarity of the active trigger edge can be set in the UTILITIES AUX I O EXT TRIG SLOPE menu Menu MEM SEQ with the two menu pages OPERATION and EDIT offers access to the memory sequence operating mode Menu selection MEM SEQ 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY MODE LEVEL DIGITAL MOD SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ FUNCTION ODULATION RESET SEQUENCE P LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX UTILITIES SELECT LIST CURRENT MSEQ1 HELP DELETE LIST OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT SINGLE EXT STEP FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VLEW Fig 2 61 Menu MEM SEQ OPERATION page preset setting MODE EXECUTE SINGLE SEQUENCE RESET SEQUENCE 3 CURRENT INDEX SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 Selection of the operating mode setting the operating mode regards various command systems at the IEC bus cf above Starts the single run of a memory sequence This menu option is only visible if MODE SINGLE is selected IEC bus short command TRIG MSEQ Wrap to the beginning of the list IEC bus short command ABOR MSEQ Indication of the current list index Setting value of the current list index in the MODE STEP operating mode Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus short command SYST MSEQ SEL MSEQ1 Deletion
129. SOURce ILS GS GSLope ULOBe The commands to configure the signal of the upper ILS GS antenna lobe Upper LOBe are under this node SOURce ILS GS GSLope ULOBe FREQuency 60 to 120 Hz The command sets the frequency Normally it is 90 Hz This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS GS LLOBe FREQuency As the ratio of ULOBe FREQuency LLOBe FREQuency must always be 3 5 LLOBe FREQuency is readjusted accordingly Example SOUR ILS GS ULOB FREQ 90 RST value is 90 Hz SOURce ILS GS GSLOpe PHASe 0 to 120 deg The command sets the phase between the modulation signals of the upper and the lower antenna lobe The zero crossing of the signal of the lower lobe serves as a reference The angle is related to the period of the signal of the lower antenna lobe RST value is 0 Example SOUR ILS GS PHAS Odeg SOURce ILS GS GSLope SODepth 0 to 100 PCT The command indicates the sum of the modulation depths of the signals of the lower lobe 90 Hz and the upper lobe 150 Hz RST value is 80PCT Example SOUR ILS GS SOB 80PCT SOURCce ILS GS GSLOpe PRESet This command is equivalent to the following GS defaultcommand sequence LS STAT ON IS TYPE GS ILS SOUR INT2 ILS GS MODE NORM LS GS COM OFF ILS GS COM FREQ 1020Hz ILS GS COM DEPT 10PCT ILS GS DDM 0 0 LS GS DDM DIR UP ILS GS SOD 80PCT ILS GS ULOB 90Hz L P H HHHHHHHHHHH 16 GS LLOB 150Hz ILS GS PHAS 0 The value
130. SOURce PM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the phase modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal The SME can be equipped with two independent phase modulators PM1 and PM option SM B5 They are differentiated by a suffix after PM SOURce PM1 SOURce PM2 Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce PM1 2 Option SM B5 DEViation 360 deg to 360 deg rad EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC INTernal FREQuency 400 kHz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or Hz 0 1Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1Hz to 1 MHz Option SM B2 or B6 SOURce INT EXT1 EXT2 STATe ONOFF SOURce PM1 2 DEViation 360 to 360 deg The command sets the modulation depth in Radian DEGree are accepted RST value is 1 rad Example SOUR PM DEV 20DEGR SOURce PM1 2 EXTernal1 2 The commands to check the external input of the PM modulators are under this node The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM FM and PM are independent of each other The settings are always related to the socket determined by the suffix after EXTernal The suffix after PM is ignored then With the following commands e g the settings are both related to socket EXT2 SOUR PM1 EXT2 COUP AC S0UR PM2 EXT2 COUP AC A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1 SOURce PM1 2 EXTernal1 2 COUPling DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external PM input AC The d c voltage content is separate
131. SROFOUND S 0 FOR I userN TO userM Poll all bus users ON ERROR GOTO nouser No user existing CALL IBRSP 1 STB Serial poll read status byte F STB gt 0 THE This instrument has bits set in the STB SROFOUNDS 1 F STB AND 16 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Outputqueue STB AND 4 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Failure F STB AND 8 0 THEN GOSUB Questionablestatus F STB AND 128 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Operationstatus F STB AND 32 0 THEN GOSUB Esrread END IF nouser NEXT I LOOP UNTIL SROFOUND 0 ON ERROR GOTO error handling ON PEN GOSUB Srq RETURN Enable SRQ routine again of SRO routine 1038 6002 02 9D 4 11 SME Reading out the status event registers the output buffer subroutines REM Subroutines for the individual STB Outputqueue Message SPACES 100 CALL IBRD generator Message PRINT Message in output buffer Messages RETURN Failure ERRORS SPACES 100 CALL IBWRT generator SYSTEM ERROR CALL IBRD generator ERRORS PRINT Error text ERRORS RETURN Questionablestatus Ques SPACES 20 CALL IBWRT generator CALL IBRD generator STATus QUEStionable EVENt Ques Programming Examples and the error event queue is effected in bits Reading the output buffer space for response Read error queue space for error variable Read questionable status register Preallocate blanks to text variable
132. Significant Bit Start bit Each data byte begins with a start bit The falling edge of the start bit indicates the beginning of the data byte Parity bit A parity bit is not used Stop bit The transmission of a data byte is terminated by a stop bit Example Transmission of character A 41 hex in the 8 bit ASCII code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Bit 01 Start bit Bit 02 09 Data bits Bit 10 Stop bit Bitduration 1 baud rate Interface functions For interface control some control characters defined from 0 to 20 hex of the ASCII code can be transmitted via the interface see Table 4 Table A 4 Interface functions RS 232 C Control character Interface function Ctrl Q gt 11 hex Enables character output XON lt Ctrl S gt 13 hex Inhibits character output XOFF Break at least 1 character only log 0 Reset instrument ODhex OAhex Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt Switchover between local remote 1038 6002 02 6A 5 E 12 RS 232 C Interface SME Handshake Software handshake The software handshake with the XON XOFF protocol controls data transmission If the receiver wishes to inhibit data entry it sends XOFF to the transmitter The transmitter then interrupts the data output until it receives a XON The same function is provided at the transmitter side controller Note Software handshake is not suitable for transmission of binary data Use the hardware handshake Hardw
133. TD standard All essential parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable FLEX settings can be accessed via the DIGITAL MOD FLEX menu SSS EE 100 000 000 0 30 0 MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG ALWAYS EXECUTE SINGLE gt Y CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT REQUENCY OFF ON EVEL MODULATIO 1600 2FSK ODULATION DEVIATION IGITAL MOD F OUTPUT SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE WEEP FRAME OFFSET IST ROAMING NID SSID ALL EM SEQ SSID TILITIES LOCAL ID 0 ELP COVERAGE ZONE 0 COUNTRY CODE SSID TMF 15 NID NETWORK ADDRESS 2058240 MULTIPLIER 1 SERVICE AREA 0 NID TMF 15 JM DATE 1994 01 01 TIME 12 00 IB MESSAGE CAPCODE 0000001 AUTO ADJUST NONE PHASE FRAME BOTH PHASE CATEGORY i REPEATS 0 TONE NUMBER 0 NUMERIC SNUMERIC MESSAGE 0123456789 M ALPHANUM MESSAGE CURRENT USER3 EDIT MESSAGE l SECURE MESSAGE CURRENT USER3 ASCII BIN USER RESERVED Ml BINARY MESSAGE CURRENT USER1 EDIT MESSAGE DISPLAY DIRECTION LEFT RIGHT BLOCKING LENGTH 1 1 MESSAGE NUMBERING OFF ON MAIL DROP FLAG OFF ON 2 2 2 ERRORS ERROR
134. The SME generates a complete cycle which is repeated continuously Repetitions which are contained in the subsequent cycle are already transmitted in the current cycle i e they might be transmitted prior to transmitting the original IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS REP 0 3 Input value of the tone which is transmitted during category TONE 8 tones are available IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS TONE 0 Opens a window to enter the character string for a numeric or special numeric message SME provides a maximum of 41 characters In addition to the 10 figures 0 to 9 other characters such as square brackets right and left upper case letter U hyphen and blank space can be used IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS NUM 12 17 2 111 E 13 Digital Modulation ALPHANUM MESSAGE EDIT MESSAGE SECURE MESSAGE TYPE BINARY MESSAGE EDIT MESSAGE DISPLAY BLOCKING LENGTH MESSAGE NUMBERING 1038 6002 02 SME Opens a window to select or create an alphanumeric message The following selection can be made FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD complete FLEX character set USER1 4 Four messages that can be freely edited by command EDIT MESSAGE IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS ALPH FOX Opens a window to edit one of the alphanumeric messages USER1 to USER4 The message to be processed has to sele
135. The command selects the contents of the sync word This word distinguishes between the various types of paging services POCSAG 0x7CD215D8 also used for CITYRUF INFORUF 0x7CD21436 RST value is POCSag Example SOUR POCS MESS SWOR POCS SOURce POCSag MESSage TONE A B C D The command selects the tone which is transmitted during category TONE Four tones are available A B C D Note Only true tone only receivers can process all four possible values Numerical and alphanumerical receivers react to tone only pages only when tone number is B or C Example SOUR POCS MESS TONE B RST value is TONE SOURce POCSag MESSage NUMeric String The command determines the type of character string the numeric message may consist of SME allows a maximum of 41 characters In addition to the 10 figures 0 to 9 other characters such as square brackets right and left upper case letter U hyphen and blank space can be used Example SOUR POCS MESS NUM 12 17 RST value is 0123456789 U SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the alphanumeric messages There is one common character set for FLEX and POGSAG These commands can only be activated if POCS MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric is selected SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric SELect FOX ALPHA USER 1 USER2 USERS USER4 The command selects the alphan
136. The modulation depth of the 90 Hz signal results from the settings of parameters SUM OF DEPTH SOD and DDM according to AM 90 Hz 0 5 x SOD DDM x 100 2 68 E 13 SME DDM DDM DDM FLY SUM OF DEPTH UP FREQ 1038 6002 02 Analog Modulations 150 Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 150 Hz signal content of the ILS GS signal The modulation depth of the 150 Hz signal results from the settings of parameters SUM OF DEPTH SOD and DDM acc to AM 150 Hz 0 5 x SOD DDM x 100 IEC bus command SOUR ILS STAT ON TYPE GS MODE NORM Difference in Depth of Modulation Input value of the difference in depth of modulation between the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone of the ILS GS modulation signal The DDM value is calculated to formula parameter UP DOWN DOWN DDM AM 90 Hz AM 150 Hz 100 A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the value of the instrument current and the DDM value in dB IEC bus command SOUR ILS DDM 0 Input value of the current of the ILS indicating instrument corresponding to the DDM value A variation of the value of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB The value of the instrument current is calculated according to DDM u A DDM x 857 1 LA IEC bus command SOUR ILS DDM CURR 0 Input of the DDM value in dB A variation of the value automatically leads to a variation of
137. The most important instrument functions are automatically monitored during operation If an error is detected the message ERROR is displayed in the status line For further identification of the error press the ERROR key Thereupon a description of the error s is displayed cf Chapter 2 section Error Messages Return to the menu exited by pressing the RETURN key If required the self tests can be induced purposefully See Chapter 4 section Functional Test Further internal test points can be polled by the user and the results be read out and displayed See Chapter 2 section Voltage Indication of Test Points 1038 6002 02 1 3 E 13 SME Fitting the Options 1 3 Fitting the Options Due to its variety of options the SME offers the possibility of providing the instrument with the equipment exactly corresponding to the application Newly fitted options are automatically recognized and the relevant parameters added in the menu After every change of the instrument configuration the CMOS RAM has to be cleared as the storage data shift gt Switch off the instrument gt Switch the instrument on again with the RESET key pressed The internal calibration routines PULSE GEN YFOM ALLAMP now have to be called up again to restore the cleared calibration values These routines are accessible via menu UTILITIES CALIB see also Chapter 2 section calibration The calibration routines have to be carried out in the followin
138. The polarity and the period of the signal can be set under UTILITIES AUX I O BLANK POLARITY and BLANK TIME 2 136 E 13 SME Sweep MARKER This output becomes active when the sweep run has reached the mark The MARKER signal can be used for the brightness control of an oscilloscope Up to three marks can be set in order to mark certain positions in the sweep run The polarity of the signal can be set in menu UTILITIES AUX I O MARKER POLARITY The period of the active signal is equal to the dwell time DWELL of a step Signal examples 10 V7 X AXIS OV 5V 4 BLANK ov 5V MARKER 0v Fig Fig 2 53 Signal example sweep MODE AUTO BLANK TIME NORMAL SINGLE restarted 10 V4 X AXIS OV Fig 2 54 Signal example sweep MODE SINGLE BLANK TIME LONG 1038 6002 02 2 137 E 13 Sweep SME 2 8 6 RF Sweep Menu SWEEP FREQ offers access to settings for RF sweep Menu selection SWEEP FREQ REIS EZ START FREQ 100 000 0000 mHz STOP FREQ 500 000 0000 30 0 dem FREQUENCY 000 000 LEVEL 1 STOP FREQ 000 000 ODULATION 1 CENTER FREQ 000 000 DIGITAL MOD SPAN 000 000 LF OUTPUT CURRENT FREQ 000 000 SWEEP LIST SPACING LIN LOG MEM SEQ STEP LIN 1 000 000 0 MHz UTILITIES DWELL 15 0 ms HELP ODE OFF AUTO S
139. This command selects the bit rate of the reverse channel 800bps 1600bps 6400bps and 9600bps are available The set value is transferred to the receiver and has no further effects Example SOUR REFL25 SI RCH SPE 800 bps RST value is 800 bps SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FSPacing 0 to 102350 Hz This command specifies the frequency spacing according to the formulas for FREQ given above This parameter applies both to the forward and the reverse channel Valid values are O to 102350Hz in steps of 50Hz RST value is 6250 Hz Example SOUR REFL25 SI FSP 589 Hz SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation SClBase 0 to 127 System configuration information SCI frames are sent within each cycle of 128 frames Their positions within the cycle are calculated according to INDEX SCI BASE FRAME 25 COLLAPSE MASK tor all i until INDEX exceeds 127 REFL25 S1 SCIBase and REFL25 S1 SCICollapse are transferred to the receiver in the respective block information words RST value is 0 Example SOUR REFL25 SI SCIB 99 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation SClCollapse 0 to 7 See explanation under REFL25 SI SCIB RST value is 7 Example SOUR REFL25 SI SCIC 5 SOURce REFLex25 ERRor The SME allows for providing a 32 bit word of the transferred message with bit errors for test purposes The following parameters specify the bits to the falsified and the position of the erroneous word within a frame The bit errors are
140. and Marker Beacon can be generated 2 64 E 13 SME Analog Modulations 2 6 2 7 1 VOR Modulation Notes The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another VOR and AM VOR and PM if SOURCE PM LFGEN2 VOR and FM if SOURCE FM LFGEN2 In the AM FM PM and LF output menu the message VOR is displayed under LFGEN2 if the VOR modulation is activated Menu selection MODULATION VOR AAA H X fiot 108 000 0000 47 0 FREQUENCY A OFF NORM VAR SUBCARRIER SUBC FM LEVEL F BEARING ANGLE 0 00 deg ODULATION B DIRECTION FROM TO DIGITAL MOD P VAR REF FREQUENCY 30 0 Hz LF OUTPUT S VAR DEPTH 30 0 SWEEP VO SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY 9 960 kHz LIST 11 SUBCARRIER DEPTH 30 0 MEM SEO 1 REF DEVIATION 480 Hz UTILITIES M VOR DEFAULT SETTING p HELP COM ID STATE OFF ON COM ID FREQUENCY 1 020 kHz COM ID DEPTH 10 0 CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED I EXT AM SENS 1V 100 OFF EXT1 Fig 2 33 Menu MODULATION VOR preset setting fitted with option SM B6 multifunction generator MODE Selection of the VOR operating mode OFF VOR modulation is switched off In menus AM FM PM and LF OUTPUT the original setting is displayed under LFGEN2 the message VOR is eliminated NORM VOR
141. and 90 of the RF amplitude Fall time the time between 90 and 10 of the RF amplitude Pulse delay time the time between 50 of the input pulse amplitude and 50 of the RF amplitude Pisino NE coi eaten lt 10 ns PAT eE e lt 10 ns Pulse delay time c t E re ete lt 70 ns 1038 6002 02 5 28 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 33 GFSK Modulation Option SME B11 5 2 33 1 Spectrum Operating Mode internal Test equipment Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 D c voltage source Section 5 1 item 12 Pulse generator Section 5 1 item 17 Test setup Connect spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the SME Measurement gt Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 945 MHz Level 0 dBm in menu DIGITAL MOD GFSK SOURCE PRBS PRBS 23 bit SELECT STANDARD DECT gt Settings at the analyzer Reference level 0 dBm Span 5 MHz Center frequency 945 MHz Resolution bandwidth 30 kHz Video bandwidth 30 Hz A spectrum according to Fig 5 1 must be visible at the spectrum analyzer dBm 0 934 944 945 946 947 MHz Fig 5 1 Spectrum with GFSK 1038 6002 02 5 29 E 13 Test Procedure SME The signal level with respect to the level at a center frequency as a function of the offset frequency must be as follows Offset frequency Level 835 kHz 40 dB 3 dB 990 kHz 30 dB 2 dB i 1890 kHz 58 dB 4 dB Operating Mode External Test equipment Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2
142. as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit sends error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent on the IEC bus the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI 3 7 6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping Equally setting commands within one command line are not absolutely serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line that is to say with a separate IBWRT call In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of commands OPC OPC or WAI must be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set and has settled By a suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the respective action to occur cf table 3 3 Table 3 3 Synchronization with OPC OPC And WAI Com Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller mand OPC Setting the operation complete bit in the ESR Setting bit 0 in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Writing 1 into the output buffer Addressing the instrument as a talker
143. be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately 3 4 Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus see annex A can be divided into two groups interface messages and device messages 3 4 1 Interface Message Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus the ATN control line being active They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a controller which has the IEC bus control Interface commands can be subdivided into universal commands and addressed commands Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC bus without previous addressing addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in annex A Some control characters are defined for the control of the RS 232 interface see annex A 1038 6002 02 3 4 E 13 SME Structure and Syntax of the Messages 3 4 2 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus the ATN control line not being active ASCII code is used The device messages are largely identical for the two interfaces IEC bus and RS232 A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC bus Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device functions and req
144. board by means of 4 screws Caution The four insulating washers supplied have to be placed between the spacers on module A8 and PCB of the option Plug in connector W1 W2 and W3 Screw on cover again After fitting the module the amplitude content and the delay for the DQPSK modulation must be calibrated following the calibrations mentioned in Section 1 3 Amplitude content gt Allow the SME to warm up gt Set 836 MHz in the FREQUENCY menu gt Select PRBS in the DIGITAL MOD DQPSK SOURCE menu gt Select TRIM ON in menu UTILITIES CALIB DQPSK AMPLITUDE Select the following in menu UTILITIES DIAG TPOINT TEST POINT 704 STATE ON The diagnostic point of the ALC control voltage can be switched on gt Adjust the voltage at this test point to O 4 mV using potentiometer R297 on module A7 digital synthesis Adjustment element R297 LEVEL can be accessed from the bottom of the instrument without dismantling the module 1038 6002 02 1 9 E 13 SME Delay compensation 1038 6002 02 Fitting the Options gt Allow the SME to warm up gt Connect the spectrum analyzer see Section 5 item 2 to the RF output of the SME gt SME settings Menu FREQUENCY 836 MHz Menu LEVEL 0 dBm Menu DIGITAL MOD DQPSK data source PRBS gt Settings at the spectrum analyzer Center frequency 836 MHz Span 300 kHz Resolution bandwidth 3 kHz Video bandwidth 100 Hz gt Check spectrum Th
145. carrier VOR i P 2 66 3 107 carrier frequency deviation 5 25 coupling eeeeeee 2 56 3 63 2 56 3 63 deviation 2 57 deviation setting 5 22 distortion aclor ee i ie eii haa eee 5 24 frequency 2 56 3 64 modulator a A ci Odd AR ida 1 7 2 56 preemphasis 2 57 8 64 5 24 residtial AM o eee 5 24 stereo modulation sessi 5 25 Format data IEC DUS sse 3 25 Frequency ACCU ACY oon oi essaie t ies 1 2 IAM aat atas eee o tas 2 55 3 31 antenna lobe ILS GS side eo a oes 2 69 3 71 3 73 audio signal oreet 2 63 3 101 COM ID signal ILS GS aida 2 68 3 70 win 2 74 3 72 2 76 3 80 VOR DEEE A n DE 2 66 3 108 2 56 3 64 2 66 3 107 indicalion ett 2 18 3 54 indication suppressed sse 2 154 EF generator iliis 2 133 3 110 EPS WOOD iu eir eite Der 2 141 3 110 list us 2 143 3 76 A RE e HT 2 41 3 66 PM 3i obe do edis i PER eR 2 58 3 83 pulse modulation esses 2 60 3 91 REF signal VOR 2 66 3 107 RF output signal esee 2 41 3 65 RF sweep 2 138 3 66 selling
146. command sets the frequency of the VAR signal As VAR and reference signal must always have the same frequency this setting is also valid for the reference signal Example SOUR VOR VAR FREQ 30 RST value is 30 Hz SOURce VOR SUBCarrier DEPTh O to 100 PCT The command sets the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier RST value is 30PCT Example SOUR VOR SUBC DEPT 30PCT SOURce VOR SUBCarrier FREQuency 5 to 15 kHz The command sets the frequency of the FM carrier RST value is 9960 Hz Example SOUR VOR SUBC FREQ 9960 1038 6002 02 3 107 E 13 SOURce VOR SME SOURce VOR REFerence DEViation 0 to 960 Hz The command sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier Example SOUR VOR REF DEV 480 RST value is 480 Hz SOURce VOR PRESet The command sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier VOR MODE NORM VOR SOUR INT2 VOR Odeg VOR DIRection FROM VOR VAR FREQ 30Hz VOR VAR 30PCT VOR SUBC 9960Hz VOR SUBC DEPTh 30PCT VOR REF DEV 480Hz VOR COM OFF VOR COM FREQ 1020Hz VOR COM DEPTh 10PCT The values set correspond to the state after SYSTEM PRESET or RST The command neither has a query form nor an RST value Example SOUR VOR PRES SOURce VOR COMid STATe ON OFF The command activates or deactivates the Comld signal RST value is OFF Example SOUR VOR COM STAT ON SOURce VOR COMid FREQuency
147. corresponding caution message being generated In order to avoid an overmodulation the peak value of the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of the modulation depths of the remaining ILS signal components 2 71 Analog Modulations SME 2 6 2 7 3 ILS Localizer Modulation ILS LOC Notes The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another ILS LOC and AM ILS LOC and PM if SOURCE PM LFGEN2 ILS LOC and FM if SOURCE FM LFGEN2 Inthe AM FM PM and LF output menu the note ILS LOC is displayed under LFGEN2 if the ILS LOC modulation is activated With setting CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DEFINED a change to modulation ILS GS automatically causes the RF frequency to be adapted to the glide slope value which is coupled to the localizer setting Menu selection MODULATION ILS LOC i i 108 100 000 0 z 47 0 FREQUENCY A MODE OFF NORM 90Hz 150Hz LEVEL F DDM 0 000 0 MODULATION DDM 0 000 pA DIGITAL MOD PULSE DDM 0 0 LF OUTPUT STEREO FLY LEFT RIGHT SWEEP VOR SUM OF DEPTH 40 0 LIST ILS GS FREQUENCY 90 0 Hz MEM SEQ ILS LOC LEFT FREQUENCY 150 0 Hz UTILITIES MKR BCN LEFT RIGHT PHASE 0 0 deg HELP ILS DEFAULT SET
148. counter and attenuator circuits Menu selection UTILITIES DIAG PARAM A gt 100 000 000 0 z 30 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONFIG SERIAL XX DOE LEVEL REF OSC TPOINT SOFTWARE VERSION 1 03 MODULATION PHASE PARAM SOFTWARE DATE FEB 04 1993 DIGITAL MOD PROTECT POWER ON COUNT 173 LF OUTPUT CALIB OPERATION TIME 300 SWEEP ATTEN COUNT 40dB 320 LIST TEST ATTEN COUNT 5dB 456 MEM SEQ MOD KEY ATTEN COUNT 20dB 523 AUX I O ATTEN COUNT 20dB 250 HELP BEEPER ATTEN COUNT 10dB 466 INSTALL ATTEN COUNT 40dB 400 Fig 2 75 UTILITIES DIAG PARAM For IEC bus commands cf Chapter 3 Section DIAGnostic System 2 11 12 Test TEST cf Chapter 4 Section Functional Test 1038 6002 02 2 164 E 13 SME Utilities 2 11 13 Assigning Modulations to the MOD ON OFF Key MOD KEY The modulations can be switched on off in the individual modulation menus and parallely by means of the MOD ON OFF key For which modulations the MOD ON OFF key is effective can be defined in the UTILITIES MOD KEY menu The key can either be effective for all modulations or for a selected one Function of the MOD ON OFF key if effective for a type of modulation gt Every pressing a key alters the state ON or OFF of the selected modulation Function of the MOD ON OFF key if effective for all types of modulation ALL gt If at least one modulation is switched on pressing
149. cursor then marks FUNCTION The list entry in the example for MEMORY with index AT n is calculated as follows from the information AT RANGE starting value MEMORY and WITH INCREMENT MEMORY AT n starting value MEMORY Increment O lt n lt RANGE 1 Selection FUNCTION INSERT 100 000 000 0 sver 30 0 ENCY SELECT LIST 10 RANGE 2 FUNCTION LATION INDEX FREE 2041 LEN 2055 MEMORY ITAL MOD 0001 WITH INCREMENT LF OUTPUT 0002 DWELL SWEEP 0003 WITH INCREMENT LIST 0004 MEM SE 0005 0006 HELP 0007 0008 EXECUTE b Fig 2 12 Edit function INSERT Input window INSERT AT Input of the starting index and the number of the elements to be inserted AT Starting index before which the insert operation is to be effective RANGE Number of the elements to be inserted MEMORY Input of the starting value for MEMORY DWELL Input of the starting value for DWELL WITH INCREMENT Input of the increment between two successive values for MEMORY or DWELL If 0 is indicated as increment constant values are achieved to be inserted RANGE times Note In the case of some types of lists e g digital modulation data indicating an increment is eliminated since there are binary data In these cases all lines WITH INCREMENT are eliminated EXECUTE gt Starts the inserting se
150. data not allowed The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position 203 Command protected The desired command could not be executed as it was protected with a password Use command SYSTem PROTect OFF password to enable the command Example The command CALibrate PULSe MEASure is protected with a password 211 Trigger ignored The trigger GET TRG or trigger signal was ignored due to device timing considerations 221 Settings conflict There is a settings conflict between two parameters Example FM1 and PM1 cannot be switched on at the same time 222 Data out of range The parameter value is out of the range permitted by the instrument Example Command RCL only permits entries in the range of 0 to 50 223 Too much data The command contains too many data Example The instrument does not have sufficient storage space 224 Illegal parameter value The parameter value is invalid Example An invalid text parameter is indicated TRIGger SWEep SOURce TASTe 225 Out of memory The storage space available in the instrument is exhausted Example An attempt is made to create more than 10 Memory Sequence lists 226 Lists not of same length The parts of a list have different lengths This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has been transmitted via IEC bus All parts of the list have to be transmitted always before it is executed Example The POWer list content is longer than the FREQuency
151. data output to useful data output for the duration of a subsequence 12 s The filler data are then output again STARt Digital modulation is started by a trigger event Useful data are then continuously output according to the settings This setting is suitable for example for a synchronous start of several units ONCE The output of the message subsequence is only started by a valid trigger event After recognition of this signal exactly one message subsequence length 12 seconds is output After that the SME waits for its trigger pulse again defined under TRIG DM SOUR Example SOUR ERM TACT MESS RST value is MESSage 1038 6002 02 3 54 E 13 SME 3 6 11 5 SOURce FLEX Subsystem SOURce FLEX This subsystem contains the commands for setting the FLEX signal Like ERMES FLEX is a radiocommunication service that makes for convenient paging When equipped with the SME B41 FLEX SME B11 DM coder and SME B12 DM memory extension options the SME generates call signals complying to the FLEX standard All essential parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable Switchover between the output of useful or filler signals is by means of the TRIGger DM subsystem Command Parameter Defaul Remark t Unit SOURce FLEX Options SME B11 STATe ON OFF SME B12 SME B41 AUTO ON OFF CYCLe to 14 DEViation 2 0 to 10 0 kHz Hz ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 WORD 0 to 87 FCONtent X O A s
152. electricistas autorizados por sobrecarga el ctrica 2 utilizar solamente en R amp S Si se reponen partes con importancia estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m para los aspectos de seguridad por ejemplo sobre el nivel del mar el enchufe los transformadores o los A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos hoja de datos se aplicar una tolerancia de por partes originales Despues de cada 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 recambio de partes elementales para la sobre la frecuencia nominal seguridad deber ser efectuado un control de 1171 0000 42 02 00 p gina 2 Informaciones de seguridad seguridad control a primera vista control de conductor protector medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de medici n de la corriente conductora control de funcionamiento Como en todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede ser excluido en general de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos que puedan generar alergias los llamados elementos alerg nicos por ejemplo el n quel Si se producieran en el trato con productos R amp S reacciones al rgicas como por ejemplo urticaria estornudos frecuentes irritaci n de la conjuntiva o dificultades al respirar se deber consultar inmediatamente a un m dico para averigurar los motivos de estas reacciones Si productos elementos de construcci n son tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de forma mec nica o t rmica
153. factor 5 2 18 with AM 3096 Senin 1 96 with AM 8096 EET LCS 2 96 19 Residual PhiM with AM 5 2 19 RF lt 3 GHz ez Sates bate 0 1 rad RF gt 3 GHz 1 0 20 Level monitoring EXT2 5 2 20 lower limit 0 97 nete 0 99 V upper limit TOT uu 1 03 V 1038 6002 02 5 45 E 13 Performance Test Measurem Actual Max acc to Section Item Characteristic SME Unit 21 FM deviation setting with 300 HZ BTA II OIE IE 289 fJ with 10kHz 968 with 30kHz 2908 wihio0kHz 9698 J with 250kHz J 2425 FM frequency response EXT1 10Hzto100kHz lo eese EXT2 10Hzto100kHz 2 2 lo eee EXT1 10Hzto2MHz J rs zeeeHHeesee EXT2 10 Hz to 2 MHz J s zeeHeeee 23 FM distortion factor 5 2 23 EE 0 5 24 FM preemphasis 5 2 24 50 us E eem 5 96 75 ys m 0 deni 5 25 Residual AM with 5 2 25 0 1 26 Frequency deviation with FM 5 2 26 Deviation 0 Hz 50 Hz Deviation 200 kHz _ 2050 Hz 27 FM stereo modulation 5 2 27 Distortion factor b messes 0 1 External voltage suppression 76 Noise voltage suppression ZEL Channel separation 50 sateen dB 28 PhiM deviation string 5 2 28 with 30 mrad 19 41 mrad with 0 1 rad 0 087
154. fed into the BURST connector and is stored on the LEV ATT and BURST channel same contents on the two channels 1038 6002 02 2 85 E 13 Digital Modulation 2 6 3 4 External Data Sources SME Inputs DATA CLOCK and BURST are available for the digital modulation with external data signals The polarity of the modulation and the active clock edge can be selected in the menu In the case of 4FSK and QPSK modulation the CLOCK input can be switched over between bit clock and symbol clock The BURST input controls the level reduction indicated in the menu under LEVEL ATTENUATION in the case of external modulation What is to be considered is that the delays of modulation processing and level control are different The delays of the different modulations are listed in table 2 5 radio network data The delays of the level control are 2 us in switch on and approx 1 us in switch off cf Fig 2 38 as well Table 2 5 Radio network data Network Modulation Filter Bit rate Delay INT Delay EXT GSM PCN GMSK Gauss 0 3 270 833 kb s 3 8 bit 2 8 bit CDPD GMSK Gauss 0 5 19 2 kb s 3 8 bit 2 8 bit MC9 GMSK Gauss 0 25 8 kb s 2 8 bit 2 8 bit DSRR GMSK Gauss 0 5 4 16 kb s 3 8 bit 2 8 bit MD24 MD192 GMSK Gauss 0 3 0 5 2 4 to 19 2 kb s 3 8 bit 2 8 bit GMSK Gauss 0 3 8 kb s 3 8 bit 2 8 bit DECT GFSK Gauss 0 5 1152 kb s 4 4 bit 3 4 bit CT2 GFSK Gauss 0 5 72
155. generator 28 Inform controller about instrument address CALL IBWRT generator RST CLS Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator FREQ 50MHz Set frequency to 50 MHz CALL IBWRT generator POW 7 3dBm Set output level 7 3m dBm CALL IBWRT generator AM SOUR INT1 Set AM modulation source LFGEN1 CALL IBWRT generator AM INT1 FREQ 15kHz Set AM modulation source LFGEN1 CALL IBWRT generator AM 30PCT Set AM modulation depth 3096 CALL IBWRT generator AM STAT ON Switch on AM An amplitude modulated signal is now applied at the output of the instrument 3 To return to manual control press the LOCAL key at the front panel 1038 6002 02 3 1 E 13 Introduction Brief Instructions SME 3 2 2 RS 232 Interface It is assumed that the configuration of the RS 232 interface at the unit has not yet been changed 1 Connect unit and controller using the 0 modem cable 2 Enter the following command at the controller to configure the controller interface mode com1 9600 n 8 1 3 Create the following ASCII file Switch instrument to remote control Return key RST CLS Reset instrument FREQ 50MHz Set frequency 50 MHz POW 7 3dBm Set output level 7 3 dBm OUTP STAT ON Switch on RF output BM SOUR INTET Set AM modulation source LFGEN1 AM INT1 FREO 15kHz AM 30PCT AM STAT ON Set modulation frequency 15 kHz Set AM modulation depth 3096 Switch on AM Return key 4 Transfer ASCII file to unit
156. incorporated before the individual blocks are subjected to interleaving see ReFLEX documentation SOURce REFLex25 ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 This command sets the bits to be falsified The set decimal number is converted internally into a 32 bit binary number This binary number is XORed with the original message word Each bit of the ERROR BIT MASK set to 1 causes the respective bit to be inverted in the transmitted word Example SOUR REFL25 ERR MASK 4967295 RST value is 0 SOURce REFLex25 ERRor WORD 0 to 351 This command indicates the position of the erroneous word The erroneous word appears in each frame Counting starts with the first word of block 0 of each frame i e immediately after the sync partition the sync partition cannot be falsified Values from 0 to 351 can be set Depending on the modulation a frame without sync partition consists of 88 176 or 352 words If an excessive value is entered for REFL25 ERR WORD for the modulation set no bit errors are produced Example SOUR REFL25 ERR WORD 176 RST value is 0 1038 6002 02 3 97 E 13 SOURce REFLex25 SOURce REFLex25 FCONtent SME l AIN T SI RIBIF O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DIJAIN T SIRIB F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This command specifies the contents of the max 128 frames the SME sends during a cycle A string with a length of max 128 characters can be transferred Each of the 128 frames is represented by a character whi
157. internal calibration routine VCO SUM The calibration routine needs only be executed after a data loss in the RAM or after an exchange of modules Function n a 10 MHz division scale the VCOs are synchronized with the rated frequency and the presetting voltage readjusted until the difference to the tuning voltage becomes minimal The value hence achieved is entered into the table The routine takes approx 10 seconds Menu selection UTILITIES CALIB VCO SUM amm 75 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATE gt LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET VIEW ODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN DIGITAL MOD PROTECT OSC REF LF OUTPUT CALIB QP SK 0002 SWEEP DIAG LEVEL 0003 LIST TEST 0004 MEM SEQ MOD KEY 0005 UTILITIES AUX I O 0006 HELP BEEPER 0007 INSTALL 0008 GS X CX QC X c PS Fig 2 69 Menu UTILITIES CALIB VCO SUM 1038 6002 02 2 158 E 13 SME Utilities CALIBRATE gt Triggers the calibration for the VCO summing loop IEC bus short command CAL VSUM VIEW gt Indication of the list of correction values The cursor wraps to index 1 of the list The list can be executed using the rotary knob This index can be obtained by entering the index value on the digit block IEC bus short command CAL
158. is stored in the EPROM Note The flash EPROM does not permit the deletion of individual data Thus new memory space is occupied for each calibration If there is no memory space available any more the EPROM must be cleared by an authorized service shop and be written into anew Thus a calibration should only be made if necessary 1 3 4 Option SM B2 LF Generator Fitting as 1st generator As ist generator the LF generator is fitted at one of the rear slots A5 A6 or 12 gt Withdraw jumper X29 at the front top of the motherboard gt Plug jumper X3 at position 2 3 on the right on the option to the right of multipoint connector X50 Fitting as 2nd generator If there already is a generator at one of the slots A5 A6 or A12 the LF generator is mounted at slot A4 gt Withdraw jumper X28 on the motherboard gt Plug jumper X3 at position 1 2 on the option 1038 6002 02 1 6 E 13 SME Fitting the Options 1 3 5 Options SM B3 SM B8 and SM B9 Pulse Modulator 1 5 3 and 6 GHz When fitting this option the RF characteristics of the instrument change to such an extent that the output level has to be calibrated This requires calibrated test instruments a control processor and service kit SM Z2 For this reason fitting should be carried out at an authorized R amp S service shop Fitting is described in the service manual stock number 1039 1856 24 1 3 6 Option SM B4 Pulse Generator The pulse generator is fitted wit
159. is suitable for example for a synchronous start of several units ONCE The output of the FLEX telegram is only started by a valid trigger event After recognition of this signal exactly one frame is output in the way it has been set under FLEX FCONT After that the SME waits for its trigger pulse again defined under TRIG DM SOUR Example SOUR FLEX TACT MESS RST value is MESSage 1038 6002 02 3 62 E 13 SME SOURce FM 3 6 11 6 SOURce FM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the frequency modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal The SME can be equipped with two independent frequency modulators option SM B5 They are differentiated by a suffix after FM SOURce FM1 SOURce FM2 Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce FM1 2 DEViation 0 to 1MHz Hz Option SM B5 1 2 SME03 03E 0 to 2MHz COUPling AC DC SMEO6 0 to 4MHz INTernal FREQuency 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz Hz 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Option SM B2 or B6 PREemphasis 0 50us 75us SOURce INT EXT1 EXT2 STATe QE SOURce FM1 2 DEViation 0 1 MHz 5 0 to 2 MHz SME06 0 to 4 MHz The command specifies the frequency variation caused by the FM Although the LF generators are used as modulation sources the frequency variation is independent of the voltage at the LF output The maximally possible DEViation depends on SOURce FREQ
160. is to standardize the device specific commands to a large extent For this purpose a model was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices Command systems were generated which are assigned to these functions Thus it is possible to address the same functions with identical commands The command systems are of a hierarchical structure Fig 3 1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SOURce which operates the signal sources of the devices The other examples concerning syntax and structure of the commands are derived from this command system SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488 2 i e it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the common commands defined in this standard Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488 2 see Section 3 5 4 Responses to Queries 1038 6002 02 3 5 E 13 Structure and Syntax of the Messages SME 3 5 2 Structure of a Command The commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more parameters Header and parameter are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header Note The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the instrument Common Commands Device specific commands
161. kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 6 0 kb s Bx T 0 5 bitrate 64 0 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 7 2 kb s Bx T 0 3 0 5 bitrate 67 708kb s BxT 0 2 0 3 0 5 bitrate 8 kb s Bx T 0 25 0 3 50 5 bitrate 76 8 kb s Bx T 0 3 0 5 bitrate 9 6 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 80 0 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 10 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 160 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 12 0 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 70 833kb s BxT 0 2 0 3 0 5 bitrate 14 4 kb s Bx T 0 3 0 5 bitrate 512 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 16 0 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 1000 kb s BxT 0 4 bitrate 19 2 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 The current selection is displayed IEC bus commands SOUR DM GMSK FILT 0 3 BRAT 8kb s Switching on off the GSM difference coding IEC bus command SOUR DM GMSK DCOD ON Selection of the polarity of the modulation excursion NORM Polarity of the modulation as specified according to GSM INV Polarity of the modulation is inverted IEC bus command SOUR DM GMSK POL NORM Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Selection of the editor function for processing the lists cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 88 E 13 SME Digital Modulation 2 6 3 6 GFSK Modulation Menu DIGITAL MOD GFSK offers access to settings for GFSK modulation Menu selection DIGITAL MOD GFSK 100 000 000 0 we _ 30 0 can FREQUE
162. kb s 4 4 bit 3 4 bit CT3 GFSK Gauss 0 5 640 kb s 4 4 bit 3 4 bit 1 4 DQPSK 0 35 48 6 kb s 12 bit 12 bit PDC 4 DQPSK Ncos 0 5 42 kb s 12 bit 12 bit TFTS 4 DQPSK cos 0 4 44 2 kb s 12 bit 12 bit APCO25 1 4 DQPSK cos 0 2 9 6 kb s 12 bit 12 bit TETRA 1 4 DQPSK Ncos 0 35 36 kb s 12 bit 12 bit MSAT QPSK cos 0 6 6 75 kb s 12 bit 12 bit INMARSAT M OQPSK cos 0 6 8 kb s 12 bit 12 bit ERMES 4FSK Bessel 3 9 kHz 6 25 kb s 3 3 bit 3 3 bit APCO25 4FSK cos 0 2 9 6 kb s 9 5 bit 9 5 bit FLEX 4FSK Bessel 3 9 kHz 3 2 6 4 kb s 3 3 bit 3 3 bit MODACOM 4FSK cos 0 2 9 6 kb s 9 5 bit 9 5 bit CITYRUF FSK Gauss 2 73 512 1200 2400 b s 3 6 bit 2 6 bit POCSAG FSK Gauss 2 73 512 1200 2400 b s 3 6 bit 2 6 bit FLEX FSK Bessel 3 9kHz 1 6 3 2 kb s 1 5 bit 0 5 bit POCSAG FFSK AF 1200 1800 1200 b s 2 0 bit 1 0 bit 1038 6002 02 2 86 E 13 SME Digital Modulation 2 6 3 5 GMSK Modulation Menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK offers access to settings for GMSK modulation Menu selection DIGITAL MOD GMSK 100 000 000 0 30 0 ox FREQUENCY SOURCE LEVEL 1 5 ODULATION CLOCK LE QUIPUT 1 LEVEL ATTENUATION SWEEP Fl MODE LIST SELECT STANDARD UTILITIES DIFF ENCODER HELP MOD POLARITY LECI ETE LI FUNCTION DIGITAL MOD E LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE MEM SEO FILTER BIT RATE
163. las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar da os y peligros de toda clase Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto Tambi n deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en otro cap tulo de esta documentaci n y que tambi n son obligatorias de seguir En las informaciones de seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Palabras de se al y su significado PELIGRO Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el ususario Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves heridas ADVERTENCIA Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el usuario Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves heridas ATENCI N Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo peque o para el usuario Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o pequefias CUIDADO Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia danarlo INFORMACION Indica una situaci n en la que deber an seguirse las instrucciones en el uso del producto pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un da o del mismo Las palabras de se al c
164. list content or only the POWer content is transmitted 230 Data corrupt or stale The data are incomplete or invalid Example The instrument has aborted a measurement Hardware error The command cannot be executed due to problems with the instrument hardware 240 241 Hardware missing The command cannot be executed due to missing hardware Example An option is not fitted 255 Directory full The list management cannot accept any more lists as the maximum number of lists has already be attained Example Only 10 MEM SEQ lists can be created 1038 6002 02 7B 3 E 11 List of Error Messages SME Device Specific Error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 310 System error This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform the R amp S Service 311 Memory error Error in the instrument memory 313 Calibration memory lost Loss of calibration data stored The calibration data of VCO SUM LEVEL PRESET and PULSE GEN can be restored by internal routines see Chapter 2 Section Calibration 314 Save recall memory lost Loss of the non volatile data stored using SAV command 315 Configuration memory lost Loss of the non volatile configuration data stored by the instrument 330 Self test failed The selftest could not be executed 350 Queue overflow This error code is entered into the queu
165. made The product may be installed and connected only by a skilled electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that suitable protection is provided for users and products Do not insert any objects into the openings in the housing that are not designed for this purpose Never pour any liquids onto or into the housing This can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a thunderstorm can reach the product Otherwise the operating personnel will be endangered by electric shocks Rohde amp Schwarz products are not protected against penetration of water unless otherwise specified see also safety instruction 1 If this is not taken into account there exists the danger of electric shock or damage to the product which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product was moved from a cold to a warm environment Do not close any slots or openings on the product since they are necessary for ventilation and prevent the product from overheating Do not place the product on soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or inside a closed housing unless this is well ventilated D
166. modulation BAS is returned for the basic modula tions GFSK QPSK FSK FSK4 and FFSK COMP is returned for the complex protocols ERMES FLEX and POCSAG The command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR DM MGR Response BAS SOURce DM BASic The commands that are also valid for modulations GMSK GFSK DQPSK FSK FSK4 and FFSK are under this node SOURce DM BASic TYPE GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK FSK4 FFSK The command selects the type of basic modulation GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GFSK Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying QPSK Quad Phase Shift Keying a special form of PSK The key word DQPSk is also accepted FSK Frequency modulation with exactly two states FSK4 Frequency modulation with exactly four states designated as 4 FSK in the manual control FFSK Fast Frequency Shift Keying a special form of FSK Example SOUR DM BAS TYPE FSK RST value is GMSK SOURce DM BASic STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the modulation selected under SOURce DM BASic TYPe Example SOUR DM BAS STAT OFF RST value is OFF SOURce DM BASic SOURce EXTernal PRBS DATA The command selects the data source Note Even if PRBS is selected the burst output and the level reduction continue to be controlled by the list selected under SOURce DM BASic DATA Example SOUR DM BAS SOUR PRBS RST value is PRBS SOURce DM BASic CLOCk The commands to set the data s
167. of the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections Tables provide a fast overview of the commands implemented in the instrument and the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of every command and the status registers Detailed program examples of the main functions are to be found in annex D The program examples for IEC bus programming are all written in QuickBASIC Note In contrast to manual control which is intended for maximum possible operating convenience the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status This means that when incompatible settings e g activation of PM and FM at the same time are attempted the command is ignored and the device status remains unchanged i e is not adapted to other settings Therefore IEC IEEE bus control programs should always define an initial device status e g with command RST and then implement the required settings 3 2 Brief Instructions The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions 3 2 1 IEC Bus It is assumed that the IEC bus address which is factory set to 28 has not yet been changed 1 Connect instrument and controller using IEC bus cable 2 Write and start the following program on the controller CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD
168. of the corresponding adjustments This requires service kit SM Z2 stock no 1039 3520 02 gt Press key PRESET gt Set LFGEN1 in menu MODULATION AM AM SOURCE INT Set the voltage at pin A6 of the plug of the module to 1 V crest voltage using R298 AF LEVEL Press the PRESET key Set LFGEN2 in menu MODULATION AM AM SOURCE INT Set the voltage at pin A7 of the plug of the module to 1 V crest voltage using R55 1Vp DDS ADJ Press the PRESET key Set LFGEN2 in menu MODULATION AM AM SOURCE INT Set the voltage at pin A7 of the plug of the module to 1 V crest voltage using R380 DAC1 AMPL ADJ Press the PRESET key Setthe following in menu MODULATION VOR MODE NORM VAR DEPTH 0 SUBCARRIER DEPTH 0 COM ID STATE ON COM ID DEPTH 100 Set the voltage at pin A7 of the plug of the module to 1 V crest voltage using R465 DAC2 AMPL ADJ 1 8 E 13 Fitting the Options SME 1 3 8 Option SM B6 Multifunction Generator The multifunction generator is fitted at one of rear slots A5 A6 or 12 gt Undo the board locking on both sides of the motherboard gt Plug the PCB on one of the slots Lock modules again Remove jumper X29 at the front top of the motherboard Cable 50 MHz reference cf Section 1 3 13 1 3 9 Option SME B11 DM Coder The data coder is fitted into module A8 digital synthesis gt Open module A8 Fasten the DM coder
169. of this section specify the erroneous bits and their positions Entry of the erroneous bits in a 32 bit field The transmitted decimal number 0 4294967295 is converted internally into a 32 bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits These bits are XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine which bits of this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly IEC bus command SOUR POCS ERR MASK 0 Entry value of the position of the word to be falsified in the batch Values from O to 16 are valid The value O denotes the synchronization word IEC bus command SOUR POCS ERR WORD 0 The parameters of this section determine which types of data POCSAG message POCSAG filler data are sent at what time Input value for the number of filler batches emitted prior to the actual message This allows e g to create a test message according to FTZ 171TR1 appendix 1 section 3 2 2 where the message must appear in the 7 batch IEC bus command SOUR POCS LBAT 0 Input value of the length of the time slice Possible values are 2 to 120 sec A preamble of 576 bits is sent at the beginning of every time slice followed by the number of filler batches set under FILL BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE Each batch has the length of 544 bits Depending on the settings under MODE zero one or two message batches follow Then an unmodulated signal is sent up to the end of the time slice Due to the fact t
170. permits the resetting of instrument settings which have inadvertently been deleted using Recall 0 If an instrument setting is stored in which a sweep was switched on the sweep is started using the recall The parameter EXCLUDE FROM RCL in the FREQUENCY and LEVEL LEVEL menus determines whether the saved RF frequency and RF level are loaded when an instrument setting is loaded or whether the current settings are maintained Store IEC bus command SAV 12 Call IEC bus command RCL 12 Notes The contents of lists as they are used for the LIST mode or for user correction UCOR is not saved in the SAVE memory It is stored under the respective list name and can be called If instrument settings are called which go back to list data such as level setting using UCOR the current list contents is used If this has been altered it is not identical to the list contents at the point of storing any more Memory Sequence is dealt with in Section 2 10 Model and units that are equipped with option SM B50 comprise the Fast Restore mode for very fast loading of stored device settings This mode can be called up only during remote control see section 3 Fast Restore Mode 1038 6002 02 2 39 E 13 SME Menu Summary 2 3 Menu Summary 1038 6002 02 FREQUENCY LEVEL LEVEL ALC UCOR EM
171. por el producto Si se utilizaran cables o enchufes de extensi n se deber poner al seguro que es controlado su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red se deber considerar el enchufe del cable de distribuci n como interruptor En estos casos deber asegurar de que el enchufe sea de f cil acceso y nabejo medida del cable de distribuci n aproximadamente 2 m Los interruptores de funci n o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si los productos sin interruptor est n integrados en construciones o instalaciones se deber instalar el interruptor al nivel de la instalaci n p gina 3 12 13 14 15 17 19 Informaciones de seguridad No utilice nunca el producto si est dafiado el cable el ctrico Asegure a trav s de las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de el ctrico no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser dafiado por l por ejemplo al tropezar o por un golpe de corriente Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de distribuci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de como m ximo 16 A Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente Si no tiene en consideraci n estas indicaciones se arriesga a que se originen chispas fuego y o heridas No sobrecargue las t
172. preamplifier with 40 dB changeover switch input noise 2nV 1Hz 7 Oscilloscope Bandwidth gt 100 MHz 5 1 1 4 two channels with d c coupling 5 2 7 5 2 8 5 2 40 8 RF power meter 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 NRVS 1020 1809 02 5 2 11 5 kHz to 3 GHz SME03 NRVS Z51 857 9004 02 5 2 13 5 kHz to 6 GHz SMEO6 9 Precision attenuation set Attenuation 0 to 120 dB DPSP 8334 6010 02 5 2 11 resolution 5 dB RSG 1038 6002 02 Test Instruments and Utilities SME Item Type of instrument Specification required Suitable R amp S R amp S order no Application instrument 10 Low noise preamplifier 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 5 2 11 5 kHz to GHz SMEO3 5 kHz to 6 GHz SMEO6 amplification gt 20 dB noise factor 10 dB 11 VSWR bridge 1 MHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 ZRC 1039 9492 55 52 5 2 12 1 MHz to 3 GHz SME03 06 directivity gt 40 dB 12 D c voltage source Setting range 0 to 10 V 117 7133 02 5 2 14 5 2 33 13 RF power amplifier 10 MHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 5 2 14 10 MHz to 3 GHz SME03 06 Power gt 1W 14 Audio analyzer Generator up to 100 kHz UPD 1030 7500 04 05 5 1 1 2 level meter 5 2 31 distortion meter 5 2 39 15 Modulation analyzer 100 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 856 5005 52 5 1 1 1 100 kHz to 3 GHz SME03 06 5 1 1 2 AM FM PhiM stereo coder stereo decoder distortion meter weighting filter CCIR CCITT 16 Mixer 10 MHz to 1 5 GHz SME02 5 1 1 3 10 MHz to GHz SME03 5 1 1 4 10 MHz to 6 GHz SME0
173. pueden generarse elementos peligrosos polvos de sustancia de metales pesados como por ejemplo plomo berilio n quel La partici n elemental del producto como por ejemplo sucede en el tratamiento de materias residuales debe de ser efectuada solamente por personal especializado para estos tratamientos La partici n elemental efectuada inadecuadamente puede generar dafios para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes al tratamiento de materias residuales En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de peligro o combustibles en la aplicaci n del producto que debieran de ser transferidos a un tratamiento de materias residuales como por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben ser repuestos en periodos definidos o aceites para motores deberan ser tenidas en cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o combustibles y las regulaciones regionales para el tratamiento de materias residuales Cuiden tambi n de tener en cuenta en caso dado las prescripciones de seguridad especiales en la descripci n del producto Ciertos productos como por ejemplo las instalaciones de radiaci n HF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada En vista a la protecci n de la vida en desarrollo deber an ser protegidas personas embarazadas debidamente Tambi n las personas con un bypass pueden correr 1171 0000 42 02 00 10 11 pelig
174. queue poll Error explanation No list defined There is no list defined 242 List not learned execute LEARn command The instrument has been switched to LIST mode and a list has been selected However command LEARn has not been executed 243 Dwell time adjusted A dwell time given on a list cannot be processed by the unit The setting was automatically adjusted 251 No User Correction Table zero assumed An attempt has been made to switch on user correction but no UCOR table has been stored in the instrument yet The instrument behaves as if a table was called which only contains 0 values Invalid keyboard input ignored An invalid input via the keyboard is not considered This parameter is read only An attempt has been made to change a fixedly specified value Data output aborted Data output was aborted on the IEC IEEE bus Example The key LOCAL was pressed 304 String too long A character string which is too long was received via the IEC bus The names of lists may have a length of maximally seven letters 305 Fill pattern too long trunctated More data have been entered with block function FILL in the list editor than the filling range RANGE set permits The exceeding data are ignored No fill pattern specified An attempt was made to execute a filler function without having to indicate a filler pattern 1038 6002 02 7B 7 E 11 SME Annex C List of Commands with SCPI Conformity In
175. sequence Peak deviation 3880 4120 Hz Modulation frequency 1164 1236 Hz Distortion factor zS 0 eee 1 96 LOW sequence Peak deviation 3880 4120 Hz Modulation frequency 1746 1854 Hz Distortion factor zm Cu Meses 1 37 LF generator 5 2 37 Frequency error S 1E 04 Distortion factor 0 1 Level 3mV 2 4 mV Level 10 mV 8 9 11 1 mV Level 30 mV 28 7 Jl ee 31 3 mV Level 100 mV 98 0 nm 102 0 mV Level 300 mV 296 xc 304 mV Level 1V 0 989 ne 1 011 Level 2V 1 979 nins 2 021 Level 4V 3 959 Lue 4 041 V Frequency resp up to 100 kHz AE 0 3 dB Frequency resp up to 400 kHz a 0 5 dB 38 Pulse generator 5 2 38 Pulse period checked Pulse width 5 3 5 ees 5 3 ns Pulse delay 5 3ns 5 43 ns Double pulse spacing 596 10ns 5 20 ns Trigger delay So lll ELVIS 50 ns 1038 6002 02 5 48 E 13 SME Performance Test Item Characteristic Measurem Min Actual Max Unit acc to Section 39 Multi function generator 5 2 39 Frequency error Se enses 1E04 Distortion factor Se 0 1 Level a 3 mV 2 eee 4 mV 10 mV amp 9 j 11 1 mV 30 mV 28 7 31 3 mV 100 mV 98 0 102 0 mV 300 mV 296 ee 304 mV 1V 0 989 J 1 011 2V 1979 x 2 021 4V 39 959 nnm 4 041 Frequency resp up to 100 kHz EE
176. step IEC bus short command SOUR SWE DWEL 10ms Input value of the dwell time per step IEC bus short command SOUR SWE SPAC LIN Selection of the sweep operating mode cf Section 2 8 3 IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SWE MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING Starts a single sweep run This action to be executed is only indicated and is only effective if MODE SINGLE has been selected IEC bus short command TRIG Sets the starting frequency IEC bus short command ABOR Input value of the frequency for the marker selected IEC bus short command MARK1 FREQ 100MHz Switching on off the marker selected IEC bus short command SOUR MARK1 OFF Switching on off the amplitude marker selected OFF Input value of the frequency for the marker selected ON Amplitude marker is switched on On reaching the mark the output level is reduced by 1 dB IEC bus short command SOUR MARK1 AMPL OFF 2 139 E 13 Sweep SME 2 8 7 LEVEL Sweep Menu SWEEP LEVEL offers access to settings for LEVEL sweep Menu selection SWEEP LEVEL _ a START LEVEL 30 0 100 000 000 0 STOP LEVEL 10 0 LEV SWP FREQUENCY 30 LEVEL STOP LEVEL 10 ODULATION 1 CURRENT LEVEL 30 DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT STEP 1 0 dB SWEEP DWELL 15 0 ms LIST ODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT SIN
177. step manual processing of the list Activating STEP stops a list running and the cursor wraps to the indication value of CURRENT INDEX The list can now be controlled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob or the numeric keys IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE STEP TRIG LIST SOUR SING EXT SINGLE Single run from the beginning to the end of the list as with SINGLE but triggered by an external trigger signal IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR EX EXT STEP Step by step run by means of the external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE STEP TRIG LIST SOUR EXT OFF Operating mode LIST is switched off IEC bus short command FREQ MODE CW 2 9 2 Inputs Outputs TRIGGER input and BLANK output are available at the rear of the instrument for synchronization with other instruments TRIGGER An external signal at this input triggers the LIST mode in operating modes EXT SINGLE and EXT STEP The polarity of the active trigger edge can be set in the UTILITIES AUX I O EXT TRIG SLOPE menu BLANK This output supplies a signal 0 V 5 V to blank the settling process by means of pulse modulation or AM The signal can also be used to synchronize other instruments The p
178. sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 Two independent POINts values are used for SPACing LOG and SPACing LIN That is to say before POINts is changed SPACing must be set correctly A change of POINts causes an adaption of STEP but not of STARt STOP and SPAN Example SOUR2 SWE POIN 50 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency SPACing LINear LOGarithmic The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings Example SOUR2 SWE SPAC LOG RST value is LINear SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP The commands to set the step width with linear and logarithmic sweeps are under this node The settings of STEP LIN and STEP LOG are independent of each other SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LiNear 0 to 500 kHz The command sets the step width with the linear sweep If STEP LINear is changed the value of POINts valid for SPACing LINear also changes according to the formula indicated under POINIts A change of SPAN does not cause a change of STEP LlNear Keyword LINear can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see example Example SOUR2 SWE STEP 10kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 50PCT The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated according to if STARt STOP new frequency prior frequency STEP LOG x prior frequenc
179. the MOD ON OFF key switches the modulation s off Which modulations were switched on is stored If no modulation is switched on pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches on the modulations which were last switched off using the MOD ON OFF key On switching on using the MOD ON OFF key the modulation sources are used as defined in the modulation menus Access to the selection of the modulation to be switched using the MOD ON OFF key is possible in the UTILITIES MOD KEY menu Menu selection UTILITIES MOD KEY Sa E 100 000 000 0 30 0 cx FREQUENCY SYSTEM AM FM PM PULSE DM LEVEL REF OSC ODULATION PHASE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX 1 O HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 76 Menu UTILITIES MOD KEY preset setting MODULATION Selection for which modulation the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective Note Preset switches off all modulations sets the selection to ALL and stores AM 30 AM SOURCE INT LF GEN1 as default setting 1038 6002 02 2 165 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 14 Setting Auxiliary Inputs Outputs AUX Menu UTILITIES AUX I O offers access to settings for the TRIGGER input BLANK output and MARKER output Sections Sweep List Mode and Memory Sequence provide further information Menu selection UTILITIES AUX I O gm nec
180. the analog FM deviation IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK DEV 4 5kHz Input value of the bit rate for FSK Setting range FILTER OFF 0 05 to 1900 kbps FILTER switched on 0 05 to 90 kbps resolution 3 digit IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK BRAT 1200b s 2 95 E 13 Digital Modulation FILTER MOD POLARITY SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 SME Opens a window to select the filters The following filters can be selected OFF BESSEL BxT 1 22 corresponds to a bandwidth of 3 9 kHz at 3 2 kbps BESSEL BxT 2 44 corresponds to a bandwidth of 3 9 kHz at 1 6 kbps GAUSS BxT 2 73 corresponds to a rise time 250 us at 512 bps Due to digital filtering a change of the bit rate influences the cut off frequency of the filter That is why BxT bandwidthxsymbol duration is indicated instead of the cut off frequency which is specified according to the standard The cut off frequency of the filter is calculated as follows Cut off frequency BxT value x symbol rate IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK FILT BESS 1 22 Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation NORM Logic 1 generates a positive deviation INV Logic 1 generates a negative deviation IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK POL NORM Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 96 E 13 SME Digita
181. the case of OFF the vector field is reduced by one code word if this is permitted by the ReFLEX standard IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 MESS RREQ OFE The system information parameters are used for setting the data of the sending system simulated by the SME These data are sent to the receiver in the respective block information words Input value of the geographical transmit zone The significance is determined by the network operator The value 0 is referred to as restricted in the ReFLEX25 documentation but can be set for testing The upper limit is 4091 IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI ZONE 1 Input value of the subzone within a transmit zone The significance is determined by the network operator The value 0 is referred to as restricted in the ReFLEX25 documentation but can be set for testing The upper limit is 127 IEC bus command REFL25 S1 SZONe 1 Input value for the ID of the service provider Valid values are 0 to 16383 IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI PROV 0 2 121 E 13 Digital Modulation FORWARD CHANNEL BASE FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT NUMBER REVERSE CHANNEL BASE FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT NUMBER SPEED FREQUENCY SPACING 1038 6002 02 SME Together with FREQUENCY SPACING the next two settings determine the frequency of the channel from the transmitter SME to the receiver The following formula is valid in this case FREQ FORW CHAN BASE FREQUENCY FORW CHAN ASSIG
182. the level reduction The level reduction is internally controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via connector BURST A logic 1 in the data list causes a level reduction IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV 0dB 1038 6002 02 2 89 E 13 Digital Modulation MODE SELECT STANDARD BIT RATE FILTER DEVIATION MOD POLARITY SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 SME Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator AUTO The data are always repeated SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO Opens a window to select one of the standard GFSK modulations see Table 2 5 By selecting a standard the parameters indented below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard If the setting of a parameter is different from the standard SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM GFSK STAN DECT Input value of the bit rate for the selected standard The specified ranges are 10 585 kb s and 640 1170 kb s With settings BxT20 5 DEV 14 0 kHz and DEV 25 2 kHz the specified range is 0 05 to 90 kb s IEC bus command SOUR DM GFSK BRAT 1152 kb s Opens a window to select different settings with filtering BXT and with the deviation The following is to choose from BxT 0 5 DEV 14 0 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 18 0 kHz BxT 0 4 DEV 25 2 kHz BxT 0 5
183. the list cannot be selected freely in the case of manual control A definite list name is automatically generated in the following form MSEQ lt n gt with n e 0 9 e g MSEQ1 with Memory Sequence This applies correspondingly to the other operating modes In the case of LIST mode LIST1 would be generated for example If a list is created via IEC bus an arbitrary list name can be given cf Section 3 Unrestricted access is also possible by means of the selection window The list currently set is marked in the selection window by means of the selection mark here SEQ2 In addition to the list name the length of the list is given here 100 elements 2 2 4 2 Deletion of Lists DELETE LIST DELETE LIST opens a selection window in which the list to be deleted can be selected The lists are represented together with their name and their length cf Fig 2 9 By pressing the RETURN key the selection window is exited without deleting a list Delete list Selection DELETE LIST Mark desired list using the rotary knob Press SELECT key The prompt enter SELECT to delete list sequence is displayed Press SELECT key The list is deleted If the prompt is acknowledged with the RETURN key however the list is not deleted The selection window is automatically closed due to the acknowledgment of the prompt 100 000 000 0 1z 30 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL ODULATION
184. to 16 dBm dBm STATe ON OFF POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep The commands for the markers with frequency sweep are under this node Keyword FSWeep can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulations SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep AMPLitude ON OFF The command specifies whether the marker influences the signal level ON The output level is reduced by a constant value when the marker frequency is executed OFF The output level remains unchanged RST value is OFF Example SOUR MARK1 FSW AMP ON SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep AOFF Command All markers off switches off all frequency markers This command triggers an event thus it has no RST value and no query form Example SOUR MARK FSW AOFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to F 3 6 GHz The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the frequency indicated In this command the OFFSet value of the subsystem menu FREQuency is considered as with input value MARKER in the SWEEP FREQ menu Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 0 The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula cf Chapter 2 Section Frequency Offset as well 5 kHz OFFSet to 1 5 GHz OFFSet RST value for MARK1 100 MHz MARK2 200 MHz Example SOUR MARK1 FSW FREQ 30MHz MARK3 300 MHz
185. to respond to serial poll SR1 Service request function Service Request PP1 Parallel poll function RL1 Remote Local switchover function DC1 Resetting function Device Clear DT1 Trigger function Device Trigger 1038 6002 02 6A 2 E 12 SME IEC IEEE Bus Interface Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They serve to communicate between instrument and controller Universal Commands The universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex They are effective for all instruments connected to the bus without addressing them before Table A 2 Universal Commands Command QuickBASIC commandl Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear IBCMD controller CHR 20 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting IFC Interface Clear IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting LLO Local Lockout IBCMD controller CHR 17 The LOC IEC ADDR key is disabled SPE Serial Poll Enable IBCMD controller CHR 24 Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable IBCMD controller CHR 25 End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure IBCMD controller CHR 21 End of the parallel poll polling state Addressed Commands The addressed commands are encode
186. transmission with the MSB of the byte at the lowest address and stops with the LSB of the byte at the highest address 1038 6002 02 2 116 E 13 SME Digital Modulation Bit Error Rate Test The SME is able to switch a receiver to the test mode for bit error rate tests and then send standard test patterns To this end set a character to B for BER message in FRAME CONTENTS Furthermore set any number of continuous frames to F for filler pattern In the BER frame the SME sends the command for switching over to the BER test mode to the receiver The FPAT frames contain the test pattern The command in the BER frame contains start and number of test pattern frames For calculating the command the SME searches for the first F in FRAME CONTENTS and sets the length to the number of continuous FPAT frames The calculation of the BER frame is performed when switching on ReFLEX25 and executing RECALCULATE This is why FRAME CONTENTS either must be set before switching on ReFLEX2 or RECALCULATE must be executed Reading Out Modifying Returning of Telegram Parts It is possible to modify parts of the telegram generated by the SME using a host processor and to have the modified telegram sent by the SME Likewise telegram parts generated on the host processor can be transferred into the custom frames of the SME When ReFLEX25 is switched on the telegram to be sent is calculated and stored in the extension memory of the SME XMEM
187. via RS 232 interface Enter the following command at the controller copy filename com1 An amplitude modulated signal is now applied at the output of the instrument 5 To return to manual control press the LOCAL key at the front panel 3 3 Switchover to Remote Control On power on the instrument is always in the manual operating state LOCAL state and can be operated via the front panel The instrument is switched to remote control REMOTE state IEC bus as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller RS 232 as soon as it receives either a carriage return CR 0Dh or a line feed lt LF gt 0Ah from a controller During remote control operation via the front panel is disabled The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via IEC bus see Sections 3 3 1 3 and 3 3 2 3 Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument settings 1038 6002 02 3 2 E 13 SME Switchover to Remote Control 3 3 4 Remote Control via IEC Bus 3 3 1 1 Setting the Device Address The IEC bus address of the instrument is factory set to 28 It can be changed manually in the UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB ADDRESS menu or via IEC bus Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible Manually gt Call UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB ADDRESS menu Enter desired address Terminate input using the 1x ENTER key Via IEC bus CALL IBFIND
188. via the power amplifier and feed frequencies of up to 1500 MHz in the case of SME03E 03 2200 3000 MHz The overvoltage protection must respond at a supplied RF power of 0 5 to 1W 5 2 15 Level Monitoring at Input EXT1 Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 2 Test setup Connect the generator output of the audio analyzer to external modulation input EXT1 Testing Setting at the SME Select EXT1 in the MODULATION AM AM SOURCE menu Gen level under 0 98 0 01 V Vpeak indication EXT1 LOW Gen level over 1 02 0 01 V Vpeak indication EXT1 HIGH Gen level between 0 99 and 1 01 V Vpeak no indication 1038 6002 02 5 19 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 16 Modulation Depth of AM Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 1 Test system 5 1 1 6 SMEO6 Measurement Settings at the SME Level 0 dBm Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION AM AM SOURCE INT menu Modulation depth 0 196 to 8096 recommended values 3095 and 8096 Modulation frequency 1 kHz Vary the carrier frequency from 5 MHz to 1500 MHz 2200 3000 6000 MHz with SME03E 03 06 For recommended setting values see table 5 2 Read off the modulation depth at the modulation analyzer Deviation of the modulation depth measured from the setting value n 5 2 17 AM Frequency Response Testequpment Test system 5 1 1 2 Test system 5 1 1 6 SMEO6 Measurement Settings at the SME Level 0 dBm Select EXT1 in the MODULATION AM AM SOURCE me
189. 0 or 1 By analogy to the SRE register which determines under which conditions an SRQ is generated there is a parallel poll enable register PPE which is ANDed with the STB bit by bit as well considering bit 6 The results are ORed the result is then sent possibly inverted as a response in the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll by means of command IST The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using quick BASIC command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used in order to quickly find out after an SRQ which instrument has sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC bus To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same value A detailed example as to the parallel poll is to be found in annex D Program Examples 3 8 4 4 Query by Means of Commands Each part of every status register can be read by means of queries The individual commands are indicated in the detailed description of the registers in Section 3 8 3 What is returned is always a number which represents the bit pattern of the register queried Evaluating this number is effected by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the S
190. 0 00000000 0057 11010010 00000000 Fig 2 37 Menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK edit page 1038 6002 02 2 79 E 13 Digital Modulation SME IEC bus commands for programming the data generator DM DATA SEL DLIST1 DM DATA DATA 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 DM DATA ATT 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMDAT SBUES 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 bit bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 DATA LEV ATT bit bit2 bit3 WEN bit4 bit5 bit6 elay of leve gt a approx 1 us control AO i E bit1 bit2 bit3 bit n DM delay cf table 2 5 Fig 2 38 Signal example with respect to DM delay and delays of level control 2 6 3 2 PRBS Generator The PRBS generator Pseudo Random Binary Sequence supplies pseudo random bit sequences with sequence lengths of 29 1 511 9 bit 215 1 32767 15 bit 220 1 1048575 20 bit 221 1 2097151 21 bit 223 4 8388607 23 bit or If the PRBS generator is switched on the PRBS bit sequence replaces the data bit sequence of the data generator The programming of the level reduction and the BURST output remains valid even if the PRBS generator is switched on For a constant carrier either the bits of the LEV ATT list or para
191. 0 1 to 20 000 Hz The command sets the frequency of the Comld signal RST value is 1020 Hz Example SOUR VOR COM FREQ 1020 SOURce VOR COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The command sets the AM modulation depth of the Comld signal Example SOUR VOR COM DEPT 10PCT RST value is 10 PCT 1038 6002 02 3 108 E 13 SME SOURce0 2 FREQuency 3 6 12 SOURce0 2 System The SOURce0 2 system contains the commands to configure the LF signal sources The following allocation is valid SOURceo Standard generator Designated as INT1 if used as a modulation source cf command SOURce AM SOURce INT1 e g The numbering as SOURceO is different from the manual control Second optional LF generator option SM B2 Replaces the standard generator which is cut out by this option Is designated as INT1 if it is used as a modulation source if it is used as an LF generator it is designated as SOURce0 differently from the numbering of the manual control SOURce2 First optional LF or modulation generator option SM B2 or SM B6 Is designated as INT2 if it is used as a modulation source if it is used as an LF generator it is designated as SOURce2 The commands to set the output voltage of the LF generators are in the OUTPut2 system see Section 3 6 10 Subsystems Settings SOURceO 2 FREQuency Frequency with CW and sweep operation FUNCtion Waveform of the output signal MARKer Marker for LF sweeps only possible using SOURce2 SWEep LF sweep
192. 0 Menu STATUS page 1038 6002 02 2 169 E 13 Error Messages SME 2 14 Error Messages The SME displays error and caution messages in a different manner depending on how long for a short period of time or permanently the cause exists Short term message The short term message is displayed in the status line Part of it overwrites the status indications and disappears after approx 2 seconds or in the case of a new entry The instrument shows e g short term messages if the attempt is made to enter an overrange or if incompatible operating modes deactivate one another Long term message The long term message is displayed in the status line by means of the message WARNING or ERROR Pressing the ERROR key calls the ERROR page in which the messages are entered Several messages can be entered at the same time The long term message remains existing until there is no cause any more The ERROR page is exited using the RETURN key The instrument displays e g the long term message ERROR if there is a hardware error or WARNING if overrange settings have been made Notes An error message ERROR does not necessarily point to a defect instrument There are various operating states which can cause an ERROR message E g if the instrument is set to external reference but no external reference is connected Error 313 indicates the loss of calibration data and is also applicable in case of a cold start key PRESET is pres
193. 00 kHz This command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation If this value does not correspond to the standard selected the FILTer is deactivated automatically OFF Example SOUR DM FSK DEV 3kHz RST value is 4 5 kHz 1038 6002 02 3 47 E 13 SOURce DM SME SOURce DM FSK FiLTer GAUSs 2 73 BESSel 1 22 BESSel 2 44 OFF The command activates or deactivates the selected filter Deactivating the filter is possible at any time Activating the filter is only possible when values DEViation and BITRate correspond to the standard values Example SOUR DM FSK FILT GAUS 2 73 RST value is OFF SOURce DM FSK POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the modulation NORMal Logic 0 reduces the frequency logic 1 increases it INVerted Logic 1 reduces the frequency logic 0 increases it Example SOUR DM FSK POL INV RST value is NORMal SOURce DM FSK4 The commands to set the data source for the digital frequency modulation with exactly four states are under this node In contrast to the other modulations there are trigger commands for FSK and FSK4 which also permit a single processing of the data list SOURce DM FSK4 STANdard ERMes APCO MODacom FLEX3200 FLEX6400 This short form command sets parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the standards cf table The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table Hence it neither has a query form no
194. 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY SELECT LIST CURRENT LIST2 LEVEL FUNCTION FILL LIST INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW ODULATION INDEX FREE 2041 LEN 2055 FREQ LEVEL DIGITAL MO 575 000 000 13 0 dBm LF OUTPUT 0002 235 000 000 7 0 dBm SWEEP 0003 123 000 000 dBm LIST 0004 456 000 000 dBm MEM SEQ 0005 735 000 000 dBm UTILITIES 0006 333 000 000 dBm HELE 0007 400 000 000 dBm 0008 235 000 000 dBm do XS e N NN N N N N N Fig 2 60 Menu List EDIT page INDEX Index of the list FREE Indication of the list entries still vacant LENGTH Length of the current list FREQ Parameter Frequency LEVEL Parameter Level specified range 20 dB 1038 6002 02 2 147 E 13 Memory Sequence SME 2 10 Memory Sequence In the memory sequence operating mode the instrument automatically services a list with stored instrument settings Memory locations 1 to 50 which are loaded using SAVE and whose stored settings are called either separately using RECALL or automatically and subsequently in the SEQUENCE mode are available The list is continuously serviced from the beginning to the end with a continual index The order of the memories to be passed through is arbitrary Each setting can be assigned a freely selectable dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the setting its minimal value is 50 ms its maximal value 60 sec
195. 002 02 3 41 E 13 SOURce DM SOURce DM GMSK STANdard Short command Command sequence DM GMSK STANdard MD24W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 2 4 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD36N DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 3 6 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD36W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 23 6 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD48N DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 4 8 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD48W DM GMS FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 4 8 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD48W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 4 8 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD80W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 8 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD96N DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 9 6 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD96W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 9 6 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD100W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 10 0 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD120W DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 12 0 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard DSRR MD160 DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 16 0 kb s DM G
196. 02 3 87 E 13 SOURce POWer 3 6 11 15 SOURce POWer Subsystem SME This subsystem contains the commands to set the output level the level control and the level correction of the RF signal Other units can be used instead of dBm by indication directly after the numeric value Example POW 0 5v by altering the DEFault unit the UNIT system see Command UNIT POW ER Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth 100 kHz 500 kHz Hz AUTO ON OFF ONCE STATe ON OFF LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 144 to 16 dBm dBm OFFSet 100 to 100 dB dB RCL INCLude EXCLude LIMit AMPLitude 144 to 16 dBm dBm MANual 144 to 16 dBm dBm MODE FIXed SWEep LIST STARt 144 to 16 dBm dBm STOP 144 to 16 dBm dBm STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB dB SOURce POWer ALC The commands checking the automatic level control are under this node SOURce POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth 100 kHz 500 kHz The command sets the bandwidth of the level control Example SOUR POW ALC BAND 100kHz SOURce POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth AUTO ON OFF ONCE The command determines the mode in adapting the bandwidth ON The bandwidth is automatically adapted OFF No bandwidth adaptation RST value is 100 kHz ONCE The bandwidth is adapted once then AUTO is automatically set to OFF Example SOUR POW ALC BAND AUTO ON 1038 6002 02 3 88 RST value is ON E 13 SM
197. 03 06 1500 000 000 1 MHz 3000 000 000 0 MHz 1500 000 000 2MHz 2297 200 000 0 2 Doubler2 SME06 3000 000 000 1 MHz 6000 000 000 0 MHz Synthesis octave 750 000 000 1 MHz 1500 000 000 0 MHz 1038 6002 02 5 6 E 13 SME Test Procedure Divider 2 375 000 000 1 MHz Divider 4 187 500 000 1 MHz Divider 8 93 750 000 1 MHz 0 001 000 0 MHz Mixer range 750 000 000 0 MHz 375 000 000 0 MHz 187 500 000 0 MHz 93 750 000 0 MHz Mixer range with a large deviation 0 001 000 0 MHz Table 5 20 Changeover limits of the SME Lowpass filters OPU1 No 0 0 1045 600 000 1 MHz 1 750 000 000 1 MHz 2 522 800 000 1 MHz 3 375 000 000 1 MHz 4 261 400 000 1 MHz 5 187 500 000 1 MHz 6 130 700 000 1 MHz 7 93 750 000 1 MHz 130 700 000 0 MHz to 1500 000 000 0 MHz 1045 600 000 0 MHz 750 000 000 0 MHz 522 800 000 0 MHz 375 000 000 0 MHz 261 400 000 0 MHz 187 500 000 0 MHz 130 700 000 0 MHz 1500 000 000 1 MHz 1885 200 000 1 MHz 2297 200 000 1 MHz Bandpass filters No 1 SME03E 03 06 2 SME03 06 3 Bandpass filters OPU6 NR 1 3000 000 000 1 MHz 1885 200 000 0 MHz 2297 200 000 0 MHz 3000 000 000 0 MHz 3770 400 000 0 MHz SMEO6 2 3770 400 000 1 MHz 4594 400 000 0 MHz 3 4594 400 000 1 MHz 6000000000 Oscillators SUM 1 750 000 000 1 MHz 1100 000 000 0 MHz 2 1100 000 000 1 MHz 1500 000 000 0 MHz Rectifier before mixer 0 001 000 0 MHz 9 362 500 0 MHz at
198. 036 7760 02 08 Multifunction Generator SM B8 1036 6805 02 Pulse Modulator SM B9 1039 5100 02 Pulse Modulator SM B50 1104 8410 02 Fast CPU complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN50081 1 1992 EN50082 1 1992 Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1995 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 1998 01 26 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1104 8410 02 CE E 1 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your Rohde amp Schwarz equipment always up to date please subscribe to our electronic newsletter at http www rohde schwarz com www response nsf newsletterpreselection or request the desired information and upgrades via email from your Customer Support Center addresses see below Feedback We want to know if we are meeting y
199. 1 3 10 30 100 and 250 kHz 1038 6002 02 5 22 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 22 FM Frequency Response 5 2 22 1 FM Frequency Response up to 100 kHz Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 2 Measurement gt Settings at the SME Test frequency 100 MHz Level 0 dBm Select EXT1 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 50 kHz gt Setting at the audio analyze Generator level 1 V Vpeak gt Determine the modulation frequency response difference between the highest and lowest modulation depth by varying the generator frequency of the audio analyzer from 10Hz to 100kHz Modulation frequency response max 0 5 dB gt Repeat measurement when frequency is fed at socket EXT2 and with setting MODULATION FM FM2 SOURCE EXT2 Note option SM B2 LF generator is fitted LFGEN2 can be selected in the MODULATION FM FM2 SOURCE menu and the test frequency be set using the internal generator for this measurement 5 2 22 2 FM Frequency Response up to 2 MHz Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 3 Test system 5 1 1 6 SMEO6 Measurement gt Setting at the SME Select EXT1 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Vary the frequency from 10Hz to 2 MHz and measure the modulation frequency response difference between highest and lowest modulation depth using an AC voltmeter at the sine wave generator Modulation frequency response max 3 dB R
200. 1 1 2 Test System with Audio Analyzer Test equipment Test setup 1038 6002 02 EXT1 EXT2 RF Modulation analyzer Section 5 1 item 15 Audio analyzer Section 5 1 item 14 5 3 LF Analyzer t Oscilloscope Audio Analyzer te Analyzer E 13 Test Instruments and Utilities SME 5 1 1 3 Test System for Broadband FM Test equipment Test setup Second signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Mixer Section 5 1 item 16 Sine wave generator Section 5 1 item 18 AC voltmeter Section 5 1 item 19 Broadband FM demodulator Section 5 1 item 20 RF attenuator pad Section 5 1 item 21 Lowpass filter Section 5 1 item 23 Sine wave generator RF oz 3 E e H H EXTI EXT2 AC voltmeter Masso pec LF Attenuator gt Low pass filter FM demodulator IF IF ho Auxillary transmitter 5 1 1 4 Test System for Pulse Modulation Test equipment Test setup 1038 6002 02 Second signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Oscilloscope Section 5 1 item 7 Mixer Section 5 1 item 16 Pulse generator Section 5 1 item 17 RF attenuator pad Section 5 1 item 21 Lowpass filter Section 5 1 item 23 Pulse genera
201. 1 E 12 IEC IEEE Bus Interface SME 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear active low resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting ATN Attention active low signals the transmission of interface messages inactive high signals the transmission of device dependent messages SRQ Service Request active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable active low permits the switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify has two functions in connection with ATN active low marks the end of data transmission with ATN high active low triggers a parallel poll with ATN low 3 Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data active low signals that one of the device connected is not ready for data transfer NDAC Not Data Accepted active low as long as the instrument connected is accepting the data present on the data bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via IEC bus can be equipped with different interface functions Table A 1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument Table A 1 Interface function Control Interface function character SH1 Handshake source function source handshake AH1 Handshake drain function acceptor handshake L4 Listener function 6 Talker function ability
202. 1 bit The maximum length of the message is 460 bit This message has to be selected first with the command BINary SELect Example SOUR FLEX MESS BIN DATA 111101 RST value is i e empty message 1038 6002 02 3 59 E 13 SOURce FLEX SME SOURce FLEX MESSage BINary DDIRection LEFT RIGHt The command determines the direction of binary messages LEFT Display from left to right RIGHtDisplay from right to left RST value is LEFT Example SOUR FLEX MESS BIN TYPE LEFT SOURce FLEX MESSage MNUMbering ON OFF The command determines whether every message is to be assigned with a number and whether this information is to be evaluated when received by the pager ON SME sends the number 0 for every message OFF No number is sent Example SOUR FLEX MESS MNUM OFF RST value is OFF SOURce FLEX MESSage MDRop ON OFF The command determines whether or not the messages are to be marked with a MAIL DROP flag see chapter 2 section Radiocommunication Service FLEX ON The messages are marked as volatile OFF The messages are not marked Example SOUR FLEX MESS MDR OFF RST value is OFF SOURce FLEX MESSage NUMeric String The command determines the type of character string the numeric message may consist of SME allows a maximum of 41 characters In addition to the 10 figures 0 to 9 other characters such as square brackets right and left upper c
203. 132 A A O T A 2 134 2 8 1 Setting the Sweep Range START STOP CENTER and SPAN 2 134 2 8 2 Selecting the Sweep Run SPACING LIN 2 135 2 8 8 Operating Modes MODE maea aa aeree iaaa inneren nennen snnt tnter ns 2 135 2 9 4 Trigger pubis it e eo crap eed E 2 136 2 8 5 Sweep 8 iii 2 136 2 8 6 BESSWOOD un ccena tme feo iv e betta p n inea b e P P 2 138 2 8 7 PLEVELE SWEEP nia ente eet vica o etum wore etis 2 140 2 8 00 B EEIE rai eiie voa di 2 141 BIN Dp IIS 2 143 2 9 1 Operating Modes MODE nnne nennen 2 143 2 9 2 Inputs QutpulS eerie Pe tos eles 2 144 LInad rud a 2 148 rpm 2 152 2 11 1 IEC Bus Address SYSTEM GPIB 2 152 2 11 2 Parameter of the RS232 Interface SYSTEM RS232 2 153 2 11 3 Suppressing Indications and Deleting Memories SYSTEM SECURITY 2 154 2 11 4 Indication of the IEC Bus Language LANGUAGE sess 2 155 2 11 5 Reference Frequency Internal External REF 2 155 2 11 6 Phase of the Output Signal PHASE 2 156 2 11 7 Password Input With Functions Protected 2 157 211 87 Calibration G
204. 2 2 117 E 13 Digital Modulation SME The following steps are required gt Generation of a telegram Set all ReFLEX25 parameters to the desired values Make sure that REFLEX25 STATE AUTO is set to ON Switch ReFLEX25 on and off again in order to generate a ReFLEX25 telegram in the SME memory This step is not required for custom frames Reading out of the telegram data You can now transfer any parts of the just generated telegram via IEC bus or the serial interface to a host processor Enter values from the above table for start and length in order to determine the fragment you wish to read out Use the following command sequence FORMAT PACKED Data output is performed in binary format SOUR DM DATA SEL XMEM Determine memory extension as source SOUR DM DATA XMEM MODE ALL Read out x and y bits SOUR DM DATA XMEM START start Specify the start address of the data to be read SOUR DM DATA XMEM LENGTH length Specify the length of the data to be read SOUR DM DATA DATA Read out the x bits SOUR DM DATA ATT Read out the y bits only required for four valued modulations The setting commands in this step except for the two last ones are also necessary if you wish to transfer custom frames to the SME without reading out data before Modifying the telegram data Each data byte received contains 8 valid x or y bits The MSB of each byte belongs to the symbol output first the LSB to that outp
205. 2 28 2 2 4 4 Select and Generate SELECT 2 29 2 24 2 Deletion of Lists DELETE LIST 2 30 2 2 4 3 Edition OF SS x at eio eco terere reto ahead ENGA 2 31 2 2 4 4 Pattern Setting to Operate the List 2 35 2 2 5 Save Recall Storing Calling of Instrument Settings 2 39 23 MenuSummalty 2 2 ngo ueste diete 2 40 2 4 nere cr eere prenant 2 41 2 411 Frequency Osdia neve vai Pavo Oia eeu ea gea deni Ed 2 42 IEEE Nau E 2 43 25 1 A Nt 2 45 2 5 2 Interrupt free Level Setting ssssssssssssssseeeennreeen nennen 2 45 2 5 3 Switching On Off Internal Level ContrOl coooonccnnnnccccnonocnncnononnnocanononcnanonononanonnnnnnnnos 2 46 2 5 4 Internal Level Control Bandwidth Selection eese 2 47 2 5 b User Correction DGOR center Hen ra neces 2 47 6 m LE 2 49 25 7 RF ON OFF FKE n nr a th de rad aaa ac 2 49 2 5 8 Reset Overload Protection only SME02 and SMEO9 2 49 2 6 Modulation ia Sa SURE YR un 2 50 261 Modulation Sources Eie dd dt ated aed Meee 2 50 2 6 1 1 S
206. 2 79 3 39 HF OQUI DUE iio eit ere decora inl 2 43 3 89 setting interrupt free sese 2 45 5 18 SWOOD tei T 2 140 3 79 unit 2 22 2 43 3 129 Olartlevelz oi oie e set mee 2 140 Stop level uite 2 140 SWOOP 2 140 LF 9 1 6 2 53 2 133 3 28 3 109 TOQUEN 2 133 3 110 signal shape 2 133 lesting dii et nnd ree deed 5 37 2 56 3 111 output 2 11 2 13 2 132 3 28 WIP e ate evo essersi ie eed tents 3 110 List attenuate DM etn 3 38 burst DM aieo usen eB 3 38 data DM ies 2 79 3 38 delete ert ot e DR e eno een as 2 30 1038 6002 02 SME dwell BIST iuit e dc t estet 3 76 dre eee RR 2 148 3 119 iyo Hu MEME ERES 2 31 entry Qelele ec 2 35 INS OM PE 2 34 fill 2 32 Irequency eee 2 143 3 76 function LEARN we 2 143 3 76 generate naire i sooo e eee 2 29 inputs outpuls sess 2 144 instrument states 3 120 level LIST we 2 143 3 77 level correction 2 47 3 32 manual processing of the 2 144 memory extension XMEM 2 81 8 39
207. 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue cf annex B Error Messages 6 User Request This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key i e when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument 1038 6002 02 3 137 E 13 SME Status Reporting System 3 8 3 4 STATus OPERation Register In the CONDition part this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being executing or in the EVENt part information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last reading It can be read using commands STATus OPERation CONDition or STATus OPERation EVENt Table 3 6 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus OPERation register Bit No Meaning CALibrating This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration SETTling This bit is set as long as the new status is settling after a setting command It is only set if the settling time is longer than the command processing time 3 SWEeping This bit is set while the instrument is performing a sweep This bit is set while the instrument is performing a measurement 5 WAIT for TRIGGER This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for a trigger event 8 LEARning This bit is set while the instrument is learning a list 9 MSEQuencing This bit is set while the instrument
208. 3 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed RCL INCLude EXCLude 3 63 SOURCce ILS STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 67 SOURce ILS SOURce INT2 INT2 EXT not SCPI 3 67 SOURce ILS TYPE GS GSLope LOCalize not SCPI 3 67 SOURCce ILS GS GSLope COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 68 SOURce ILS GS GSLope COMid FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz not SCPI 3 68 SOURCce ILS GS GSLope COMid STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 68 SOURCce ILS GS GSLope DDM CURRent 685 uA to 685 uA not SCPI 3 68 SOURCce ILS GS GSLope DDM DIRection UP DOWN not SCPI 3 68 SOURce ILS GS GSLope DDM LOGarithmic 999 9 dB to 999 9 dB not SCPI 3 68 SOURce ILS GS GSLope DDM DEPTh 0 8 to 0 8 not SCPI 3 68 SOURCce ILS GS GSLope LLOBe FREQuency 100 to 200 Hz not SCPI 3 69 SOURce ILS GS GSLope MODE NORM ULOBe LLOBe not SCPI 3 67 SOURCce ILS GS GSLOpe PHASe 0 to 120 deg not SCPI 3 69 SOURce ILS GS GSLope PRESet not SCPI 3 69 SOURce ILS GS GSLope SODepth 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 69 SOURce ILS GS GSLope ULOBe FREQuency 60 to 120 Hz not SCPI 3 69 1038 6002 02 8C 8 E 12 SME List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce ILS LOCalizer COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 70 SOURce ILS LOCalizer COMid FREQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz not SCPI 3 70 SOURCce ILS LOCalizer COMid STATe ON OFF not SC
209. 3 6 15 TES TSSVSIOIT e ere p deputari reis 3 122 3 6 16 3 124 3 621 7 FEINEESSVSIOITI a 3 129 3 7 Instrument Model and Command menneen nnn 3 130 3 74 InputlJnit ate etse a den ERE Eon Ru den 3 130 3 7 2 Command Recognition 3 131 3 7 3 Data Set and Instrument Hardware ja 3 131 3 7 4 Status Reporting System cccccccceecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeseeeeseaeeseeeseaes 3 131 9 7 55 ito etit code miter efus te ertet ope O ern eee ere 3 132 3 7 6 Command Sequence and Command 3 132 3 8 Status Reporting seen een nnn 3 133 3 8 1 Structure of an SCPI Status Register sssssssssseeeeneenes 3 133 3 8 2 Overview of the Status Registers sss 3 135 3 8 8 Description of the Status Registers ssssssssssssseeeeneeenens 3 136 3 8 3 1 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 3 136 3 8 8 2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register 3 137 3 8 8 8 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 3 137 3 8 3 4 STATus OPERa
210. 32 DATA FORMAT PARITY STOP BIT BAUD RATE HANDSHAKE 1038 6002 02 Indication of the number of data bits This value cannot be changed Indication of parity This value cannot be changed Indication of the number of stop bits This value cannot be changed Selection of the baud rate IEC bus short command SYST COMM SER BAUD 9600 Selection of the handshake OFF RTS CTS XON XOFF No handshake IEC bus short command SYST COMM SER PACE NONE SYST COMM SER CONT RTS ON Hardware handshake using the interface lines RTS and CTS This mode always is to be preferred to XON XOFF mode if permitted by the configuration of the host computer IEC bus short command SYST COMM SER CONT RTS RFR Software handshake using the ASCII codes 11h XON and 13h lt XOFF gt This mode is not recommended for binary data and for baud rates above 9600 baud IEC bus short command SYST COMM SER PACE XON 2 153 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 3 Suppressing Indications and Deleting Memories SYSTEM SECURITY For security interests indications can be suppressed and memories deleted in the SYSTEM SECURITY submenu Menu selection UTILITIES SYSTEM SECURITY a ne Say 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM GPIB LEVEL REF OSC RS232 ANNOTTATION FREQ ODULATION PHASE SECURITY ANNOTTATION AMPLITUDE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LANGUAGE CLEAR MEMORY LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG
211. 4 AFSK modulation esses eene 2 97 3 48 A Abort digital data recording cesse 2 83 triggered act ons eene reinen eot inni 3 17 Active edge external trigger PULSE Input ri ideo 2 62 3 128 TRIGGER input 2 83 2 166 3 40 3 128 Adaress IEG PUS e ento ades 3 3 3 118 pager ERMES cite qe does 2 104 3 52 2 2 110 3 58 2 128 3 85 REFLEX acacia 2 116 3 93 3 94 Start thease 2 83 3 39 Addressed commands Airplane position Alphanumeric message 2 104 Alternate switching off of modulations 2 51 AM distortion factor e irte trier iod 5 21 frequency 2 55 8 31 frequency 5 20 Modulation depth etai eed 5 20 ccc 2 46 polarity 3 iun 2 55 3 31 residual PhiM esteri ren 5 21 Amplitude marker RF 2 139 3 78 modulation AM 2 54 3 30 modulator calibration esses 2 159 Antenna lobe frequency Z5 2 69 3 71 IES3EOQ ut etc tete ts 2 74 3 73 phase 2 70 3 71 IESO Cicas 2 74 3 74 25 Association of Public Safety Communications Officers Project 25 tii ti 2 78 Ra
212. 4K SOURce DM GMSK BRATe 2 4 kb s to 1000 kb s not SCPI 3 42 SOURce DM GMSK DCODer ON OFF not SCPI 3 42 SOURce DM GMSK FILTer 0 2 0 25 0 3 0 4 0 5 not SCPI 3 42 SOURce DM GMSK GSLope ON OFF not SCPI 3 43 SOURce DM GMSK POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 43 SOURce DM GFSK STANdard DECT CT2 CT3 not SCPI 3 43 SOURce DM GFSK BRATe 10 to 585 kb s and 640 to 1170 kb s not SCPI 3 43 SOURce DM GFSK DEViation 14 14 4 18 20 0 25 2 160 180 not SCPI 3 44 202 259 288 317 403 kHz SOURce DM GFSK FILTer 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 not SCPI 3 44 SOURce DM GFSK POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 44 SOURce DM QPSK STANdard NADC PDC TFTS TETRa APCO not SCPI 3 44 MSAT INMarsat SOURce DM QPSK TYPE PSK OQPSk Pl4Qpsk 4 not SCPI 3 45 1038 6002 02 8C 4 E 12 SME List of Commands Parameter Command SCPI Page info SOURce DM QPSK BRATe 1 to 24 3 kb s and 27 0 to 48 6 kb s not SCPI 3 45 SOURce DM QPSK CODing NADC PDC TFTS TETRa APCO not SCPI 3 45 MSAT INMarsat SOURce DM QPSK FILTer COSine SCOSine 0 35 0 4 0 5 0 6 not SCPI 3 46 COSine 0 2 SOURce DM QPSK POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 46 SOURce DM FSK STANdard POCSag512 POCSag1200 not SCPI 3 46 POCSag2400 CITYruf512 CITYruf1200 CITYruf2400 FLEX1600 FLEX3200 SOURce DM
213. 5 114 75 115 45 116 15 116 90 117 60 109 20 110 60 112 00 112 70 113 40 114 10 114 80 115 50 116 20 116 95 117 65 HHBHHHBBHBHHBBH FETT TT ek 109 25 110 65 112 05 112 75 113 45 114 15 114 85 115 55 116 25 117 00 117 70 EXT AM SENS 1V 100 Switching on off an external modulation signal via socket EXT 1 OFF External AM input EXT1 switched off ON External AM input EXT1 activated The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation depth IEC bus command SOUR VOR SOUR INT2 EXT Note As automatic level monitoring of the external modulation signal is switched off in this operating mode there can be an overmodulation as a function of the level of the external signal without a corresponding caution message being generated In order to avoid an overmodulation the peak value of the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of the modulation depths of the remaining VOR signal components 1038 6002 02 2 67 E 13 Analog Modulations SME 2 6 2 7 2 ILS Glide Slope Modulation ILS GS Notes The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another ILS GS and AM ILS GS and PM if SOURCE PM LFGEN2 ILS GS and FM if SOURCE FM LFGEN2 In the AM FM PM and LF output menu the message ILS GS is displayed under LFGEN2 if the ILS GS modulation is activated With setting CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DEFINED a change to modu
214. 5 2 26 Carrier frequency Deviation with FM ssssssseseseeeeeeneenennn nennen 5 25 1039 1856 12 8 E 13 SME Contents 5 227 FM Stereo Modulation ette ee 5 25 5 2 28 PHM Deviation Settirig einer epe Pent t n Pete e REP Rod 5 26 5 2 29 PhiM Frequency ennt nennen nnne 5 26 5 2 30 PNM Distortion ESC eed eet pet orte cie ee 5 27 5 2 31 Internal Modulation Generator sssseseee nnne 5 27 5 2 32 Pulse Modulation Option SM B3 B8 B9 sse 5 28 5 2 32 ON OEE s Fallos i certet ee ro inita ipe Pet vacet da eat eruta 5 28 5 2 32 2 Dynamic Characteristics sssssssssssseseseseeeen enne 5 28 5 2 33 GFSK Modulation Option SME B1 1 sess 5 29 PO Mio EET 5 29 5 2 39 2 Deviation ioni oec toten eec ax socie core eee ret bone sx 5 31 5 2 94 QPSK Modulation tuae uses ies 5 32 5 2 94 1 Spectrum iiid oie a HER dede dp ERE eee 5 32 5 2 34 2 Vector Error Standard 15 54 5 33 5 2 35 5 34 52 351 OS POCIUM ert Retos ipee prt e Dee HE POET ED e duoc 5 34 5 2 95 2 Phases Error uu eer e ee Utere eret ete ee oos 5 35
215. 5 years serves to supply the RAM with power When the battery is discharged the data stored will be lost Exchanging the battery is described in Chapter 4 1038 6002 02 1 2 E 13 Functional Test SME 1 1 6 Preset Setting A defined setting status is achieved by pressing the PRESET key Preset Status RF frequency 100 MHz RF level 30 dBm Reference frequency internal adjustment off Offsets 0 Modulations switched off Transient free level setting switched off level attenuator mode AUTO Internal level control level ALC ON User correction level UCOR OFF PLL bandwidth auto LF output switched off Sweep switched off List mode switched off Memory sequence switched off Suppression of indications system security unaltered Protection of calibration data protection lock unaltered Settings stored unaltered Data lists etc stored unaltered IEC bus address unaltered Beeper unaltered All parameters and circuit states even those of operating modes which are not activated are preset by means of Preset The presettings going beyond the above list can be seen from the menu representations as of Section 2 4 which each indicate the Preset setting status 1 2 Functional Test On switching on the instrument and permanently during operation the SME carries out a self test The ROM contents as well as the battery of the non volatile RAM are checked on switching on the instrument and the RAM contents with every calling the memory
216. 6 5 1 1 5 high level 17 Pulse generator Pulse repetition frequency 377 2100 02 5 1 1 4 up to 10 MHz 5 2 32 level TTL 5 2 33 5 2 40 18 Sine wave generator 10 Hz to 2 MHz 1013 0000 02 5 1 1 3 1 V peak 1013 1494 02 377 2100 02 19 AC voltmeter 10 Hz to 2 MHz 350 5315 03 5 1 1 3 5 2 39 20 Broadband FM Delay line discriminator input 5 1 1 3 demodulator frequency 50 MHz slope 5 5 1 1 5 V MHz demodulation bandwidth 2 MHz 21 RF attenuator pad D c to 1 5 GHz SME02 5 1 1 3 D c to GHz SME03 5 1 1 4 D c to 6 GHz SME06 5 1 1 5 3 dB 22 Lowpass filter Attenuation 5 1 1 8 up to 50 MHz 1 dB 5 1 1 4 with 100 MHz 20 dB 5 1 1 5 with 200 MHz 40 dB 1038 6002 02 5 2 E 13 SME Test Instruments and Utilities Item Type of instrument Specification required Suitable R amp S R amp S order no Application instrument 23 Demodulator for digital Vector error measurement with FSEA20 with 1065 6000 20 5 2 34 2 modulations QPSK modulation option FSE B7 1066 4317 02 5 2 35 2 Phase error measurement with GMSK modulation 25 VSWR directional coupler 3 GHz to 6 GHz SME06 5 2 12 26 RF attenuator D c to 6 GHz SME06 5 1 1 6 20 dB 5 1 1 Test Systems to Measure Modulation Characteristics 5 1 1 1 Standard Test System Test equipment Test setup Modulation analyzer Section 5 1 item 15 Oscilloscope for 5 2 35 to 5 2 37 Section 5 1 item 7 15 5
217. 600 bps the message is transmitted for every setting in phase A With 3200 bps the message is transmitted in phase A if A and B are set and transmitted in phase C if C and D are set With 6400 bps the message is transmitted in all the four phases depending on the relevant setting Each pager is set to one phase The phase can be calculated from the CAPCODE of a pager as shown below Phase Integer CAPCODE 4 modulo 4 with O A 1 B etc IEC bus command SOUR FLEX PHAS A Selection of message category for all frames where FRAME CONTENT contains the entry X or For all other values of FRAME CONTENTS this setting is ignored TONE tone only message NUMERIC numeric message with x3 figures short message SNUMERIC special numeric message ALPHANUM alphanumeric message SECURE secure alphanumeric message BIN binary message IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS CAT TONE Entry of the number of calls following the first call according to FLEX TD For the value 0 no repeat normal FLEX frames are transmitted whereas subframes according to FLEX TD are used with other values The repeat calls are transmitted at the frame interval defined by the SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE A frame may contain a new message and repetitions of previous messages Notes Since the SME transmits the messages always completely in a sub frame the maximum length of the SME generated message decreases with increasing values
218. 9 CLOCK Opens a window to set the clock parameters The current settings are displayed cf Section QPSK modulation LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction OFF The level reduction is switched off NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of gt 800B IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV MODE NORM LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction The level reduction is internally controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via connector BURST A logic 1 in the data list causes a level reduction IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV 0dB 1038 6002 02 2 100 E 13 SME Digital Modulation MODE EXECUTE SINGLE MODE gt SELECT STANDARD BIT RATE DEVIATION SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator AUTO The data are always repeated SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO Starts a single servicing of the data This action to be executed is only indicated and is only effective if MODE is set to SINGLE IEC bus commands TRIG DM SOUR SING TRIG DM Opens a window to select the standard FFSK modulation see Table 2 5 By se
219. 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 1996 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 9502004 This is to certify that Equipment type Order No Designation SME02 03 06 1038 6002 02 03 06 Signal Generator SME03A 1038 6002 53 SMEOSE 1038 6002 13 i SME42 1038 6002 42 i SME22 23 24 1038 6002 22 23 24 Power Signal Generator SME B11 1036 8720 02 22 DM Coder SME B12 1039 4090 02 8MB Memory Extension complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 73 23 EEC revised by 93 68 EEC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN61010 1 1991 EN50081 1 1992 EN50082 1 1992 Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1995 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 1998 01 26 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1038 6002 00 CE E 3 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 9502055 This is to certify that Equipment type Order No Designation SM B1 1036 7599 02 Reference Oszillator SM B2 1036 7947 02 08 LF Generator SM B3 1036 6340 02 Pulse Modulator SM B4 1036 9310 02 Pulse Generator SM B5 1036 8489 02 FM PHIM Modulator SM B6 1
220. ALIB cocinan lante a Ra tes 2 158 2 11 9 Indications of Module Variants DIAG CONFIG seen 2 162 2 11 10 Voltage Indication of Test Points DIAG TPOINT 2 163 2 11 11 Indications of Service Data 01 2 164 2 2 Test TEST C LP E 2 164 2 11 13 Assigning Modulations to the MOD ON OFF Key 2 165 2 11 14 Setting Auxiliary Inputs Outputs AUX 2 166 2 11 15 Switching On Off Beeper BEEPER 2 167 2 11 16 Installation of Software Option ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeecaeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeesaeeseeeseneeeeeas 2 168 AAA A 2 169 ueni 2 169 Etror Messages a 2 170 1039 1856 12 5 E 13 Contents SME 3 Remote Conde 3 1 3 1 A 3 1 3 2 Brief DIE 3 1 Eier eR 3 1 3 2 2 77 RS 232 Interface o ite Hg de eet in eb e Eee evened 3 2 3 3 Switchover to Remote Control eeseseeeseiseeeeeeeeeeee seen rc 3 2 3 3 4 Remote Control via IEC Bus ssssssssssssseee eee 3 3 3 3 1 1 Setting the Device 3 3 3 3 1 2 Indications during Remote Control
221. ATe ON OFF 3 115 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 to 30 3 116 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 3 116 57600 115200 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR 3 116 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PACE XON NONE 3 116 SYSTem ERRor 3 116 SYSTem KLOCk ON OFF 3 117 SYSTem MODE FlXed MSEQence not SCPI 3 117 SYSTem MSEQuence CATalog not SCPI 3 117 SYSTem MSEQuence DELete Name of sequence not SCPI 3 117 SYSTem MSEQuence DELete ALL not SCPI 3 117 SYSTem MSEQuence DWELI 50 ms to 60 s 50 ms to 60 s not SCPI 3 117 1038 6002 02 8C 15 E 12 List of Commands Command SME Parameter SCPI Page SYSTem MSEQuence FREE not SCPI 3 118 SYSTem MSEQuence MODE AUTO STEP not SCPI 3 118 SYSTem MSEQuence SELect Name of sequence not SCPI 3 118 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL 1 to 50 1 to 50 not SCPI 3 118 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL POINts not SCPI 3 118 SYSTem PRESet 3 118 SYSTem PROTect1 2 3 STATe ON OFF password not SCPI 3 119 SYSTem SECurity STATe ON OFF 3 119 SYSTem SERRor not SCPI 3 119 SYSTem VERSion not SCPI 3 119 TEST BATTery XMEM 3 121 TEST BATTery RAM 3 121 TEST DIRect ATTC Subaddress hex data string not SCPI 3 120 TEST DIRect DCOD Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect DSYNOMUX Subaddress hex data
222. B1 remains switched on which increases frequency accuracy Frequency accuracy after switching on when the oven controlled reference oscillator is fitted option SM B1 When switching on from the STANDBY mode the specified frequency accuracy is reached immediately If the power switch was switched off the reference oscillator needs some minutes of warm up time to reach its nominal frequency During this period of time the output frequency does not yet reach its final value either In the status line in the header field of the display the message OVEN COLD is displayed for this time 1 1 4 Setting Contrast and Brightness of the Display O NE E Brightness control Contrast control Contrast and brightness of the display can be set by means of the contrast and brightness controls situated below the display 1 1 5 RAM With Battery Back Up The SME has a static read write memory CMOS RAM with battery back up in which 50 different complete settings of the instrument can be stored cf Chapter 2 section Storing and Calling of Instrument Settings In addition all data and or lists the user enters himself such as for list mode memory sequence user correction of the level and data sequences with digital modulation are stored in the RAM Further all data of the calibrations running within the instrument in the SME are stored in the RAM cf Chapter 2 section Calibration A lithium battery with a service life of approx
223. CCOunt ATTenuator 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 21 DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer 3 22 1038 6002 02 8C 1 E 12 List of Commands Parameter SME Command SCPI Page info DIAGnostic INFO MODules 3 22 DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe 3 22 DIAGnostic INFO SDATe 3 22 DIAGnostic MEASure POINt 3 22 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum AT Tenuate not SCPI 3 23 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum BURSt DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum CALCulate DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum DATA 3 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum TOTal DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude ON OFF 23 not SCPI 3 23 24 3 3 24 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency ON OFF NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed MEMory NSTates OUTPut AMODe AUTO FIXed 3 24 3 25 3 25 3 26 not SCPI 3 26 OUTPut BLANk POLarity NORMal INVerted 3 27 OUTPut IMPedance 3 27 OUTPut PROTection CLEar 3 27 OUTPut PROTection TRIPped 3 27 OUTPut STATe ON OFF 3 27 OUTPut STATe PON OFF UNCHanged not SCPI 3 27 OUTPut2 SOURce 0 2 not SCPI 3 28 OUTPut2 SOURce STEReo MPX PILot not SCPI 3 28 OUTPut2 STATe ON OFF 3 28 OUTPut2 VOLTage 0Vto4V not SCPI 3 28 SOURce AM DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT 3 30 SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling AC DC 3 30 1038 6002 02 8C 2 E 12 SME List of Commands Parameter
224. CH BASE REFL25 SI FCH ANUMber and RI to calculate and set the RF The values set automatically can be changed subsequently without recalculation of the telegram These modifications take effect immediately However they do not react on the output parameters REFL25 SI FCH SCIBase etc see above Example SOUR REFL25 AAD ON EFL25 SI FSPacing are used RST value is ON SOURce REFLex25 TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE 1038 6002 02 This command Trigger ACTion determines the action triggered by a trigger event The valid trigger events free running external signal TRG etc are specified by the command TRIGger DM SOURce The assignment manual operation remote control is also described with this command MESSage A valid trigger event causes the next ALPH NUM or TONE frame see REFL25 FCONtent to be actually output as such and not as IDLE frame The output of the ReFLEX telegram is only started by a valid trigger event Then the frames are sent exactly as specified in REFL25 FCONtent until REFL25 STATe is switched to OFF This setting is suitable for starting several SMEs synchronously The output of the ReFLEX telegram is only started by a valid trigger event After recognition of this signal exactly one cycle up to 128 frames is output The frames are output exactly as specified in REFL25 FCONT After execution of the cycle the SME waits for its trigger pulse again defined under TRIG
225. DATA 0 1 0 1 not SCPI 3 38 SOURce DM BASic DATA DATA POINts not SCPI 3 38 SOURce DM BASic DATA ATTenuate 0 1 0 1 not SCPI 3 38 SOURce DM BASic DATA ATTenuate POINts not SCPI 3 38 SOURce DM BASic DATA BURSt 0 1 0 1 not SCPI 3 38 1038 6002 02 8C 3 E 12 List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce DM BASic DATA BURSt POINts not SCPI 3 38 SOURce DM BASic DATA ALEVel 0 to 60 dB not SCPI 3 39 SOURce DM BASic DATA ALEVel MODE NORM MAX not SCPI 3 39 SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM STARt 1 to 8388478 XMEM MODE DATA not SCPI 3 39 1 to 1048558 XMEM MODE ALL SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM LENGth 3 to 8388480 XMEM MODE DATA not SCPI 3 39 3 to 1048560 XMEM MODE ALL SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM LENGth AUTO ON OFF not SCPI 3 39 SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM MODE DATA ALL not SCPI 3 39 SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM RECord not SCPI 3 40 SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM TRIGger ON OFF not SCPI 3 40 SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative not SCPI 3 40 SOURce DM BASic PRBS LENGth 9 15 20 21 23 not SCPI 3 40 SOURce DM COMPlex CLOCk SOURCce INT EXT not SCPI 3 40 SOURce DM GMSK STANdard GSM PCN CDPD MC9 MOBitex not SCPI 3 41 MD24N MD24W MD36N MD36W MD48N MD48W MD80W MD96N MD96W MD100W MD120W DSRR DSRR
226. DDM DEPT 0 RST value is 0 SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM DIRection LEFT RIGHt The command enters the DDM value in dB This parameter is coupled with SOURCe ILS LOC DDM DEPTh LEFT The airplane is too much to the right it must turn to the left RIGHtThe airplane is too much to the left it must turn to the right Example SOUR ILS LOC DDM DIR LEFT RST value is LEFT SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM LOGarithmic 999 9 dB to 999 9 dB The command enters the DDM value in dB This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS LOC DDM DEPTh and CURRent Example SOUR ILS LOC DDM LOG 0 RST value is 0 0 dB SOURce ILS LOCalizer LLOBe The commands to configure the signals of the left ILS LOC antenna lobe Left LOBe are under this node SOURce ILS LOCalizer LLOBe FREQuency 60 to 120 Hz The command sets the frequency Normally it is 90 Hz This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS LOC RLOBe FREQuency As ratio of LLOBe FREQuency RLOBe FREQuency must always be 3 5 RLOBe FREQuency is readjusted accordingly Example SOUR ILS LOC LLOB FREQ 90 RST value is 90 Hz 1038 6002 02 3 73 E 13 SOURce ILS SME SOURce ILS LOCalizer RLOBe The commands to configure the signal of the right ILS LOC antenna lobe Right LOBe are under this node SOURce ILS LOCalizer RLOBe FREQuency 100 to 200 Hz The command sets the frequency Normally it is 150 Hz This parameter is coupled with SO
227. DEV 160 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 202 kHz BxT 0 4 DEV 288 kHz BxT 0 6 DEV 288 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 403 kHz BxT 0 7 DEV 14 4 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 20 0 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 25 2 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 180 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 259 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 288 kHz BxT 0 5 DEV 317 kHz The values currently set are displayed Note In the RF range from 130 to 187 MHz deviations gt 200 kHz are not possible IEC bus command SOUR DM GFSK FILT 0 5 DEV 288kHz Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation NORM Logic 1 generates a positive deviation INV Logic 1 generates a negative deviation IEC bus command Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor SOUR DM GFSK POL NORM Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Selection of the editor function to process the selected list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 90 SME 2 6 3 7 QPSK Modulation Menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK offers access to settings for QPSK modulation setting range of the bit rate is 1 00 to 24 3 kbps and 27 0 to 48 6 kbps In range 1 00 to 24 3 kbps the nonharmonic suppression is reduced by aliasing products The spurious products occur at the frequency spacing 15 x bit rate The spurious level is shown in the diagram Spurios products dBc 80 20 30 Menu selection DIGITAL MOD QPSK 40 50 Bit rate kps Digital Modulation
228. DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HE LP SE MODE AUTO SINGLE 199 RESET SEQUENCE gt MSEQ3 1 CURRENT INDEX MSEQ2 100 MSEQ4 123 BCT LIST DE ETE LIST FUNCTION Fig 2 9 DELETE LIST selection window 1038 6002 02 2 30 E 13 SME List Editor 2 2 4 3 Edition of Lists Due to the selection of an edit mode on the OPERATION page the EDIT page is automatically activated When the EDIT VIEW function is selected the largest possible section of the list is displayed cf Fig 2 10 In the case of block functions FILL INSERT and DELETE an input window is additionally displayed cf Fig 2 11 to 2 13 Functions SELECT LIST and FUNCTION are available on the EDIT page as on the OPERATION page Return to the OPERATION page is effected by pressing the SELECT key twice Single value function EDIT VIEW By selecting the EDIT VIEW function the entire list can be viewed or modifications of single values be carried out If the cursor marks a value in the INDEX column of the list the EDIT mode is exited by pressing the RETURN key The menu cursor then marks FUNCTION again There is no separate function for storing the list This means that every modification of the list is transferred to the internal data set and has an effect on exiting the EDIT VIEW function Selection FUNCTION EDIT VIEW
229. DULATION STEREO preset 2 63 Menu MODULATION VOR preset setting 2 65 Menu MODULATION ILS GS preset 2 68 11 E 13 Contents SME Fig 2 35 Menu MODULATION ILS LOC preset setting sseeeeeee 2 72 Fig 2 36 Menu MODULATION MKR BCN preset settings 2 76 Fig 2 37 Menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK edit 2 79 Fig 2 38 Signal example with respect to DM delay and delays of level control 2 80 Fig 2 39 Selection of the memory extension in submenu SELECT LIST 2 81 Fig 2 40 Submenu DIGITAL MOD GMSK CONFIG 2 82 Fig 2 41 Menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK preset setting 2 87 Fig 2 42 Menu DIGITAL MOD GFSK preset setting sese 2 89 Fig 2 43 Menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK preset setting sseeeeee 2 91 Fig 2 44 Submenu DIGITAL MOD QPSK CLOCK preset 2 92 Fig 2 45 Menu DIGITAL MOD FSK preset setting sse 2 94 Fig 2 46 Menu DIGITAL MOD 4FSK preset setting sse 2 97 Fig 2 47 Menu DIGITAL MOD FFSK preset 2 100 Fig 2 48 Menu DIGITAL MOD ERMES
230. E AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG2 SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT 2 135 E 13 Sweep EXT STEP OFF SME Step by step run by means of the external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE STEP SOUR2 SWE MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG2 SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT The sweep operating mode is switched off IEC bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE CW SOUR2 FREQ MODE CW SOUR POW MODE CW 2 8 4 Trigger Input An external signal at the rear input triggers the sweep in the EXT SINGLE and EXT STEP operating modes The polarity of the active trigger edge can be set in menu UTILITIES AUX I O EXT TRIG SLOPE 2 8 5 Sweep Outputs Outputs X AXIS BLANK and MARKER are available at the rear of the instrument to control and trigger oscilloscopes or XY recorders X AXIS BLANK 1038 6002 02 With sweep switched on this output supplies a voltage ramp of 0 to 10 V for the X deflection of an oscilloscope or an XY recorder This output supplies a signal OV 5V to trigger and blank an oscilloscope or for the PEN LIFT control of an XY recorder
231. E SOURce POWer SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFFFehler Textmarke nicht definiert The command switches level control on or off ON Level control is permanently switched on OFF Level control is switched on for a short period of time if the level changes Example SOUR POW ALC STAT ON RST value is ON SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 144 to 16 dBm The command sets the RF output level in operating mode CW UP and DOWN can be indicated in addition to numeric values Then the level is increased or reduced by the value indicated under SOURCe POWer STEP In this command the OFFSet value is considered as with input value AMPLITUDE in the LEVEL LEVEL menu Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for POWer OFFSet 0 The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula cf Chapter 2 Section Level Offset as well 144dBm OFFSet to 16dBm OFFSet The keywords of this command are optional to a large extent thus the long as well as the short form of the command is shown in the example RST value is 30 dBm Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 15 or POW 15 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude OFFSet 100 to 100 dB The command enters the constant level offset of a series connected attenuator amplifier cf Chapter 2 Section Level Offset If a level offset is entered the level entered using POWer AMPLitude does no longer conform to the RF o
232. EC bus short command Input value of the dwell time per step IEC bus short command SOUR2 SWE STEP LIN 1kHz SOUR2 SWE DWEL Selection of the sweep run linear or logarithmic IEC bus short command Selection of the sweep operating mode SOUR2 FREQ MODE IEC bus short command SOUR2 SWE SPAC 15ms LIN cf Section 2 8 3 SWE SOUR2 SWE MODE TRIG2 S SOUR O AUTO UR SING Starts a single sweep run This action to be executed is only indicated and is only effective if MODE SINGLE is selected IEC bus short command Sets the starting frequency IEC bus short command TRIG ABOR Input value of the frequency for the marker selected SOUR2 MARK1 FREQ 1kHz IEC bus short command Switching on off the marker selected SOUR2 MARK1 OFF IEC bus short command 2 142 E 13 SME LIST Mode 2 9 LIST Mode A sequence of predefined frequency and level points is executed in the LIST mode similar as in a sweep Differently from the sweep however a list with freely selectable pairs of values frequency and level can be generated The specified range of the frequency comprises the entire adjustable frequency range of the instrument The specified range of the level covers a 20 dB range If the permissible variation range is exceeded the level error increases Caution After the generation or change of a list in the
233. ECTOR ANALYZER DIGITAL STANDARDS NADC ENTER TRIGGER FIND BURST OFF MODE MEAS RESULTS SYMB TABLE ERRORS RMS vector error 2 596 1 3 typically 1038 6002 02 5 33 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 35 GMSK Modulation 5 2 35 1 Spectrum Test equipment Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 Test setup Connect the spectrum analyzer to the RF output socket of the SME Measurement gt Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 900 MHz Level 0 dBm in menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK SOURCE PRBS PRBS 23 bit SELECT STANDARD GSM gt Settings at the spectrum analyzer Center frequency 900 MHz Span 1 MHz Resolution bandwidth 10 kHz Video bandwidth 10 Hz A spectrum according to Fig 5 3 must be visible at the spectrum analyzer dBm 0 i bo de am o afm o i 100 899 5 900 900 5 MHz Fig 5 3 Spectrum with GMSK 1038 6002 02 5 34 E 13 SME The signal level with respect to the level at a center frequency as a function of the offset frequency must Offset frequency evel adhere to the following tolerances 5 2 35 2 Phase Error Test equipment Test setup Measurement 1038 6002 02 Test Procedure 50 kHz 2 1 dB 100 kHz 8 6 dB 2 dB 150 kHz 20 dB 3 dB 220 kHz 36 dB 3 dB 300 kHz 52 dB 3 dB FSEA with option FSE B7 Section 5 1 item 23 Connect FSEA to the RF output socket of the SME gt Settings at th
234. ENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable register In reading out the content of the EVENt part is deleted Example STAT QUES EVEN Response 1 STATus QUEStionable CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register In reading out the content of the CONDition part is not deleted Example STAT QUES COND Response 2 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 to 32767STATus QUEStionable PT RansitionB to The command Positive TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus QUEStionable register from 0 to 1 for transitions of the CONDition bit Example STAT QUES PTR 32767 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Negative TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus QUEStionable register from 1 to 0 for transitions of the CONDition bit Example STAT QUES NTR 0 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 to 32767 The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part selectively enables the individual events of the appropriate EVENt part for the sum bit in the status byte Example STAT QUES ENAB 1 STATus QUEue NEXT The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time and thus deletes it Positive error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument negative error numbers error messages spe
235. EQ or LEVEL keys pressing the FREQ and or LEVEL key again deletes the entire input 2 2 4 Sample Setting for First Users First users most quickly become familiar with the operation of the instrument if they execute the pattern setting of this section First frequency and level of the RF output signal are set via keys FREQ and LEVEL in the DATA INPUT field Frequency 250 MHz Level 10 dBm Operating steps Explanations mug Reset the instrument to the defined state DATA INPUT pee 1215110 Set the frequency to 250 MHz The menu cursor marks the permanent frequency indication DATA INPUT Set the level to 10 dBm The menu 1 cursor marks the permanent level wa 1 0 ee indication Reset the menu cursor to the menu field RETURN 1038 6002 02 2 23 E 13 Sample Setting for First Users The output signal is to be amplitude modulated next AM modulation depth 15 5 AM signal 3 kHz sine Operating steps MENU VARIATION SELECT MENU VARIATION MODULATION MENU VARIATION SELECT SME Explanations Select MODULATION menu Set menu cursor to MODULATION using the rotary knob and subsequently press SELECT key The submenu is displayed Select AM submenu The AM setting menu is displayed MENU VARIATION Select AM DEPTH parameter The menu cursor marks the setting value AM DEPTH DATA INPUT Enter modulation depth 15 5 96 and
236. EX SI TIME 12 00 The parameters of this section are used for setting the destination address as well as the useful data of the message Input value of the CAPCODE of the pager to be called as printed on the receiver CAPCODE is defined in FLEX standard The CAPCODE contains the addresses of the receiver as well as frame and phase information IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS CAPC 0000001 Selection of which settings are influenced by a change of CAPCODE NONE influence PHASE The phase is adjusted to the value contained in CAPCODE This is performed whenever the setting for CAPCODE is changed FRAME CONTENT is set so that in all the frames evaluated by the receiver and only in those FLEX data are also transmitted However FRAME CONTENTS is changed only for frames where FRAME CONTENTS contains an X x or a blank For all other frames FRAME CONTENTS is left unchanged BOTH PHASE as well as FRAME CONTENT are adjusted IEC bus command SOUR FLEX PHAS AUTO ON SOUR FLEX FCON AUTO ON FRAME 2 110 E 13 SME PHASE CATEGORY REPEATS TONE NUMBER NUMERIC SNUMERIC MESSAGE 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Selection of which phase A to D the message is to be transmitted Since each frame lasts 1 875 sec independent of the modulation and more data can be transmitted at bit rates higher than 1600 bps several independent channels phases are bit multiplexed With 1
237. Edit function INSERT Input window sese 2 34 Edit function DELETE Input eme 2 35 Starting point of the pattern setting 2 36 Pattern setting Edition of a list 2 38 Menu FREQUENCY preset setting 2 41 Example of a circuit with frequency offset sessssseee 2 42 Menu LEVEL preset setting POWER RESOLUTION is set to 0 01 dB 2 43 Example of a circuit with level offset 2 45 Menu LEVEL ALC preset setting sssessseseeeeeenneennen 2 46 Menu LEVEL OPERATION side sese 2 47 Menu LEVEL EDIT SiO cococccccnccconocananoccconcccnnncnnonnnnnonn nan c cnn nennen 2 48 Menu EEVELE EMELF iere na 2 49 Menu MODULATION AM preset setting 2 54 Menu MODULATION FM preset setting oooonocconncccinccconocanonacanancccnnnnnnnona nana nn cancion 2 56 Dependency of the FM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set 2 57 Menu MODULATION PM preset setting ssesseennnme 2 58 Dependency of the PM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set 2 59 Signal example 1 single pulse TRIGGER MODE 2 60 Signal example 2 double pulse TRIGGER MODE EXT SLOPE POS 2 61 Menu MODULATION PULSE preset setting 2 61 Menu MO
238. F MODULATION FM Option SM B5 PM Option SM B5 PULSE Option SM B3 B8 B9 STEREO Option SM B5 B6 VOR Option SM B6 ILS GS Option SM B6 ILS LOC Option SM B6 MKR BCN Option SM B6 DIGITAL 7L GMSK Option SME B11 GSFK Option SME B11 QPSK Option SME B11 GSK Option SME B11 4FSK Option SME B11 FFSK Option SME B11 ERMES Option SME B11 and SME B12 FLEX Option SME B11 SME B12 and SME B41 POCSAG Option SME B11 SME B12 and SME B42 LF OUTPUT REFLEX Option SME B11 SME B12 and SME B43 SWEEP FREQ LEVEL LFGEN Option SM B2 SM B6 LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB REF OSC RS232 PHASE SECURITY PROTECT LANGUAGE CALIB VCO SUM DIAG CONFIG LEV PRESET TEST TPOINT PULSE GEN Option SM B4 MOD KEY PARAM REFOSC AUX I O QPSK Option SME B11 BEEPER LEVEL HELP 2 40 E 13 SME RF Frequency 2 4 RF Frequency The frequency of the RF output signal can be set directly using the FREQ key cf Section 2 2 2 5 or by accessing menu FREQUENCY In the FREQUENCY menu the frequency of the RF output signal is indicated under FREQUENCY In the case of frequency settings effected in the FREQUENCY menu the value entered directly is the frequency of the RF output signal The input value of frequency settings opened by means of the FREQ key considers the offset in calculation cf next Section This offers the possibility of entering the
239. GE 1V Read AC voltage of the pilot tone Rated value nre etes 0 707 14mMV efe 1038 6002 02 5 41 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 40 Memory Extension Option SME B12 Note To ensure a proper functioning of the memory extension XMEM the modification status of the DM coder has to be at least VAR 2 REV 4 Menu UTILITIES DIAG CONFIG offers access to indication of module modification status The read write function via the IEC IEEE bus and the interplay between the XMEM and the DM coder during GFSK modulation high bit rate are first checked followed by checks of the dibit synchronization for QPSK and external triggering 5 2 40 1 Read Write Check via the IEC IEEE Bus Measurement Read in read out gt Call up digital modulation GFSK via the IEC IEEE bus on the SME and activate memory extension in R amp S BASIC EC OUT 28 DM TYPE GFSK STAT ON SOUR DATA EC OUT 28 SOUR DM DATA SEL XMEM ead in first sequence into memory extension EC OUT 28 DM DATA XMEM START 88 LENG 3 EC OUT 28 SOUR DM DATA DATA 1 0 1 Y HAD HH Read in the three remaining sequences analogously gt Read out sequences and compare with those sent IEC OUT 28 DM DATA XMEM START 88 LENG 3 IEC OUT 28 SOUR DM DATA DATA IEC IN 28 SEQUENCES PRINT SEQUENCES The sequences read in have to correspond to the sequences read
240. GLE EXT STEP MEM SEQ EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP gt UTILITIES RESET SWEEP p HELP IARKER 1 LEVEL AR 1 STATE ARKER 2 LEVEL 2 0 dB ARKER 2 STATE OFF ON ARKER 3 LEVEL 3 0 dB ARKER 3 STATE OFF ON Fig 2 56 Menu SWEEP LEVEL START LEVEL Input value of the starting level IEC bus short command SOUR POW STAR 30dBm STOP LEVEL Input value of the stop levell IEC bus short command SOUR POW STOP 10dBm CURRENT LEVEL Indication of the current level Operating mode STEP Input value of the level STEP Input value of the step width IEC bus short command SOUR SWE POW STEP 1dB DWELL Input value of the dwell time per step IEC bus short command SOUR SWE POW DWEL 15ms MODE Selection of the sweep operating mode cf Section 2 8 3 IEC bus short command SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING 1038 6002 02 2 140 E 13 SME Sweep EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP Starts a single sweep run This action to be executed is only indicated and is only effective if MODE SINGLE is selected IEC bus short command TRIG RESET SWEEP 3 Sets the starting level IEC bus short command ABOR MARKER 1 LEVEL Input value of the level for the marker selected MARKER 2 LEVEL IEC bus short command SOUR MARK1 PSW POW OdBm MARKER 3 LEVEL MARKER 1 STATE Switching on off the marker selected MARKER 2 STATE IEC bus short command SOUR MARK1 PSW OFF MARKER 3 STATE 2 8 8 LF Sw
241. Hz gt Video bandwidth 30 Hz Synchronize reference frequencies of analyzer and test object Recommended test and search frequencies Nonharmonics of the step synthesis 1038 6002 02 Setting at the SME Search in the ratio 831 0 MHz 689 6 kHz 832 7 MHz 699 3 kHz 1044 5 2 598 8 kHz 1043 0 MHz 591 7 kHz 1139 6 MHz 518 1 kHz 1141 0 MHz 523 5 kHz 1457 5 2 917 4 2 1349 6 2 934 5 2 1444 0 MHz 826 4 kHz 1446 0 MHz 840 3 kHz 1430 5 MHz 751 9 kHz 1434 1 MHz 763 4 kHz 5 11 E 13 Test Procedure SME Mixer nonharmonics of the output part Setting at the SME Search at frequency 93 75 MHz 131 25 MHz 93 75 MHz 37 5 MHz 93 75 MHz 56 25 MHz 70 0 MHz 40 0 MHz Nonharmonics of the summing loop Setting at the SME Search in the ratio 1412 9 2 300 0 kHz 1305 4 MHz 300 0 kHz 1197 9 MHz 300 0 kHz 1090 4 MHz 300 0 kHz 838 25 MHz 117 6 kHz 380 MHz 425 5 kHz 1495 59 MHz 15 59 MHz 1354 0625 MHz 14 2567 MHz 1354 0625 MHz 28 5133 MHz 5 2 7 SSB Phase Noise Test equipment Second signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Phase noise test system consisting of mixer with lowpass filter and preamplifier Section 5 1 item 6 Oscilloscope Section 5 1 item 7 Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 Test principle The two signal generators are set to the test frequency and synchronized with a phase offset of 90 deg phase quadrature Mix
242. Hz 0 1 Square wave signal at the BURST output HC level EIU frequency 576 kHz 0 1 Square wave signal at the CLOCK output HC level frequency 1152 kHz 0 1 96 Diagnostic voltage at test point 301 6 3 1 V After 10 average sweeps an almost sinusoidal signal must be measured at the digital oscilloscope whose peak voltage must be Vrett796 Now enter the sequence 11111111011111111 using the list editor After 10 average sweeps a pulse signal must be measured at the digital oscilloscope whose voltage peak is about V ert796 Enter the sequence 00000000111111111 using the list editor After 10 average sweeps a square wave signal with an amplitude of 1 136xV ef 3 must be measured at the digital oscilloscope whose overshoot must be smaller than 596 Recommended settings for the measurement using the digital oscilloscope 50 MHz 750 1 MHz 1099 MHz 1101 MHz 1500 MHz 2200 MHz 3000MHz 6000 MHz Mixer x x x x F LO 800 1 MHz 1149 MHz 1151 MHz 1550 MHz 2250 MHz 2950MHz 5950 MHz SME03E 03 06 SME03 06 SMEO6 1038 6002 02 5 31 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 34 QPSK Modulation 5 2 34 1 Spectrum Caution The LEVEL PRESET calibration see service manual stock 1039 1856 24 must be carried out before this measurement x The delay adjus
243. I RCH BASE 896MHz Frequency assignment number This is not the logic channel number Valid values are 0 to 2047 IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI RCH ANUM 2 Selection of bit rate of reverse channel Possible selections are 800bps 1600bps 6400bps and 9600bps IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI RCH SPE 800bps Determines the frequency spacing according to the above formulas for FREQ This setting applies both to forward and reverse channel Valid values are 0 to 102350Hz in steps of 50Hz IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI FSP 6250Hz 2 122 13 SME SCI BASE FRAME SCI COLLAPSE MASK BIT ERRORS ERROR BIT MASK POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD MESSAGE GENERATION 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation System configuration information SCI frames are transmitted within each cycle of 128 frames Their positions within the cycle is calculated according to INDEX SCI BASE FRAME 280 COLLAPSE MASK i for all i until INDEX exceeds 127 SCI BASE FRAME and SCI COLLAPSE MASK are transmitted to the receiver in the respective block information words IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI SCIBase 0 See explanation under SCI BASE FRAME IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI SCICollapse 7 The SME allows for providing a 32 bit word of the transferred message with bit errors for test purposes The following parameters specify the bits to be falsified and the position of the erroneous word within a frame
244. IEC bus command SOUR PULS PER 10us Input value of the pulse width IEC bus command SOUR PULS WIDT lus Input value of the single pulse delay Is only displayed if DOUBLE PULSE STATE is set to be OFF IEC bus command SOUR PULS DEL lus Input value of the double pulse delay IEC bus command SOUR PULS DOUB DEL lus Switching on off the double pulses ON Double pulse is switched on OFF Single pulse IEC bus command SOUR PULS DOUB ON Selection of the trigger mode AUTO Period as entered under PERIOD EXT Period is determined by the external signal at the PULSE input IEC bus command TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO Selection of the active edge of the external trigger signal POS Pulse generator triggers on positive edge of the external signal NEG Pulse generator triggers on negative edge of the external signal IEC bus command TRIG PULS SLOP POS 2 62 E 13 SME Analog Modulations 2 6 2 6 Stereo Modulation By means of option SM B6 multifunction generator and option SM B5 FM PM modulator stereo multiplex signals conforming to standards can be generated according to the pilot tone method Note The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another STEREO and FM STEREO and PM STEREO and AM if SOURCE AM LFGEN2 Menu selection MODULATION STEREO 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL DEVIATION ODULATION AUDIO FREQ DIGITAL MOD P
245. ILITIES AUX I O D B A 07F7088 H 00000000 H 00000000 H HELP BEEPER XMEM BATTERY M Fig 4 4 UTILITIES TEST menu fitted with Option SME B11 DM Coder and SME B12 Memory Extension 1038 6002 02 4 5 E 13 Functional Test TEST EPROM gt TEST RAM gt RAM BATTERY 3 TEST XMEM XMEM FILL PATTERN FILL XMEM DESTRUCTIVE GENERATE XMEM CHECKSUM gt XMEM BATTERY 3 1038 6002 02 SME Tests the EPROM The test result is displayed in a window Tests the RAM The test result is displayed in a window Tests the RAM battery The test result is displayed in a window Tests the memory of option SME B12 8 MBit without overwriting the contents The test result is displayed in a window Caution The unit must not be switched off during the test run Input value of the 8 bit pattern to fill the memory of option SME B12 This value is entered as a decimal equivalent 0 255 If the input value 256 the memory is continuously filled with the sequence from 0 to 255 Fills the complete memory of option SME B12 with the 8 bit pattern entered under XMEM FILL PATTERN Caution Stored data will be overwritten Calculates the checksum of the active memory area of option SME B12 The active memory area is fixed by parameters START ADDRESS LENGTH and MEM MODE in the submenu CONFIG XMEM The checksum for the first line applies to the data in the MEM MODE 8M
246. INGLE STEP EXT SINGLE EXT STEP EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP p RESET SWEEP p gt ARKER 1 FREQ 100 000 0 MHz 1 STATE OFF ON AMPLITUDE MARKER 1 OFF ON ARKER 2 FREQ 200 000 0 MHz IARKER 2 STATE OFF ON AMPLITUDE MARKER 2 OFF ON MARKER 3 FREQ 300 000 0 MHz ARKER 3 STATE OFF ON AMPLITUDE MARKER 3 OFF ON Fig 2 55 Menu SWEEP FREQ 2 8 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 START FREQ Input value of the starting frequency IEC bus short command SOUR FREQ STAR 100MHz STOP FREQ Input value of the stop frequency IEC bus short command SOUR FREQ STOP 500MHz CENTER FREQ Input value of the center frequency IEC bus short command SOUR FREQ CENT 300MHz SPAN Input value of the span IEC bus short command SOUR FREQ SPAN 100MHz CURRENT FREQ Indication of the current frequency value Operating mode STEP Input value of the frequency STEP LIN LOG Input value of the step width Depending on whether SPACING LIN or LOG is selected STEP LIN or STEP LOG is displayed IEC bus short command SOUR SWE STEP LIN 1MHz 1038 6002 02 2 138 E 13 SME DWELL SPACING MODE EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP gt RESET SWEEP gt MARKER 1 FREQ MARKER 2 FREQ MARKER 3 FREQ MARKER 1 STATE MARKER 2 STATE MARKER 3 STATE AMPLITUDE MARKER1 AMPLITUDE MARKER 2 AMPLITUDE MARKER 3 1038 6002 02 Sweep Input value of the dwell time per
247. IST and TRIGger MSEQuence The pulse generator has an own trigger input and thus also an own SLOPe command RST value is POSitiv Example TRIG SLOP NEG 1038 6002 02 3 128 E 13 UNIT 3 6 17 UNIT System SME This system contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated in a command These settings are valid for the entire instrument Command Parameter Default Remark Unit UNIT ANGLe DEGRee DEGree RADian POWer DBM DBW DBMW DBUW DBV DBMV DBUV V UNIT ANGLe DEGRee DEGree RADian The command indicates the unit for angles Example UNIT ANGL DEGR UNIT POWer DBM DBW DBMW DBUW DBV DBMV DBUV V The command indicates the unit for power Example UNIT POW V 1038 6002 02 3 129 RST value is RADian RST value is DBM E 13 Instrument Model and Command Processing SME 3 7 Instrument Model and Command Processing The instrument model shown in Fig 3 2 has been made viewed from the standpoint of the servicing of IEC bus commands The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously They communicate by means of so called messages Input unit with IEC bus input buffer Y Command recognition Y Data set Status reporting system vov Instrument hardware Y IEC bus Output unit with output buffer Fig 3 2 Instrument
248. LECT STANDARD BITRATE FILTER DIFF ENCODER MOD POLARITY SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 SME Input value of the level reduction The level reduction is internally controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via connector BURST A logic 1 in the data list causes a level reduction IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV OdB Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator AUTO The data are always repeated SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO Opens a window to select one of the standard GMSK modulations see Table 2 5 By selecting a standard the parameters indented below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard If the setting of a parameter is different from the standard SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM GMSK STAN GSM Selection of filtering BxT and bitrate The following is to choose from bitrate 2 4 kb s Bx T 0 3 0 5 bitrate 20 0 kb s Bx T 0 5 bitrate 2 5 kb s Bx T 0 5 bitrate 24 0 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 3 0 kb s BxT20 5 bitrate 28 8 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 3 6 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 32 0 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 4 0 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 38 4 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 4 8 kb s BxT 0 3 0 5 bitrate 40 0 kb s BxT 0 5 bitrate 5 0 kb s Bx T 0 5 bitrate 48 0
249. LIST1 DLIST2 DLIST3 SOURce DM BASic DATA DELete Name This command deletes the data list indicated RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA DEL DLIST2 SOURce DM BASic DATA DELete ALL This command deletes all data lists with the exception of list XMEM cf Chapter 2 Section DM Memory Extension RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA DEL ALL 1038 6002 02 3 37 E 13 SOURce DM SME SOURce DM BASic DATA FREE This command deletes all data lists with the exception of list XMEM cf Chapter 2 Section DM Memory Extension RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA FREE Answer 2400 200 SOURce DM BASic DATA SELect Name This command selects the data list indicated Working with the data list is only possible after selection If the list indicated does not exist yet it is generated The name may contain up to seven letters List XMEM calls the DM memory extension option SME B12 cf Chapter 2 Section DM memory extension RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA SEL DLIST1 SOURce DM BASic DATA DATA 0 1 0 1 This command transmits the bit data the data generator outputs bit by bit to the data list selected or to the memory area of the DM memory extension indicated selection list XMEM definition of the memory area under DM BAS DATA XMEM Only numbers 0 o
250. M MESS NUM 12 15 17 RST value is i e empty message 1038 6002 02 3 52 E 13 SME SOURce ERMes SOURce ERMes MESSage TONE 0to 15 The command specifies which of the 16 tones possible 8 normal 8 urgent are transmitted in an tone only message This command is only effective if CATegory TONE has been selected Example SOUR ERM MESS TONE 7 RST value is 0 SOURce ERMes NINFormation The commands to set the data denoting the network the SME simulates in greater detail are under this node These data are part of every message sent cf ERMES standard SOURce ERMes NINFormation OPERator 0 to 7 The command sets the code of the network operator RST value is 0 Example SOUR ERM NINF OPER 1 SOURce ERMes NINFormation PA PARea 0 to 63 The command sets the paging area RST value is 0 Example SOUR ERM NINF PA 4 SOURce ERMes NINFormation ZCOuntry 0 to 799 The command sets the zone and the country code in the message to be sent Germany has code 262 RST value is 262 Example SOUR ERM NINF ZCO 799 SOURce ERMes SEQuence The commands specifying the structure of the message subsequences are under this node The control of the subsequence message or fill subsequences cf Chapter 2 Section Radiocommunication Service ERMES is effected via the TRIGger system SOURce ERMes SEQuence DBATch to P A toP The command indicates the batches which are to c
251. MBEacon Subsystem 3 80 3 6 11 12 SOURce PHASe 3 81 3 6 11 13 SOURce PM Subsystem sssssssssssseeseeeeeen enne nennen 3 82 3 6 11 14 SOURce POCSag Subsystem 3 84 3 6 11 15 SOURce POWer Subsystem sssssssseeeeee enne 3 88 3 6 11 16 SOURce PULM Subsystem ccoooccicoccnnnoccconcccconnnononnnnno conan cn narrar cnn 3 91 3 6 11 17 SOURce PULSe Subsystem 3 92 3 6 11 18SOURce REFLex25 Subsystem sse 3 93 3 6 11 19SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem sse 3 99 3 6 11 20 SOURce STEReo 3 100 3 6 11 21 SOURce SWEep Subsystem sse 3 103 3 6 11 22 SOURce VOR Subsystem sese 3 106 23 6 12 SOURCEO 2 Systems ceil tata Pe rne n rt xD rb ER go sae 3 109 3 6 12 1 SOURce0 2 FREQuency Subsystem 3 109 3 6 12 2 SOURce 0 2 FUNCtion Subsystem sse 3 111 3 6 12 3 SOURce2 MARKer Subsystem sse 3 112 3 6 12 4 SOURCe2 SWEep Subsystem ssssssssseeeeen nens 3 113 3 0 13 STA NIE LTD 3 115 3 6 14 SYSTem System 3 117
252. ME 5 16 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 12 Output Reflection Coefficient Test equipment Test setup Measurement 1038 6002 02 VSWR bridge Section 5 1 item 11 No VSWR directional coupler Section 5 1 item 25 for SMEO6 Second signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 te For test frequencies gt 3 GHz use a VSWR directional coupler instead of a VSWR bridge The test port of the bridge or the directional coupler has to be screwed directly to the DUT 10 MHz reference Signal generator p Source refl gt Analyzer _ Ooo GO UO co Object output Bridge test frequency lt 3 GHz Directional coupler test frequency gt 3 GHz Settings at the SME Test level Test frequency unmodulated Settings at the Spectrum analyzer Test frequency Test level Resolution and video bandwidth 10kHz Span 0 Hz linear scale Sweep time 30 ms Settings at the second signal generator Detune by 100 Hz compared to the test frequency first minimal level unmodulated At the spectrum analyzer now bring the line indicated approx into the center of the screen by varying the reference level and read and note down the level as a reference level Screw off the bridge or the directional coupler from the SME and increase the level at the second signal generator until the reference
253. MS at 600 per 40 kHz of set sum deviation The following is displayed VOLTAGE STEREO 6dBu 40 kHz one of operating modes VOR ILS GS or ILS LOC is activated the input of the output voltage of the LF output is effected relative to the set sum modulation depth The following is displayed e g in the case of VOR modulation VOLTAGE VOR ILS per 100 DEPTH 1 000 V Selection of the signal source for the LF output IEC bus short command OUTP2 SOUR 0 Selection of LF generator 1 OUTP2 SOUR 2 Selection of LF generator 2 Input value of the frequency of internal modulation generator 1 IEC bus short command SOURO FREQ 1kHz Input value of the signal shape for modulation generator 1 The signal shape of modulation generator 1 can only be set if two modulation generator options are fitted IEC bus short command SOURO FUNC SIN Input value of the frequency of internal modulation generator 2 This parameter is only displayed if a modulation generator option is fitted IEC bus short command SOUR2 FREQ 1kHz Note In operating modes Stereo VOR ILS or LF Sweep the value indication is replaced by STEREO VOR ILS or SWEEP Input value of the signal shape of modulation generator 2 This parameter is only displayed if a modulation generator option is fitted IEC bus short command SOUR2 FUNC SIN Notes A selection of signal shape NOI in the LF SWEEP operating mode automatically leads to
254. MSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard DSSR4K DM GMSK FILTer 0 5 DM GMSK BRATe 4 0 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM Example SOUR DM GMSK STAN PCN 1038 6002 02 3 42 SME E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM GMSK BRATe 2 4 kb s to 1000 kb s The command sets the bit rate of the modulation The value of SOURce DM GMSK FILTer is adapted if necessary to obtain a valid setting Valid setting are listeted in the table to Section GMSK Modulation in Chapter 2 Example SOUR DM GMSK BRAT 8000b s RST value is 270 833kb s SOURce DM GMSK DCODer ON OFF Command Differential Encoder specifies the state coding ON Difference coding of the states according to regulation GSM is switched on OFF No difference coding RST value is ON Example SOUR DM GMSK DCOD OFF SOURce DM GMSK FILTer 0 2 0 25 0 3 0 4 0 5 The command specifies B x T of the Gaussian filter used The value of SOURce DM GMSK FILTer is adapted if necessary to obtain a valid setting Valid settings are listed in the table to Section GMSK Modulation in Chapter 2 Example SOUR DM GMSK FILT 0 2 RST value is 0 3 SOURce DM GMSK GSLope ON OFF The command specifies the level reduction for the modulation ON The rise and fall time of the level reduction correspond to GSM power ramping OFF Command DATA ALEVel MODE specifies the level reduction Example SOUR DM GMSK GSL ON RS
255. NCY EXT PRBS DATA LEVEL 1 PRBS 15 20 21 23 Bit ODULATION OLOCR Ls POS COUPLED DIGITAL MOD E LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OR MAX DECT SLOPE LE QUIPUT 1 LEVEL ATTENUATION 0 0 dB SWEEP Fl MODE AUTO SINGLE LIST SELECT STANDARD CURRENT DECT MEM SEQ BITRATE oa 1 152 Mbps UTILITIES FILTER B T DEVIATION B T 0 5 DEV 288 kHz HELP MOD POLARITY NORM INV SELECT LIST CURRENT DLIST2 DELETE LIST FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEV Fig 2 42 Menu DIGITAL MOD GFSK preset setting fitted with option SME B11 DM coder SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for GFSK IEC bus command SOUR DM TYPE GFSK SOUR EXT STAT ON PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence IEC bus command SOUR DM PRBS 9 CLOCK Opens a window to set the clock parameters The current settings are displayed cf Section QPSK modulation LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction OFF The level reduction is switched off NORM level reduction corresponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of gt 800B DECT SLOPE The rise and fall time of the level reduction are filtered IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV MODE NORM LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of
256. NMENT NUMBER FREQUENCY SPACING If AUTO ADAPTATION is switched to ON the frequency calculated when switching on ReFLEX25 and executing RECALCULATE is also transferred to the RF setting of the SME provided the formula provides a value that lies within the setting range of the SME The preset values for the following parameters are selected such that the default value of 929 00625 MHz specified in the ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as frequency Base frequency of forward channel Valid values are O to 8191 MHz This exceeds the setting range of the SME Nevertheless the set value is transferred to the receiver without being changed IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI FCH BASE 929MHz Frequency assignment number This is not the logic channel number Valid values are 0 to 2047 IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 SI FCH ANUM 1 Together with FREQUENCY SPACING the next two settings determine the frequency of the reverse channel from the receiver to the transmitter SME The following formula is valid in this case FREQ REV CHAN BASE FREQUENCY REV CHAN ASSIGNMENT NUMBER FREQUENCY SPACING In addition the bit rate of the reverse channel is specified The preset values for the following parameters are selected such that the default value of 896 0125 MHz specified in the ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as frequency Base frequency of the reverse channel Valid values are 0 to 8191 MHz IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 S
257. NORM MAX OFF This command specifies the operating mode for the level reduction In GMSK modulation the command is only active in the setting DM GMSK GSLope OFF NORM The level reduction is specified by the command DM BAS DATA ALEVel MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of gt 80 dB OFF No level reduction DM DATA ALEV is without effect Example SOUR DM BAS DATA ALEV MODE MAX RST value is NORM SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM The commands to configure option SME B12 DM memory extension are under this node SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM STARt 1 to 8388478 XMEM MODE DATA 1 to 1048558 XMEM MODE ALL This command indicates the start address for reading and outputting the data Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM STAR 256 Not changed by RST SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM LENGth 3 to 8388480 XMEM MODE DATA 3 to 1048560 XMEM MODE ALL This command indicates the length of the data sequence to be input or output The command is only effective if SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM LENG AUTO is set to OFF The length maximally possible depends on the selected mode of the memory space allocation and on the selected start address cf Chapter 2 Section DM Memory Extension The minimal length is 3 Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM LENG 524280 Not changed by RST 1038 6002 02 3 39 E 13 SOURce DM SME SOURce
258. ODE 1M 3 In this mode X and Y bits are stored in parallel in the XMEM list and are transmitted in parallel via the DATA or BURST line The LEV ATT channel can be used for level reduction During the serial operating modes 1 and 2 bit clock the DM coder and the memory extension are synchronized with regard to the X and Y bit if one of the settings e g BITRATE or LENGTH is changed As this synchronization is effected via the trigger input of the memory extension EXT TRIG it is not possible to externally trigger the memory extension The external trigger mode has to be switched off EXT TRIGGER OFF If EXT TRIGGER is ON an error message is displayed In the parallel operating mode 3 symbol clock the synchronization is not required and the memory extension can be externally started via connector TRIGGER EXT TRIGGER ON is allowed By selecting list XMEM list editor line FUNCTION is replaced by submenu CONFIG XMEM which contains the parameters of the memory extension Menu selection DIGITAL MOD DM CONFIG XMEM 100 000 000 0 30 0 cm FREQUENCY SOURCE START ADDRESS LEVEL 1 5 LENGTH MODULATION CLOCK MEM MODE 8M 1 DIGITAL MOD LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE EXT TRIGGER ON LF OUTPUT 1 LEVEL ATTENUATION EXT TRIGGER SLOPE POS SWEEP MODE LIST SELECT STANDARD MEM SEQ FILTER BIT RATE RECORD DATA y UTILITIES DIFF ENCODER ABORT RECORDING HELP MOD POLARITY SELEC
259. ONCE EXTTRIG ALWAYS The units waits for a signal edge at the trigger connector After recognition of this edge the unit behaves as described under setting AL WAYS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR POCS TACT STAR The set message is output exactly once at the next possible point of time This triggerable action is only displayed and active when MODE SINGLE has been selected IEC bus command TRG Selection of the clock source This setting is also valid for ERMES FLEX and REFLEX but not for the other digital modulations INT The clock required for signal generation is generated internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as the clock signal Note For all bit rates i e for 1600 bps and 3200 bps a symbol clock rate of 3200 Hz is always used This applies to both the output CLOCK SOURCE INT and the input CLOCK SOURCE EXT of the clock IEC bus command SOUR DM COMP CLOC SOUR INT 2 131 E 13 LF Output SME 2 7 LF Output Depending on which options are fitted cf table 2 4 internal LF generator 1 and or 2 are available as a signal source for the LF output Menu LF OUTPUT offers access to the settings of the LF output Notes An alteration of the waveform or frequency of the internal modulation generators in the LF output menu has a parallel effect on the modulation for which the respective generator is selected as modulation source
260. ONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflects the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents is not affected by reading The Positive TRansition part acts as an edge detector When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 20 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read at will Its contents is not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as an edge detector When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 21 the bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read at will Its contents is not affected by reading With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of the condition part none O to 1 1 to 0 or both is stored in the EVENt part The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the edge filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user During reading its contents is set to zero In linguistic usage this part is often equated w
261. On Off Beeper BEEPER Menu UTILITIES BEEPER offers access to the switching on off of the beeper Note Preset does not alter the current state ON or OFF Menu selection UTILITIES BEEPER AAA AAA 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM KEY BEEP STATE LEVEL REF OSC MODULATION PHASE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX 1 0 HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 78 Menu UTILITIES BEEPER KEY BEEP STATE Switching on off the beeper IEC bus command SYST BEEP STAT ON 1038 6002 02 2 167 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 16 Installation of Software Option are installed in the menu UTILITIES INSTALL by means of a keyword The keyword is part to the equipment supplied in case of a follow up order Menu UTILITIES INSTALL gives access to the keyword entry Menu selection UTILITIES INSTALL ADEE 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM OPTION TO INSTALL LEVEL REF OSC INSTALLATION KEY ODULATION PHASE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX I O HELP BEEPER erroe Fig 2 79 Menu UTILITIES INSTALL fitted with options OPTION TO INSTALL Selection of the option to be installed INSTALLATION KEY Entry of the keyword after entry press key ENTER 1038 6002 02 2 168 E 13 SME
262. PI 3 70 SOURCce ILS LOCalizer DDM CURRENT 387 to 387 uA not SCPI 3 71 SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM DIRection LEFT RIGHt not SCPI 3 71 SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM LOGarithmic 999 9 dB to 999 9 dB not SCPI 3 71 SOURce ILS LOCalizer DDM DEPTh 0 4 to 0 4 not SCPI 3 71 SOURce ILS LOCalizer _LOBe FREQuency 60 to 120 Hz not SCPI 3 71 SOURCce ILS LOCalizer MODE NORM LLOBe RLOBe not SCPI 3 70 SOURce ILS LOCalizer PHASe 0 to 120 deg not SCPI 3 72 SOURCce ILS LOCalizer PRESet not SCPI 3 72 SOURce ILS LOCalizer RLOBe FREQuency 100 to 200 Hz not SCPI 3 72 SOURce ILS LOCalizer SODepth 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 72 SOURCce LIST CATalog not SCPI 3 73 SOURce LIST DELete Name of list not SCPI 3 73 SOURce LIST DELete ALL not SCPI 3 73 SOURCce LIST DWELI 1ms to1s 1ms to1s 3 74 SOURCce LIST DWELI POINts 3 74 SOURce LIST FREE 3 74 SOURce LIST FREQuency 5 kHz to1 5 GHz 5 kHz to1 5 GHz 3 74 block data SME03 06 5 kHz to3 6 GHz SOURce LIST FREQuency POINts 3 74 SOURce LIST LEARn not SCPI 3 74 SOURCce LIST MODE AUTO STEP not SCPI 3 75 SOURce LIST POWer 144 to16 dBm 144 to16 dBm 3 75 block data SOURce LIST POWer POINts 3 75 SOURce LIST SELect Name of list not SCPI 3 75 SOURce FSWeep AMPLitude ON OFF 3 76 SOURce FSWeep AOFF 3 76 1038 6002 02 8C 9 E 12
263. QPSK COD RST value is NADC SOURce DM QPSK FILTer COSine SCOSine 0 35 0 4 0 5 0 6 COSine 0 2 The command specifies the filter characteristics characteristic and roll off factor Values COSine cosine and SCOSine square root cosine are permissible for characteristic For roll off 0 2 0 35 0 4 0 5 and 0 6 are permissible Example SOUR DM QPSK FILT COS 0 35 RST value is SCOSine 0 35 SOURce DM QPSK POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the modulation NORMal A 1 from the data source generates a positive deviation INVerted 1 from the data source generates a negative deviation Example SOUR DM QPSK POL NORM RST value is NORMal 1038 6002 02 3 46 E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM FSK The commands to set the data source for the digital frequency modulation are under this node FSK Frequency Shift Keying always has exactly two states In contrast to the other types of modulation there are trigger commands for FSK and FSK4 which also permit a single processing of the data list cf TRIGger system Section 3 6 16 SOURce DM FSK STANdard POCSag512 POCSag1200 POCSag2400 CIT Yruf512 CITYruf1200 CITYruf2400 FLEX1600 FLEX3200 This short form command sets parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the standards cf table The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table Hence it neither has a query form nor an RST value Short
264. REEMPHASIS LF OUTPUT 1 PILOT STATE SWEEP PILOT DEVIATION LIST PILOT PHASE MEM SEQ UTILITIES ARI DEVIATION HELP ARI IDENTIFICATION ARI BK Fig 2 32 Menu MODULATION STEREO preset setting fitted with option SM B6 multifunction generator and option SM B5 FM PM modulator MODE Selection of the operating mode OFF The stereo signal is switched off R Audio signal only in the right hand channel L Audio signal only in the left hand channel R L Audio signals of same frequency and phase in both channels R L Audio signals of same frequency but opposite phase in both channels ARI Generation of 19 kHz pilot tone and ARI traffic channel signals IEC bus command SOUR STER STAT ON SIGN AUD AUD MODE LEFT DEVIATION Input value of the frequency deviation of the STEREO MPX signal without considering the pilot tone content IEC bus command SOUR STER 40kHz AUDIO FREQ Input value of the frequency of the audio signal IEC bus command SOUR STER AUD 1kHz 1038 6002 02 2 63 E 13 Analog Modulations SME PREEMPHASIS Selection of the preemphasis of the audio signal PILOT STATE 50uS Preemphasis 50 us 75uS Preemphasis 75 us OFF Preemphasis switched off IEC bus command SOUR STER AUD PRE OFF Switching on off the pilot tone IEC bus command SOUR STER PIL STAT OFF PILOT DEVIATION Input value of the
265. REQuency ON OFF DISPlay ANNotation The commands determining whether frequency and amplitude are indicated are under this node Caution With SYSTem SECurity ON the indications cannot be switched from OFF to ON In this case RST does not influence the ANNotation settings either With SYSTem SECurity OFF the RST value is ON for all ANNotation parameters DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF The command switches the frequency and amplitude indication on or off Command DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON can only be executed if SySTem SECurity is set to OFF With SECurity OFF RST value is ON Example DISP ANN ALL ON DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude ON OFF The command switches on or off the amplitude indication Command DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude ON can only be executed if SYSTem SECurity is set to OFF With SYSTem SECurity OFF RST value is ON Example DISP ANN AMPL ON DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency ON OFF The command switches on or off the amplitude indication Command DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude O can only be executed if SYSTem SECurity is set to OFF With svSTem SECurity OFF RST value is ON Example DISP ANN FREQ ON 1038 6002 02 3 24 E 13 SME FORMat 3 6 7 FORMat System This system contains the commands determining the format of the data the SME returns to the controller All queries returning a list of numeric data or block data are concerned With each of these
266. ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual SIGNAL GENERATOR SMEO2 1038 6002 02 SME03 1038 6002 03 SMEO3E 1038 6002 13 SMEOS3A 1038 6002 53 SME06 1038 6002 06 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1039 1856 12 14 1 SME Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview Certificate of quality List of R amp S Representatives Safety Instructions Contents Data Sheet EC Certificate of Conformity Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1 2 Chapter 2 3 Chapter 3 4 Chapter 4 5 Chapter 5 6 Annex A 7 Annex B 8 Annex C 9 Annex D 10 Index 1039 1856 12 Preparation for Use Manual Operation Remote Control Maintenance Performance Test Interfaces List of Error Messages List of Commands Programming Example RE E 1 SME Contents Contents 1 Preparation Tor USE iii 1 1 1 1 Putting into Operation nece neret iia 1 1 TAA Supply Voltage cie ae emt e dde ed dp ee ee 1 1 1 1 2 Switching On Off the Instrument sse 1 1 11 3 Initial Status tem ex lite 1 2 1 1 4 Setting Contrast and Brightness of the Display 1 2 1 1 5 RAM With Battery 3 1 2 1 1 6 Preset Setting 1 3 1 23
267. RQ 3 8 4 5 Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages which can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control or queried via the IEC bus using command SySTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 1038 6002 02 3 141 E 13 SME Status Reporting System 3 8 5 Resetting Values of the Status Reporting Systems Table 3 8 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except for RST and SYSTem PRESet influences the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 3 8 Resetting instrument functions Event Switching on supply voltage Power On Status DCL SDC Device Clear RST or STATus PRESet CLS Clear Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear Effect 0 1 Clear STB ESR yes
268. Rce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP not SCPI 3 103 SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 0 to 10 dB not SCPI 3 103 1038 6002 02 80 13 E 12 List of Commands SME Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce VOR BANGle 0 to 360 deg not SCPI 3 105 SOURce VOR BANGle DIRection FROM TO not SCPI 3 105 SOURce VOR COMid DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 106 SOURce VOR COMid F REQuency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz not SCPI 3 106 SOURce VOR COMid STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 106 SOURce VOR MODE NORM VAR SUBCarrier not SCPI 3 105 SOURce VOR PRESet not SCPI 3 106 SOURce VOR REFerence DE Viation 0 to 960 Hz not SCPI 3 106 SOURce VOR SOURce INT2 INT2 EXT not SCPI 3 104 SOURce VOR STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 104 SOURce VOR SUBCarrier DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 105 SOURce VOR SUBCarrier FREQuency 5 to 15 kHz not SCPI 3 105 SOURce VOR VAR FREQuency 20 to 40 Hz not SCPI 3 105 SOURce VOR VAR DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not SCPI 3 105 SOURce0 2 FREQuency CW FIXed 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or 3 108 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz SOURce0 2 FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz 3 108 SOURce0 2 FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep 3 108 SOURce0 2 FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz 3 108 SOURce0 2 FREQuency STOP 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MH
269. Rce FM POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the third command level It defines the polarity between modulator and modulation signal SOURce FM EXTernal POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth command level It defines the polarity between modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked by square brackets in the description The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words Example SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 1 This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1 volt The following command has the same effect POWer OFFSet 1 Note An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified in detail by a numeric suffix The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permissible Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 STAT QUES ENAB 1 Note The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Upper case and lower case notation only serve the above purpose the instrument itself d
270. S DDM CURRent The following is true for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIRection DOWN ILS GS DDM DEPTh AM 90Hz AM 150Hz 100 and for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIRection UP ILS GS DDM DEPTh AM 150Hz AM 90Hz 10096 Example SOUR ILS GS DDM DEPT 0 RST value is 0 SOURCce ILS GS GSLope DDM DiRection UP DOWN The command indicates the direction in which the pilot has to correct the course By calculation this setting has the same effect as reverse of the sign of the SOURce ILS GS DDM DEPTh value UP The airplane is too low it must climb DOWN The airplane is too high it must descend Example SOUR ILS GS DDM DIR DOWN RST value is UP SOURce ILS GS GSLope DDM LOGarithmic 999 9 dB to 999 9 dB The command enters the DDM value in dB This parameter is coupled with SOURce ILS GS DDM DEPTh and CURRent RST value is 0 0 dB Example SOUR ILS GS DDM LOG 0 1038 6002 02 3 70 E 13 SME SOUR ce ILS SOURce ILS GS GSLope LLOBe The commands to configure the signal of the lower ILS GS antenna lobe are under this node Lower LOBe SOURce ILS GS GSLope LLOBe FREQuency 100 to 200 Hz The command sets the frequency Normally it is 150 Hz This parameter is coupled with SOURCe ILS GS ULOBe FREQuency As the ratio of ULOBe FREQuency LLOBe FREQuency must always be 3 5 ULOBe FREQuency is readjusted accordingly Example SOUR ILS GS LLOB FREQ 150 RST value is 150 Hz
271. SELect 3 93 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage NUMeric 3 93 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage PADDress 16777216 to 1073741823 not SCPI 3 92 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage RREQuired ON OFF not SCPI 3 93 SOURce REFLex25 MODulation 1600 FSL2 3200 FSK2 3200 FSK4 not SCPI 3 92 6400 FSK4 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel ANUMber 0 to 2047 not SCPI 3 94 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel ANUMber 0 to 2047 not SCPI 3 94 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel BASE 0 to 8191 MHz not SCPI 3 94 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel SPEed 800 1600 6400 9600 not SCPI 3 95 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FSPacing 0 to 102350 not SCPI 3 95 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation PROVider 0 to 16383 not SCPI 3 94 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation RCHannel BASE 0 to 8191 MHz not SCPI 3 94 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation SCIBase 0 to 127 not SCPI 3 95 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation SCICollapse 0to 7 not SCPI 3 95 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation SZONe 0 to 127 not SCPI 3 94 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation zZONE 0 to 4091 not SCPI 3 93 SOURce REFLex25 STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 92 1038 6002 02 8C 12 E 12 SME List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce REFLex25 STATe AUTO ON OFF not SCPI 3 92 SOURce REFLex25 TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE not SCPI 3 96 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuenc
272. SUBCarrier Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated SOURce VOR SUBCarrier FREQuency FM carrier usually 9960 Hz of the VOR signal The modulation depth is set under SOURce VOR SUBCarrier DEPTh FMSubcarrier FM modulated subcarrier Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the frequency modulated SOURce VOR SUBCarrier FREQuency FM carrier usually 9960 Hz of the VOR signal The frequency deviation is set under SOURce VOR REFerence DEViation the modulation depth under SOURCe VOR SUBCarrier DEPTh RST value is NORM Example SOUR VOR MODE VAR SOURce VOR BANGIe 0 to 360 deg The command sets the Bearing ANGle between the VAR signal and the reference signal The orientation of the angle depends on the setting under SOURce VOR BANGle DIRection Example SOUR VOR BANG 0deg RST value is 0 Grad SOURce VOR BANGIe DIRection FROM TO The command determines the orientation of the bearing angle FROM The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north and the connection line from beacon to airplane TO The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north and the connection line from airplane to beacon Example SOUR VOR BANG DIR TO RST value is FROM SOURce VOR VAR DEPTh 0 100 PCT The command sets the AM modulation depth of the VAR signal Example SOUR VOR VAR DEPT 30PCT RST value is 30PCT SOURce VOR VAR FREQuency 20 to 40 Hz The
273. Status 2 12 The Help System The SME has two help systems On the one hand the context sensitive help which is called by means of the HELP key and which gives information on the current menu On the other hand auxiliary texts can be selected according to headwords in alphabetical order by accessing menu HELP HELP Key The yellow HELP key can be pressed at any point in time The current setting menu is faded out and context sensitive text faded in The help panel can be exited by means of the RETURN key Menu HELP After calling the help menu access to all auxiliary texts is possible via an index Operation is analog to menu operation gt Set the menu cursor to the index desired using the shaft encoder gt Press the SELECT key The information for the index marked is displayed Press the RETURN key to exit the menu 2 13 Status By means of a STATUS page the SME permits an overview over all settings of the instrument The settings are displayed in an abbreviated form The STATUS page is called by pressing the STATUS key Return to the preceding menu is effected using the RETURN key eee 100 000 000 0 30 0 AM OFF LF1 1kHz LF2 1 000 OkHz SIN 1 DEV 123 00kHz LFGEN1 AC OUTPUT OFF 2 0FF PM OFF SWEEP OFF LSE EXT DEL 1 005 REF 10MHz INT WID 1 00us ALC BW AUTO OFF FM1 PULSE TRIGGER SLOPE NORM LOCAL UNLOCKED Fig 2 8
274. T RF level RFlevelS PRINT AM modulationdepth AMmodulationdepths PRINT AM frequency AMfrequency PRINT Step width stepwidth REM RKKKKK KKK KKK kckck ck kckck ck kckck ck kck ck k kckck KK KKK KK ck ck KR KK KK RK k kck ck ck kck ck k kck ck ck kck ck kkk kk 1038 6002 02 9D 2 E 11 SME Programming Examples REM 2352752555520 ESE Example of list management CALL IBWRT generator LIST SELECT CHRS 34 LIST1 CHRS 34 Select list LIST1 is generated if necessary CALL IBWRT generator LIST POWER 30 15 10 5 0 0 1 Fill power list with values CALL IBWRT generator LIST FREQ 575MHz 235MHz 123MHz 456MHz 735MHz 333MHz Fill frequency list with values CALL IBWRT generator LIST DWELL 0 2 200ms per item CALL IBWRT generator TRIGGER21 LIST SOURCE AUTO Permanently repeat list automatically CALL IBWRT generator POWER MODE LIST Switch over instrument to list mode REM XX XXX k k K kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk 7 Command synchronization The possibilities for synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Section 3 7 6 Command Order and Command Synchronization REM Examples of command synchronization REM Command ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT has a relatively long execution time REM over 300ms It is to be ensured that the next command is only executed REM when
275. T LIST DELETE LIST Fig 2 40 Submenu DIGITAL MOD GMSK CONFIG XMEM 1038 6002 02 2 82 E 13 SME START ADDRESS LENGTH MEM MODE EXT TRIGGER EXT TRIGGER SLOPE RECORD DATA gt ABORT RECORDING gt 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Input value of the start address Input range in mode 8M 1 1 to 8388478 Input range in mode 1M 3 1 to 1048558 IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA XMEM STAR 1 LENGTH Input value of the sequence length For a start address 1 the following applies Input range in mode 8M 1 to 8388480 Input range in mode 1M 3 1048560 On increasing the start address the maximum sequence length is reduced correspondingly If the maximum value is exceeded an error message is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA XMEM LENG 3 MEM MODE Selection of the allocation of the memory area 8M 1 The 8 MBit memory area can only be used for data 1M 3 The memory area is divided up into DATA LEV ATT and BURST The memory depth is 1 MBit IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA XMEM MODE DATA Switching on off the external trigger facility ON The run of the list is triggered by the external trigger signal Each trigger signal starts a new run beginning with the start address OFF The external trigger mode is switched off IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA XMEM TRIG ON
276. T SINGLE EXT STEP OFF 1038 6002 02 Memory Sequence Single run from the beginning to the end of the list If SINGLE is selected the run is not yet started Below the MODE line function EXECUTE SINGLE SEQUENCE gt to be executed is displayed which can be used to start the run IEC bus short command SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE AUTO TRIG MSEQ SOUR SING Step by step manual processing of the list Activating STEP stops an automatic run and the cursor wraps to the indication value of CURRENT INDEX The list can now be passed through upwards or downwards step by step using the rotary knob IEC bus short command SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEO MODE STEP TRIG MSEQ SOUR SING Single run from the beginning to the end of the list as with SINGLE but triggered by an external trigger signal IEC bus short command SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEO MODE AUTO TRIG MSEQ SOUR EX Step by step run using the external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC bus short command SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE STEP TRIG MSEQ SOUR EXT Step by step run using the external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC bus short command SYST MODE FIX 2 149 E 13 Memory Sequence External Trigger SME An external signal at the rear input TRIGGER triggers the MEMORY SEQUENCE in the EXT
277. T value is OFF SOURce DM GMSK POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the modulation NORMal A 1 from the data source generates a positive deviation a 0 a negative deviation INVerted 1 from the data source generates a negative deviation a 0 a positive deviation RST value is Example SOUR DM GMSK POL INV SOURce DM GFSK The commands to set the data source for the digital of modulation GFSK are under this node GFSK Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying always has exactly two states 1038 6002 02 3 43 E 13 SOURce DM SME SOURce DM GFSK STANdard DECT CT2 CT3 This short form command sets the parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the standards cf table The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table Hence it neither has a query form nor an RST value Short command Command sequence DM GFSK STANdard DECT GE FILTer 0 5 BRATe 1125 kb s DEViation 288kHz POLarity NORM DM GFSK STANdard CT2 DM GE FILTer 0 5 BRATe 72 kb s DEViation 18 kHz POLarity NORM DM GFSK STANdard CT3 DM GF FILTer 0 5 BRATe 640 kb s DEViation 160 kHz POLarity NORM Example SOUR DM GFSK STAN DECT SOURce DM GFSK BRATe 10 to 585 kb s and 640 to 1170 kb s The command sets the bit rate for the modulation in bits per second With setting FILTer 0 5 and DEViation 14 0 kHz or 25 2 kHz the range is 0 05
278. TARt STOP CENTer SPAN MANual LIST The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings The settings are effected in the SOURce LIST subsystem Setting SOURce FREQuency MODE LIST automatically sets command SOURce POWer MODE to LIST as well Example SOUR FREQ MODE LIST RST value is CW SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 to 50 GHz The command sets the frequency offset of an instrument which might be series connected e g a mixer cf Chapter 2 Section Frequency Offset If a frequency offset is entered the frequency entered using SOURce FREQuency to does no longer correspond to the RF output frequency The following connection is true SOURce FREQuency to RF output frequency SOURce FREQuency OFFSet Entering an offset does not alter the RF output frequency but the query value of SOURce FREQuency Example SOUR FREQ OFFS 100MHz RST value is 0 SOURce FREQuency SPAN 0 to 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz This command indicates the frequency range for the sweep This parameter is coupled to the start and stop frequency Negative values for SPAN are permitted then STARt gt STOP is true There is the following connection STARt CENTer SPAN 2 STOP CENTer SPAN 2 RST value is STOP START Example SOUR FREQ SPAN 1GHz SOURce FREQuency STARt 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz This command indicates the starting val
279. TING b COM ID STATE OFF ON B COM ID FREQUENCY 1 020 kHz 2 COM ID DEPTH 10 0 1 1 DDM KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED M CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED EXT AM SENS 1V 100 OFF EXT1 Fig 2 35 Menu MODULATION ILS LOC preset setting fitted with option SM B6 multifunction generator MODE Selection of the ILS LOC operating mode OFF ILS LOC modulation is switched off In menus AM FM PM and LF OUTPUT the original setting is displayed under LFGEN2 the note ILS LOC is eliminated NORM ILS LOC modulation is activated 90Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 90 Hz signal content of the ILS LOC signal The modulation depth of the 90 Hz signal is calculated from the settings of parameters SUM OF DEPTH SOD and DDM according to AM 90 Hz 0 5 x SOD DDM x 100 1038 6002 02 2 72 E 13 SME DDM DDM DDM FLY SUM OF DEPTH 1038 6002 02 Analog Modulations 150 Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 150 Hz signal content of the ILS LOC signal The modulation depth of the 150 Hz signal results from the settings of parameters SUM OF DEPTH SOD and DDM according to AM 150 Hz 0 5 x 00 DDM x 100 IEC bus command SOUR ILS STAT ON TYPE LOC LOC MODE NORM Difference in Depth of Modulation Input value of the difference in depth of modulation between the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone of the ILS LOC modulation signal The DDM value is calcu
280. TO RST value is AUTO TRIGger LIST This node contains all commands to trigger a list in the LIST mode The commands are only valid for TRIGger1 TRIGger LIST IMMediate The command immediately starts the processing of a list of the LIST mode It corresponds to command EXECUTE SINGLE MODE of the manual control in the LIST menu This command is an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG LIS IMM 1038 6002 02 3 126 E 13 SME TRIGger TRIGger1 2 LIST SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal The command specifies the trigger source The naming of the parameters corresponds to the one with sweep mode SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the instrument accepts as well These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important The following table provides an overview SME designation SCPI designation Command with manual control AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO SINGIe BUS MODE SINGLE or STEP EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP AUTOThe trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is permanently fulfilled As soon as the list selected has been finished in the LIST mode it is started anew SINGle Triggering is executed by means of IEC bus command TRIGger LIST IMM The list is executed once EXTernal Triggering is carried out from outside via the EXT TRIG socket or by the GET command via IEC IEEE bus see annex A The list is executed once Example TRIG LIS SOUR A
281. The command acts on module ATTC cf TEST DIR SUM 1038 6002 02 3 122 E 13 SME TEST TEST DIRect DCOD Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect DSYNOMUX Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module DSYN cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect DSYN1MUX Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module DSYN cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect FMOD Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module FMOD cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect LEGENA Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module LFGENA cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect LFGENB Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module LFGENB cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect MGEN Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module MGEN cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect OPU1M Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module OPU1 cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect OPU3M Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module OPUS cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect OPU6M Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module OPU6 cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect PUM Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module PUM cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect REFSS Subaddress hex data string The command acts on module REFSS cf TEST DIR SUM TEST DIRect ROSC Subaddress hex data string Th
282. The first command is part of the SOURce system and is used to specify the center frequency of the output signal The second command is part of the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels see also Fig 3 1 The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce FM MODE LOCKeg SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the SOURce command system subsystem FM i e they have two common levels When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below SOURce FM The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows CALL IBWRT generator SOURCe FM MODE LOCKed INTernal FREQuency 1kHz However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce FM MODE LOCKed CALL IBWRT generators SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz 3 5 4 Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a quest
283. URCe ILS LOC LLOBe FREQuency As the ratio of LLOBe FREQuency RLOBe FREQuency must always be 3 5 LLOBe FREQuency is readjusted accordingly Example SOUR ILS LOC RLOB FREQ 150 RST value is 150 Hz SOURce ILS LOCalizer PHASe 0 to 120 deg The command sets the phase between the modulation signals of the left and the right antenna lobe The zero crossing of the signal of the right lobe serves as a reference The angle refers to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe RST value is 0 Example SOUR ILS LOC PHAS Odeg SOURce ILS LOCalizer PRESet This command is equivalent to the following command sequence ILS SOUR INT2 ILS STAT ON iS TYPE LOC LOC MODE NORM OFF LOC COM FREO 1020Hz DEPT 10PCT LOC DDM 0 0 DM DIR LEFT SOD 40PCT 90Hz 150Hz LOC PHAS 0 The values set correspond to the state after SYSTEM PRESET or RST The command neither has a query form nor an RST value Example SOUR ILS LOC PRES H HAA F4 FH FE EH oH oH EH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOURce ILS LOCalizer SODepth 0 to 100 PCT The command indicates the sum of modulation depths of the signals of the left lobe 90 Hz and the right lobe 150 Hz Example SOUR ILS LOC SOB 40PCT RST value is 40 PCT 1038 6002 02 3 74 E 13 SME SOURce LIST 3 6 11 9 SOURce LIST Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the
284. UTO RST value is SINGle TRIGger MSEQuence This node contains all commands to trigger a memory sequence The commands are only valid for TRIGger1 TRIGger MSEQuence IMMediate The command immediately starts a memory sequence It corresponds to the EXECUTE SINGLE MODE command of the manual control in the MEMORY SEQUENCE menu This command is an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG MSEQ IMM TRIGger MSEQuence SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal The command specifies the trigger source cf TRIGger SWEep SOURce Example TRIG MSEQ SOUR AUTO RST value is SINGle TRIGger PULSe This node contains all commands to trigger the pulse generator option SM B4 The commands are only valid for TRIGger1 1038 6002 02 3 127 E 13 TRIGger SME TRIGger PULSe SOURce EXTernal AUTO The command specifies the trigger source EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the PULSE socket AUTOTrigger is free running see above RST value is AUTO Example TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO TRIGger PULSe SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command indicates whether the action triggered is triggered at the positive or the negative edge of the trigger signal RST value is POSitiv Example TRIG PULS SLOP NEG TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command indicates whether the external trigger input only responds to the positive the negative or to both edges of the trigger signal The command acts on TRIGger SWEep TRIGger L
285. User Defined variation step width as entered under KNOB STEP USER EXCLUDE FROM RCL OFF The saved frequency is loaded as well when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key or with a memory sequence IEC bus command SOUR FREQ RCL INCL ON The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded the current frequency settings are maintained IEC bus command SOUR FREQ RCL EXCL 2 4 4 Frequency Offset The SME offers the possibility of entering an offset OFFSET of possibly series connected instruments in the FREQUENCY menu The indication input value of FREQ in the header field considers this input and represents the frequency value of the RF signal at the output of these instruments cf Fig 2 17 The entry values FREQUENCY and OFFSET in the menu FREQUENCY or FREQ in the header line are related to the RF output frequency as follows FREQ OFFSET output frequency FREQUENCY An offset entry causes no modification of the RF output frequency but only a modification of the display value in the FREQ field in the header line ie FREQ in the header line indicates the offset associated frequency and FREQUENCY in the menu FREQUENCY the RF output frequency The status line indicates FREQ OFFST The offset setting also remains effective with the frequency sweep Input value OFFSET a jo FREQUENCY menu 88 L O SME UT e y aa Io OO0 e SOO80 OO gt gt Mixer p
286. W MAN 1dBm SOURce POWer MODE FlXed SWEep LIST The command specifies the operating mode and thus also by means of which commands the level setting is checked FIXed The output level is specified by means of commands under SOURce POWer LEVel SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep mode The level is specified by means of SOURce POWer STARt STOP CENTer SPAN MANual LIST The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings The settings are effected in the SOURce LIST subsystem Setting SOURce POWer MODE LIST automatically sets command SOURce FREQuency MODE to LIST as well RST value is FIXed Example SOUR POW MODE FIX SOURce POWer STARt 144 to 16 dBm The command sets the starting value for a level sweep STARt may be larger than STOP then the sweep runs from the high to the low level As to specified range cf POWer AMPLitude Example SOUR POW STAR 20 RST value is 30dBm SOURce POWer STOP 144 to 16 dBm The command sets the final value for a level sweep STOP may be smaller than STARt As to specified range cf POWer AMPLitude RST value is 10dBm Example SOUR POW STOP 3 SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB The command sets the step width with the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as level values The command is coupled with KNOB STEP in the manual control i e it also specifies the step width of the shaft en
287. WE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR AUTO TRIG2 SOUR AUTO TRIG SOUR AUTO Single run from the starting point to the stop point If SINGLE is selected the run is not started yet Function EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP to be executed which can be used to start the run is displayed below the MODE line cf Fig 2 53 IEC bus short commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING TRIG2 SOUR SING TRIG SOUR SING Step by step manual run within the sweep limits Activating STEP stops a running sweep and the cursor wraps to the indication value of CURRENT The sweep run can now be controlled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob or the numeric keys IEC bus short commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE STEP SOUR2 SWE MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP TRIG SOUR SING TRIG2 SOUR SING TRIG SOUR SING Single run from the starting point to the stop point as in the case of SINGLE but triggered by an external trigger signal IEC bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MOD
288. X312 3 Lithium battery 5 Fastening screws 2 Jumper X300 4 Cable connection to motherboard Fig 4 2 Position of the RAM battery on the PCB side where the components are fitted 1038 6002 02 4 3 E 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting SME 4 1 3 2 Exchange of XMEM Battery Removing Option SME B12 Exchanging the battery Fitting Option SME B12 1038 6002 02 gt Switch off unit and disconnect power plug Remove all cable connections gt Undo the four screws of the rear panel feet and remove feet gt Push top panelling towards the rear and remove gt Turn unit upside down Remove bottom panelling gt On each locking rail undo two screws in the oblong holes Push the locking rails towards the front by using a screwdriver gt Withdraw option SME B12 For the location of the battery on the computer PCB refer to Fig 4 3 gt Unplug jumper X2 cf Fig 4 3 item 1 Cut off cable ties gt Unsolder battery G1 cf Fig 4 3 item 2 Fix new battery with cable ties Caution Observe the polarity when fixing and soldering the battery cf Fig 4 3 and marking on the PCB The solder tag for the positive pole is located close to jumper X2 A wrong polarity will lead to the destruction of components gt Shorten connection wires to the necessary length and solder battery Plug jumper X2 cf Fig 4 3 pos 1 gt Shorten connection wires to the necessary length and solder battery
289. age SOURce ERMes MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric NUMeric TONE not SCPI 3 51 SOURce ERMes MESSage lA IADDress 0 to 262143 not SCPI 3 51 SOURce ERMes MESSage NUMeric String not SCPI 3 51 SOURce ERMes MESSage TONE 0 to 15 not SCPI 3 52 SOURce ERMes NINFormation OPERator 0107 not SCPI 3 52 SOURce ERMes NINFormation PA PARea 0 to 63 not SCPI 3 52 SOURce ERMes NINFormation ZCOuntry 0 to 799 not SCPI 3 52 SOURce ERMes SEQuence DBATch A to P not SCPI 3 52 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation BAI ON OFF not SCPI 3 52 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation DOMonth 1 to 31 not SCPI 3 53 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation ETI ON OFF not SCPI 3 53 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation FSI 0 to 30 not SCPI 3 53 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation TIME 00 00 to 23 59 not SCPI 3 53 SOURce ERMes STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 49 SOURce ERMes STATe AUTO ON OFF not SCPI 3 50 SOURce ERMes TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE not SCPI 3 53 SOURce FLEX CYCLe to 14 not SCPI 3 55 SOURce FLEX DEViation 2 0 to 10 0 kHz not SCPI 3 55 SOURce FLEX ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 not SCPI 3 55 SOURce FLEX ERRor WORD 0 to 87 not SCPI 3 55 SOURce FLEX FCONtent X blank spaces A X blank not SCPI 3 56 spaces O A SOURce FLEX FCONtent AUTO ON OFF not SCPI 3 56 SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanumeric CATalog not SCPI 3 58 SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA String not SCPI 3 58 SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanumeric
290. ains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in Fig 3 4 3 8 1 Structure of an SCPI Status Register Each SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions cf Fig 3 3 The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts For example bit 3 of the STATus OPERation register is assigned to the hardware status wait for trigger in all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer 15 CONDition part slefi lo vYvN 15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 3 15 14 13 12 3 NTRansition part vYvY EVENtpat 3 h b Ww vVNNN to higher order register amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp 8 amp amp 8 gt AAAA Sum bit amp logical ANC hshahshe ENABle part 3121110 logical OR of all bits Fig 3 3 The status register model 1038 6002 02 3 133 E 13 SME CONDition part PTRansition part NTRansition part EVENt part ENABle part Sum bit Status Reporting System The C
291. alue of the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of 90 Hz and 150 Hz ILS LOC signal contents The RMS modulation depth depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC SOD 40PCT 2 73 E 13 Analog Modulations LEFT FREQUENCY RIGHT FREQUENCY LEFT RIGHT PHASE ILS DEFAULT SETTING COM ID STATE COM ID FREQUENCY COM ID DEPTH DDM KNOB STEP 1038 6002 02 SME Input value of the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the left viewed from the plane IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC LLOB 90 Input value of the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the right viewed from the plane IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC RLOB 150 Note A variation of one of the two modulation frequencies causes an automatic adaptation of the other modulation frequency in such a way that a frequency response ratio of 3 5 or 5 3 is maintained Input value of the phase between the modulation signals of the left hand and right hand antenna lobe The zero point of the 150 Hz signal serves as a reference The input is effected in degrees of the 150 Hz signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC PHAS Odeg Calling the ILS LOC default setting The default setting corresponds to the setting represented in Fig 2 35 except for the MODE setting NORM The selection of the CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP parameter is not changed by calling this function IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC PRES Switchin
292. amp Schwarz SME03 00000001 1 03 03 variant identification 000000012 serial number 1 03 firmware version number IST INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll cf Section 3 8 3 2 OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request cf Section 3 7 OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed The options are separated from each other by means of commas For every option a fixed position is provided in the response Table 3 2 Device Response to OPT Position Option SM B1 Reference oscillator OCXO SM B2 LF generator SM B2 2nd LF generator SM B3 Pulse modulator 1 5 GHz SM B4 Pulse generator SM B5 FM PM modulator SM B6 Multifunction generator SM B8 Pulse modulator 3 GHz SM B9 Pulse modulator 6 GHz SME B11 DM coder SME B12 DM memory extension Example for a device response 0 SM B2 0 0 0 SM B5 0 0 0 0 0 TET 1038 6002 02 3 15 E 13 Common Commands SME PRE 0 to 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the value indicated Query PRE returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form PSC 0 1
293. ands These key words are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words has to be indicated in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the key words is indicated Example SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands of identical meaning can be formed They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal to 1 kHz SOURce FREQuency CW 1E3 SOURce FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command is different depending on which parameter is entered Example Selection of the parameters for the command SOURce COUPling AC DC If parameter AC is selected only the AC content is fed through in the case of DC the DC as well as the AC content Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header cf Section 3 5 2 Optional Keywords The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either not at all once or several times 3 13 E 13 Common Commands SME 3 6 2 Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard Same commands have the
294. are handshake In case of a hardware handshake the instrument signals that it is ready for reception via line DTR and RTS A logic 0 means ready and a 1 means not ready Whether the controller is ready for reception or not is signalled to the instrument via lines CTS or DSR see signal lines The transmitter of the instrument is switched on by a 0 and off by a 1 Line RTS remains active as long as the serial interface is active Line DTR controls whether the instrument is ready for reception or not Connection between instrument and controller Connection of the instrument with the controller is via a so called 0 modem cable In this case the data control and signalling lines have to be cross connected For a controller with a 9 pin or 25 pin connector the following circuit diagram applies SME Controller SME Controller 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 25 pin MUT EE 1 cas a nce era eie net 8 2 RxD TxD 3 2 RxD TxD 2 3 TxD RxD 2 8 arret TxD RxD 3 4 DTR DSR 6 4 DTR DSR 6 5 io GND GND 5 5 GND GND 7 6 DSR DTR 4 6 DSR DTR 20 7 RTS 8 7 RTS 5 8 CTS RTS 7 8
295. are under this node If SOURce PULSe DOUBle STATe is set to ON a second pulse whose width is identical to the first pulse is generated in every period SOURce PULSe DOUBle DELay 60 ns to 1 s The command sets the time from the start of the pulse period to the first edge of the second pulse RST value is 1 us Example SOUR PULS DOUB DEL 10us SOURce PULSe DOUBle STATe ON OFF The command switches the second pulse on or off ON The second pulse is switched on Parameter SOURce PULSe DELay is set to 0 and cannot be changed WIDTh PULSe PERiod PULSe DOUBle DELay 2 results in error message 221 Settings conflict OFF The second pulse is switched off RST value is OFF Example SOUR PULS DOUB STAT OFF SOURce PULSe PERiod 100 ns to 85 s The command sets the pulse period The pulse period is the reciprocal value of the pulse frequency thus this command is coupled to command SOURce PULM INTernal FREQuency RST value is 10 us Example SOUR PULS PER 2s SOURce PULSe WIDTh 20 ns to 1s The command sets the pulse width RST value is 1 us Example SOUR PULS WIDT 0 15 1038 6002 02 3 92 E 13 SME 3 6 11 18 SOURce REFLex25 Subsystem SOURce REFLex25 This subsystem contains the commands for setting the ReFLEX25 signal The telegram generated by the SME complies with the ReFLEX25 Protocol Specification Document Version 2 4 dated March 15 1996 issued by the Motorola Advanced Messagi
296. arity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the marker signal NORMal When running through the marker condition TTL level is applied at the marker output otherwise 0 V INVerted When running through the marker condition O V is applied at the marker output otherwise TTL level RST value is NORM Example SOUR MARK POL INV 1038 6002 02 3 79 E 13 SOURce MBEacon 3 6 11 11 SOURce MBEacon Subsystem SME This subsystem contains the commands to control the characteristics of the marker signals Marker BEacon as they are used to mark the distance in the approach range of airports option SM B6 multifunction generator Command SOURce MBEacon STATe MARKer FREQuency DEPTh COMid STATe FREQuency DEPTh Parameter ON OFF 400 Hz 1300 Hz 3000 Hz 0 to 100 PCT ON OFF 0 1 to 20 000 Hz 0 to 100 PCT SOURce MBEacon STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the generation of marker beacon signals STATe ON is only possible if no amplitude modulation is switched on Modulation generator 2 must not be inserted simultaneously as a source for PM or FM either Example SOUR MBI E STAT ON Default Unit Remark Option SM B6 PCT RST value is OFF SOURce MBEacon MARKer FREQuency 400 Hz 1300 Hz 3000 Hz The command selects the frequency of the marker signal Example SOUR MBI E MARK FREQ 400 SOURce MBEacon MARKer
297. arried out the instruction remains framed by the selection mark 2 2 3 4 Quick Selection of Menu QUICK SELECT The keys of the QUICK SELECT control field are used to call selected menus quickly by one keystroke Store menus Establish the desired operating status of the current menu Press the ASSIGN key gt Press key MENU1 or MENU2 The current menu is stored as menu1 or menu2 That is to say 2 menus can be stored in total Call menus gt Press key MENU 1 or MENU2 Menu1 or menu2 stored is displayed Exactly the operating status which was current at the point of time of storing is reconstructed 1038 6002 02 2 21 E 13 Basic Operating Steps SME 2 2 3 5 Use of FREQ and LEVEL Keys RF frequency and RF level can be set without menu operation as well using direct keys FREQ and LEVEL The input value considers the offset see Sections 2 4 and 2 5 Key FREQ LEVEL gt Press the FREQ or LEVEL key The frequency and or the level indication in the header field of the display is marked The current menu at the display is maintained Alter the value via a value input or the rotary knob Press the RETURN key The menu cursor wraps to the position marked last in the menu 2 2 3 6 Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ON OFF Keys RF signal and modulation can be switched on off without menu operation as well using direct keys RF ON OFF and or MOD ON OFF see Section 2 6 1 3 MOD ON OFF
298. ase letter hyphen and blank space can be used This command can only be activated if FLEX MESSage CATegory NUMeric is selected RST value is 0123456789 U Example SOUR FLEX MESS NUM 15 17 SOURce FLEX MESSage REPeats 0 to The command determines the number of calls following the first call according to FLEX TD For the value 0 no repeat normal flex frames are transmitted whereas subframes according to FLEX TD are used with other values cf Section 2 6 3 12 Radiocommunication Service FLEX Example SOUR FLEX MESS REP 0 RST value is 0 SOURce FLEX MESSage TONE 0 to 7 The command determines which of the 8 possible tones is to be transmitted in case of an only tone message This command can only be activated if FLEX MESSage CATegory TONE is selected Example SOUR FLEX MESS TONE 7 RST value is 0 1038 6002 02 3 60 E 13 SME SOURce FLEX SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation This node contains commands used to set the data of the transmitting system see FLEX standard These data are sent to the pager CZONe DATE and TIME are transmitted every hour in cycle 0 frame 0 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation COLLapse 0 to 7 The command indicates the number of bits 0 to 7 the pager uses to compare its built in frame number with the received frame number The value 7 signifies that the pager only accepts messages in one of the 128 frames p
299. ayed in the LEVEL indication of the header field If RF OFF is displayed the 50 Q source resistance is maintained IEC bus command OUTP OFF 2 5 8 Reset Overload Protection only SME02 and SME03 SME02 SMEO3 are protected against overload by an external signal which is fed into the RF output If an external signal is too high the overload protection responds This state is indicated by means of the message RF OFF in the LEVEL indication in the header field and the message OVERLOAD in the status line gt Reset the overload protection by pressing the RF ON OFF key IEC bus command OUTP PROT CLE SMTO6 is not protected against overvoltage the IEC IEEE bus command being ignored 1038 6002 02 2 49 E 13 Modulation Sources SME 2 6 Modulation The SME offers the following modulations e Amplitude modulation AM Frequency modulation FM e Phase modulation PM e Pulse modulation PULSE e FM stereo modulation STEREO e VOR ILS modulation VOR ILS GS ILS LOC BCN and the digital modulations e GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK FFSK 4FSK and e Radiocommunication services ERMES FLEX REFLEX and POCSAG Internal or external modulation sources can be used for all modulations 2 6 1 Modulation Sources Internal Modulation Sources Internal modulation generators LF GEN1 and LF GEN2 are available for AM FM and PM depending on the equipment For a more detailed description cf Section 2 6 2 1 LF
300. bration System sse enne 3 18 3 6 5 DlIAGnostic Systerm oe ae e dee dt es 3 21 3 6 6 einen nennen A aiaa 3 24 3 6 7 FORMat System une eerie ce eese dece cepe elaine eg ed uet 3 25 3 6 8 Syste M ari nnn 3 26 3 6 9 OUTPut SyStem 5 dece e ge tay eee eh anv 3 26 3 6 10 OUT Put2 System itat educit bei de dae a indie Pu De dede 3 28 3 611 SOURCe System oce egere d tede n sere ded erar dg E doe oe deg 3 29 3 6 11 1 SOURce AM 3 30 3 6 11 2 SOURce CORRection Subsystem sss eee 3 32 6 18 5 5 8 81 nennen 3 34 3 6 11 4 SOURce ERMes 3 50 3 6 11 5 SOURce FLEX Subsystem 3 55 3 6 11 6 SOURce FM Subsystem sese enne 3 63 1039 1856 12 6 E 13 SME Contents 3 6 11 7 SOURce FREQuency Subsystem sss eee 3 65 3 6 11 8 SOURce ILS Subsystem sse 3 68 3 6 11 9 SOURce LIST Subsystem sssssssseeeeen nennen 3 75 3 6 11 10 SOURce MARKer Subsystem ssssssssseeeenenes 3 78 3 6 11 11 SOURce
301. cance is specified by the network operator The value 0 is referred to as restricted in the ReFLEX25 documentation but can be set for test purposes The upper limit is 4091 RST value is 1 Example SOUR REFL25 SI ZONE 91 1038 6002 02 3 95 E 13 SOURce REFLex25 SME SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation SZONe 0 to 127 This command sets the subzone within a transmit zone The significance is specified by the network operator The value 0 is referred to as restricted in the ReFLEX25 documentation but can be set for test purposes The upper limit is 127 RST value is 1 Example SOUR REFL25 SI SZON 99 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation PROVider 0 to 16383 This command sets the ID of the service provider RST value is 0 Example SOUR REFL25 SI PROV 6383 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel Together with REFL25 SI FSP the commands under this node specify the frequency of the channel from the transmitter SME to the receiver The following formula is valid FREQ REFL25 SI FCH BASE REFL25 SI FCH ANUM REFL25 SI FSPacing If REFL25 AADaptation is set to ON the frequency calculated is also transferred to the RF setting of the SME when switching on ReFLEX25 provided that the formula provides a value that lies within the setting range of the SME The preset values for the following parameters are selected such that the default value of 929 00625MHz specified in the ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as f
302. cated by the more positive or higher output voltage INVers The active BLANK state is indicated by the more negative or lower output voltage Example OUTP BLAN POL NORM RST value is NORM OUTPut IMPedance The command queries the impedance of the RF output This permits converting the output level between units V and W The impedances cannot be changed With the SME this is the fixed value of 50 Ohm for the RF output Example OUTP IMP Response 50 OUTPut PROTection The commands to configure the protective circuit are under this node The RF output is protected by a protective circuit which deactivates the output if an overvoltage is supplied from outside This does not change the value of OUTPut STATe OUTPut PROTection CLEar The command resets the protective circuit after it has been triggered The state of the output is determined by OUTPut STATe again The command triggers an event and hence has no default setting value Example OUTP PROT CLE OUTPut PROTection TRIPped The command queries the state of the protective circuit The responses mean 0 The protective circuit has not responded 1 The protective circuit has responded Example OUTP PROT TRIP Response 1 OUTPut STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the RF output The RF output can also be switched off by the response of the protective circuit But this has no influence on this parameter Note In contrast to the PRESET key c
303. cation IN 2 164 3 110 KByDOAId ub aed 3 119 DK Broadcasting code 2 64 3 102 DM ditus E i Hadas Pda ded 1 9 2 78 data generator nene 2 79 data source 2 78 3 36 delays oi i RO E EU REM 2 86 e EP 2 79 3 37 memory extension XMEM 2 81 8 39 radio network data essen 2 86 Trige sii rettet 2 95 2 101 3 125 Double pulse 5 2 62 3 92 DSRR Digital Short Range Radio Radio network 2 86 Duration blank signal 2 166 Dwell list LIST v dad sashes eat Soe ee 2 151 3 76 MSEQ 2 146 2 148 3 119 Dwell time level SWeep dede cie e 2 140 3 105 LF sweep 2 142 3 103 PE SWCD 2 139 3 104 Edge othe WERE As 3 37 external trigger PULSE inp t eene nem 2 62 3 128 TRIGGER input 2 83 2 166 3 40 3 128 lee ete e b eat 2 31 acer pM I teak a hens pros 256 2 49 Enable reQiSter inntian nnna g 3 134 EOI command sss 3 8 ERMES European Radio Message System 2 78 Radio communication service 2 102 3 50 Radio Network siii iia 2 86 Error messages 2 170 3 121 7B 1 erit pti 3 116 3 118 3 141 ESE event status enable
304. ccording to SCPI forbids the mutual influence of types of modulation on one another In the case of remote control an error message is outputted when the attempt is made to switch on incompatible types of modulation cf annex B 1038 6002 02 2 51 E 13 Modulation Sources SME Table 2 3 Modulations which cannot be operated simultaneously AM AM AM FM FM1 FM2 FM2 PM1 PM1 INT1 INT2 EXT1 INT1 EXT1 2 INT2 EXT1 INT1 EXT1 2 2 _ pom 1 1 wer FM1 EXT1 2 X X x FM2 EXT1 2 X X Pmi x 1 ExT1 2 x x x n pm2int2 x x 2 1 2 x x x X X X X Mutual switching off in the case of manual control in the VOR ILS menu AM EXT can be added as an own parameter a Switching off by means of 1 out of n selection 2 6 1 3 MOD ON OFF Key The modulations can directly be switched on off using the key MOD ON OFF or by accessing the MODULATION menu When switching on using the MOD ON OFF key the modulation sources which are set in the modulation menus are used The MOD ON OFF key can either be effective for all modulations or for a selected modulation The selection for which modulation the MOD ON OFF key is effective is made in the UTILITIES MOD KEY menu cf Section Assigning Modulation to MOD ON OFF
305. ce ERMes STATe AUTO ON OFF The command specifies wether the ERMES data are to be newly calculated on switching from ERMes STATe OFF to STATe ON ON The data are newly recalculated and written into list OFF The existing contents are kept in the memory extension This can be used to transfer data generated or changed by an external program to the memory extension and thus generate a ERMes telegram RST value is ON Example SOUR ERM STAT AUTO ON SOURce ERMes CHANnel 0 to 15 The command determines the channel and thus the transmitter frequency for ERMes cf Chapter 2 Section Radiocommunication Service ERMES This command also influences the structure of the ERMES data This is why the channel cannot be changed by adjusting the frequency using command SOURce FREQuency but only using command SOURce ERMes CHANnel and then changing to STATe OFF and then to STATe ON again Example SOUR ERM CHAN 1 RST value is 0 SOURce ERMes ERRor The SME offers the possibility of entering bit errors into a 30 bit word of the message transmitted for test purposes The commands to specify the bit errors and their position are under this node SOURce ERMes ERRor MASK 0 to 1073741823 The command specifies the faulty bits of the word of the message selected using ERRor WORD 30 bits can be defined as faulty 1 or perfect 0 The decimal number transmitted is converted internally into a 30 bit binary number and t
306. ce POCSag ERRor WORD 0 to 16 not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag LBATches 0 to 100 not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag MESSage not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag MESSage ADDRess 0 to 209715 not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric CATalog not SCPI 3 84 SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA String not SCPI 3 84 1038 6002 02 C 10 E 12 SME List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric SELect 3 84 SOURce POCSag MESSage CATegory NUMeric TONE ALPHanumeric not SCPI 3 83 SOURce POCSag MESSage NUMeric String not SCPI 3 84 SOURce POCSag MESSage SWORd POCSag INForuf not SCPI 3 84 SOURce POCSag MESSage TONE A B C D not SCPI 3 84 SOURce POCSag MODulation FSK FFSK not SCPI 3 82 SOURce POCSag POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 85 SOURce POCSag STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 82 SOURce POCSag TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE not SCPI 3 85 SOURce POCSag TSLice 2 to 120 sec not SCPI 3 85 SOURce POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth AUTO ON OFF ONCE not SCPI 3 86 SOURce POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth 100 kHz 500 kHz not SCPI 3 86 SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF 3 87 SOURce POWer LEVel MMediate AMPLitude 144 to 16 dBm 3 87 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude OFFSet 100 to 100 3 87 SOURce POWer LEVel MMediate AMPLitude RCL INCLude EXCLude 3
307. ce REFLex25 MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA alphanumeric data string This command is used to fill the list selected using REFL25 MESS ALPH SEL with the transferred data The string may contain a maximum of 128 characters which must be part of the alphabet defined in the ReFLEX25 documentation ReFLEX25 and Flex share a common set of messages changing ReFLEX25 causes the message under Flex to be changed as well The messages are not influenced by RST Example SOUR REFL25 MESS ALPH DATA hello SOURce REFLex25 MESSage NUMeric numeric data string This command enters the character string for a numeric message The numeric data string may contain a maximum of 41 characters In addition to the 10 figures 0 to 9 other characters such as square brackets left and right and upper case letter U hyphen and blank space can be used The parameter is not influenced by RST Example SOUR REFL25 MESS NUM 49 89 1111 2222 SOURce REFLex25 MESSage RREQuired ON OFF This command determines whether the receiver is to confirm the message or not The respective bit is set in the message In the case of OFF the vector field is reduced by one code word if this is permitted by the ReFLEX standard RST value is OFF Example SOUR REFL25 MESS RREO ON SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation ZONE 0 to 4091 This command sets the geographical transmit zone The signifi
308. ch may assume one of the following values Frame contents Character Status display IDLE ReFLEX25 frame without addresses and message contents ReFLEX25 frame with alphanumeric message and address 2 ALPH NUM TONE SCl RSYN BER ReFLEX25 frame with a message that switches the receiver to the bit error test mode FPAT ReFLEX25 test filler pattern according to section 10 1 of the ReFLEX25 standard OTH Simulated data of another radiocommunication service contains no ReFLEX 1to9 CUS1 to CUS9 structures at all Notes A cycle can be reduced to less than 128 frames by transferring a string with less than 128 characters In this case the SME starts the next cycle earlier REFL25 FCONtent can also be changed with ReFLEX25 being active For using the frame types BER and FPAT see also section Bit Error Rate Test in the manual operation part SOUR REFL25 FCON ReFLEX25 frame with numeric message and address ReFLEX25 frame with tone only message and address SCI frame Emergency Resynchronization Frame 0 2 O m Custom frames freely definable by the user see instructions in the manual operation part RST value is SAAAA SAAAA Example abbreviated SOURce REFLex25 AADaptation ON OFF If REFL25 AADaptation is set to ON the following settings are performed automatically as soon as ReFLEX25 is switched on REFL25 SI F
309. change of one of the ERMES parameters except for MESSAGE SEQUENCE MODE requires the data to be recalculated During STATE ON every change of the parameters thus generates a warning ERMES settings and output signal mismatch The data can be recalculated either by switching over to STATE OFF STATE ON or by triggering action RECALCULATE OFF Switching off ERMES IEC bus command SOUR ERM STAT ON Opens a window to select the RF channel used 16 channels with the appropriate frequencies can be selected Channel 0 169 425 MHz Channel 8 169 625 MHz Channel 1 169 450 MHz Channel 9 169 650 MHz Channel 2 169 475 MHz Channel 10 169 675 MHz Channel 3 169 500 MHz Channel 11 169 700 MHz Channel 4 169 525 MHz Channel 12 169 725 MHz Channel 5 169 550 MHz Channel 13 169 750 MHz Channel 6 169 575 MHz Channel 14 169 775 MHz Channel 7 169 600 MHz Channel 15 169 800 MHz The selection of the channel also influences the structure of the ERMES data Thus the channel cannot be changed by readjusting the frequency in the FREQUENCY menu or via the FREQ key Readjusting the RF output frequency by means of the FREQ key or in the FREQUENCY menu is possible however message ERMES channel Frequency mismatch is displayed IEC bus command SOUR ERM CHAN 1 Triggers a recalculation of the data for the XMEM list This action must be triggered after every change of the parameters except for MESSAGE SEQUENCE MODE IEC bus comman
310. ched over to the next GLIDE SLOPE transmitting frequency acc to the table when switching on the modulation 2 70 E 13 SME Analog Modulations LOC GS MHz LOC GS MHz LOC GS MHz LOC GS MHz LOC GS MHz LOC GS MHz LOC GS MHz 108 10 108 70 109 30 109 90 110 50 111 10 111 70 333 50 334 70 330 50 332 00 333 80 329 60 331 70 108 15 108 75 330 35 109 35 109 95 110 55 111 15 111 75 333 35 334 55 331 85 333 65 329 45 331 55 108 30 108 90 109 50 110 10 110 70 111 30 111 90 331 10 334 10 329 30 332 60 334 40 330 20 332 30 108 35 108 95 109 55 110 15 110 75 111 35 111 95 330 95 333 95 329 15 332 45 334 25 330 05 332 15 108 50 109 10 331 40 109 70 110 30 110 90 111 50 329 90 333 20 335 00 330 80 332 90 108 55 109 15 109 75 110 35 110 95 111 55 329 75 331 25 333 05 334 85 330 65 332 75 EXT AM SENS 1V 100 1038 6002 02 Switching on off an external modulation signal via socket EXT1 OFF ON IEC bus command Note External AM input EXT1 switched off External AM input EXT1 activated The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent of modulation depth EXT SOUR ILS SOUR INT2 As the automatic level monitoring of the external modulation signal is switched off in this operating mode there can be an overmodulation as a function of the level of the external signal without a
311. ching on and off FM2 and selection of the modulation source EC bus short command SOUR FM2 STAT OFF LFGEN2 FREQ Input value of the LFGEN2 frequency EC bus short command SOUR FM2 INT FREQ 1kHz LFGEN2 SHAPE Selection of the waveform of the 2nd LF generator EC bus short command SOUR SOUR2 FUNC SIN EXT1 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC for the external input EXT1 IEC bus command SOUR FM1 EXT1 COUP AC 1038 6002 02 2 56 E 13 SME Analog Modulations EXT2 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC for the external input EXT2 IEC bus command SOUR FM1 EXT2 COUP AC PREEMPHASIS Selection of the preemphasis IEC bus command SOUR FM1 PRE 50us 2 6 2 3 1 FM Deviation Limits The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set cf Fig 2 26 It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be set In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message is displayed In the RF range 93 75 MHz to 130 MHz a different synthesis range is selected depending on the deviation set If the deviation is smaller than 62 5 kHz the synthesizer is in the division range with optimal spectral purity If the deviation set is larger than 62 5 kHz the extended heterodyne band is automatically selected maximal 4000 __ FM deviation kHz 2000 extended heterodyne band 1000
312. cified by SCPI see annex B If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to SYSTem ERRor Example STATus QUEue NEXT Response 221 Settings conflict 1038 6002 02 3 116 E 13 SME SYSTem 3 6 14 SYSTem System In this system a number of commands for general functions which are not immediately related to signal generation are combined Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SYSTem BEEPer STATe ON OFF COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 0 to 30 SERial CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 BAOD 115200 XON NONE PACE ERRor Query only KLOCk ON OFF j FIXed MSEQuence MODE MSEQuence CATalog Query only Name of sequence DELete ALL 50 ms to 60 s 50 ms to 60 s DWELI FREE AUTO STEP MODE 1 to 50 1 to 50 RCL Query only POINts Name of sequence SELect No query PRESet PROTect ON OFF password STATe SECurity ON OFF STATe Query only SERRor Query only VERSion SYSTem BEEPer STATe ON OFF This node contains the commands to set the beeper fitted RST value is OFF SYST BEEP STAT OFF SYSTem COMMunicate The commands to set the remote control interfaces are under this node 1038 6002 02 3 117 E 13 SYSTem SME SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB The commands to check the IEC bus are under this node GPIB General Purpose Inte
313. coder Only dB is permissible as a unit here the linear units V W etc are not permitted Example SOUR POW STEP INCR 2 RST value is 1dB 1038 6002 02 3 90 E 13 SME SOURce PULM 3 6 11 16 SOURce PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the pulse modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal The internal pulse generator option SM B4 is set in the SOURce PULSe subsystem Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce PULM Option SM B3 SM B4 SM B8 and SM B9 EXTernal IMPedance 50 Ohm 10 kOhm INTernal FREQuency 0 01176 Hz to 10 MHz POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce INTernal EXTernal STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM EXTernal IMPedance 50 Ohm 10 kOhm The command sets the impedance of the input socket for the external pulse generator The pulse generator has an own input socket hence this setting is independent of the corresponding settings under PM and FM RST value is 10 kOhm Example SOUR PULM EXT IMP 10E3 SOURce PULM INTernal FREQuency 0 01176 Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the frequency of the pulse generator This parameter is coupled with SOURce PULSe PERiod RST value is 100 kHz Example SOUR PULM INT FREQ 1MHz SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity between modulating and modulated signal NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the interpulse period INVerted The RF signal is supp
314. command Command sequence DM FSK STANdard POCSag512 DM FSK BRATe 512 DM FSK DEViation 4 5 kHz DM FSK FILTER GAUSs 2 73 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK STANdard POCSag1200 DM FSK BRATe 1200 DM FSK DEViation 4 5 kHz DM FSK FILTER GAUSs 2 73 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK STANdard POCSag2400 DM FSK BRATe 2400 DM FSK DEViation 4 5 kHz DM FSK FILTER GAUSs 2 73 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK STANdard CITYruf512 DM FSK BRATe 512 DM FSK DEViation 4 kHz DM FSK FILTER GAUSs 2 73 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK DEViation 4 kHz DM FSK FILTER GAUSs 2 73 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK STANdard CITYruf2400 DM FSK BRATe 2400 DM FSK DEViation 4 kHz DM FSK FILTER GAUSs 2 73 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK STANdard FLEX1600 DM FSK BRATe 1600 DM FSK DEViation 4 8 kHz DM FSK FILTER BESSel 2 44 DM FSK POLarity INVerted DM FSK STANdard FLEX3200 DM FSK BRATe 3200 DM FSK DEViation 4 8 kHz DM FSK FILTER BESSel 1 22 DM FSK POLarity INVerted ewe CITYruf1200 E BRATe 1200 Example SOUR DM FSK STAN POCS512 SOURce DM FSK BRATe 0 05 to 1900 kb s with FILTer OFF 0 05 to 90 kb s with FILTer switched on The command sets the bit rate for the modulation in bits per second If this value does not correspond to the standard selected the FILTer is deactivated automatically OFF Example SOUR DM FSK BRAT 2400 RST value is 1200b s SOURce DM FSK DEViation 0 to 4
315. commands this connection is pointed to in the description Command Parameter Default Remark Unit FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed The command specifies the data format that the SME uses for returning the data When data are transmitted from the controller to the SME the SME recognizes the data format automatically In this case the value specified here has no significance Note Settings using the FORMat DATA command are only effective for commands with which this is stated in the command description ASCii Numeric data are transmitted in plain text separated by commas PACKed Numerical data are transmitted as binary block data The format of the binary data itself is command specific Its description can be found in Section 3 5 5 Example FORM DATA ASC RST value is ASCIi FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped This command defines the order of bytes inside a binary block This concerns only blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally see section 3 5 5 paragraph Block Data NORMal SME expects for setting commands and sends for queries first the most significant byte of each IEEE 754 floating point number last the least significant byte For hosts based on a 80x86 processor this corresponds to the configuration of bytes in the main memory Thus no further conversion is required SWAPped The SME expects for setting commands and sends for queries
316. conds is output IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR ERM TACT ONCE EXTTRIG ALWAYS The units waits for a signal edge at the trigger connector After recognition of this edge the unit behaves as described under setting AL WAYS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EX SOUR ERM TACT STAR Starts the output of a message subsequence length 12 seconds Afterwards fill subsequences are sent again This action to be executed is only displayed and is only effective if MODE SINGLE is selected IEC bus command TRG Selection of the clock source This setting is also valid for FLEX REFLEX and POCSAG but not for the other digital modulations INT The clock required for signal generation is generated internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as the clock signal Note For all bit rates i e for 1600 bps and 3200 bps a symbol clock rate of 3200 Hz is always used This applies to both the output CLOCK SOURCE INT and the input CLOCK SOURCE EXT of the clock IEC bus command SOUR SOUR DM COMP CLOC SOUR INT 2 106 E 13 SME Digital Modulation 2 6 3 12 Radiocommunication Service FLEX Like ERMES FLEX is a radiocommunication service that makes for convenient paging When equipped with the SME B41 FLEX SME B11 DM coder and SME B12 DM memory extension options the SME generates call signals complying to the FLEX or FLEX
317. connecting device must be provided at the system level Never use the product if the power cable is damaged By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by e g tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fused with max 16 A Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket Otherwise this can result in sparks fire and or injuries Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment comply with IEC 950 EN 60950 Never remove the cover or part of the housing while you are operating the product This will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product Sheet 3 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Safety Instructions If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the PE terminal on site and the product s PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is
318. cted with ALPHANUM MESSAGE IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS ALPH DATA Test Opens a window to select a secure message Four messages USER1 to USERA are available and can be arbitrarily edited Note The messages can be edited via remote control only IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS SEC USER1 Selection of the type of a secure message The value set here is transmitted via the corresponding bits of the message body and thus determines the character used to fill the remaining space behind the message body It has no further consequences IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS SEC TYPE ASC Opens a window to select a binary message IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS BIN SEL USER1 Opens a window to edit one of the binary messages The message to be processed has to be selected wit BINARY MESSAGE Values 0 and 1 are available Each value represents 1 bit The maximum length of the message is 460 bit IEC bus command S0UR FLEX MESS BIN DATA ql Selection of direction of binary message LEFT Display from left to right RIGHT Display from right to left IEC bus command SOUR FLEX ESS BIN DDIR LEFT Entry of number of bits to be interpreted as a unit character Permissible values are 1 to 16 IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS BIN BLEN 1 Selection of whether or not the transmitted message is to be assigned a message n
319. d SOUR ERM STAT OFF STAT ON The parameters of the network information set the data denoting the network the SME simulates in greater detail These data are included in every message cf ERMES standard Input value of the zone and country code Germany has the value 262 IEC bus command SOUR ERM NINF ZCO 262 2 103 E 13 Digital Modulation OPERATOR CODE PAGING AREA SYSTEM INFORMATION EXT TRAFFIC INDICATOR BORDER AREA INDICATOR FREQ SUBSET INDICATOR DAY OF MONTH TIME MESSAGE INITIAL ADDRESS CATEGORY TONE NUMBER NUMERIC MESSAGE 1038 6002 02 SME Input value of the code of the network operator IEC bus command SOUR ERM NINF OPER 7 Input value of the paging area IEC bus command SOUR ERM NINF PA 4 The parameters of the system information set the data of the transmitting system These data are included in every message cf ERMES standard Input value of the External Traffic Indicator Bit IEC bus command SOUR ERM SI ETI ON Input value of the Border Area Indicator Bit IEC bus command SOUR ERM SI BAI ON Input value of the Frequency Subset Indicator One channel networks have an FSI of 30 according to ERMES standard IEC bus command SOUR ERM SI FSI 30 Input value of the date day of month IEC bus command SOUR ERM SI DOM 24 Input value of the time IEC bus command SOUR ER SI TIME 12 59 The parameters of thi
320. d press key 1 x ENTER Mark parameter MODE using the menu cursor and press key SELECT gt Mark selection 8M 1 using the menu cursor and press key SELECT 2 84 E 13 SME Digital Modulation Select external clock gt Mark submenu CLOCK using the menu cursor and press key SELECT gt Mark parameter CLOCK SOURCE using the menu cursor and press key SELECT gt Mark selection COUPLED using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Connect external gt Connect the data source to input socket DATA of the SME gt Connect the clock source to input socket CLOCK of the SME Recording gt Mark action RECORD DATA to be executed using the menu cursor and press key SELECT If parameter CLOCK EDGE is set on POS the data with the positive clock edge is read in The data sequence recorded can be activated as an internal source by switching over parameter SOURCE from EXT to DATA in the DM menu after the recording The above example describes the recording of a DATA sequence in the 8M 1 mode MEM MODE 8M 1 For recording in the 1M 3 mode the same settings can be used except for selection 1M 3 for MEM MODE It should be noted that the setting range for the start address and the sequence length is reduced No bits will be overwritten below the start address and one bit overwritten above the stop address In the 1M 3 mode the LEV ATT channel can be used for level reduction During recording this signal then has to be
321. d e edt date etas 5 15 5 2214 Quitput Level teo thi rete E de t a rr bb t ee ch creek 5 15 5 2 12 Output Reflection 5 17 5 2 13 Interrupt free Level Setting ATTEN FIXED 5 18 5 2 14 Overvoltage Protection SME02 and SMEO3 5 19 5 2 15 Level Monitoring at Input 5 19 5 2 16 Modulation Depthiof aiite tern Ren eR ee Reed 5 20 52 17 AM Frequency RFesporisoe ue ete ee eti ine i ite Et es 5 20 5 2 18 Distortion Factor tete dee e eed dar tete ente 5 21 5 2 19 Residual PhIM with AM iiec Ee eterne n ERE LE e 5 21 5 2 20 Level Monitoring at Input EXT2 Option SM B5 sse 5 22 52221 JEM Deviation Setting cartas rer e Pavese vot Do dead 5 22 5 2 22 FM Frequency Response en nnne 5 23 5 2 22 1 FM Frequency Response up to 100 2 5 23 5 2 22 2 FM Frequency Response up to 2 2 5 23 5 2 23 FM Distortion entrent 5 24 5 2 24 FM Preemphasis ihi ree eee i Ia re eb Ee Te ae ee ec 5 24 5 2 25 Residual AM with enhn enters 5 24
322. d from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed RST value is AC Example SOUR PM COUP DC 1038 6002 02 3 82 E 13 SME SOURce PM SOURce PM1 2 INTernal The settings for the internal PM generators are effected under this node For PM1 this is always LF generator 1 for PM2 always LF generator 2 Here the same hardware is set for FM1 PM1 AM INT1 as well as SOURce0 for FM2 2 and AM INT2 and SOURce2 as well This means that e g the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect SOUR AM INT2 FREQ SOUR FM2 INT FREQ SOUR PM2 INT FREQ SOUR2 FREQ CW SOURce PM1 2 INTernal FREQuency 400 kHz 1 kHz kHz 15 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency There are different specified ranges depending on the equipment of the instrument If neither SM B2 nor SM B6 are fitted only INT1 is permissible and values 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz and 15 kHz are valid With option SM B2 the specified range from 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz is valid with SM B6 from 0 1 to 1 MHz RST value is 1 kHz Example SOUR PM INT FREQ 10kHz SOURce PM1 2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal1 EXTernal2 The command selects the modulation source A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1 LF generator 1 is INTernal for PM1 LF generator2 for PM2 option SM B5 Several modulation sources can be active at the same time see e
323. d in the left hand column of the setting menu to the current selection on the right e g from LFGEN1 FREQ to 0 4 kHz Fig 2 4 gt Set the menu cursor to the position desired within the 1 out of n selection using the rotary knob or cursor keys lt gt gt Press the SELECT key The setting is made The selection mark which has marked the setting valid up to now wraps to the new position Press the RETURN key The menu cursor wraps back to the respective parameter 2 20 E 13 SME Basic Operating Steps Quick selection of The quick selection of a parameter reduces the number of operating steps if a parameter several parameters are set successively The menu cursor can directly be set further from line to line in the column of the setting values by pressing the SELECT key The menu cursor wraps from the setting value of a parameter to the setting value of the parameter in the next line The column of the setting values can be exited at each position by pressing the RETURN key 2 2 3 3 Triggering Action Lines in the setting menu which are marked with the gt symbol at the end of the line qualify an action which can be carried out Instruction SEARCH ONCE in the LEVEL ALC menu e g switches on level control for level calibration for a short period of time Trigger action gt Set the menu cursor to the respective instruction gt Press the SELECT key The action is triggered While the action is c
324. d in the range 00 through OF hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners Table A 3 Addressed Commands Command QuickBASIC commandl Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received Clear and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting GET Group Execute IBTRG device Triggers a previously active device function eg a Trigger sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local IBLOC device Transition to the Local state manual control PPC Parallel Poll IBPPC device data Configure instrument for parallel poll The Configure QuickBASIC command additionally executes PPE PPD 1038 6002 02 6A 3 E 12 RS 232 C Interface SME RS 232 C Interface The instrument is fitted with an RS 232 C interface as standard The 9 pin connector is at the rear panel A controller can be connected via this interface for remote control Interface characteristics Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode Bidirectional data transmission via two separate lines Transmission rate selectable from 1200 to 115200 baud Logic 0 signal from 3 V to 15 V Logic 1 signal from 15 V to 3 V An external instrument controller can be connected Software handshake XON XOFF Hard
325. d settings see table 5 2 Level 0 dBm Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 40 kHz Modulation frequency 1 kHz Measure the amplitude modulation resulting by means of a 23 kHz lowpass filter and peak weighting at the modulation analyzer Unwanted modulation max 0 196 5 24 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 26 Carrier frequency Deviation with FM Test equipment Measurement Test system 5 1 1 1 gt Settings at the SME 400 MHz Level 0 dBm Select LFGEN 1 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Deviation O kHz Setting at the modulation analyzer Counter function Observe change when switching on and off FM Frequency deviation when switching on FM lt 50 Hz gt Increase the deviation at the SME to 200 kHz Frequency deviation when switching on FM 2050 Hz 5 2 27 FM Stereo Modulation Test equipment Test setup Measurement 1038 6002 02 Test system 5 1 1 1 Connect the stereo coder output of the modulation analyzer with Socket EXT1 of the SME Settings at the SME Carrier frequencies 10 7 MHz and 85 MHz to 108 MHz Select EXT1 DC coupled in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 46 kHz gt Setting at the stereo coder Set the level such that neither EXT1 HIGH nor EXT1 LOW is indicated gt Modulate both channels with 1 kHz determ
326. des 1 12 Radio network data DM seen 2 86 Radiocommunication Service 2 102 3 41 2 2 107 3 41 2 127 3 41 2 116 3 41 RCL list 3 120 Recording of external data 2 83 3 40 REF INDUU OULDUE eee 2 15 2 66 2 155 3 65 Signal VOR ves ierit ir rere etn 2 64 3 106 Reference Zootecnia E ted 2 15 50 MEI iniit ieri 1 12 external 2 155 3 99 REIR RE 3 99 Mema A rade lasers 3 99 oscillator 1 5 2 155 3 99 Step Synthesis oor cete ct ne 1 5 ReFLEX25 radiocommunication service 2 116 REMOTE E EN AEE EE fees 3 2 Remote control interface E 13 SME IEC DUS setae ss a 2 15 2 17 1 RS 232 Remove paneling Reset status reporting system 3 142 Residual A 5 15 AM with FM PhiM with AM amp Responses to 3 8 RF channel ERMES seen 2 103 3 51 Trequency tee n e ee te 2 41 2 68 OUL DUT eese ais pentane en ieee 2 11 3 27 OutpUtlevel b ree 2 43 3 89 WOOD cidade 2 138 3 103 REORE aee rtr dan 2 49 Rotary knob 2 7 2 19 RS232 interface io
327. desired output frequency of possibly series connected instruments such as mixers in the menu Note Further settings Frequency sweep Menu SWEEP LF frequency Menu MODULATION Menu LF OUTPUT int ext reference frequency Menu UTILITIES REF OSC Phase of the output signal Menu UTILITIES PHASE Menu selection FREQUENCY rr 100 000 0000 30 0 FREQUENCY 100 000 000 O MHz LEVEL OFFSET 0 0 Hz ODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT KNOB STEP USER 1 000 000 0 MHz SWEEP KNOB STEP DECIMAL USER LIST EXCLUDE FROM RCL ON OFF MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP Fig 2 16Menu FREQUENCY preset setting FREQUENCY Input value of the RF frequency considering the OFFSET input value The frequency of the RF output signal is determined by input values FREQUENCY and OFFSET cf Section 2 4 1 Frequency Offset IEC bus command SOUR FREQ 100E6 OFFSET Input value of the frequency offset e g of a series connected mixer cf Section 2 4 1 Frequency Offset IEC bus command SOUR FREQ OFFS 0 KNOB STEP USER Input value of the step width for frequency variation using the rotary knob The RF frequency is varied in the step width entered if KNOB STEP is set to USER IEC bus command SOUR FREQ STEP 1MHz 1038 6002 02 2 41 E 13 RF Frequency SME KNOB STEP DECIMAL Variation step width corresponding to the position of the digit cursor USER
328. ding to new frequency prior frequency STEP LOG x prior frequency if STARt STOP STEP LOG indicates the fraction of the prior frequency by which this is increased for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is indicated in percent with the suffix PCT having to be used explicitly If STEP LOG is changed the value of POINts valid for SPAC LOG also changes according to the formula stated under POINts A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOG Example SOUR SWE STEP LOG 10PCT RST value is 1 PCT 1038 6002 02 3 104 E 13 SME SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep POWer DWELI 10msto5s The command sets the dwell time per level step Example SOUR SWE POW DWEL 12ms RST value is 15 ms SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTOEach trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle MANual Each level step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOURce POWer MANual command the trigger system is not active The level increases or decreases depending on the direction of the shaft encoder by the value stated under SOURce POWer STEP INCRement STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The level increases by the value indicated under SOURce POWer STEP INCRement Example SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO SOURce SWEep POWer POINts Number The command determines the number of steps in a sw
329. dio network ooooconccocinoccccnonccccnonanocanancconancna nana nonannnos 2 86 Area code BK eese 2 64 3 102 ARI traffic channel 2 63 3 102 ASCII character licor 3 11 ete eR LE estes 3 11 1 5 2 44 circuits indication isien a 2 164 Audio sigrial e rt ptr eee 2 63 3 100 AVIONICS systems essen nnne nnn nnne nnns 2 64 B Bandwidth level control sess 2 46 3 88 Batch PERMES e a taa 2 105 3 51 eise 2 130 3 85 Battery eXClalige iiie d a Eee e d etd aei 4 1 Sel e ro ie 3 123 Baud rate RS232 2 153 3 118 5 BO6pOt tai NEP HN e dde 2 167 3 117 Bit clock pulse 2 92 3 36 1038 6002 02 Bit errors ERMES seen 2 105 3 51 Bit rate 4FSK modulation cesses FFSK modulation FLEX nene FSK modulation GFSK modulation GMSK modulation QPSK modulation REFLEX is ote Suae Lanne ce 2 116 3 93 Bit sequence PRBS 3 40 3 41 BK area code sse 2 64 3 102 BLANK OUIDUE cce etre s 2 13 2 136 2 144 2 166 3 103 Block dala EI a 3 25 Boolean 3 9 Brief Instruction Sra uoo ss HE 3 1 Brightness control o
330. ductos sirven solamente de ayuda para el manejo que solamente est previsto para personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte como por ejemplo gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc El usuario es responsable de que los productos sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios de transporte y de que las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante de los medios de transporte sean tenidas en cuenta En caso de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden causarse da os en personas y objetos Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un veh culo queda en la responsabilidad absoluta del conductor que conducir el veh culo de manera segura Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente las lesiones u otra clase de da os No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Siempre queda en la responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la seguridad del veh culo y el fabricante no asumir ninguna clase de responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones Dado el caso de que est integrado un producto de laser en un producto R amp S por ejemplo CD DVD ROM no utilice otras instalaciones o funciones que las descritas en la documentaci n De otra manera pondr en peligro su salud ya que el rayo laser puede da ar irreversiblemente sus ojos Nunca trate de descomponer estos productos Nunca m
331. dware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting however it is permissible to set impermissible instrument states within one command line for a short period of time without this leading to an error message example simultaneous activation of FM and PM At the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must have been reached again Before passing on the data to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set cf Section 3 8 3 4 The hardware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has settled This fact can be used to synchronize command servicing IEC bus queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit 3 7 4 Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit on request The exact structure and function are described in Section 3 8 1038 6002 02 3 131 E 13 Instrument Model and Command Processing SME 3 7 5 Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller which it receives from the data set management It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer The output buffer has a size of 256 characters If the information requested is longer it is made available in portions without this being recognized by the controller If the instrument is addressed
332. e RST value is 2048 INTernal The internal oscillator is used EXTernal The reference signal is fed externally RST value is INTernal Example SOUR ROSC SOUR EXT 1038 6002 02 3 99 E 13 SOURce STEReo SME 3 6 11 20 SOURce STEReo Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to generate FM stereo multiplex signals conforming to standards according to the pilot tone method options SM B5 and SM B6 The modulation signal is output in addition at the LF output socket cf Section OUTPut2 system as well Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce STEReo Option SM B6 and STATe ON OFF SM B3 DEViation 0 Hz to 100 kHz Hz SIGNal AUDio ARI AUDio FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 15 kHz Hz PREemphasis OFF 50 us 75 us MODE RIGHt LEFT RELeft REMLeft PILot STATe ON OFF DEViation 0 Hz to 10 kHz Hz PHASe 0 to 360 deg rad ARI DEViation 0 Hz to 10 kHz TYPE BK DK OFF Hz BK CODE A B C D E F SOURce STEReo STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the stereo signal RST value is OFF Example SOUR STER STAT ON SOURce STEReo DEViation 0 Hz to 100 kHz The command sets the frequency deviation of the FM stereo multiplex signal without considering the pilot tone content Example SOUR STER DEV 40kHz RST value is 40 kHz SOURce STEReo SIGNal AUDio ARI The command selects which signals are generated simulated audio signals or ARI traffic channe
333. e keyword is printed on a label which is part of the equipment supplied and has to be stuck to the rear of SME A prerequisite for installing the options is that option SME B11 DM Coder hardware VAR 2 4 REV 21 and SME B12 Memory Extension hardware VAR 2 REV 2 as well as a firmware version 21 95 are part of SME Enabling option Call up menu UTILITIES INSTALL and then press key SELECT Select OPTION TO INSTALL and then press key SELECT gt Select option FLEX or POCSAG to be installed and then press key SELECT Enter the 6 digit keyword into the entry field INSTALLATION KEY and then press ENTER Switch off unit and then switch on again After installation the new option can be checked in the module list in menu UTILITIES DIAG CONFIG 1038 6002 02 1 11 E 13 SME Fitting the Options 1 3 13 Cabling of the 50 MHz Reference REF50 Instrument without options Cable From To W72 A7 X72 A8 X81 Cable From To Instrument with option multifunction generator nes PUER desta W72 A5 X51 A8 X81 Cable From To Instrument with option pulse generator wat A7 X72 A4 X41 W72 A4 X42 A8 X81 Cable From To Instrument with options multifunction generator W172 A7 X72 A5 X53 and pulse generator W41 A5 X51 A4 X41 W72 A4 X42 A8 X81 1 4 Mounting into a 19 Rack Caution X Ensure free air inlet at the perforation of the side walls and air outlet at the rear of the instrument in rack
334. e 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 5 1 Table 5 2a b Table 5 3 Figures Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 Fig 2 18 Fig 2 19 Fig 2 20 Fig 2 21 Fig 2 22 Fig 2 23 Fig 2 24 Fig 2 25 Fig 2 26 Fig 2 27 Fig 2 28 Fig 2 29 Fig 2 30 Fig 2 31 Fig 2 32 Fig 2 33 Fig 2 34 1039 1856 12 Contents Input sockets for the different types of modulation 2 50 Status messages in the case of a deviation 2 51 Modulations which cannot be operated 2 52 Modulation generators as component parts 2 53 Radio Network data 2 din 2 86 LIST mode Example of a list esses 2 143 MEMORY SEQUENCE Example of a list 2 148 Common Commands aisina naai a nennen senten treten reser ra nennen 3 14 Device Response to 3 15 Synchronization with OPC OPC And 3 132 Overview of the status register cccccc
335. e EVENt part of an SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using command ESE and read using command x FSE Table 3 5 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue cf annex B Error Messages 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct however cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue cf annex B Error Messages 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received An error message with a number between 100 and
336. e SME Carrier frequency 890 2 MHz Level 13 dBm in menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK SOURCE DATA SELECT STANDARD GSM LEVEL ATTEN 60 dB LEVATT MODE GSM SLOPE Enter the following bit pattern using the list editor for DATA Bit no 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Contents 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Bit no 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 Contents 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Bit no 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 Contents 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Bit no 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 038 040 Contents 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Bit no 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Contents 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Bit no 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 Contents 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 Bit no 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 Contents 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 Bit no 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 Contents 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 5 35 E 13 Test Procedure Bit no 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 Contents 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Bit no 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 Contents 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 Bit no 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 Contents 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit no 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Contents 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Bit no 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Contents 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Bit no 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 Contents 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 Bit no 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 Contents 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Bit no 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 Contents 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit no 161 1250 Contents 111 For LEV ATT ent
337. e called The values range from 16 777 216 to 1 073 741 823 IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 MESS PADD 16777216 Opens a window to enter the character string for a numeric message The SME provides a maximum of 41 characters In addition to the 10 figures O to 9 other characters such as square brackets left and right and upper case letter U hyphen and blank space can be used IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 MESS NUM 49 89 4129 1131 2 120 E 13 SME ALPHANUM MESSAGE EDIT MESSAGE RESPONSE REQUIRED SYSTEM INFORMATION ZONE SUBZONE SERVICE PROVIDER 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Opens a window to select an alphanumeric message The following selections can be made FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD complete ReFLEX25 character set USER1 4 Four messages that can be freely edited by command EDIT MESSAGE There is one common set of messages for ReFLEX25 and Flex each modification for ReFLEX25 also changes the message for FLEX IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 MESS ALPH FOX Opens a window to edit the message selected under ALPHANUM MESSAGE The maximum length of the message is 128 characters IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 MESS ALPH DATA Hello world Determines whether the receiver is to confirm the message or not The respective bit is set in the message In
338. e command activates or deactivates the pilot tone The pilot tone can be activated or deactivated independently of the setting of SOURce STEReo SIGNal Example SOUR STER PIL STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo PILot DEViation 0 Hz to 10 kHz The command sets the frequency deviation of the pilot tone RST value is 6 72 kHz Example SOUR STER PIL DEV 6720 SOURce STEReo PILot PHASe 0 to 360 deg The command sets the phase of the pilot tone The zero crossing of the suppressed 38 kHz auxiliary carrier of the stereo multiplex signal serves as a phase reference Example SOUR STER PIL PHAS 10deg RST value is 0 deg 1038 6002 02 3 101 E 13 SOURce STEReo SME SOURce STEReo ARI The commands to specify the characteristics of the ARI traffic channel signal are under this node SOURce STEReo ARI DEViation 0 Hz to 10 kHz The command sets the deviation content of the unmodulated 57 kHz ARI auxiliary carrier Example SOUR STER ARI DEV 4kHz RST value is 4 kHz SOURce STEReo ARI TYPE BK DK OFF The command specifies which identification is generated BK Area code The AM modulation depth of the area code on the ARI auxiliary carrier which has been selected under SOURce STEReo ARI BK CODE is m 0 6 DK Broadcasting code The AM modulation depth of the broadcasting code 125 Hz on the ARI auxiliary carrier is m 0 3 OFF Area and broadcasting code are deactivated RST value is DK
339. e command acts on module ROSC cf TEST DIR SUM TEST RAM The command triggers a test of the RAM TEST ROM The command triggers a test of the main memory EEPROM TEST BATTery RAM The command triggers a test of the RAM battery voltage The voltage should be at least 2 1 V TEST BATTery XMEM The command triggers a test of the XMEM battery voltage The voltage should be at least 2 1 V 1038 6002 02 3 123 E 13 TRIGger SME 3 6 16 TRIGger System The TRIGger system contains the commands to select the trigger source and to configure the external trigger socket The suffix is only important for the SWEEP subsystem and conforms to the numbering of the SOURce system TRIGger1 RF generator TRIGger2 LFGEN2 The trigger system of the SME is a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system Compared to SCPI the TRIGger system shows the following differences No INITiate command the instrument behaves as if INITiate CONTinuous ON was set e There are several subsystems denoting the different parts of the instrument under TRIGger SWEep LIST PULSe MSEQuence DM Further commands as to the trigger system of the SME can be found in the ABORt system Command Parameter Default Remark Unit TRIGger1 2 SWEep IMMediate No query SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO DM Option SME B11 IMMediate No query SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO LIS IMMediate No query SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO
340. e generation of the ReFLEX25 signal immediately after switching on of ReFLEX25 All ALPH NUM and TONE frames are replaced by IDLE frames By selecting EXECUTE SINGLE one ALPH NUM or TONE frame as specified in FRAME CONTENTS is transmitted all further ALPH NUM and TONE frames are again replaced by IDLE frames until EXECUTE SINGLE is triggered again IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR SING SOUR REFL25 TACT MESS EXT SINGLE The SME starts with the generation of the ReFLEX25 signal immediately after switching on of ReFLEX25 EXT SINGLE behaves like SINGLE however instead of EXECUTE SINGLE a trigger signal is required at the trigger input connector IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR REFL25 TACT MESS EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the ReFLEX25 signal after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input connector After recognition of this signal exactly one cycle up to 128 frames is output The frames are output in the way they have been specified in FRAME CONTENTS After execution of the cycle the SME waits for a new trigger pulse IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR REFL25 TACT ONCE 2 125 E 13 Digital Modulation SME EXTTRIG ALWAYS The SME only starts with the generation of the ReFLEX25 signal after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input connector Then this mode behaves as described under the setting ALWAYS This
341. e injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer to select suitable personnel for operating the products 8 Prior to switching on the product it must be ensured that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 9 In the case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with earthing contact and protective earth connection 1171 0000 42 02 00 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use If the product has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply the plug of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device In such cases it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times length of connecting cable approx 2 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply If products without power switches are integrated in racks or systems a dis
342. e instead of the actual error code if the queue is full It indicates that an error has occurred but not been accepted The queue can accept 5 entries 360 Communication error An error has occurred during the transmission or reception of data on the IEC IEEE bus or via the RS 232 interface Query Error Error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Query INTERRUPTED The query has been interrupted Example After a query the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely 410 The query is incomplete Example The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data Query DEADLOCKED The query cannot be processed Example The input and output buffers are full the instrument cannot continue operation 420 Query UNTERMINATED 430 1038 6002 02 7B 4 E 11 SME List of Error Messages SME Specific Error Messages Device dependent Error device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 105 Frequency underrange The frequency is below the limit value guaranteed 106 Frequency overrange The frequency is beyond the limit value guaranteed 110 Output unleveled The level control loop is deactivated 115 Level overrange The level is above the limit value guaranteed 117 Level underrange The level is belo
343. e request 3 16 3 140 SSB phase noise enne nnne 5 14 STANDBY 1 1 1 2 2 9 Start address XMEM 2 83 3 39 Start bit RS 232 C a A ian A6 5 Start frequency EP SWeODi a hue e 2 142 3 110 RF sweep 2 138 3 66 Start level level 2 140 3 90 Or 3 2 STATus OPERation register 3 115 3 138 1038 6002 02 Index QUEStionable 3 116 3 139 Status byte STB sss 3 136 Status Me oro e EE ERE 2 18 STATUS page 2 169 Status register overview 3 135 Status reporting 51 3 133 STB status byte oti 3 136 Step width DDM value with rotary knob 2 74 level sweep 2 140 3 90 LE SWe6D iD ER 2 142 3 114 RF sweep ssssssssssssssssss eene nna 2 138 3 67 rotary knob carrier frequency ccocccccococonocccocncnnccanecnonananonno 2 67 2 75 frequency variation eese 2 41 level variatiQn iieri oerte i ledere bienes 2 44 Stereo modulation Stereo multiplex signal Stop bit RHS232 ovis wee ren ett Stop frequency LF SWCD Ai itch e tree eir 2 142 3 110 RF sweep
344. e spectrum should observe the following tolerance limits the reference level is at the center frequency Offset frequency Level 0 kHz 0 dB reference level 30 to 50 kHz 40 dB gt 50 kHz lt 50 dB Select DELAY in menu UTILITIES CALIB DQPSK Adjust the delay such that the spectrum has symmetric spurious sidebands which are as low as possible and observes the tolerance limits Note The delay data are stored in the RAM thus the calibration can be repeated as often as required If the value for the delay thus found is different from the DEFAULT SETTING stored with R amp S the new value can also be transferred to the EPROM see note in Section 1 3 3 however Select OVERWRITE DEFAULT SETTING in menu UTILITIES CALIB DQPSK Fitting the Options SME 1 3 10 Option SME B12 DM Memory Extension The memory extension is mounted on one of rear slots A5 A6 or 12 gt Undo the board locking on both sides of the motherboard Plug the PCB on one of the slots A5 A6 or 12 Fix the board locking 1 3 11 Option SME B19 Rear Panel Connections for RF and LF The SME can be retrofitted to include rear panel connections for RF and LF for mounting it into a 19 rack using option SME B19 The mounting instructions are attached to the option 1 3 12 Options SME B41 FLEX Protocol and SME B42 POCSAG Options SME B41 and SME B42 are software options They can be enabled by a keyword Th
345. eak value 5 27 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 32 Pulse Modulation Option SM B3 B8 B9 5 2 32 1 ON OFF Ratio Test equipment Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 Pulse generator Section 5 1 item 17 Test setup To determine the ON OFF ratio connect a spectrum analyzer to the RF output socket of the SME and a pulse generator to socket PULSE at the rear panel of the SME Measurement gt Setting at the SME Select EXT in the MODULATION PULSE SOURCE menu gt Determine the output level of the SME with a present high and low signal with various carrier frequencies Difference of the output level with a high and low signal etc e eed gt 80 dB 5 2 32 2 Dynamic Characteristics Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 4 Measurement gt Simultaneously display the input signal from the pulse generator and the down converted output signal on the dual trace oscilloscope triggering on the input signal gt Settings at the pulse generator Square wave pulse sequence at a frequency of approx 10 MHz TTL level Settings at the SME Carrier frequencies 50 MHz with option SM B3 level 10 dBm with option SM B8 level 9 dBm with option SM B9 level 8 dBm gt With carrier frequencies gt 50 MHz use mixer and set an IF of approx 50 MHz using the auxiliary transmitter Evaluate the modulated RF signal at the oscilloscope Rising time the time between 10
346. eceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeseaeeeeneeseeeesaeeesaeeeeeees 3 136 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register 3 137 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus OPERation 3 138 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register 3 139 Resetting instrument functions seen enne 3 142 Test Instruments and Utilities 5 1 Changeover limits of the SME sse nnns 5 6 BRI E 5 44 SME View from the toD sieci aa nennen ener nennen nnns nennen 1 5 Front panel view 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 10 Rear panel Vi Wii id Ln e da iaa via 2 12 Design of the display 2 antes cai a aaa 2 18 MODULATION AM 2 19 Display after AM settlrig cies Sethian seen di ed 2 25 Display after pattern setting nennen 2 27 OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu sse 2 28 SELECT LIST selection 2 29 DELETE LIST selection Window ccc cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeseeeeess 2 30 Edit function EDI VIEW 3 ida oh age aind dap annee Ves 2 31 Block function FILL Input windOw enn 2 32
347. ectly cf Section Radiocommunication Service ERMES Option SME B41 FLEX together with option SME B12 memory extension can be used to generate call signals complying to the FLEX standard cf Section Radiocommunication Service FLEX Option SME B42 POCSAG together with option SME B12 memory extension can be used to generate call signals complying to the POCSAG standard cf Section Radiocommunication Service POCSAG Option SME B43 REFLEX together with option SME B12 memory extension can be used to generate call signals complying to the ReFLEX standard cf Section Radiocommunication Service REFLEX 1038 6002 02 2 78 E 13 SME Digital Modulation 2 6 3 1 Data Generator The data generator contains a memory for the data DATA for level switchover LEV ATT and for the BURST output BURST each The data generator can be programmed via the IEC bus or manually using the list editor cf Fig 2 37 The maximal memory capacity is 8192 bits The data generator can also be programmed for shorter sequences The data of all three memories are combined in a list Up to 10 different lists can be stored in the instrument Option SME B12 DM memory extension increases the memory depth to 8 MBit cf Section 2 6 3 3 DM memory extension option SME B12 The DATA memory contains the modulation data bits The LEV ATT memory contains the bits to control the level reduction A logic 0 means the level indicated in the header field
348. ed bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a Service Request SRQ is generated on the IEC bus which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using command SRE and read using SRE Table 3 4 Overview of the status register Bit no Meaning 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with IEC bus control 3 QUEStionable status sum bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be specified greater detail by polling the QUEStionable status register 4 MAV Bit Message AVailable The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller cf annex D program examples ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable
349. eep Instead of this command command SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic should be used as POINts has been adapted to the instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command The value of POINts depends on SPAN and STEP according to the following formulas POINts log STOP log START log STEP LOG 1 A change of POINts results in an adaptation of STEP but not of STARt STOP and SPAN Example SOUR SWE POW POIN 100 SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 0 to 10 dB The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next level value of a sweep is calculated according to new level prior level STEP LOG x prior level STEP LOG indicates the fraction of the prior level by which this is increased for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is indicated in dB with suffix dB having to be used explicitly If STEP LOG is changed the value of POINts also changes according to the formula indicated under POINts A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOG Keyword LOG can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see example Example SOUR SWE STEP 10dB RST value is 1dB 1038 6002 02 3 105 E 13 SOURce VOR 3 6 11 22 SOURce VOR Subsystem SME This subsystem contains the commands to control the characteristics of the test signals for VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range option SM B6 multifunction generator Command Parameter Default Remark Unit
350. eep Menu SWEEP LF GEN offers access to settings for LF sweep Note Settings LF SWEEP and SOURCE LFGEN2 SHAPE NOI deactivate one another Menu selection SWEEP LF GEN2 A A START FREQ 100 0000 STOP FREQ 50 0000 30 0 e FREQUENCY 1 100 000 0 LEVEL I STOP FREQ 50 000 0 ODULATION 1 CURRENT FREQ 82 000 0 DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SPACING LIN LOG SWEEP STEP LIN 1 000 0 LIST DWELL 15 0 MEM SEQ UTILITIES ODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT INGLE EXT STEP HELP EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP RESET SWEEP y ARKER 1 FREQ ARKER 1 STATE OFF ON ARKER 2 FREQ 2 000 0 kHz ARKER 2 STATE OFF ON MARKER 3 FREQ 3 000 0 kHz Y ARKER 3 STATE OFF ON Fig 2 57 Menu SWEEP LF GEN 1038 6002 02 2 141 E 13 Sweep START FREQ STOP FREQ CURRENT FREQ STEP DWELL SPACING MODE EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP RESET SWEEP gt MARKER 1 FREQ MARKER 2 FREQ MARKER 3 FREQ MARKER 1 STATE MARKER 2 STATE MARKER 3 STATE 1038 6002 02 Input value of the starting frequency SOUR SOUR2 FREQ STAR 100kHz IEC bus short command Input value of the stop frequency IEC bus short command SME SOUR2 FREQ STOP 50kHz Indication of the current frequency value Operating mode STEP Input value of the frequency Input value of the step width I
351. eld The transmitted decimal number 0 4294967295 is converted internally into a 32 bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits These bits are XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine which bits of this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly Example SOUR POCS ERROr MASK 0 RST value is 0 SOURce POCSag ERRor WORD 0 to 16 The command determines the position of the word to be falsified in the batch Value 0 denotes the synchronization word Example SOUR POCS ERRor WORD 0 RST value is 0 SOURce POCSag LBATches 0 to 100 The command sets the number of filler batches which are transmitted before the message Leading BATches RST value 0 Example SOUR POCS LBAT 0 SOURce POCSag MESSage The parameters of this section are used for setting the destination address as well as the useful data of the message SOURce POCSag MESSage ADDRess 0 to 2097151 The command sets the address of the pager to be called The specified range is 0 to 2097151 Example SOUR POCS MESS ADDR 1 RST value is 1 SOURce POCSag MESSage CATegory NUMeric TONE ALPHanumeric The command selects the category of the transmitted message TONE Tone only message NUMeric Numeric message ALPHanumeric Alphanumeric message RST value is TONE Example SOUR POCS MESS CAT TONE 1038 6002 02 3 85 E 13 SOURce POCSag SME SOURce POCSag MESSage SWORd POCSag INForuf
352. em FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 2 36 E 13 SME List Editor MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select single value function p EDIT VIEW 4 The EDIT page of the MEM SEQ lo EDIT VIEW menu is called The menu cursor marks the index of the first element NN Y of list MSEQO Set the menu cursor to the memory location number value of the first element c f Fig 2 15 A Enter MEMORY 20 The menu cursor automatically wraps m to the DWELL value of the first ENIER element Fig 2 15 B The default value is 100 ms DATA INPUT DATA INPUT Enter DWELL 15 s T The menu cursor automatically wraps to the MEMORY value of the second ENTER element DATA INPUT Enter MEMORY 1 3 The menu cursor automatically wraps to the DWELL value of the second ENTER element default value is 100 ms Reset the menu cursor to the index RETURN Reset the menu cursor to the RETURN FUNCTION menu item of the EDIT page of menu MEM SEQ c f Fig 2 15 C Reset the menu cursor to the FUNCTION menu item of the OPERATION page of menu MEM SEQ Note With the return to the OPERATION page the operation of the list editor is finished In the list mode menu LIST function LEARN must be activated subsequently to ensure that the settings are transferred to the hardware 1038 6002 02 2 37 E 13 List Editor SME A 100 000 000 0 pa
353. ency CENTer Example SOUR FREQ CW 100kHz RST value is 100 MHz SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed RCL INCLude EXCLude 1038 6002 02 The command determines the effect of the recall function on the frequency RST value has no effect to this setting INCLude The saved frequency is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the RECALL key or with a memory sequence EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded the current settings are maintained Example SOUR FREQ RCL INCL 3 65 E 13 SOURce FREQuency SME SOURce FREQuency MANual 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz The command sets the frequency if SOURce SWEep MODE MANual SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep are set Only frequency values between the settings with SOURce FREQuency STARt and SOURce FREQuency STOP are permitted As to specified range cf FREQuency CENTer RST value is 100 MHz Example SOUR FREQ MAN 500MHz SOURce FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep LIST The command specifies the operating mode and hence also specifies which commands check the FREQuency subsystem The following allocations are valid CW FlXed CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is specified by means of SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep operating mode The frequency is specified by means of commands SOURce FREQuency S
354. epeat measurement when frequency is fed at socket EXT2 and with setting MODULATION FM FM2 SOURCE EXT2 Settings recommended 1101 MHz 1500 MHz 3000 MHz 6000 MHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz X X X X 1151 MHz 1550 MHz 2950 MHz SME03 06 5950 MHz SMEO6 1038 6002 02 5 23 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 23 FM Distortion Factor Test equipment Measurement 5 2 24 FM Preemphasis Test equipment Measurement Test system 5 1 1 1 gt Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 250 MHz Level 0 dBm Select INT in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 62 5 kHz Modulation frequency 1 kHz Read off distortion factor at the modulation analyzer Distortion factor iii clinic dde rai max 0 5 Test system 5 1 1 1 gt Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 100 MHz Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 25 kHz gt Read off the deviation at the modulation analyzer and note down as a reference value with a modulation frequency of 100 Hz gt Switch on preemphasis 50 us at the SME and at the modulation analyzer and increase the modulation frequency to 15 kHz Deviation of the deviation measured now from the reference value lt 5 gt Repeat measurement with a preemphasis of 75 us 5 2 25 Residual AM with FM Test equipment Measurement 1038 6002 02 Test system 5 1 1 1 Settings at the SME Various test frequencies gt 10 MHz for recommende
355. er a sus productos siempre al dia con los estandards de seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el maximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestra secci n de gesti n de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el comprobante de conformidad adjunto seg n las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los estandards t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros deber el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la ind stria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda ser dafiada El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto Se parte del uso correcto del producto pa
356. er the following bit pattern Bit 1 to 8 must be 1 Bit 9 to 159 must be 0 Bit 160 to 1250 must be 1 Settings at the FSE PRESET CENTER 890 2 MHz REF20dBm MODE VECTORANALYZER MARKER SEARCH SUM MKR ON RMS phase error Peak phase 1038 6002 02 5 36 088 098 108 118 128 138 148 158 1 089 099 109 119 129 139 149 158 1 SME 090 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 1 1 0 7 typically 3 2 7 typically E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 36 FFSK Modulation Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 1 Measurement Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 466 MHz Level 0 dBm Select SOURCE DATA MODE AUTO SELECT STANDARD POCSAG in the DIGITAL MOD FFSK menu gt Enter a HIGH sequence 1 using the list editor Setting at the modulation analyzer Demodulation FM Lowpass filter 23 kHz Demodulated signal sinusoidal Peak deviation of 4 kHz 3 96 Enter a LOW sequence 0 using the list editor Demodulated signal eee sinusoidal ce ay Peak deviation 4 kHz 3 5 2 37 LF Generator Option SM B2 5 2 37 1 Frequency Error Test equipment Audio analyzer Section 5 1 item 14 Test setup Connect the audio analyzer to the LF socket of the SME Measurement Se
357. er to the RF output of the SME Settings at the SME 1000 MHz unmodulated Level 8 0 dBm Select FIXED in the LEVEL LEVEL ATTEN menu Note down the level read at the power meter as a reference level or set the power meter to 0 dB for relative measurement gt Now reduce the level in steps of 5 dB at the SME The following deviations should not be exceeded Attenuation Tolerance 5 dB 0 2 dB 10 dB 0 4 dB 15 dB 10 6 dB 20 dB 10 8 dB 5 18 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 14 Overvoltage Protection SME02 and SME03 only Caution SMEO6 is not protected against overvoltage To prevent damages to the unit never apply a DC voltage to the RF output connector never apply more than the maximum permissible RF power 30 dBm to the RF output connector Test equipment Adjustable d c voltage source Section 5 1 item 12 Signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Power amplifier Section 5 1 item 13 Test setup Connect an adjustable d c voltage source to the RF output socket of the SME via a 50 Ohm resistor or a signal generator with a subsequent power amplifier with a power output of more than 1 Watt Testing Settings at the SME 100 MHz unmodulated Level 120 dBm Apply the d c voltage via the 50 Ohm resistance The overvoltage protection must respond at a voltage of 24V and lt 7V with both polarities gt Connect the signal generator to the RF output socket of the SME
358. eric DATA String The command allows any character string to be entered into one of the alphanumeric messages USER 1 to 4 This message has to be selected first with the command ALPHanumeric SELect RST value is eg empty message Example SOUR FLEX MESS ALPH DATA Hallo SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the binary messages The commands can only be activated if FLEX MESSage CATegory BINary is selected SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary SELect USER1 USER2 The command selects the binary messages RST value is USER1 Example SOUR FLEX MESS BIN SEL USER1 SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary BLENgth 1 to 16 The command sets the number of bits to be interpreted as a unit character This value has no significance for SME It is transmitted to the pager and evaluated there RST value is 1 Example SOUR FLEX MESS BIN BLEN 16 SOURce FLEX MESSage BINary CATalog The command queries the binary messages available It causes a list to be returned on which the entries are separated by commas The command is a query command and thus has no RST value Example SOUR FLEX MESS BIN CAT Answer USER1 SOURce FLEX MESSage BlNary DATA 0 1 0 1 The command allows the entry of any binary data into one of the binary messages Values 0 1 are available Each value represents
359. es identical with lt blank gt instruction for SSID subscriber units numeric message frame without FLEX structures other special numeric message Emergency Resync Frame as defined in the FLEX standard Secure Message tone only message the message type is defined by the value of CATEGORY lt blank gt same as F lower case letter same as upper case letters but as a message to all subscribers Not all message types can be sent as message to all subscribers so that not all lower case letters exist X and blank may be used in order to permit the AUTO ADJUST mechanism see above to change this entry Notes The SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE may cause the pager to respond to much more than only its own frame After RST a character is set in the editor window for each of the 128 frames It is possible however to clear characters by means of the BACKSPACE key Correspondingly less than 128 frames are then output per cycle Thus it is possible for instance to generate a three frame test sequence if only the characters for the first three frames are output IEC bus command SOUR FLEX FCON O X A AVDDVOZ Triggers a recalculation of the generated FLEX telegram This action has to be triggered each time a parameter has been changed Exception MESSAGE GENERATION MODE IEC bus command SOUR FLEX STAT OFF STAT ON Selection of sequence of useful and filler frames ALWAYS The frames are continuously o
360. esigned and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system This product has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions Rohde amp Schwarz will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its operating manual and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English It is therefore essential that the products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the re
361. et is situated at the rear of the instrument The instrument automatically sets itself to the voltage applied within the permissible voltage ranges It is not necessary to set the instrument to a certain supply voltage 1 1 2 Switching On Off the Instrument Switch on off gt Press power switch at the top bottom Power switch When the instrument is switched off the Fuse holder marking O is visible at the top of the Power supply socket power switch The power switch can remain switched on permanently Switching off is only necessary when the instrument is to be completely disconnected from the mains Power switch at the rear of the instrument LU sTBY Standby check LEE Switch on Press switch The instrument is ready for operation E Switch off Release switch The instrument assumes the STANDBY mode On off switch at the front of the instrument 1038 6002 02 1 1 E 13 SME Putting into Operation 1 1 3 Initial Status Upon switching on the instrument either automatically assumes the status which was set when it was switched off parameter POWER ON STATE PREVIOUS SETTING in LEVEL LEVEL menu or the RF output is disconnected POWER ON STATE RF OFF If the instrument need not to be operated from the initial status any further a defined default status should be established by pressing the PRESET key prior to further settings STANDBY Mode In the STANDBY mode the optional reference oscillator option SM
362. following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT generators SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 125 345678E6 127 876543E6 The commands SOURce DM DATA DATA SOURce DM DATA ATTenuate SOURce DM DATA BURSt use a bit by bit format The data transmitted are evaluated byte by byte from the left to the right and from the MSBit to the LSBit Example The following sequence of modulation data is to be transmitted as a binary block 01010101 00110011 00001111 11111111 00000000 binary representation 3 10 E 13 SME 3 5 6 Structure and Syntax of the Messages 55 33 OF FF 00 hexadecimal rep The QuickBASIC command reads CALL IBWRT generator SOURCE DM DATA DATA 15 CHRS amp h55 CHRS h33 CHR amp hOF CHRS amp hFF CHRS amp h00 if introduces the binary block 1 indicates that 1 digit specifying the length will follow next 5 is the length of the binary block in bytes The actual binary data follow now As the function IBWRT requires a text string CHR is used for the type conversion The following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT generator 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 071 1 151 175 01 151 1 17 05050 SOURCE DM DATA DATA OO DO 0 05071 1715 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 However the binary representation is more compact and transmitted faster The number of data bits must be an integer multiple of 8 because accord
363. following is to choose from OFF cos 0 2 COS 0 35 0 35 cos 0 4 cos 0 4 cos 0 5 0 5 cos 0 6 cos 0 6 Note For modulation type OQPSK only Ncos 0 6 can be set IEC bus command SOUR DM QPSK FILT SCOS 0 35 Selection of difference coding The following is to choose from NADC PDC TETRA APCO TFTS MSAT and INMARSAT IEC bus command SOUR DM QPSK COD Selection of the polarity of the modulation excursion NORM Polarity of the modulation is specified according to standards INV Polarity of the modulation is inverted IEC bus command SOUR DM QPSK POL NORM Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Selection of the editor function to process the selected list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 93 E 13 Digital Modulation SME 2 6 3 8 FSK Modulation Menu DIGITAL MOD FSK offers access to settings for FSK modulation FSK modulation is possible with or without a filter The filter can be switched off and allows free setting of the deviation The maximum setting depends on the carrier frequency Carrier frequency Maximum deviation lt 130 MHz 100 kHz 130 to 187 5 MHz 25 kHz 187 5 to 375 MHz 50 kHz 375 to 750 MHz 100 kHz 750 to 1500 MHz 200 kHz 1500 to 3000 MHz 400 kHz 3000 to 6000 MHz 800 kHz If option SME B11 is not installed FSK modulation is only possible with an external source and without a filter The menu indicates the lines SOURCE
364. for the RF frequency variation are set in the following Parameter quick select is used which reduces the number of operating steps Operating steps Explanations RETURN merum Reset the menu cursor to the main menu in 2 steps A MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select FREQUENCY menu 9pg x The frequency setting menu is 4 displayed I FREQUENCY Y J 5 u Z7 MENU VARIATION Select FREQUENCY parameter L OW The menu cursor marks the setting If value Ip FREQUENCY NN 2 DATA INPUT Enter frequency 420 MHz and M acknowledge A MENU VARIATION Set menu cursor to the setting value of parameter KNOB STEP USER d ED KNOB STEP USER DATA INPUT Enter step width 12 5 kHz Jide MENU VARIATION Set menu cursor to parameter KNOB if ST E P KNOB STEP 1038 6002 02 2 26 E 13 SME List Editor Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select USER user defined step width The selection mark marks USER This results in step width 12 5 kHz being used in the case of variation using the rotary knob Reset the menu cursor to the main menu in 2 steps 420 000 000 0 10 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL ODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HE LP FREQUENCY OFFSET KNOB STEP USER KNOB STEP EXCLUDE FROM RCL
365. for RF sweeps NORMal Blank time as short as possible LONG Blank time long enough to permit an X Y recorder to return to 0 Example SOUR2 SWE BTIM LONG RST value is NORM SOURce2 SWEep The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node Keyword FREQuency can be omitted Then the commands are SCPI compatible unless stated otherwise see examples SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency DWELI 1msto1s The command sets the time per frequency step dwell Example SOUR2 SWE DWEL 20ms RST value is 15 ms SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTOEach trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The frequency increases by the value indicated under SOURce2 SWEep Example SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO 1038 6002 02 3 113 E 13 SOURce2 SWEep SME SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency POINts Number The command determines the number of steps in a sweep Instead of this command commands S0URce2 FREQuency STEP LINear and SOURce2 FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic should be used as SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency POINts has been adapted to the instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command The value of POINts depends on SPAN and STEP according to the following formulas The following is true of linear sweeps POINts SPAN STEP LIN 1 The following is true of logarithmic
366. for the memory expansion are recalculated and written into the XMEM list The data must be recalculated whenever any POCSAG parameter other than POCSag DEViation is changed This means that STATe OFF should be briefly activated after every change Example SOUR POCS STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce POCSag MODulation FSK FFSK The command selects the desired modulation Two types are available for POCSAG FSK und FFSK FSK The is directly modulated with the data signal FFSK An LF is first modulated which is then used as the modulation signal for the RF Example SOUR POCS MOD FSK RST value is FSK 1038 6002 02 3 84 E 13 SME SOURce POCSag SOURce POCSag DEViation 1 5 2 0 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5 kHz The command enters the input value of the frequency deviation for the set modulation For FSK 4 0 kHz and 4 5 kHz are possible for FFSK 1 5 kHz 2 0 kHz 3 0 kHz 3 5 kHz 4 0 kHz and 4 5 kHz The instrument stores two independent deviation values one for each type of modulation The value which is displayed and used depends on the modulation setting Example SOUR POCS DEV 4 5kHz RST value is 4kHz SOURce POCSag BRATe 512bps 1200bps 2400bps The command selects the bitrate at which the data should be outputted Possible values are 512 1200 and 2400 baud Example SOUR POCS BRAT 512bps RST value is 512bps SOURce POCSag ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 The command determines the erroneous bits in a 32 bit fi
367. for this instrument Example nHz is not defined Suffix too long The suffix contains more than 12 signs 134 Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example Command RCL does not permit indicating a suffix 138 Invalid character data The text parameter either contains an invalid sign or it is invalid for this command Example write error with parameter indication SOURce FREQuency MODE FIKSed 141 Character data too long The text parameter contains more than 12 signs 144 Character data not allowed The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example Command RCL requires a number to be indicated 148 String data not allowed The command contains a valid character string at a position which is not allowed Example A text parameter is set in quotation marks SOURce FREQuency MODE FIXed 158 Invalid block data The command contains faulty block data Example An END message was received before the expected number of data had been received 161 131 Invalid suffix 1038 6002 02 7 2 11 SME List of Error Messages Execution Error Error in executing the command sets bit 4 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 168 Block data not allowed The command contains valid block data at an impermissible position 178 Expression
368. formation List of Commands The SME supports SCPI version 1994 0 For remote control commands which were specified or accepted in this SCPI version have been used to a large extent Commands which are not part of the SCPI specification are marked not SCPI in the SCPI info Structure and Syntax of messages are explained in Chapter 3 5 and a detailled description of commands is to be found in Chapter 3 6 Parameter Command SCPI Page info ABOREDM not SCPI 3 17 ABORELIST not SCPI 3 17 ABORt MSEQuence not SCPI 3 17 ABORI SWEep not SCPI 3 17 ABOREXMEM CALibration LEVel DATA not SCPI 3 17 not SCPI 3 19 CALibration LEVel FRANge NORMal MIXer not SCPI 3 19 CALibration LEVel PMODulator ON OFF not SCPI 3 19 CALibration LEVel STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 19 CALibration LPReset DATA not SCPI 3 19 CALibration LPReset MEASure not SCPI 3 19 CALibration PULSe DATA not SCPI 3 20 CALibration PULSe MEASure not SCPI 3 20 CALibration QPSK STORe not SCPI 3 18 CALibration QPSK DATA 0 to 10 000 ns DEFault not SCPI 3 18 CALibration ROSCillator DATA 0 to 4095 not SCPI 3 20 CALibration VSUMmation DAC not SCPI 3 20 CALibration VSUMmation KOS not SCPI 3 20 CALibration VSUMmation MEASure not SCPI 3 20 CALibration VSUMmation OFFS not SCPI 3 20 DIAGnostic INFO
369. frequency deviation of the pilot tone IEC bus command SOUR STER PIL 6720 PILOT PHASE Input value of the phase of the pilot tone The zero point of the suppressed 38 kHz subcarrier of the STEREO multiplex signal serves as phase reference IEC bus command SOUR STER PIL PHAS 0 ARI DEVIATION Input value of the deviation content of the unmodulated 57 kHz ARI subcarrier in the ARI operating mode IEC bus command SOUR STER ARI 4kHz ARI IDENTIFICATION Selection between ARI broadcasting code DK and traffic area code BK ARI BK OFF The area code and the broadcasting code are switched off DK The broadcasting code is activated The AM modulation depth of the broadcasting code 125 Hz on the ARI subcarrier is m 0 3 BK The area code is activated The AM modulation depth of the area code chosen under ARI BK is m 0 6 IEC bus command SOUR STER SIGN ARI ARI TYPE DK Selection of the standard traffic area codes Traffic area code A 23 7500 Hz Traffic area code B 28 2738 Hz Traffic area code C 34 9265 Hz Traffic area code D 39 5833 Hz Traffic area code E 45 6731 Hz Traffic area code F 53 9773 Hz IEC bus command SOUR STER SIGN ARI ARI TYPE BK ARI BK A gt 2 6 2 7 VOR ILS Test Signals By means of option SM B6 multifunction generator test signals for avionics systems e VOR e ILS e MKR BCN 1038 6002 02 VHF Omnidirectional Range Instrument Landing System
370. g on off an additional communication identification signal COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC COM ON Switching on off an additional communication identification signal COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC COM FREQ 1020 Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC COM DEPT 10PCT Selection of the variation of the DDM value via the rotary knob DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position DEFINED Variation between the predefined DDM values 0 2000 0 1550 Course Sector 0 0930 0 0460 0 0000 Course Line 0 0460 40 0930 40 1550 Course Sector 0 2000 2 74 E 13 SME CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP EXT AM SENS 1 V 100 1038 6002 02 Analog Modulations Selection of the variation of the carrier frequency via the rotary knob The selection is effective on both ILS modulations DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position DEFINED Decimal variation according to the current cursor position Note If DEFINED is selected the current RF frequency is automatically switched over to the next LOCALIZER transmitter frequency according to the table when switching on the modulation Switching on off an external modulation signal via socket EXT 1 OFF External AM input EXT1 switched off ON External AM input EXT1 activated The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation depth IEC bus command SOUR ILS SOUR
371. g on the relevant setting Each pager is set to one phase The phase can be calculated from the CAPCODE of a pager as shown below Phase Integer CAPCODE 4 modulo 4 with O A 1 B etc Example SOUR FLEX PHAS A RST value is A SOURce FLEX PHASe AUTO ON OFF This command determines whether the phase setting is coupled to the CAPCODE ON The phase is adjusted to the value contained in the CAPCODE whenever the CAPCODE is used see FLEX standard OFF Using the CAPCODE has no effect on the phase Example SOUR FLEX PHAS AUTO ON RST value is ON SOURce FLEX MESSage Under this node there are commands to set the destination address and to determine the useful data of the message SOURce FLEX MESSage CAPCode Capcode string Input value of the CAPCODE of the pager to be called as printed on the receiver CAPCODE is defined in the FLEX standard It contains the addresses of the receiver as well as frame and phase information Example SOUR FLEX MESS CAPC A0000001 value is 40000001 SOURce FLEX MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric SECure BlNary NUMeric SNUMeric TONE The command determines the category of the message to be transmitted ALPHanumeric Alphanumeric message SECure Secured alphanumeric message BINary Binary message NUMeric Numeric message with lt 3 figures short message according to FLEX standard SNUMeric Special numeric message TONEOnly tone message Exam
372. g order 1 YFOM 2 ALLAMP 3 PULSE GEN if installed 1 3 1 Opening the Casing Remove paneling gt Remove four screws in the two tilt feet at the rear of the instrument Remove the upper paneling towards the top and rear Turn the instrument Remove the lower paneling towards the top and rear Open ventilation ducts When an option is fitted at a slot which has not been used up to now the appropriate ventilation duct of the plexiglas plate at the left in the casing frame must be opened The openings are pre punched so that the respective part is easy to break out 1038 6002 02 1 4 E 13 Fitting the Options SME 1 3 2 Overview of the Slots A3 A4 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A12 A2 00 X28 X29 15 Option SM B1 i A2 power supply A8 digital synthesis front unit A9 summing loop A4 option A10 output section 1 5 GHz 5 option A11 output section 3 GHz 6 GHz A6 option A11 option A7 reference step synthesis A15 attenuator Fig 1 1 SME View from the top 1 3 3 Option SM B1 Reference Oscillator OCXO Fitting the option gt Fasten the option at the back end of the lateral opening by means of the screw threads provided there If slots A5 and A6 are both occupied one of these modules must be removed temporarily Feed ribbon cable W710 through the rear square cut out to the motherboard insert into connector X22 and snap in the locking Feed coaxia
373. g to the standardized VOR transmitting frequencies see table values in MHz Note If DEFINED is selected the current RF frequency is automatically switched over to the next VOR transmitting frequency according to the table when switching on modulation VOR 108 00 109 40 110 80 112 10 112 80 118 50 114 20 114 90 115 60 116 30 117 05 117 75 108 05 109 45 110 85 112 15 112 85 113 55 114 25 114 95 115 65 116 35 117 10 117 80 108 20 109 60 111 00 112 20 112 90 113 60 114 30 115 00 115 70 116 40 117 15 117 85 108 25 109 65 111 05 112 25 112 95 113 65 114 35 115 05 115 75 116 45 117 20 117 90 108 40 109 80 111 20 112 30 113 00 113 70 114 40 115 10 115 80 116 50 117 25 117 95 108 45 109 85 111 25 112 35 113 05 113 75 114 45 115 15 115 85 116 55 117 30 108 60 110 00 111 40 112 40 113 10 113 80 114 50 115 20 115 90 116 60 117 35 108 65 110 05 111 45 112 45 113 15 113 85 114 55 115 25 115 95 116 65 117 40 108 80 110 20 111 60 112 50 113 20 113 90 114 60 115 30 116 00 116 75 117 45 108 85 110 25 111 65 112 55 113 25 113 95 114 65 115 35 116 05 116 80 117 50 108 00 110 40 111 80 112 60 113 30 114 00 114 70 115 40 116 10 116 85 117 55 109 05 110 45 111 85 112 65 113 35 114 0
374. ge at EXT1 and EXT2 too high EXT LO LO Voltage at EXT1 and EXT2 too low EXT HI LO Voltage at EXT1 too high and EXT2 too low EXT LO HI Voltage at EXT1 too low and EXT2 too high 2 6 1 1 Simultaneous Modulation Basically every combination of AM FM pulse modulation and a digital modulation GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK FFSK or 4FSK is possible Instead of FM phase modulation PM can be switched on as well There are only restrictions for modulations of the same kind and for the multiple use of the 2nd LF generator cf table 2 3 Two tone AM is possible by simultaneously switching on the external and internal source Two tone FM or two tone PM is possible by simultaneously switching on FM1 and FM2 or PM1 and PM2 For FM1 and FM2 PM1 and PM2 separate deviations can be set and separate sources switched on Note With two tone modulation please observe that the set deviation or modulation depth is valid for one signal and the sum deviation or sum modulation depth is determined by adding both signals This results in overmodulation if the maximal value for deviation or modulation depth is exceeded 2 6 1 2 Alternate Switching Off of Modulations Due to the multiple use of some functional modules in the instrument some modulations cannot be set at the same time cf table 2 3 In the case of manual control incompatible modulations deactivate one another a short time warning is displayed in the status line Note The IEC bus control a
375. ge is transmitted in the first batch By setting FILL BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE however the filler batches can be inserted prior to the actual message Entry of a value in this menu changes the LEVEL ATTENUATION value of the other DM modulations too IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV 0dB Selection of bitrate at which the data should be outputted Possible values are 512 1200 and 2400 baud IEC bus command SOUR POCS BRAT 512bps The parameters of this section are used for setting the destination address as well as the useful data of the message Input value of the address of the pager to be called The specified range is 0 to 2097151 IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS ADDR 1 Selection of the category of the transmitted message NUMERIC numeric message TONE tone only message ALPHANUMERIC alphanumeric message IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS CAT TONE 2 128 E 13 SME SYNC WORD TONE NUMBER NUMERIC MESSAGE ALPHANUM MESSAGE EDIT MESSAGE 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Selection of the contents of the sync word This word distinguishes between the various types of paging services POCSAG 0x7CD215D8 also used for CITYRUF INFORUF 0x7CD21436 IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS SWOR POCS Input value of the tone which is transmitted during category TONE Four tones are available A B C D Notes Only true tone only receivers can process all four possible values Numer
376. gital modulation e Level incl mech switched attenuator e Functions not regarding the RF output signal incl user correction eg commands under SYSTem except for incl ALC modes SYSTem PRESet or e Analog modulation AM FM PM UNIT e Switch on off of digital modulation Sweep e Standard LF generator 4 fixed frequencies List mode Memory sequence Options LF generator SM B2 and multifunction generator SM B6 incl LF output stereo and VOR ILS modulation e Pulse modulation and pulse generator Alternative use with other IEC IEEE bus commands The alternative use of the RESTORE commands SYSTem SREStore or and normal IEC IEEE bus commands is e useful in case of digital modulation First the digital modulation is configured and switched on by means of normal commands Then digital modulation can be switched on off by means of the RESTORE e possible for all commands that do not regard the RF output signal eg SYSTem e normally not possible for all the functions listed in the left column of the above table In case of doubt we recommend testing Synchronization signal In the Fast Restore mode a synchronization signal is available at the rear panel BLANK connector to synchronize other devices The BLANK signal is high during settling of the RF output signal and low in the settled state 1038 6002 02 3 144 E 13 SME Maintenance and Troubleshooting 4 Maintenance and Tr
377. gle between the true north and the connection line between airplane and beacon IEC bus command SOUR VOR DIR FROM Input value of the frequency of the VAR and the REF signal IEC bus command SOUR VOR VAR FREQ 30 Input value of the AM modulation depth of the 30 Hz VAR signal IEC bus command SOUR VOR VAR 30PCT Input value of the frequency of the FM carrier IEC bus command SOUR VOR SUBC 9960 Input value of the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier IEC bus command SOUR VOR SUBC DEPT 30PCT Input value of the frequency deviation of the REF signal on the FM carrier IEC bus command SOUR VOR REF 480 Call the VOR default setting The default setting corresponds to the setting represented in Fig 2 33 except for the MODE setting ZNORM The selection of the CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP parameters is not changed by calling this function IEC bus command SOUR VOR PRES Switching on off an additional communication identification signal COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR VOR COM ON Input value of the frequency of the COM ID signals IEC bus command SOUR VOR COM FREQ 1020 Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signals IEC bus command SOUR VOR COM DEPT 10PCT 2 66 E 13 SME Analog Modulations CARRIER FREQ Selection of the variation of the carrier frequency via the rotary knob KNOB STEP DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position DEFINED Variation in predefined steps accordin
378. hat only complete code word groups are sent it is possible that depending on the set bit rate the actual length of the time slice slightly differs from the set length of the time slice IEC bus command SOUR POCS TSL 10 Triggers a recalculation of the generated POCSAG telegram The telegram which is to be sent is recalculated using the set values As a result of this function a change in the settings also becomes effective in the generated signal IEC bus command SOUR POCS STAT OFF STAT ON 2 130 E 13 SME MODE EXECUTE SINGLE gt CLOCK SOURCE 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Selection of sequence of messages and filler data ALWAYS The message is continuously output according to the time interval which is set under TIME SLICE IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO SINGLE The time slices without message are continuously output If EXECUTE SINGLE is selected a time slice with the message is output once IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR SING SOUR POCS TACT MESS EXT The time slices without message are continuously output If EXECUTE SINGLE is selected a time slice with the message is output once IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR POCS TACT MESS EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the POCSAG signal after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input connector After recognition of this signal exactly one message is output IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR POCS TACT
379. he command aborts the recording of data into the DM memory extension list XMEM Example ABOR XMEM 1038 6002 02 3 17 E 13 CALibration SME 3 6 4 CALibration System The CALibration system contains the commands to calibrate the SME On triggering the calibration by means of MEASure response 0 displays a faultless calibration response 1 means that an error has occurred during calibration As to the meaning of the data in the case of query DATA cf Chapter 2 Section Calibration Command Parameter Default Remark Unit CALibration QPSK Option SME B11 DATA 0 to 10 000 ns DEFault S STORe LEVel DATA Query only FRANge NORMal MIXer PMODulator ON OFF STATe ON OFF LPReset MEASure Query only DATA Query only PULSe Option SM B4 MEASure Query only DATA Query only ROSCillator DATA to 4095 VSUMmation Q i uery on MEASure y only Query only OFFS Query only DAC Query only KOS CALibration QPSK The commands to set the calibration value for the QPSK modulator are under this node CALibration QPSK DATA 10 000 ns DEFault The command enters the calibration data The number specifies a delay for the digital FM signal DEFault can also be indicated instead of a time Then the value saved in the FLASH memory is used Example CAL QPSK DATA 10 000ns CALibration QPSK STORe The command saves the delay presently set under DATA as a defau
380. he correction is effected by adding user defined table values to the output level as a function of the RF frequency In the SME this subsystem serves to select transmit and switch on USER CORRECTION tables see Chapter 2 Section User Correction UCOR as well Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF CSET CATalog Query only SELect Name of table DATA FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz Hz SMEO3E to 2 2 GHz POWer 40 dBto 6dB 40 dBto 6dB dB SMEO3 to GHz DELete Name of table SMEO6 to 6 GHz SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF The command switches the table selected using SOURce CORRection CSET on or off Example SOUR CORR STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce CORRection CSET The commands to select and edit the UCOR tables are under this node SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog The command requests a list of UCOR tables The individual lists are separated by means of commas This command is a query and has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CAT Answer UCOR1 UCOR2 UCOR3 SOURce CORRection CSET SELect Name of table The command selects a UCOR table This command alone does not yet effect a correction First the table selected must be activated cf SOURce CORRection STATe If there is no table of this name a new table is created The name may contain up to 7 letters This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value
381. he line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard If the setting of a parameter is different from the standard SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK4 STAN ERM Input value of the deviation for 4FSK The maximum setting depends on the carrier frequency and is limited to 2096 of the analog FM deviation IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK4 DEV 4 6875 kHz Input value of the bit rate for 4FSK Setting range 1 to 24 3 kbps and 27 to 48 6 kbps IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK4 BRAT 6250b s 2 98 E 13 SME Digital Modulation FILTER CODING MOD POLARITY SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 Opens a window to select the filters for 4AFSK The following filters can be selected BESSEL BxT 1 22 cos 0 2 BESSEL BxT 1 25 cos 0 2 BESSEL BxT 2 44 Due to digital filtering a change of the bit rate influences the cut off frequency of the filter That is why BxT bandwidthxsymbol duration is indicated instead of the cut off frequency which is specified according to the standard The cut off frequency of the filter is calculated as follows Cut off frequency BxT value x symbol rate IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK4 FILT BESS 1 25 Opens a window to select the coding following is to choose from APCO25 ERMES FLEX and MODACOM IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK4 COD Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation NORM Logic 1 generates a positi
382. he list Changing one of the ReFLEX parameters except for REFL25 AAD TRIG DM SOUR and REFL25 FCON requires a recalculation of data The recalculation of data is effected by switchover to REFL25 STAT OFF STAT ON To permit easier handling a few settings are automatically updated each time ReFLEX25 is switched on if other settings have been changed This applies to SOUR FREQ Normally automatic mode is activated but it can be deactivated using REFL25 AAD OFF Parameters that have been set automatically can be varied again at will these modifications take effect immediately Example SOUR REFL25 STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce REFLex25 STATe AUTO ON OFF The command determines whether the ReFLEX telegram is to be recalculated after switchover from REFL25 STATE OFF to ON ON The data are recalculated OFF The previous memory extension contents are maintained This setting makes sense if the data in the memory extension have been altered by an external program see also Manual Operation part under ReFLEX25 section Further Notes Reading Out Modifying Returning of Program Parts Example SOUR REFL25 STAT AUTO ON RST value is ON SOURce REFLex25 MODulation 1600 FSK2 3200 FSK2 3200 FSK4 6400 FSK4 This command selects the used bit rate and modulation Four modulations are available 1600bps 2FSK 3200bps 2FSK 3200bps 4FSK and 6400bps 4FSK Example SOUR REFL25
383. he modulation signals of the upper and lower antenna lobe The zero point of the 150 Hz signal serves as a reference The input is effected in degrees of the 150 Hz signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS PHAS Odeg Call the ILS GS default setting The default setting corresponds to the setting represented in Fig 2 34 except for the MODE setting The selection of the CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP parameter is not changed by calling this function IEC bus command SOUR ILS PRES Switching on off an additional communication identification signal COM ID Signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS COM ON Switching on off an additional communication identification signal COM ID Signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS COM FREQ 1020 Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal IEC bus command SOUR ILS COM DEPT 10PCT Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position DEFINED Variation between the predefined DDM values 0 4000 0 1750 Glide Sector 0 0910 0 0450 0 0000 Glide Path 40 0450 40 0910 0 1750 Glide Sector 0 4000 Variation between the predefined DDM values DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position DEFINED Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized GLIDE SLOPE transmitting frequencies see table Note If DEFINED is selected the current RF frequency is automatically swit
384. her order menus remain in the display The current menu path is evident through the select marks Menu cursor The menu cursor shows the user at which position in the menu he is The position of the menu cursor is evident from the inverse notation of the term white characters on a black background Digit cursor As an underscore the digit cursor marks the position which can be varied by means of the rotary knob in a value indication Select mark frame around a term marks current menus or valid settings in the setting menu 1038 6002 02 2 18 E 13 SME Display 2 2 2 Basic Operating Steps The operating principle is explained in this section For better understanding please read sections Display Section 2 2 1 and Sample Setting for First Users Section 2 2 3 in addition To operate the instrument menus are called in the display All setting possibilities and the current setting status are evident from the menus All settings can be made by accessing the menus RF frequency and RF level can also be set without menu operation using keys FREQ and LEVEL RF signal and modulation can also be switched on off without menu operation using keys RF ON OFF and or MOD ON OFF 2 2 3 1 Calling the Menus Accessing the menus is effected using rotary knob VARIATION SELECT key and RETURN key Rotary knob Rotary knob VARIATION moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level to be selected If a scrollbar is vi
385. hin module A4 pulse modulator Fitting the option Calibrating pulse generator gt Open module 4 gt Fasten the pulse generator board by means of 4 screws gt Plug in connectors W10 and W11 gt Screw on cover again Establish the following RF connections at the pulse generator Cable From To Signal W43 A4 X43 Rear panel VIDEO W44 A4 X44 Rear panel SYNC gt Cable 50 MHz reference cf Section 1 3 13 gt Call menu UTILITIES CALIB PULSE GEN gt Select action CALIBRATE gt and activate using the SELECT key gt The start and end of the calibration are displayed Calibration only takes a few seconds Note The calibration data are stored in the RAM thus the calibration can be repeated as often as required 1 3 7 Option SM B5 FM PM Modulator The FM PM modulator is fitted at slot A6 Fitting the option 1038 6002 02 gt Withdraw cable W89 from X99 of the summing loop and use again gt Establish the following connections Cable From To Signal W89 A8 X89 A6 X67 FDSYN W65 A6 X65 A7 X71 REF100 W67 A6 X69 A9 X99 FDFM 1 7 E 13 SME Adjustment Standard generator Option SM B2 LF generator Option SM B6 Multifunction generator 1038 6002 02 Fitting the Options Option SM B5 loads the internal modulation generators so that their output voltage decreases by approx 1 This causes a modulation error which can be corrected by the adaptation
386. hronized 180 Calibration failed Calibration could not be executed 181 REF OSC calibration data not used because ADJUSTMENT STATE is ON The reference oscillator calibration data are not used as long as ADJUSTMENT STATE is activated 182 Calibration data missing Calibration data are missing in the device memory The calibration data have to be generated first by an internal or external calibration or to be loaded into the device Cannot access hardware The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful Function not supported by this hardware revision A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected Diagnostic A D converter failure Diagnostic A D converter has failed Summing loop unlocked The PLL of the summing loop has not been synchronized Digital synthesis buffer VCO unlocked The VCO of the buffer loop has not been synchronized DATA coder clock unlocked The clock oscillator of the data coder has not been synchronized 232 Cannot access data coder RAM No data can be sent to the data coder The data coder cannot be used as a source for a digital modulation 240 Invalid list odd number of elements The list selected contains an odd number of elements Some lists such as DM data for QPSK however must contain an even number of elements 1038 6002 02 7B 6 E 11 SME List of Error Messages Continuation Device dependent Error Error code Error text in the case of
387. hus determines the 30 bits These bits are XORed with the word to be corrupted and hence determine which bits of this word are transmitted correctly or wrongly RST value is 0 Example SOUR ERM ERR MASK 5 SOURce ERMes ERRor BATCh AtoP The command specifies in which of batches A to P the faulty word is The faulty word is determined by command SOURce ERMes ERRor WORD RST does not influence this setting Example SOUR ERM ERR BATC SOURce ERMes ERRor WORD 0 to 153 0 to 189 for long batch The command determines the faulty word in the batch selected by means of command SOURce ERMes ERRor BATC RST value is 0 Example SOUR ERM ERR WORD 111 SOURce ERMes MESSage The commands to set the destination address and to determine the message data are under this node 1038 6002 02 3 51 E 13 SOURce ERMes SME SOURce ERMes MESSage lA IADDress 0 to 262143 The command determines the address Inital ADDress of the pager addressed Each pager has an own nonrecurring address O are 262143 are valid values i e all numbers which can be indicated using 18 bits RST value is 0 Example SOUR ERM MESS IA 0 SOURce ERMes MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric NUMeric TONE The command specifies the category of the message to be sent ALPHanumeric Alphanumeric message NUMeric Numeric message TONE Tone only message Example SOUR
388. i eoe eet 2 15 2 153 4 S Sample setting Sample and hold 2 46 SCPI Information eer eee ee 7B 1 Introduction OCHO Dari Lii ete EE ER o PORA tei ee iad 2 19 Select TOQUE Nin ii tack ead 2 20 MAN dE 2 18 Self test 3 16 3 122 4 5 Semicolon seperates essent 3 11 Sensitivity per percent modulation depth 2 71 2 75 Sequence length PRD EHE n 2 78 3 41 SA EN A tite 2 164 3 15 SerialDoll cio eni ee MAL dt 3 140 Service request SRQ 3 140 Service request enable SRE ES 3 136 Setting sss 3 5 Selling Valli ved deve pea e ee eda 2 20 Settling bit 3 138 Short form 5 sess 3 7 S gh xi atten b tr exc inta 3 9 Signal shape LF generator 2 133 3 111 Simultaneous modulation esee 2 51 Single pulse delay 2 62 H 1 5 Software indication inier i eei eani 2 164 er baste 1 11 2 164 VOS ON eb 2 168 3 22 Source resistance oit e io 2 49 Span HF sweep 2 138 Special characters 3 13 Spectral purity 2 57 2 59 Sq are brack els o ae retarded rien 3 7 SRE service request enable register 3 136 SRQ servic
389. ic input field RUBBER 2 3 A 3 7 Values lepus toh ne 2 3 3 9 O Offset frequency level ON OFF ratio Opening the 1 4 Operating modes sesssssesseeeeee nennen 2 135 Operating hours indication 2 164 3 22 Option MUA Rum 1 4 SM B1 Reference oscillator OCXO 1 5 2 155 SM B2 LF generator 1 6 2 53 2 58 SM B3 Pulse 1 7 2 61 SM B4 Pulse 1 7 2 60 SM B5 FM PM modulator 1 7 2 56 2 58 SM B6 Multifunction generator SM B8 Pulse modulator 3 GHz SM B9 Pulse modulator 6 1 7 SME B11 DM 1 9 2 78 SME B12 memory extension 1 11 2 81 SME B19 Rear panel connections for RF and LF 1 11 SME B41 FLEX 1 11 2 107 SME B42 POCSAG wee 1 11 2 127 43 25 2 116 Output BLANK erase 2 13 2 136 2 144 2 166 M 3 132 BURST ocara posu ire 2 13 2 79 3 36 3 39 CLOCK 2 11 2 79 2 92 3 37 3 41 DATA
390. ical and alphanumerical receivers react to tone only pages only when tone number is B or C IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS TONE B Opens a window to enter the character string for a numeric or special numeric message SME provides a maximum of 41 characters Characters 0 to 9 U and blank space may be used IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS NUM 12 17 Opens a window to select or create an alphanumeric message There is one common character set for FLEX option SME B41 and POCSAG FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD complete POCSAG character set USER1 4 Four messages that can be freely edited by command EDIT MESSAGE IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS ALPH SEL USER3 Opens a window to edit one of the alphanumeric messages USER1 to USER4 The following conversions are used for the German CITYRUF network Hex value USA Germany 5 A 0 5 0x5D 0x7B a 0x7D y pomo IEC bus command SOUR POCS MESS ALPH DATA Hello 2 129 E 13 Digital Modulation BIT ERRORS ERROR BIT MASK POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD MESSAGE GENERATION FILL BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE TIME SLICE RECALCULATE gt 1038 6002 02 SME The SME allows for providing a 32 bit word of the transferred message with bit errors for test purposes The parameters
391. icios de la caja del aparato No vierta nunca ninguna clase de l quidos sobre o en la caja Esto puede producir corto circuitos en el producto y o puede causar golpes de corriente fuego o heridas Asegurese con la protecci n adecuada de que no pueda originarse en el producto una sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una tormenta Si no se ver el personal que lo utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de corriente Los productos R amp S no est n protegidos contra el agua si no es que exista otra indicaci n ver tambi n punto 1 Si no se tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de golpe de corriente o de dafios en el producto lo cual tambi n puede llevar al peligro de personas No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las que pueda producirse y se hayan producido l quidos de condensaci n en o dentro del producto como por ejemplo cuando se desplaza el producto de un lugar fr o a un lugar caliente Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio del producto ya que estas son necesarias para la ventilaci n e impiden que el producto se caliente demasiado No pongan el producto encima de materiales blandos como por ejemplo sof s o alfombras o dentro de una caja cerrada si esta no est suficientemente ventilada No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que produzcan calor como por ejemplo radiadores o calentadores La temperatura ambiental no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la hoja de datos p gina 4
392. ics occur at frequencies gt 1 5 GHz only SME03 SME06 have to be tested for subharmonics Test equipment Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 Test setup Connect the spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the SME Measurement gt Settings at the SME02 03E 03 06 Test frequencies 5 kHz to 1500 2200 3000 6000 MHz unmodulated Level 10 dBm or 13 dBm gt Check the harmonics suppression using the spectrum analyzer Make sure that the spectrum analyzer is not overdriven Harmonics level ie ee ee ete ade ety max 30 dBc ne ae ra 26 dBc gt Measure the subharmonics using a spectrum analyzer Make sure not to overdrive the spectrum analyzer only for SME03 06 Level of subharmonics at Frequency settings gt 1 5 GHz max 40 dBc Frequency settings gt 3 0 2 max 34 dBc 1038 6002 02 5 10 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 6 Suppression of Nonharmonics Test equipment and setup Measurement See Section 5 2 5 Harmonics Suppression The test level should be 8 1 dBm unmodulated Nonharmonics level with Frequency settings lt 1 5 GHz sese 80 dBc Frequency settings gt 1 5 GHz SMEOS OSE 74 dBc Frequency settings gt 3 0 GHz SMEO6 68 dBc Recommended settings at the spectrum analyzer Span 5 kHz Resolution bandwidth 1 k
393. ig 2 67 Menu UTILITIES PHASE preset setting DELTA PHASE Setting value of the phase IEC bus short command SOUR PHAS 0 RESET DELTA PHASE DISPLAY Sets the display of the DELTA PHASE to 0 without the phase of the output signal being influenced IEC bus short command SOUR PHAS REF 1038 6002 02 2 156 E 13 SME Utilities 2 11 7 Password Input With Functions Protected PROTECT The execution of calibrating and service functions is protected by a password To unlock the lock out the correct password a 6 digit number has to be entered and then the ENTER key has to be pushed After the instrument has been switched on the lock out is automatically activated Password 1 unlocks the lock out for calibrations LEV PRESET VCO SUM and PULSE GEN Password 2 unlocks the lock out for calibration REF OSC Password 3 permits the input of the serial number and the value of the counter for POWER ON operating hours and attenuator circuits Menu UTILITIES PROTECT offers access to the unlocking of protected functions Menu selection UTILITIES PROTECT AA A AA 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM LOCK LEVEL 1 LEVEL REF OSC PASSWORD LEVEI ODULATION PHASE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LOCK LEVEL 2 OFF ON LF OUTPUT CALIB PASSWORD LEVEI XXXXXX SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST LOCK LEVEL 3 OFF ON MEM SEO MOD KEY PASSWORD LEVEI XXXXXX UTILITIES AUX 1 0 HELP BEEPER INSTALL
394. ignal for FM PM Input resistance gt 100 kQ Nominal voltage Us 1 V max permissible overvoltage 15 V Output LF signal of the internal LF generators LF Gen 1 and LF Gen 2 Source resistance lt 10 Q Output RF signal Source resistance 50 Q When fitted with option DM Coder SME B11 Options SM B2 SM B6 2 11 Front Panel See as well Section 2 6 3 Digital Modulation Section 2 6 3 Digital Modulation Section 2 7 LF outputs Section 2 2 2 6 Use of ON OFF and MOD ON OFF Key E 13 SME Rear Panel 16 o 4 gt 50 400 Hz 2 7 1 1 A CE 17 18 19 20 21 Rear panel view Fig 2 2 E 13 2 12 1038 6002 02 SME 2 1 2 Elements of the Rear Panel Cf Fig 2 2 Rear panel view 10 Outputs for control and triggering in the sweep and list operating modes X AXIS MARKER BLANK 11 LF 12 TRIGGER ON TRIGGER 13 BURST DATA CLOCK 1038 6002 02 Level 0 to 10 V Level TTL Level TTL Cut out provided to relocate the LF output at the front to the rear of the instrument Input to trigger sweep memory sequence LIST mode and DM memory extension Level TTL Signal input output for digital modulation Signal output for synchronization with data signal generated internally Level TTL Signal input in the external operating mode to control level bursts Level TTL
395. imultaneous Modulation ooocccccnccccnononncinnnnnonononanannnncn 2 51 2 6 1 2 Alternate Switching Off of Modulations ssssseeeeee 2 51 2 6 1 3 MOD ON OFF Key i rre 2 52 262 Analog Modulation ene be ense en s 2 53 2 6 2 4 LF Generator E 2 53 2 6 2 2 Amplitude Modulation eseeeeeene nennen 2 54 2 6 2 3 Frequency Modulation ssseeneeeneeeennnen 2 56 2 6 2 3 1 FM Deviation Limits ooooconnccccnonncnnnnoccnnnonanancn ona nano nanananonanannn 2 57 2 0 2 3 2 Preemphasis oot 2 57 2 6 2 4 Phase 2 58 2 6 2 4 1 PM Deviation LiMITS o oocononnccccnnninnnnnoccnnnononononanananonananan cnn 2 59 2 6 2 5 Pulse Modulation 2 60 2 6 2 5 1 Pulse Generator 2 60 2 6 2 6 Stereo Modulation 2 63 2 6 27 WOR ILS Test amp e 2 64 26 27 VOR Modulation 2 65 2 6 2 7 2 ILS Glide Slope Modulation ILS GS 2 68 2 6 2 7 3 LS Localizer Modulation 1 5
396. in 5 of the IEC bus Settings at the SME Stop frequency unmodulated Level 0 dBm Settings at the storage oscilloscope Time base 2 ms div Sensitivity corresponding to the video output of the analyzer Trigger free running with respect to calibration Settings at the spectrum analyzer Reference level 5 dBm Amplitude scale 1 dB div Resolution bandwidth to 3 kHz Video bandwidth 100 kHz Span 10 kHz Now increase the center frequency starting from the stop frequency until the visible filter edge runs through the central point of the screen The span can now be reduced to 0 Hz and the frequency scale be calibrated at the free running oscilloscope by means of steps of 100 Hz at the SME 5 8 E 13 SME Measurement Recommended measuring frequencies Test Procedure gt Setting at the storage oscilloscope Time base 2 ms div Sensitivity corresponding to the video output of the analyzer Triggering externally by the positive edge at 1 5 V gt Send the starting frequency first and then the stop frequency from the controller The settling curve is displayed on the screen of the oscilloscope triggered externally Relative deviation from the rated frequency after 10 ms lt 1E 7 gt Repeat measurement with exchanged starting stop frequencies Starting frequency Stop frequency 749 MHz 751 MHz 751 MHz 1101 MHz 93 MHz 1500 MHz 840 MHz 942 MHz
397. ine the distortion factor of both channels using the distortion meter in the modulation analyzer Distortion factor lt 0 1 gt Switch over deviation measurement to relative measurement and operate both channels without a signal Measure the signal to noise ratio in both channels according to CCIR The unweighted and weighted signal to noise ratio must be more than 76 dB gt Modulate only one channel with 1 kHz Measure the crosstalk modulation in the unmodulated channel It should be more than 50 dB under the reference value of the wanted modulation 5 25 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 28 PhiM Deviation Setting Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 1 M gt Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 1000 MHz Level 0 dBm Select INT in the MODULATION PM PM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 0 03 to 10 rad Modulation frequency 1 kHz Read off PhiM deviation at the modulation analyzer Deviation of the deviation measured from the setting value miii cct nad max 3 of the indication 0 01 rad Recommended setting values 0 03 0 1 0 3 1 3 10 rad 5 2 29 PhiM Frequency Response Note option SM B2 LF generator is fitted LFGEN2 can also be selected in the MODULATION PM PM2 SOURCE menu and the test frequency be set using the internal generator for this measurement Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 2 Measurement Settings at the SME Carrier freque
398. ing on the contents of FRAME CONTENTS also if ROAMING is set to OFF consists of an operator message address a vector and a message body has no BIW101 IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF ROAM OFF The following four commands define the Simulcast System ID emitted by the SME Input value of the local ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF LID 0 Input value of the country code IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF COUN 0 Input value of the current zone IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF CZON 0 Input value of the four traffic management flags for SSID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF STMF 15 2 109 E 13 Digital Modulation NID DATE TIME NETWORK ADDRESS MULTIPLIER SERVICE AREA NID TMF MESSAGE CAPCODE AUTO ADJUST 1038 6002 02 SME The following four commands define the Network Identification emitted by the SME Input value of the network address part of the network ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF NADD 2058240 Input value of the multiplier part of the network ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF MULT 1 Input value of the service area part of the network ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF SAR 0 Input value of the four traffic management fags for NID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF NTMF 15 Input value of the date IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SI DATE 1994 12 01 Input value of the current time IEC bus command SOUR FL
399. ing to 0 Hz suppresses the RF carrier and due to the phase quadrature the mixer supplies a voltage corresponding to the phase difference between the input signals This is measured by the LF spectrum analyzer and can be converted into SSB phase noise Signal generator 10 MHz reference M SME d He yo LF analyzer t TODO eee preamplifier Test setup 0010660 Oscilloscope 1038 6002 02 5 12 E 13 SME Measurement Evaluation 1038 6002 02 Test Procedure gt Set the levels of the two signal generators according to the specifications of the mixer used unmodulated gt For calibration set the preamplifier to 0 dB and detune a signal generator by 20 kHz Measure and note down the reference value at 20 kHz at the analyzer gt Cancel the detuning and make the phase quadrature Call menu UTILITIES PHASE to this effect Observe the output voltage of the mixer at the oscilloscope and vary the phase until the voltage becomes 0 gt Set the preamplifier to 40 dB and read the noise voltage at the analyzer normalized to a bandwidth of 1 Hz noise level gt Subtract from the reference value and add 6 dB for the second side band measured correlated and 40 dB for the amplification switchover to the ratio found If the signal to noise ratio of the second signal generator is not better than the one of the test object by at least 10dB
400. ing to IEEE 488 2 binary blocks allow transmission of integer bytes only Eventually the binary block must be filled up to the next byte the spare bits can then be deleted manually Overview of Syntax Elements The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the key words of a command In acommand line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterix marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it ASCI character introduces block data A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter 1038 6002 02 3 11 E 13 Description of Commands Notation SME 3 6 Description of Commands 3 6 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail separated according to the command system The notation corresponds to the one of the SCPI standards to a large extent The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the list of commands in annex C Table of Commands Command Parameter Unit Remark Indentations Upper lower case notation 1038 6002 02 In the command column the table provides a
401. ion altitude max 2000 m Unless specified otherwise in the data sheet a tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and of 5 to the nominal frequency Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Prior to performing any work on the product or opening the product the 1171 0000 42 02 00 product must be disconnected from the supply network Any adjustments replacements of parts maintenance or repair must be carried out only by technical personnel authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection PE conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens e g nickel such as aluminum cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties consult a physician immediately to determine the cause Sheet 2 Safety Instructions 4 If products components are mechanically and or thermically processed in a manner
402. ion mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example SOURce EXTernal COUPling Response AC 2 Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities which are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example FREQuency MAX Response 10E3 3 Numerical values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command Example FREQuency Response 1E6 for 1 MHz 4 Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example OUTPut STATe Response 1 5 Text character data is returned in a short form see also Section 3 5 5 Example SOURce FM SOURCe Response INT1 1038 6002 02 3 8 E 13 SME 3 5 5 Parameter Structure and Syntax of the Messages Most commands require a parameter to be specified The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description see Section 3 6 Numerical values Special numerical values MIN MAX DEF UP DOWN INF NINF NAN Boolean Parameters
403. ion of data can either be effected by switchover from STATE OFF STATE ON or by triggering RECALCULATE b OFF Switch off of FLEX IEC bus command SOUR FLEX STAT OFF Selection of used bit rate and modulation Four modulations are available 1600bps 2FSK 3200bps 2FSK 3200bps 4FSK 6400bps 4FSK Basic setting after RST 1600 2FSK IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MOD 1600 FSK2 Input value of frequency deviation of modulation The deviation specifies the spacing from the carrier to the two further placed symbols in 4FSK The FLEX standard specifies 4800 Hz for this value which may be varied for testing Basic setting after RST 4800Hz IEC bus command SOUR FLEX DEV 4 8kHz The system information parameters are used for setting the data of the sending system These data are sent to the pager see FLEX standara Input value of number of bits 0 to 7 which the pager uses to compare its home frame number with the received frame number The value 7 signifies that the pager only accepts messages in one of the 128 frames provided its pager collapse value is not below 7 With the value O the pager receives messages in any frame Basic setting after RST 4 IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SI COLL 4 2 108 E 13 SME FRAME OFFSET ROAMING SSID LOCAL ID COUNTRY CODE COVERAGE ZONE SSID TMF 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Input value of the frame offsets IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF FOFF 0
404. ire dentro del rayo laser p gina 5 Certified Quality System DIN EN ISO 9001 DIN EN 9100 DIN EN ISO 14001 DOS REG NO 001954 QM ST UM QUALITATSZERTIFIKAT Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produktes entschie den Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Management systems entwickelt gefertigt und gepr ft Das Rohde amp Schwarz Management system ist zertifiziert nach DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 1996 CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY Dear Customer you have decided to buy a Rohde amp Schwarz product You are thus as sured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods available This product was developed manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality manage ment system standards The Rohde amp Schwarz quality manage ment system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 1996 CERTIFICAT DE QUALIT Cher Client vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde amp Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d veloppement la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de ges tion qualit Le syst me de gestion qualit de Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu conform ment aux normes DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN
405. is 0 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation LID 0 to 511 The command sets the input value of the local ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF LID 0 RST value is 0 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation NADDress 2058240 to 20622335 Input value of the network address part of the network ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF NADD 2058240 RST value is 2058241 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation NTMFlags 0 to 15 The command sets the input value of the four traffic management fags for NID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF NTMF 15 RST value is 0 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation SARea 0 to 31 The command sets the input value of the service area part of the network ID IEC bus command SOUR FLEX SINF SAR 0 RST value is 15 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation TIME 00 00 to 23 59 This command sets the time RST value is 12 00 Example SOUR FLEX SI TIME 12 00 SOURce FLEX TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE This command Trigger ACTion determines the action which is activated by a trigger event The valid trigger events are specified by command TRIGger DM SOURce This command also defines the allocation between manual and remote control operations MESSage A trigger event switches from filler data output to useful data output for the duration of a batch 1 875 s The filler data are then output again STARt Digital modulation is started by a trigger event Useful data are then continuously output according to the settings This setting
406. is not deleted The value returned directly reflects the current hardware state Example STAT OPER COND Response 1 STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Positive TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus OPERation register from 0 to1 for the transitions of the CONDition bits Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 STATus OPERation NTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Negative TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus OPERation register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit 1038 6002 02 3 115 E 13 STATus SME Example STAT OPER NTR 0 STATus OPERation ENABle 0 to 32767 The command sets the bits of the ENABle register This register selectively enables the individual events of the appropriate status event register for the sum bit in the status byte Example STAT OPER ENAB 1 STATus PRESet The command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Example STAT PRES STATus QUEStionable The commands for the STATus QUEStionable register are under this node STATus QUEStionable EV
407. is performing a memory sequence 10 RECording This bit is set while the instrument is recording external data via the DATA input 4 MEASuring 1038 6002 02 3 138 E 13 SME Fast Restore Modus 3 8 3 5 STATus QUEStionable Register This register contains information on questionable instrument states They can occur e g if the instrument is operated out of its specifications It can be queried using commands STATus QUEStionable CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EVENt Table 3 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning VOLTage This bit is set if the voltage at an output connector is not correct if the voltage is above or below the specified limit values if the level limit has responded if the overvoltage protection has responded 5 FREQuency The bit is set if a frequency at the RF output is not correct or if it is lower or higher than the specified values 7 MODulation The bit is set if a modulation is not correct or is operated outside the specifications 8 CALibration The bit is set if a calibration is not performed properly 1038 6002 02 3 139 E 13 SME Status Reporting System 3 8 4 Application of the Status Reporting Systems In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system the information contained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed there There are several methods which are represen
408. ith the entire register The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit cf below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENAB bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENAB bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user at will Its contents is not affected by reading As indicated above the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event e g a PLL that has not locked can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Note The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488 2 can be taken as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be taken as the ENABle part of the ESR 1038 6002 02 3 134 E 13 SME Fast Restore Modus 3 8 2 Overview of the Status Registers not used vacant vacant vacant vacant Recording MSEQuencing vacant vacant vacant Waiting for Trigger MEASuring SW Eeping vacant SETTling CALibrating O
409. ively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses Not a Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0 0 or 1 is provided in a query Example Setting command SOURce FM STATe ON Query SOURce FM STATe Response 1 Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command OUTPut FILTer TYPE EXTernal Query OUTPut FILTer TYPE Response EXT Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Example SYSTem LANGuage SCPI or SYSTem LANGuage SCPI 3 9 E 13 Structure and Syntax of the Messages SME Block data 1038 6002 02 Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168
410. ively for personnel to hold or carry the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles for fastening the product to or on means of transport such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport and for observing the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle The driver is always responsible for the safety of the vehicle the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated in a Rohde amp Schwarz product do not use any other settings or functions than those described in the documentation Otherwise this may be hazardous to your health since the laser beam can cause irreversible damage to your eyes Never try to take such products apart and never look into the laser beam Sheet 4 Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de la primera puesta en funcionamiento las siguientes informaciones de seguridad Informaciones de seguridad Es el principio de Rohde amp Schwarz de ten
411. ke Example SYST COMM SER PACE NONE RST value is NONE SYSTem ERRor The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time Positive error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument negative error numbers denote error messages specified by SCPI see annex B If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to STATus QUEue NEXT Example SYST ERR Response 221 Settings conflict 1038 6002 02 3 118 E 13 SME SYSTem SYSTem KLOCk ON OFF The command Keyboard LOCk disables the keyboard of the SME including the LOCAL key or enables it again OFF Caution If SYSTem SECurity is ON the keyboard cannot be enabled i e SYSTem KLOCk OFF is not accepted If the disabling of the command is released by switching over to SYSTem SECurity OFF data will be lost Example SYST KLOC ON RST value is OFF SYSTem MODE FlIXed MSEQence The command sets the operating mode of the instrument FIXed The overall instrument state can only be switched over using RCL MSEQuence The instrument successively sets the instrument states indicated under SYSTem MSEQuence RCL RST value is Example SYST MODE FIX SYSTem MSEQuence This node follows the SOURce LIST system It can manage several memory sequences which each consist of a list of instrument state numbers and a time list If SYySTem MODE is switched
412. ked after power up of the unit TEST POINT 0007 RAM cell TEST POINT 1500 XMEM cell If the voltage values are below 2 5 V storage of data can no longer be quaranteed and an error message is displayed In order to guarantee a perfect function a flattened battery is to be replaced by a battery of the same type SAFT LS3 CNA R amp S stock no 565 1687 or ELECTROCHE QTC85 1 2AA 3B960 R amp S stock no 565 1687 Notes When the RAM battery is exchanged the stored data SAVE RECALL LIST MEM SEQ UCOR lists for DIG MOD IEC bus adaress calibration data are lost These data have to be reprogrammed after the exchange of the battery The calibration data are reconstructed using the CALIBRATE ALL X function in the UTILITIES CALIB ALL menu When the XMEM battery is exchanged the stored data of the memory extension are lost and have to be reprogrammed 1038 6002 02 4 1 E 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting SME 4 1 3 1 Exchange of RAM Battery Opening the instrument Exchanging the battery Closing the instrument 1038 6002 02 gt Remove all cable connections gt Screw off front panel 4 Phillips screws at the corners and tilt towards the front The shielding cover cf Fig 4 1 of the controller and the front panel modules is now freely accessible Detach cable connection to the IEC bus Fig 4 1 pos 3 and to the RS 232 interface Fig 4 1 pos 4 The connection to the motherboard Fig
413. l signals with a 19 kHz pilot tone AUDio Audio signals are generated ARI is switched off ARI ARI signals are generated Example SOUR STER SIGN AUD RST value is AUDio 1038 6002 02 3 100 E 13 SME SOURce STEReo SOURce STEReo AUDio The commands to set the characteristics of the audio signals generated by the SME are under this node SOURce STEReo AUDio FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 15 kHz The command sets the frequency of the audio signal The frequency applies to both channels at the same time Example SOUR STER AUD 1kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce STEReo AUDio PREemphasis OFF 50 us 75 us The command selects the preemphasis of the audio signal OFF Preemphasis is switched off 50 us 0 us preemphasis 75 us 75 us preemphasis RST value is OFF Example SOUR STER AUD PRE 50us SOURce STEReo AUDio MODE RIGHt LEFT RELeft REMLeft The command selects the operating mode in which the two channels operate RIGHtAudio signal only in the right channel LEFT Audio signal only in the left channel RELeft Right Equals Left Audio signals of same frequency and phase in both channels REMLeft Right Equals Minus Left Audio signals of same frequency but opposite phase in both channels Example SOUR STER AUD MODE RIGH RST value is RELeft SOURce STEReo PILot The commands to set the characteristics of the 19 kHz pilot tone signal are under this node SOURce STEReo PILot STATe ON OFF Th
414. l Modulation 2 6 3 9 4FSK Modulation Menu DIGITAL MOD 4FSK offers access to settings for 4FSK modulation The maximum setting depends on the carrier frequency Carrier frequency Maximum deviation lt 130 MHz 100 kHz 130 to 187 5 MHz 25 kHz 187 5 to 375 MHz 50 kHz 375 to 750 MHz 100 kHz 750 to 1500 MHz 200 kHz 1500 to 3000 MHz 400 kHz 3000 to 6000 MHz 800 kHz Menu selection DIGITAL MOD 4FSK 100 000 000 0 EVE 30 0 FREQUENCY EXT PRBS DATA LEVEL PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 ODULATION CLOCK POS COUPLED SYMBOL DIGITAL MOD LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX OUTPUT LEVEL ATTENUATION 0 0 SWEEP E MODE AUTO SINGLE LIST MEM SEQ SELECT STANDARD T ERMES UTILITIES DEVIATION 4 688 HELP BIT RATE 6250 FILTER BESSEL B T 1 25 CODING ERMES MOD POLARITY NOR INV SELECT LIST CURRENT DLISTS DELETE LIST I I FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEV Fig 2 46 Menu DIGITAL MOD 4FSK preset setting fitted with option SM B11 DM coder 1038 6002 02 2 97 E 13 Digital Modulation SOURCE PRBS CLOCK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE EXECUTE SINGLE MODE gt SELECT STANDARD DEVIATION BIT RATE 1038 6002 02 SME Se
415. l cable W710 from socket X711 of the option through the second cut out along the rear transverse panel to connector X74 at the A7 module reference step synthesis via the motherboard and insert there Fasten the cable at the transverse panel using the cable ties attached Set tuning voltage and calibrate The crystal oscillator was factory tuned to nominal frequency and the OCXO appropriate tuning voltage indicated on the cover of the module The calibration value now has to be calculated from this value and transferred to the memory of the signal generator 1038 6002 02 1 5 E 13 SME Fitting the Options Calculate calibration value The tuning voltage is generated by a 12b bit D A converter which is scaled such that a tuning voltage of 12 volts is generated with calibration value CALIBRATION DATA 4000 The calibration value is thus calculated from the tuning voltage as follows CALIBRATION DATA Vi x 4000 12 tun For checking purposes the voltage at pin 16 of plug X22 on the motherboard can be remeasured and corrected if necessary A check by means of frequency measurement may only be made after a warm up of 2 hours and against a calibrated reference Store calibration value gt Call menu UTILITIES CALIB REF OSC Enter the calculated calibration voltage with CALIBRATION DATA by means of the rotary knob or keypad Select STORE CALIBRATION DATA Terminate entry using the SELECT key The new calibration value
416. lated according to the following formula parameter LEFT RIGHT RIGHT DDM AM 90 Hz AM 150 Hz 100 If LEFT of parameter LEFT RIGHT is selected negative DDM values result with otherwise same setting A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB and the value of the instrument current IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC DDM 0 Input value of the current of the ILS indicating instrument corresponding to the DDM value A variation of the value of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB The value of the instrument current is calculated according to DDM p A DDM x 857 1 u A IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC DDM CURR 0 Input of the DDM value in dB A variation of the DDM value in dB automatically leads to a variation of the value of the instrument current and of the DDM value The dB value is calculated according to DDM dB 20 x LOG SOD DDMx100 SOD DDMx100 IEC bus command SOUR LOC DDM LOG 0 Selection between ILS LOC operating modes LEFT and RIGHT A change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value LEFT In the LEFT operating mode the content of the 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant The DDM value is negative RIGHT In the RIGHT operating mode the content of the 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant The DDM value is positive IEC bus command SOUR ILS LOC DDM DIR LEFT Input v
417. lation ILS LOC automatically causes the RF frequency to be adapted to the localizer value which is coupled to the glide slope setting Menu selection MODULATION ILS GS i W y 334 700 000 0 gt 50 0 FREQUENCY AM LEVEL FM ODULATION PM DIGITAL MOD PULSE LF OUTPUT STEREO SWEEP VOR TEST ILS GS MEM SEO ILS LOC UTILITIES MKR BCN HELP NORM 90Hz 150Hz DDM 0 000 0 DDM 0 00 pA DDM 0 0 dB FLY UP DOWN SUM OF DEPTH 80 0 UP FREQUENCY 90 0 Hz DOWN FREQUENCY 150 0 Hz UP DOWN PHASE 0 0 deg ILS DEFAULT SETTING gt COM ID STATE OFF ON COM ID FREQUENCY 1 020 kHz COM ID DEPTH 10 0 1 1 B bom KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED B CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED ExT AM SENS 1V 1003 OFF EXT1 4 1 Fig 2 34 Menu MODULATION ILS GS preset setting fitted with option SM B6 multifunction generator MODE 1038 6002 02 Selection of the ILS GS operating mode OFF ILS GS modulation is switched off In menus AM FM PM and LF OUTPUT the original setting is displayed under LFGEN2 the message ILS GS is eliminated NORM ILS GS modulation is activated 90Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 90 Hz signal content of the ILS GS signal
418. le PRNoise SAWTooth The command specifies the waveform of the output signal In the case of the standard generator the waveform is specified to be sine Option SM B2 LF generator can be converted to the signal forms sine square triangle and periodic noise option SM B6 multifunction generator to all signal forms If two options SM B2 are installed SOURceO can be set to the signal forms of option SM B2 as well SINusoid Sine SQUare Square TRlangle Triangle PRNoise Periodic noise SAWtooth Sawtooth RST value is SIN Example SOUR2 FUNC SHAP SQU 1038 6002 02 3 111 E 13 SOURce2 MARKer SME 3 6 12 3 SOURce2 MARKer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the marker generation in the case of LF sweeps Operating mode SWEep is only possible for SOURce2 The three markers existing are differentiated by a numeric suffix after marker Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce2 Option SM B2 B6 MARKer 1 2 3 FSWeep AOFF No query 1H kH H FREQuency 7 E STATe A NORMal INVerted POLarity SOURce2 MARKer 1 2 3 FSWeep The commands for the markers with the LF frequency sweep Frequency SWeep are under this node Keyword FSWeep can also be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see examples SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep AOFF The command switches off all LF frequency markers This command triggers an event thus is has no RST value and no query f
419. lecting a standard the parameters indented below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard If the setting of a parameter is different from the standard SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM FFSK STAN POCS Input value of the bit rate for the internal modulation signals Setting range 0 05 to 90 kbps IEC bus command SOUR DM FFSK BRAT 1200 b s Selection of the deviation for FFSK The following is to choose from 1 5 kHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 3 5 kHz 4 kHz and 4 5 kHz IEC bus command SOUR DM FFSK DEV 4kHz Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Selection of the editor function to process the list selected cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 101 E 13 Digital Modulation SME 2 6 3 11 Radiocommunication Service ERMES ERMES is a radiocommunication method permitting Europe wide paging If fitted with options SME B11 DM coder and SME B12 memory extension the SME generates ERMES call signals conforming to standard All parameters and the message to be transmitted can be freely selected Note Switching on ERMES automatically switches off all other DM modulations Menu selection DIGITAL MOD ERMES SA AAA AAA 100 000 000 0 30 0 cx FREQUENCY OFF ON LEVEL CHANNEL 0 169 452 ODULATION RECALCULATE gt LF OUTPUT I ZONE COUNTRY CODE SWEEP
420. lection of the modulation source for 4FSK IEC bus command SOUR DM TYPE FSK4 SOUR EXT STAT ON Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence IEC bus command SOUR DM PRBS 9 Opens a window to set the clock parameters The current settings are displayed cf Section QPSK modulation Selection of the operating mode for level reduction OFF The level reduction is switched off NORM level reduction corresponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of gt 800B IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV MODE NORM Input value of the level reduction The level reduction is internally controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via connector BURST A logic 1 in the data list causes a level reduction IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV OdB Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator AUTO The data are always repeated SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO Starts a single servicing of the data These action to be executed is only displayed and is only effective if MODE is set to SINGLE IEC bus commands TRIG DM SOUR SING TRIG DM Opens a window to select one of the standard 4FSK modulations see Table 2 5 By selecting a standard the parameters indented below t
421. level is measured again at the analyzer 5 17 E 13 Test Procedure Passive measurement of the VSWR with output levels of the SME below 30 dBm SME gt Screw the bridge or the directional coupler onto the SME again gt Amore or less wavy line representing the VSWR of the SME is to be seen now at the spectrum analyzer The VSWR is to be calculated from the maximal and the minimal voltage according to VSWR Vmax Vmin VSWR with test levels lt 0 dBm f 3 GHz max 1 5 VSWR with test levels x 0 dBm f gt 3 GHz max 2 0 VSWR with test levels gt 0 max 2 0 VSWR with test levels gt 0 dBm f gt 5 GHz with SM B9 max 2 5 Settings at the second signal generator Test frequency Level 10 dBm gt Screw off VSWR bridge or directional coupler from the test object and note down the level measured at the analyzer as a reference value gt Screw on the bridge or directional coupler again and determine the new level at the analyzer gt The output reflection coefficient r of the test object is the voltage ratio test level reference level It serves to determine the voltage standing wave ratio VSWR according to the formula VSWR 14r 1 r 5 2 13 Interrupt free Level Setting ATTEN FIXED Test equipment Test setup Measurement 1038 6002 02 Power meter Section 5 1 item 8 Connect the power met
422. lid for ERMES FLEX REFLEX and POCSAG but not for the other digital modulations INT The clock required for signal generation is generated internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as the clock signal IEC bus command SOUR DM COMP CLOC SOUR INT Note For all bit rates i e for 1600 bps and 3200 bps a symbol clock rate of 3200 Hz is always used This applies to both the output CLOCK SOURCE INT and the input CLOCK SOURCE EXT of the clock 2 115 E 13 Digital Modulation SME 2 6 3 13 Radiocommunication Service ReFLEX25 When equipped with the SME B43 SME B11 and SME B12 options the SME generates telegrams complying to the ReFLEX25 standard The telegram generated by the SME complies with the ReFLEX25 Protocol Specification Document Version 2 4 dated March 15 1996 issued by the Motorola Advanced Messaging Group Notes When ReFLEX25 is switched on all other DM modulations are automatically switched off To permit easier handling a few settings are automatically updated each time ReFLEX25 is switched on and RECALCULATE executed if other settings have been changed This applies to the RF frequency and the FRAME CONTENTS value Normally automatic mode is activated but it can be deactivated under AUTO ADAPTATION Parameters that have been set automatically can be varied again at will these modifications take effect immediately Fixed values The follo
423. list is processed repeatedly the RF signal is continuously DM modulated SINGle The trigger condition can be fulfilled by manual control or by using the commands TRIG DM IMM or TRG The list is processed only once DM is subsequently inactive EXTernal This setting has no effect on the basic digital modulations 1038 6002 02 3 125 E 13 TRIGger SME Effect of TRIGger DM SOURce and SOURce ERMes FLEX REFL25 POCSag TACTion on the sequence of complex digital modulations SOURce ERM FLEX REFI25 POCS TACTion TRIGger DM SOURce MESSage STARt ONCE AUTO MODE ALWAYS The frames are continuously repeated in the set sequence the setting under ERMes FLEX REFLex25 POCSag TACTion is irrelevant SINGle MODE SINGLE A trigger event key IEC IEEE bus command switches once from IDLE frame output to ALPH NUM and TONE frame output EXT MODE EXT SINGLE MODE EXTTRIG ALWAYS MODE EXTTRIG An external trigger event An external trigger event starts AN external trigger event starts signal edge at the trigger digital modulation the digital modulation After the connector switches once from Subsequently the frames are Output of a IDLE frame output to ALPH continuously repeated in the FLEX REFLex25 a time slice NUM and TONE frame output set sequence POCSAG or a subsequence ERMES the modulation is stopped the SME waits for the next trigger event Example TRIG DM SOUR AU
424. ll message frames IEC bus command SOUR FLEX ERR MASK 0 Entry value for the position of the word to be falsified The words are numbered from block 0 word 0 to block 10 word 7 of a frame The sync part and the frame information word cannot be falsified The falsification precedes block interleaving in all transmitted phases IEC bus command SOUR FLEX ERR WORD 0 The parameters of this section determine which types of data FLEX useful data FLEX filler data simulated data of other paging systems or emergency resynchronization are sent at what time This can individually be determined for every frame of a cycle with the setting then being valid for a cycles The cycle and frame numbers are generated and sent in compliance with standard for a period of one hour Input value of number of cycle with which the message is started Valid values are 1 to 14 IEC bus command SOUR FLEX CYCL O Input value of the number of the frame in the cycle with which the message is started Valid values are 1 to 127 IEC bus command SOUR FLEX FRAM 0 2 113 E 13 Digital Modulation FRAME CONTENTS RECALCULATE gt MODE 1038 6002 02 SME Opens a window to determine the contents of up to 128 frames Each frame is represented by one character These characters can be set to the following values A alphanumeric message B binary message F filler frame contains FLEX structures but no messag
425. lt value in the FLASH memory Example CAL QPSK STOR 1038 6002 02 3 18 E 13 SME CALibration CALibration LEVel This node provides the commands for the management of the level correction table The corresponding data are permanently stored in the instrument and cannot be changed The instrument includes different level correction tables The tables to be used are selected depending on the set frequency and the pulse modulator switched on internal or external The FRANge and PMODulator commands select the level correction tables to be read out using the DATA command These commands simulate the current instrument status but do not have any influence on the instrument setup The STATe ON command activates the level correction table corresponding to the real instrument setup CALibration LEVel DATA The command queries the level correction data It returns all level correction data in the format fixed in the FORMat system The other commands under this node determine the list that is returned Example CAL LEV DATA CALibration LEVel FRANge NORMal MIXer The command selects the level correction table valid for a frequency in the NORMal or in the MIXer range Example CAL LEV FRAN NORM RST value is NORMal CALibration LEVel PMODulator ON OFF The command selects the level correction table valid for an instrument setup with the pulse modulator ON or OFF Example CAL LEV PMOD OFF RST value is OFF
426. lue at RANGE Vary value using the rotary knob or enter using the numeric keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key The menu cursor marks MEMORY or DWELL in input line PARAMETER Select MEMORY using the rotary knob if not yet marked and press the SELECT key The menu cursor marks the value in input line MEMORY Vary starting value for column MEMORY using the rotary knob or enter using the numeric keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key The menu cursor marks the value in input line WITH INCREMENT gt Vary the value of the increment desired using the rotary knob or enter using the numeric keys and the ENTER key gt Press the RETURN key gt Mark the action EXECUTE gt gt Press the SELECT key The filling sequence is initiated After the function has been carried out the input window is automatically exited The menu cursor marks FUNCTION The EDIT page shows the end of the range that has been filled right now 2 33 E 13 List Editor SME Block function INSERT Function INSERT inserts the desired number of elements with constant or linearly increasing de creasing values before the element with the given starting index All elements which had been stored from the starting index are shifted to the end of the range to be inserted Input is effected analogously to filling a list By pressing the RETURN key the input window is exited without a modification being effected The menu
427. m 144 to 16 dBm block data The command fills the LEVel part of the RF list selected with data The data can either be indicated as a list of numbers separated by commas of arbitrary length or as binary block data As to the format of the data cf command SOURce LIST FREQ RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR LIST POW OdBm 2dBm 2dBm 3dBm SOURce LIST POWer POINts The command queries the length in items of the LEVel part of the list presently selected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST POW POIN Answer 32 SOURce LIST SELect Name of list The command selects the list indicated If there is no list of this name a new list is created The name may contain up to 7 letters The command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST SEL LIST1 1038 6002 02 3 77 E 13 SOURce MARKer SME 3 6 11 10 SOURce MARKer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the marker generation with sweeps The SME has three markers each for frequency and level sweeps which are differentiated by a numeric suffix after MARKer The settings for frequency sweep and level sweep marker are independent of each other Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep AMPLitude ON OFF AOFF No query FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz Hz SME03E 03 06 STATe ON OFF 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz PSWeep AOFF No query POWer 144
428. m Zs yes Clear SRE ESE yes gt Clear PPE yes Clear EVENt parts of the yes Ez yes registers Clear ENABle parts of all yes yes OPERation and QUESTionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 Fill PTRansition parts with yes yes yl Clear NTRansition parts Clear error queue yes yes ER yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command yes yes yes processing and input buffer 1 Every command being the first in a command line e immediately following a lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt clears the output buffer 1038 6002 02 3 142 SME Fast Restore Modus 3 9 Fast Restore Mode The Fast Restore mode is available with SMEO3A and units that are equipped with option Fast CPU for SMIQ SM B50 Device settings can be saved and recalled very quickly via the IEC IEEE bus using the commands described below 1000 memory locations are available In contrast to the SAVE RECALL function not the unit parameters but only the setting data of the modules are stored in the Fast Restore mode RESTORE by means of the SYSTem SREStore or command has an immediate effect on the module The database which stores all entries and delivers the display data is bypassed This allows a very high setup speed Commands SYSTem SSAVe 1 1000 This command saves the current de
429. mV G n dBuV Selects giga nano with RF level 1 dBuV with LF level dBu ENTER dB m M u uV Selects mega micro with level uV k m MV Selects kilo milli with level mV 1x Enter dB m Terminates entries in the basic unit and value inputs without unit Selects with level dBm Selects with level offset and level step width dB In order to change to another level unit simply press the unit key desired Parameter LEVEL must be activated e g by pressing the LEVEL key 3 MENU VARIATION Menu keys 1038 6002 02 The menu keys access the menus and settings within the menus RETURN Returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level SELECT Acknowledges the choice marked by the menu cursor Moves the digit cursor to the left by one position in the marked value indication Moves the menu cursor to the left by one position in a 1 out of n selection gt Moves the digit cursor to the right by one position in the marked value indication Moves the menu cursor to the right by one position in a 1 out of n selection 2 5 Front Panel see as well Section 2 2 2 Basic Operating Steps Section 2 2 2 7 Change Unit of Level see as well Section 2 2 2 Basic Operating Steps E 13 E ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz 3 0 GHz SME 03 jJ 100 000 000 0 z FREQUENCY EVEL ODULATION IGITAL MOD F OUTPUT WEEP IST EM SEQ TILITIES ELP M D S M U
430. mal point and minus sign can be E MU ES entered by means of the digital keys J 5J e 0 9 X Enters the digit E 2 Enters the decimal point E mm pA IE Enters the minus sign Deletes the last input digit sign or decimal point key BACKSPACE 1038 6002 02 2 3 Front Panel see as well Section 2 2 2 5 Use of FREQ and LEVEL Keys Section 2 4 RF Frequency Section 2 5 RF Level Section 2 2 5 Storing and Calling of Instrument Settings see as well Section 2 2 2 Basic Operating Steps E 13 9 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz 3 0 GHz SME 03 100 000 000 0 M D S M U H FREQUENCY EVEL ODULATION IGITAL MOD F OUTPUT WEEP IST EM SEQ TILITIES ELP D OPERATING Move cursor SELECT Next menu VERSION 33 RETURN Previous menu QUICK SELECT Soo 668 UEM Fig 2 1 0 Front panel view controls 1038 6002 02 2 4 MAX 50 W REVERSE POWER MADE IN GERMANY 13 SME 2 DATA INPUT Unit keys with enter function The unit keys terminate the input of values and specify E the multiplication factor for the respective basic unit The basic units are displayed next to the input field vA while numbers are entered In the case of level 1 settings the unit keys specify the unit k An
431. mand determines whether the FLEX data have to be recalculated after switchover from FLEX STATe OFF to STATe ON ON The data are recalculated and entered into the memory extension OFF The previous memory extension contents are not cleared This feature can be used for data generated or altered by an external program and then transmitted into the memory extension to generate a FLEX telegram RST value is ON Example SOUR FLEX STAT AUTO ON SOURce FLEX CYCLe 0 to 14 The command determines which number is assigned to the first cycle after switch on of FLEX Frame numbering always starts with 0 Example SOUR FLEX CYCL 0 RST value is 0 SOURce FLEX DEViation 2 0 to 10 0 kHz The command determines the frequency deviation of the modulation The deviation specifies the spacing from the carrier for the two far placed symbols in 4FSK The FLEX standard specifies 4800 Hz for this value which may be varied for testing Example SOUR FLEX DEV 4 8kHz RST value is 4800 Hz SOURce FLEX ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 The command determines the erroneous bits in a 32 bit field The transmitted decimal number 0 4294967295 is converted internally into a 32 bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits These bits are XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine which bits of this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly Note XORing precedes block interleaving see fle
432. mand line after a syntax error is analyzed further if possible and serviced If the command recognition recognizes a delimiter or a DCL it requests the data set to set the commands in the instrument hardware as well now Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process commands again This means for the command servicing that further commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution 3 7 3 Data Set and Instrument Hardware Here the expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function signal generation measurement etc The controller is not included The data set is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software IEC bus setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set The data set management enters the new values e g frequency into the data set however only passes them on to the hardware when requested by the command recognition As this is always only effected at the end of a command line the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware If the detection is made that an execution is not possible an execution error is signaled to the status reporting system All alterations of the data set are canceled the instrument har
433. measurement using a precision attenuator and a sensitive test receiver or spectrum analyzer Test setup Connect a precision attenuator to the RF output of the SME and a spectrum analyzer with screened RF measurement cables to its output 1038 6002 02 5 15 E 13 Test Procedure Measurement Settings Measurement of Lowest Levels SME Settings at the SME Test frequency Level 10 dBm unmodulated Setting at the analyzer Test frequency Setting at the attenuator Attenuation 120 dB Read the level at the analyzer and note down as a reference value It should be approx 110 dBm Select the measurement bandwidth small enough to ensure an exact reading Now repeat the measurement with the settings given in the table Deviation of the indication at the analyzer from the reference value i Gaclicase s co eee epe e R max 1dB Level at the SME Attenuation of the attenuator 10 dBm 120 dB 5 dBm 115 dB 0 dBm 110 dB 10 100 dB 30 dBm 80 dB 50 dBm 60 dB 70 dBm 40 dB 90 dBm 20 dB 110 dBm 0 dB Caution No HF leakage of the components used is the prerequisite for a correct measurement Test setup Measurement 1038 6002 02 Insert a low noise preamplifier between SME and precision attenuator Perform a subsequent calibration with a level already measured 30dBm This allows measuring levels up to the lower setting limit of the S
434. ments INSERT Insertion of elements into a list DELETE Deletion of elements of a list 2 2 4 1 Select and Generate SELECT LIST SELECT LIST opens a selection window in which either an existing list can be selected or a new empty list can be generated cf Fig 2 8 By pressing the RETURN key the selection window is closed without changing the setting Select list Mark the list desired using the rotary knob Press SELECT key The selected list is included in the instrument setting The selection window is closed The selected list is displayed under CURRENT Generate list gt Mark CREATE NEW LIST gt using rotary knob Press SELECT key A new empty list is automatically generated which can be filled using functions FILL or EDIT The selection window is closed The new list is displayed under CURRENT No modification Press RETURN key of the setting Selection DELETE nioe 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE CREATE NEW LIST LEVEL EXECUTE SINGLE MODE p MSEQ1 199 ODULATION RESET p DIGITAL MOD MSEQ3 1 LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX MSEQ4 123 SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ SELECT LIST UTILITIES DELETE LIST HELP FUNCTION Fig 2 8 SELECT LIST selection window 1038 6002 02 2 29 E 13 List Editor CREATE NEW LIST gt MSEQ2 100 SME Generating a new list The name of
435. meter LEVEL ATTENUATION must hence be set to 0 Sockets DATA CLOCK and BURST are switched to be an output if the PRBS generator is switched on and the bit sequences can be tapped there 1038 6002 02 2 80 E 13 SME Digital Modulation 2 6 3 3 DM Memory Extension Option SME B12 Option SME B12 memory extension increases the memory depth of the data generator The memory depth depends on the selection of the memory space allocation MEM MODE cf submenu CONFIG XMEM If the entire memory area is allocated to the DATA memory MEM MODE 8M 1 the memory depth is increased to 8 MBit If the memory area is divided up into the three memories DATA LEV ATT and BURST MEM MODE 1M 3 however the memory depth is decreased to 1 MBit In the DM menus the memory extension can be activated in submenu SELECT LIST by selecting list 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY SOURCE CREATE NEW LIST gt LEVEL PRBS DLIST1 MODULATION CLOCK as DLIST2 DIGITAL MOD 1 LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE DLIST3 LF OUTPUT LEVEL ATTENUATION XMEM 8388607 SWEEP MODE LIST SELECT STANDARD MEM SEQ FILTER BIT RATE UTILITIES DIFF ENCODER HELP MOD POLARITY SELECT LIST DELETE LIST CONFIG XMEM Fig 2 39 Selection of the memory extension in submenu SELECT LIST Compared to all other lists list X MEM is special for the follo
436. meters of the DM FSK4 subsystem however are not influenced by settings in the ERMes subsystem Switchover between the output of useful or filler subsequences is by means of the TRIGger DM subsystem Command Parameter Defaul Remark t Unit SOURce ERMes Option SME B1 1 STATe ON OFF SME B12 AUTO ON OFF CHANnel Oto 15 ERRor MASK 0 to 1073741823 BATCh AtoP WORD 0 to 153 0 to 189 for long batch MESSage CATegory TONE NUMeric ALPHanumeric ALPHanumeric DATA String SELect FOX ALPHA LONG USER1 to 3 lADDress 010 286143 NUMeric String 1 TONE ptos NINFormation 0to7 OPERator 0 to 63 PA PARea 0 to 799 ZCOuntry SE SEQuence A to P A to P DBATch SI SINFormation ON OFF ETI ON OFF BAI 0 to 30 FSI 1 to 31 nomen 00 00 to 23 59 MESSage STARt ONCE TACTion SOURce ERMes STATe The command switches on the ERMES signal and hence switches off all other active DM modulations The ON OFF RF frequency is set to SOURce ERMes CHANnel with every change from OFF to ON the data for the memory extension are If STATe AUTO is O recalculated and wri determined by command tten into list XMEM Every change of one of the ERMES parameters requires the data to be recalculated i e a brief switchover to STATe OFF after every change Example SOUR ERM STAT ON 1038 6002 02 3 50 RST value is OFF E 13 SME SOURce ERMes SOUR
437. mmand queries the overall checksum for the memory extension Beforehand the checksum has to be calculated using CALCulate Example DIAG XMEM CHEC Response 178034 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum DATA This command queries the overall checksum for the DATA section of the memory extension data In the 8M 1 mode this checksum is identical with the overall checksum Beforehand the checksum has to be calculated using CALCulate Example DIAG XMEM CHEC DATA Response 10043 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum AT Tenuate This command queries the overall checksum for the ATTenuate section of the memory extension data In the 8M 1 mode this checksum is 0 Beforehand the checksum has to be calculated using CALCulate Example DIAG XMEM CHEC ATT Response 97134 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum BURSt This command queries the overall checksum for the BURSt section of the memory extension data In the 8M 1 mode this checksum is 0 Beforehand the checksum has to be calculated using CALCulate Example DIAG XMEM CHEC BURS Response 28601 1038 6002 02 3 23 E 13 DISPlay SME 3 6 6 DISPLAY System This system contains the commands to configure the screen If system security is activated using command SYSTem SECurity ON the display cannot be switched on and off arbitrarily cf below Command Parameter Default Remark Unit DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF AMPLitude ON OFF F
438. model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus 3 7 1 Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC bus and collects them in the input buffer The input buffer has a size of 256 characters The input unit sends a message to the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATORs as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface message DCL If the input buffer is full the IEC bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed Subsequently the IEC bus traffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and execution The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 1038 6002 02 3 130 E 13 SME Instrument Model and Command Processing 3 7 2 Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit It proceeds in the order in which it receives the data Only a DCL is serviced with priority a GET Group Execute Trigger e g is only executed after the commands received before as well Each recognized command is immediately transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once Syntactical errors in the command are recognized here and supplied to the status reporting system The rest of acom
439. modulation is activated VAR Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 30 Hz signal content of the VOR signal The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal corresponds to the value set under VAR DEPTH SUBCARRIER Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated 9960 Hz FM carrier of the VOR signal The modulation depth corresponds to the value set under SUBCARRIER DEPTH SUBC FM Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the frequency modulated 9960 Hz FM carrier of the VOR signal The frequency deviation corresponds to the value set under REF DEVIATION the modulation depth to the value set under SUBCARRIER DEPTH IEC bus command SOUR VOR STAT ON MODE NORM 1038 6002 02 2 65 E 13 Analog Modulations SME BEARING ANGLE DIRECTION VAR REF FREQUENCY VAR DEPTH SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY SUBCARRIER DEPTH REF DEVIATION VOR DEFAULT SETTING COM ID STATE COM ID FREQUENCY COM ID DEPTH 1038 6002 02 Input value of the phase angle between the 30 Hz VAR signal and the 30 Hz reference signal IEC bus command SOUR VOR Odeg Selection of the reference position of the phase information FROM Selection of the beacon as a reference position The angle set under BEARING ANGLE corresponds to the angle between the true north and the connection line between beacon and airplane TO Selection of the airplane position as a reference position The angle set under BEARING ANGLE corresponds to the an
440. mounting The SME can be mounted into a 19 rack by means of rack adapter ZZA 94 stock no 396 4905 00 The mounting instructions are attached to the adapter 1038 6002 02 1 12 E 13 SME Front Panel 2 Operation 2 1 Explanation of Front and Rear Panel 2 1 4 Elements of the Front Panel 2 1 1 1 Display cf Fig 2 1 A Front panel view display 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY AM FM1 DEVIATION LEVEL FM 1 SOURCE LFGEN1 EXT1 2 PM LFGEN1 FREQ 0 4k 1k 15k Hz DIGITAL MOD PULSE LF OUTPUT FM2 DEVIATION 2 00 kHz SWEEP FM2 SOURCE LFGEN2 EXI1 2 LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 27 500 0 kHz MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI UTILITIES HELP EXT1 COUPLING Ac DC EXT2 COUPLING Ac DC The display shows in the see as well Header field the current frequency and level Section 2 2 1 i Display settings status messages error messages Menu field the main menu and the submenus selected with the current settings Parameters can be selected and changed in the menus indicated 1038 6002 02 2 1 E 13 9 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz 3 0 GHz Fig 2 1 a LSME 03 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL MODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP OPERATING A Mo
441. n emere 4 4 4 2 Functional Test nne ede ed ee tnt vied 4 5 5 Performance cease iiie ad 5 1 5 1 Test Instruments and eren 5 1 5 1 1 Test Systems to Measure Modulation 5 3 5 1 1 1 Standard Test System nennen 5 3 5 1 1 2 Test System with Audio 5 3 5 1 1 3 Test System for Broadband FM ssssssssseee eene 5 4 5 1 1 4 Test System for Pulse Modulation sse 5 4 5 1 1 5 Test System for GF SK Ie die dite eruere ipe aie oe 5 5 5 1 1 6 Test System Extension by Down 5 5 5 2 Test Proced tre A e re 5 6 52 1 Display and Keyboard due tee ec tete battere ec aia 5 6 5 2 2 Frequency Setllrig intet edet o e e aida 5 6 52 30 Etro 8 5 2 4 Reference Frequency ipee eret erdt 5 10 5 2 5 Harmonics Suppression Subharmonics ssssseeeeeneenen 5 10 5 2 6 Suppression of Nonharmonics sssssssssssses esent 5 11 52 7 SSB Phase NOISOG curia 5 12 5 2 8 Broadband Noise ente ee tet ete edi t ee 5 14 5 2 9 Residual ciutat ete ce ie ee tbt eie ine on eet ds 5 14 5 2 10 Residual AM site ab
442. n internal modulation source the pulse generator option SM B4 offers the possibility to set single and double pulses with variable pulse delay pulse width and period The pulse generator can be triggered internally or by means of an external signal at the PULSE input The internal triggering is derived from the reference frequency and hence very stable In trigger mode EXT the positive or the negative edge can be used to trigger the pulse generator The pulse generator can also be operated as an independent function without the pulse modulator being controlled if the pulse modulation source SOURCE is switched to OFF or EXT The pulse can be tapped at the VIDEO output The inputs and outputs to the pulse generator are at the rear of the instrument Signal examples SYNC signal ma PERIOD re PULSE DELAY WIDTH PULSE DELAY gt lt VIDEO signal signal a Fig 2 29 Signal example 1 single pulse TRIGGER MODE AUTO 1038 6002 02 2 60 E 13 SME Analog Modulations Pulse input ael r TRIGGER DELAY SYNC signal Double Pulse Delay gt WIDTH E BN VIDEO signal 3 RF signal Fig 2 30 Signal example 2 double pulse TRIGGER MODE EXT SLOPE POS Note The minimum period length depends on parameters WIDTH and PULSE DELAY To avoid a settings conflict the following has to be true PERIOD gt 1 1 x WIDTH PULSE DELAY 30 ns F
443. n overview of the commands and their hierarchical arrangement see indentations In the parameter column the requested parameters are indicated together with their specified range The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters In the remark column an indication is made on whether the command does not have a query form whether the command has only one query form whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the instrument The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the table by means of indentations to the right The lower the level is the farther the indentation to the right is Please observe that the complete notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well Example SOURce FM MODE is represented in the table as follows SOURce first level second level MODE third level In the individual description the complete notation of the command is given An example for each command is written out at the end of the individual description Upper lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description see Section 3 5 2 The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters 3 12 E 13 SME Special characters 1038 6002 02 Description of Commands Notation A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several comm
444. n the settings SOURce2 FREQuency STARt and to STOP are allowed Example SOUR2 FREQ MAN 1kHz RST value is 1kHz SOURce0 2 FREQuency MODE CWl FIXed SWEep The command specifies the operating mode and hence by means of which commands the FREQuency subsystem is checked The following allocations are valid CW FlXed CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is specified by means of SOURce0 2 FREQuency CW FIXed SWEep The generator operates in the SWEep mode The frequency is specified by means of commands SOURce2 FREQuency STARt STOP MANual The SWEep setting is only possible for SO Example SOUR2 FREQ MODE CW URce2 RST value is CW SOURce0 2 FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz This command indicates the starting value of the frequency for the sweep Example SOUR2 FREQ STAR 100kHz RST value is 1kHz SOURce0 2 FREQuency STOP 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz This command indicates the end value of the frequency for the sweep Example SOUR2 FREQ STOP 200kHz RST value is 100 kHz 1038 6002 02 3 110 E 13 SME SOURce0 2 FUNCtion 3 6 12 2 SOURce 0 2 FUNCtion Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands specifying the waveform of the output signal Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce0 2 FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid SQUare TRlangle PRNoise Option SM B2 B6 SAWTooth Option SM B6 SOURce0 2 FUNCtion SHAPe SiNusoid SQUare TRlang
445. nal operating hours counter The response supplies the number of hours the instrument has been in operation up to now Example DIAG INFO OTIM Response 19 DIAGnostic INFO SDATe The command queries the date of software creation The response is returned in the form year month day Example DIAG INFO SDAT Response 1992 12 19 DIAGnostic MEASure The commands which trigger a measurement in the instrument and return the measured value are under this node DIAGnostic MEASure POINt The command triggers a measurement at a measuring point and returns the voltage measured The measuring point is specified by a numeric suffix cf service manual stock no 1039 1856 24 Example DIAG MEAS POIN2 Response 3 52 DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum The command for calculating and querying the checksum are provided in this node Contrary to the display in local mode the values are returned as decimal numbers DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum CALCulate This command triggers the calculation of all four checksums The results depend on the start and stop addresses selected and on the operating mode of the memory extension This command is recommended whenever a checksum is to be read out and when setups or memory extension data have been modified since the last calculation Example DIAG XMEM CHEC CALC Action without query 1038 6002 02 3 22 E 13 SME DIAGnostic DIAGnostic XMEM CHECksum TOTal This co
446. nce on data lists Example SOUR LIST DEL LIST2 SOURce LIST DELete ALL The command deletes all lists As a possibly selected list is deleted as well the LIST mode must be switched off SOURce FREQuency MODE CW or SWEep RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR LIST DEL ALL 1038 6002 02 3 75 E 13 SOURce LIST SOURce LIST DWELI 1 ms to 1 s 1 ms to 1 5 SME For every item of the FREQuency or POWer VOLTage list contents the command contains the time the instrument dwells at this item Note The RF generator is not in a position to allocate different times to the individual items of the FREQuency and POWer list contents Thus the DWELI part of the list should have length 1 the value is then valid for all items If a list containing more than one element is indicated all values must be equal Example SOUR LIST DWEL 0 15 SOURce LIST DWELI POINts The command queries the length in items of the DWELI part of the list The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST DWEL POIN SOURce LIST FREE Answer 1 The command queries two values The first one indicates the space still vacant for lists in items the second one the space already occupied also in items The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST FREE SOURce LIST FREQuency 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz block data SME03 06
447. ncy 1000 MHz Level 0 dBm Select EXT1 AC coupled in the MODULATION PM PM1 SOURCE menu Select EXT1 AC coupled in the MODULATION PM PM1 5 rad Setting at the audio analyzer Generator level 1 V Vpeak gt Determine the modulation frequency response difference between t Modulation frequency response 10 Hz to 100 kHz max 3 dB gt Repeat measurement using setting PM2 SOURCE EXT2 1038 6002 02 5 26 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 30 PhiM Distortion Factor Test equipment Measurement Test system 5 1 1 1 Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Select INT in the MODULATION PM PM1 SOURCE menu Deviation 5 rad Modulation frequency 1 kHz Read off the distortion factor at the modulation analyzer Distortion Tacton iii dente vay max 1 5 2 31 Internal Modulation Generator Test equipment Test setup Measurement 1038 6002 02 Audio analyzer Section 5 1 Pos 14 Connect an audio analyzer to socket LF of the SME to test the internal modulation generator gt Settings at the SME Select LFGEN1 in the LF OUTPUT SOURCE menu Level 1 V subsequently all 4 frequencies of the internal generator Read off the actual frequency at the audio analyzer Deviation compared to the rated 3 Read off output voltage at the audio analyzer Output voltage 990 to 1010 mV p
448. nd POCSag INT The clock required for signal generation is generated internally The CLOCK connector is switched to be an output EXT The clock required for signal generation is applied to the CLOCK connector Example SOUR DM COMP CLOC SOUR INT RST value is INT SOURce DM GMSK The commands to set the data source for the digital type of modulation GMSK are under this node GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying always has exactly two states The bit rate of the data source is fixedly set the phase displacement as well SOURce DM GMSK STANdard GSMIPCN CDPD MC9 MOBitex MD24N MD24W MD36N MD36W MD48N MD48W MD80W MD96N MD96W MD100W MD120W DSRR DSRR4K This short form command sets the parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the standards cf table The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table Hence it has no query form or RST value Short command Command sequence DM GMSK STANdard GSM PCN FILTer 0 3 BRATe 270 833kb s DCODer ON POLarity DM GMSK STANdard CDPD MD192 DM GMSK STANdard MC9 DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 8 kb s DM GMSK DCODer ON DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MOBitex MD80N DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 8 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM DM GMSK STANdard MD24N DM GMSK FILTer 0 3 DM GMSK BRATe 2 4 kb s DM GMSK DCODer OFF DM GMSK POLarity NORM 1038 6
449. ndow 1038 6002 02 2 32 E 13 SME FILL AT PARAMETER MEMORY OR DWELL WITH INCREMENT EXECUTE 3 Filling a list 1038 6002 02 List Editor Setting the filling range AT Lower limit index RANGE Number of the elements to be inserted Selection on which of the parameters the filling function is to have an effect This menu option is eliminated if the list only includes elements with one parameter Input of the starting value for the parameter selected This option is only displayed if a selection has been made under PARAMETER MEMORY or DWELL Input of the increment between two successive values If 0 is entered as increment a filling procedure with constant values is achieved This option is only displayed if a selection has been made under PARAMETER MEMORY or DWELL Note In the case of some types of lists e g digital modulation data indicating an increment is eliminated since there are binary data In these cases line WITH INCREMENT is eliminated Starts the filling sequence After the function has been executed the input window is automatically exited The current index points to the first element after the processed range After selection of function FILL the menu cursor marks FILL AT gt Press the SELECT key The menu cursor marks the value at AT Vary index value using the rotary knob or enter using the numeric keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key The menu cursor marks the va
450. nect sockets SYNC and VIDEO to the two channels of the oscilloscope Switch on an input resistance of 50 Ohm at the oscilloscope or use feed through termination Measurement Single pulses Settings at the SME In Menu MODULATION PULSE SOURCE PULSE GEN PERIOD 100 ns WIDTH 20 ns PULSE DELAY 60 ns DOUBLE PULSE STATE OFF TRIGGER MODE AUTO EXT TRIGGER SLOPE POS 1038 6002 02 5 38 E 13 SME 1038 6002 02 Double pulses Ext triggering gt Test Procedure Settings at the Oscilloscope Time base 20 ns div both channels 2 V div Triggering from the SYNC signal SYNC output Pulse sequence with a pulse width of 40 ns 10 ns VIDEO output Pulse sequence with a pulse width of 20 ns 4 ns the first edge appears after the first edge of the SYNC signal by the pulse delay of 60 ns 13ns 23 ns SYNC and VIDEO Period 100 ns Note The period is derived from the internal reference frequency gt gt and has its accuracy There must be no error within the frame of the measuring accuracy of the oscilloscope Settings at the SME In menu MODULATION PULSE DOUBLE PULSE STATE ON WIDTH 20 ns DOUBLE PULSE DELAY 60 ns VIDEO output second pulse with a width of 20 ns 4 ns Spacing to the first pulse 60 ns 23ns 13ns Setting at the SME In menu MODULATION PULSE TRIGGER MODE EXT Se
451. ng Group ReFLEX25 can only be activated if the SME is equipped with the SME B43 SME B11 and SME B12 options Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce Options SME B11 REFLex25 le and SME STATe ON OFF AUTO ON OFF MODulation 1600 FSK2 3200 FSK2 3200 FSK4 6400 DEViation FSKA Hz MESSage 2 0 to 10 0 kHz PADDress ALPHanumeric 16777216 to 1073741823 SELect CATalog name DATA query only NUMeric alphanumeric data RREQuired numeric data SI SINFormation OFF ZONE SZONe 0 to 4091 PROVider FCHannel 0 to 16383 BASE Hz ANUMber 0 to 8191MHz RCHannel Ota 2087 BASE Hz ANUMber 0 to 8191MHz SPEed 0102047 bps FSPacing 800 1600 6400 9600 bps Hz SCIBase 0 to 102350 Hz SCICollapse 0 to 127 ERRor DUNT MASK WORD 0 to 4294967295 FCONtent 010 351 I AIN T SIRIBIFIO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AADaptation LIIAINITISIRIB F O 1 2 3141516171819 TACTion ON 1038 6002 02 MESSage STARt ONCE 3 93 E 13 SOURce REFLex25 SME SOURce REFLex25 STATe ON OFF This command switches on ReFLEX25 The status line displays the cycle and frame number and the type of output data as well as the word RFLX see table in the Manual Operation part under FRAME CONTENTS When ReFLEX25 is switched on all other DM modulations are automatically switched off A switchover from STAT OFF to STAT ON results in a recalculation of the telegram and its entry into t
452. ng settings are performed automatically as soon as ReFLEX25 is switched on or RECALCULATEis triggered In detail the following settings are performed FORWARD CHANNEL BASE FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT NUMBER and FREQUENCY SPACING are used to calculate and set the RF The automatically set values can be varied subsequently without recalculation of the telegram These modifications take effect immediately However they do not react on the output parameters IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 AAD ON 2 124 E 13 SME Digital Modulation RECALCULATE gt MODE 1038 6002 02 Triggers recalculation of the generated ReFLEX25 telegram and with AUTO ADAPTATION set to ON an update of the RF frequency The execution of RECALCULATE is required when a setting is changed that influences the telegram This includes all parameters except for FRAME CONTENTS AUTO ADAPTATION MODE and CLOCK SOURCE The same result can be obtained by briefly switching ReFLEX25 off and on again IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 STAT OFF STAT ON Selection of the output mode The contents of the individual frames is mainly determined by FRAME CONTENTS However MODE also performs an interpretation in this case ALWAYS The SME starts with the generation of the ReFLEX25 signal immediately after switching on of ReFLEX25 The frames are sent in the way they have been specified under FRAME CONTENTS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO SINGLE The SME starts with th
453. nu Modulation depth 60 Vary the carrier frequency from 5kHz to 1500MHz 2200 3000 6000MHz with SME03E 03 06 For recommended setting values see table 5 2 Setting at the audio analyzer Generator level 1 V Upeak Determine the modulation frequency response difference between the highest and the lowest modulation depth by varying the generator frequency Modulation frequency response from 20 Hz to 50 kHz max 1dB Note option SM B2 LF generator is fitted LFGEN2 can be selected in the MODULATION AM AM SOURCE menu and the test frequency be set using the internal generator for this measurement 1038 6002 02 5 20 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 18 AM Distortion Factor beshequipment Test system 5 1 1 1 Test system 5 1 1 6 SMEO6 M gt Settings at the SME Level 0 dBm Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION AM AM SOURCE INT menu Modulation depth 30 Modulation frequency 1 kHz gt Vary the carrier frequency from 1 MHz to 1500 MHz 2200 3000 6000 MHz with SME03E 03 06 For recommended setting values see table 5 2 Read off the distortion factor at the modulation analyzer Distortion factor max 196 gt Repeat measurement with an AM of 80 Distortion factor ccccccncccccncnononononononononenenenenonenenenenenenenos max 296 5 2 19 Residual PhiM with AM Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 1 Test system 5 1 1 6 SMEO6 Measurement Settings at the SME Vario
454. number of filler batches set with command POCS LBAT Each batch has the length of 544 bits Depending on the settings under commands POCS TACT and TRIG DM zero one or two message batches follow Then an unmodulated signal is sent up to the end of the time slice Due to the fact that only complete code word groups are sent it is possible that depending on the set bit rate the length of the actual time slice slightly differs from the set value of time slice length Example SOUR POCS TSL 10 RST value is 10 SOURce POCSag TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE This command Trigger ACTion determines the action which is activated by a trigger event The valid trigger events are specified by command TRIGger DM SOURce This command also defines the allocation between manual and remote control operations MESSage trigger event switches from filler data output to useful data output for the duration of a time slice The filler data are then output again STARt Digital modulation is started by a trigger event Useful data are then continuously output according to the settings This setting is suitable for example for a synchronous start of several units ONCE The output of a time slice is only started by a valid trigger event After recognition of this signal exactly one time slice is output After that the SME waits for its trigger pulse again defined under TRIG DM SOUR Example SOUR POCS TACT MESS RST value is MESSage 1038 6002
455. o 511 not SCPI 3 60 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation TIME 00 00 to 23 59 not SCPI 3 60 SOURce FLEX STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 55 SOURce FLEX STATe AUTO ON OFF not SCPI 3 55 SOURce FLEX TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE not SCPI 3 60 SOURce FM1 2 DEViation 0 to 1 MHz 3 61 SME03 03E 0 to 2 MHz SMEO6 0 to 4 MHz SOURce FM1 2 EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC 3 61 SOURce FM1 2 INTernal FREQuency 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or 3 62 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz SOURce FM1 2 PREemphasis 0 50 us 75 us 3 62 SOURce FM1 2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal1 EXTernal2 3 62 SOURce FM1 2 STATe ON OFF 3 62 1038 6002 02 8C 7 E 12 List of Commands SME Command Parameter SCPI Page info SOURce FREQuency CENTer 5 kHz to1 5 GHz 3 63 SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce F REQuency MANual 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 3 64 SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep LIST 3 64 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 to 50 GHz 3 64 SOURce FREQuency SPAN 0 to 1 5 GHz 3 64 SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce FREQuency STARt 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 3 64 SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement 0 to 1 GHz 3 65 SOURce FREQuency STOP 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 3 65 SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed 5 kHz to1 5 GHz 3 63 SME03E 0
456. o not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The temperature of the environment must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the data sheet Batteries and storage batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire Keep batteries and storage batteries away from children If batteries or storage batteries are improperly replaced this can cause an explosion warning lithium cells Replace the battery or storage battery only with the 1171 0000 42 02 00 28 29 30 31 32 33 matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see spare parts list Batteries and storage batteries are hazardous waste Dispose of them only in specially marked containers Observe local regulations regarding waste disposal Do not short circuit batteries or storage batteries Please be aware that in the event of a fire toxic substances gases liquids etc that may be hazardous to your health may escape from the product Please be aware of the weight of the product Be careful when moving it otherwise you may injure your back or other parts of your body Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves Handles on the products are designed exclus
457. o random sequence generator and an internal data generator are available as data source for the basic modulations Note The signal generator SME42 Id No 1038 6002 42 is a special model for ERMES FLEX FLEX TD and POCSAG The options SME B11 DM coder SME B12 DM expanded memory SME B41 FLEX protocol and SME B42 POCSAG protocol have been integrated in the SME42 as standard Only the command MGRoup and the commands of node SOURce DM COMPlex are available when using the SME42 Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce DM Option SME B11 MGRoup Query only BASic TYPE GMSK GFSK QPSK FSK FSK4 FFSK STATe ON OFF SOURce EXTernal PRBS DATA CLOCk MODE BIT SYMBol POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce INTernal COUPled DATA CATalog Query only DELete Name ALL FREE Query only SELect Name DATA 0 1 0 1 POINts Query only ATTenuate 0 1 0 1 POINts Query only BURSt 0 1 0 1 POINts Query only ALEVel 0 to 60 dB dB MODE NORM MAX OFF Option SME B12 STARt 1 to 8388478 1 to 1048558 LENGth 3 to 8388480 3 to 1048560 AUTO ON OFF MODE DATA ALL RECord No query TRIGger ON OFF SLOPe POSitive NEGative PRBS LENGth 9 15 20 21 23 1038 6002 02 3 34 13 1038 6002 02 1 5 2 0 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5 kHz 0 05 to 90 kb s 3 35 SME SOURce DM Command Parameter Default Unit Remark SOURce DM Option SME B11 COMPlex
458. o the instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command The value of POINts depends on SPAN and STEP according to the following formulas The following is true for linear sweeps POINts SPAN STEP LIN 1 The following is true for logarithmic sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log START log 1 STEP LOG Two independent POINts values are used for SPACing LOG and SPACing LIN l e before POINts is changed SPACing must be set correctly A change of POINts results in an adaptation of STEP but not of STARt STOP and SPAN Example SOUR SWE POIN 100 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency SPACing LINear LOGarithmic The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings Example SOUR2 SWE SPAC LIN RST value is LlNear SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LiNear 0 to 1 GHz The command sets the step width with the linear sweep If STEP LINear is changed the value of POINts valid for SPACing LINear also changes according to the formula stated under POINts A change of SPAN does not result in a change of STEP LlNear Keyword LINear can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulations see example Example SOUR SWE STEP 1MHz RST value is 1 MHz SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 50 PCT The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated accor
459. ode DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt The commands which can be used to query all counters in the instrument are under this node Cycle COunt DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt ATTenuator 1 2 3 4 5 6 The command queries the number of switching processes of the different attenuator stages The stages are designated with Z1 to Z6 within the instrument In this command they are differentiated by a numeric suffix whose name corresponds to the number Suffix Name Function Z1 40 dB stage Z2 20 dB stage Z3 5 dB stage A 4 Z4 20 dB stage 5 Z5 10 dB stage 6 Z6 40 dB stage Example DIAG INFO CCO ATT1 Response 1487 1038 6002 02 3 21 E 13 DIAGnostic SME DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer The command queries the number of switch on processes Example DIAG INFO CCO POW Response 258 DIAGnostic INFO MODules The command queries the modules existing in the instrument with their model and state of modification numbers The response supplied is a list in which the different entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the equipment of the instrument Each entry consists of three parts which are separated by means of blanks 1 Name of module 2 Variant of module in the form VarXX XX 2 digits 3 Revision of module in the form RevXX XX 2 digits Example DIAG INFO MOD Response FRO Var01 Rev00 DSYN Var03 Rev12 to DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe The command reads out the inter
460. oes not make any difference between upper case and lower case letters The parameter must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma A few queries permit the parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered For a description of the types of parameter refer to Section 3 5 5 Example SOURce POWer ATTenuation MAXimum Response 60 This query requests the maximal value for the attenuation If a device features several functions or features of the same kind e g inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the com mand Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Example SOURce FM EXTernal2 COUPling AC This command sets the coupling of the second external signal source 3 7 E 13 Structure and Syntax of the Messages SME 3 5 3 Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by a lt New Line gt a lt New Line with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce POWer CENTer MINimum OUTPut ATTenuation 10 This command line contains two commands
461. of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus short command SYST MSEQ DEL MSEQ2 Selection of the editor functions to process a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus short command SYST MSEQ 9 2 SYST MSEQ DWEL 50ms 50ms 2 150 E 13 SME Memory Sequence The second page of menu MEM SEQ the EDIT page is automatically activated if one of the editor functions of the FUNCTION line is selected The list which is entered as CURRENT LIST in the SELECT LIST line is shown 100 000 000 0 30 0 cx FREQUENCY SELECT LIST CURRENT MSEQ1 LEVEL FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW ODULATION INDEX FREE 2041 LEN 2055 MEMORY DWELL DIGITAL MOD 09 LF OUTPUT 002 02 SWEEP 003 01 LIST 004 23 MEM SEQ 005 09 UTILITIES 006 10 HELP 007 08 008 11 Fig 2 62 Menu MEM SEQ EDIT page INDEX Index of the list FREE Indication of the list entries still vacant LEN Length of the current list MEMORY Parameter number of memory location range 1 to 50 DWELL Parameter dwell time specified range 50 ms to 60 sec step width 1 ms 1038 6002 02 2 151 E 13 Utilities SME 2 11 Utilities The UTILITIES menu contains submenus for general functions which do not directly relate to the signal generation 2 11 1 IEC Bus Address SYSTEM GPIB Submenu SYSTEM GPIB offers access to the remote con
462. of the generator are tested after the instrument has warmed up for at least 30 minutes and a total calibration has been carried out c f Section 2 11 8 Calibration This is the only way to make sure that the guaranteed data are observed The values in the following sections are not guaranteed only the technical data in the data sheet are binding 5 2 1 Display and Keyboard Testing Display Switch on instrument The basic menu is displayed after several seconds gt Rotate contrast control left hand potentiometer at the lower edge The contrast is varied from dark to bright gt Rotate brightness control right hand potentiometer at the lower edge The brightness of the background illumination is varied Press keys and check response at the display Keyboard 5 2 2 Frequency Setting Test equipment Frequency counter Section 5 1 item 1 Test principle The frequency setting is checked using a frequency counter whose reference frequency is synchronized with the one of the SME Measurement Setting at the SME Test frequency unmodulated Level 0 dBm The values measured must be exact within the frame of the counter resolution Test frequencies see table 5 2 recommended Table 5 2 shows the synthesis dependent changeover limits In order to fully test the function of the instrument we recommend measurements at these range limits Table 5 2a Changeover limits of the SME ome oom Range from to Doubler1 SME
463. olarity of the signal can be set the UTILITIES AUX I O BLANK POLARITY menu MARKER At the first step of the LIST mode this output provides an approx 200 us trigger signal immediately after blanking At small DWELL times this signal can be used for an accurate synchronization to trigger other devices and shows the first stable output frequency The delay to the fed in signal at the TRIGGER input for EXT SINGLE or EXT STEP is 1 5 to 2 ms and has a jitter of 0 5 ms 1038 6002 02 2 144 E 13 SME LIST Mode A TRIGGER input BLANK output MARKER output Frequency Y A Fig 2 58 Signal example LIST mode MODE EXT STEP The LIST menu offers access to settings for the LIST mode Menu selection LIST FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT SINGLE EXT STEP LEVEL EXECUTE SINGLE LIST ODULATION RESET LIST DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT DWELL SWEEP CURRENT INDEX LIST LEARN p gt MEM SEQ UTILITIES SELECT LIST CURRENT LIST2 HELP DELETE LIST FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW Fig 2 59 Menu LIST OPERATION page MODE Selection of the operating mode cf Section 2 9 1 operating modes IEC bus short commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR SING EXECUTE SINGLE LIST gt Starts a single run of a list This menu option is only visible if MODE SINGLE is
464. om STATE OFF to STATE ON results in a recalculation of the telegram and its entry into the list XMEM Changing the ReFLEX parameters except for FRAME CONTENTS AUTO ADAPTATION MODE and CLOCK SOURCE requires a recalculation of data With radiocommunication service ReFLEX activated STATE ON the warning Signal output ReFLEX settings mismatch use RECALCULATE is displayed in this case The recalculation of data can either be effected by switchover to STATE OFF STATE ON or by triggering RECALCULATE gt OFF Switches off ReFLEX IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 STAT ON Selection of used bit rate and modulation Four modulations are available 1600bps 2FSK 3200bps 2FSK 3200bps 4FSK and 6400bps 4FSK IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 MOD 1600 FSK2 Input value of frequency deviation of modulation The deviation specifies the spacing from the carrier to the two further placed symbols in 4FSK The ReFLEX25 standard specifies 2400Hz for this value which may be varied for testing IEC bus command SOUR REFL25 DEV 2 4kHz The parameters of this section permit to set the address of the receiver to be called define the useful data of the message and determine whether the receiver is to return a confirmation Note The category of a sent message does not have to be specified in this section It is rather determined by the selection of appropriate frames under FRAME CONTENTS Input value of the address of the receiver to b
465. omas de corriente los cables de extensi n o los enchufes de extensi n ya que esto pudiera causar fuego o golpes de corriente En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n de entrada de Ueff 30 V se deber tomar las precauciones debidas para impedir cualquier peligro por ejemplo medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc En caso de conexi n con aparatos de la t cnica inform tica se deber tener en cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de la EC950 EN60950 Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el producto est en funcionamiento Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar heridas fuego o dafios en el producto Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un lugar se deber primero conectar el conductor protector fijo con el conductor protector del aparato antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efecutadas por un electricista especializado 1171 0000 42 02 00 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 En caso de que los productos que son instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin protector implementado autointerruptor o similares objetos de protecci n deber la toma de corriente estar protegida de manera que los productos o los usuarios est n suficientemente protegidos Por favor no introduzca ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello en los orif
466. ommand RST sets this value to OFF the output is deactivated Example OUTP STAT ON RST value is OFF OUTPut STATe PON OFF UNCHanged This command selects the state the RF output is to assume after power on of the unit It only exists for the RF output RST does not influence the set value OFF Output is switched off UNCHanged Same state as before switch off Example OUTP PON OFF 1038 6002 02 3 27 E 13 OUTPut2 SME 3 6 10 OUTPut2 System This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the LF output socket Command Parameter Default Remark Unit OUTPut2 SOURce 0 2 Option SM B2 STEReo MPX PILot Option SM B6 STATe ON OFF Option SM B6 VOLTage 0Vto4V Y OUTPut2 SOURce 0 2 This command selects which LF generator is connected with the LF output socket only with option SM B2 and SM B6 0 LF generator 1 2 LF generator 2 RST value is 0 LF generator 1 is connected at the output Example OUTP2 SOUR 2 OUTPut2 SOURce STEReo MPX PILot The command determines whether the complete stereo multiplex signal MPX or only the pilot tone is output The command is only effective if LF generator2 is in the STEREO operating mode and if LF generator2 is selected for OUTPut2 SOURce as well Example OUTP2 SOUR STER MPX RST value is MPX OUTPut2 STATe ON OFF The command switches the LF output on or off RST value is OFF Example OUTP2 STAT ON OUTPut2 VOLTage OV to 4V
467. one another The influence is exerted in the following way e START frequency altered STOP unaltered CENTER START STOP 2 SPAN STOP START e STOP frequency altered START unaltered CENTER START STOP 2 SPAN STOP START e CENTER frequency altered SPAN unaltered START CENTER SPAN 2 STOP CENTER SPAN 2 e SPAN frequency altered CENTER unaltered START CENTER SPAN 2 STOP CENTER SPAN 2 1038 6002 02 2 134 E 13 SME Sweep 2 8 2 Selecting the Sweep Run SPACING LIN LOG The sweep run linear or logarithmic can be selected using SPACING For the RF and LF sweep a linear or logarithmic run is possible For level sweep only the logarithmic run is possible With the logarithmic sweep step width STEP is equal to a constant fraction of the present setting The logarithmic step width is entered in unit with RF or LF sweep in unit dB with level sweep 2 8 3 Operating Modes MODE The following sweep operating modes are available AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT SINGLE 1038 6002 02 Sweep from the starting point to the stop point with automatic restart at the starting point If another sweep operating mode was activated prior to the AUTO operating mode continuation is made from the current sweep setting cf Fig 2 52 IEC bus short commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR S
468. only possible using SOURce2 3 6 12 1 SOURce0 2 FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings in operating modes CW and SWEep Only command SOURce0 FREQuency CW FIXed is effective for the standard LF generator SOURce0 For LF generator2 SOURce2 sweep commands are effective as well Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce0 2 FREQuency CW FIXed 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or Hz 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Option SM B2 or B6 MANual 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz Option SM B2 or B6 MODE CW FIXed SWEep Option SM B2 or B6 STARt 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz Option SM B2 or B6 STOP 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz Option SM B2 or B6 1038 6002 02 3 109 E 13 SOURce0 2 FREQuency SOURce0 2 FREQuency CW FiXed 400 H SME z 1 kHz 3 kHz 15 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the frequency for the CW mode If neither SM B2 nor SM B6 are fitted the values 400 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz and 15 kHz are permissible for SOURceO With option SM with SM B6 from 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Example SOUR2 FREQ CW 1kHz SOURce0 2 FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz to 500 B2 values from 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz are permissible RST Wert is 1 kHz kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the frequency if SOURce2 SWEep MODe MANual and SOURce2 FREQuency MODe SWEep are set In thi S case only frequency values betwee
469. ontain message data After RST value no batch contains user data Example SOUR ERM SEQ DBAT A G H M P SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation The commands to set the sending system are under this node cf ERMES standard The data are part of every message sent SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation BAI ON OFF The command sets the Border Area Indicator Bit RST value is OFF Example SOUR ERM SI BAI ON 1038 6002 02 3 53 E 13 SOURce ERMes SME SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation ETI ON OFF The command sets the External Traffic Indicator Bit RST value is OFF Example SOUR ERM SI ETI ON SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation FSI 0 to 30 The command sets the Frequency Subset Indicator According to the standard one channel networks have an FSI of 30 RST value is 30 Example SOUR ERM SI FSI 20 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation DOMonth 1 to 31 The command sets the date day of month RST value is 1 Example SOUR ERM SI DOM 24 SOURce ERMes SI SINFormation TIME 00 00 to 23 59 The command sets the time RST value is 00 00 Example SOUR ERM SI TIME 12 00 SOURce ERMes TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE This command Trigger ACTion determines the action which is activated by a trigger event The valid trigger events are specified by command TRIGger DM SOURce This command also defines the allocation between manual and remote control operations MESSage A trigger event switches from filler
470. or The user can become familiar with the operation of the list editor by means of the following pattern setting in the MEM SEQ menu A list has to be generated and filled with values by using the single value function EDIT VIEW e Memory location number of the first element 20 Dwell time of the first element 15s Memory location number of the second element 1 When the setting has been terminated return to the OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu 1038 6002 02 2 35 E 13 List Editor SME At the beginning of the operation sequence menu MEM SEQ is called First a list MSEQO has to be generated and then activated The menu cursor marks a parameter of the setting menu on the OPERATION page c f Fig 2 14 100 000 000 0 z 30 0 FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT SINGLE EXT STEP LEVEL ODULATION RESET SEQUENCE DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ SELECT LIST CURRENT MSEQ2 UTILITIES DELETE LIST HELP FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW Fig 2 14 Starting point of the pattern setting Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select the SELECT LIST menu item SELECT LIST A new list MSEQO is generated The menu cursor is reset to SELECT LIST MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION CREATE NEW LIST MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select the FUNCTION menu it
471. or double pulse the following has to be true DOUBLE PULSE DELAY gt WIDTH 40 ns Menu MODULATION PULSE offers access to settings for pulse modulation and to the pulse generator If only option SM B3 pulse modulator is fitted only the first 3 lines are displayed in the setting menu Menu selection MODULATION PULSE pa A TS 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY EXT PULSE GEN LEVEL POLARITY NORM ODULATION EXT IMPEDANCE DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT PERIODE SWEEP WIDTH LIST PULSE DELAY MEM SEQ UTILITIES DOUBLE PULSE STATE HELP TRIGGER MODE EXT TRIG SLOPE Fig 2 31 Menu MODULATION PULSE preset setting fitted with option SM B3 pulse modulator and option SM B4 pulse generator 1038 6002 02 2 61 E 13 Analog Modulations SOURCE POLARITY EXT IMPEDANCE PERIOD WIDTH PULSE DELAY DOUBLE PULSE DELAY DOUBLE PULSE STATE TRIGGER MODE EXT TRIG SLOPE 1038 6002 02 SME Selection of the modulation source IEC bus command SOUR PULM SOUR INT STAT ON Selection of the polarity of the modulation NORM The signal is on during high level INV The RF signal is suppressed during high level IEC bus command SOUR PULM POL NORM Selection of the input resistance 50 O or 10 kQ IEC bus command SOUR PULM EXT IMP 50 Input value of the period
472. orm Example SOUR2 MARK AOFF SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix at MARKer to the frequency indicated RST value for MARK1 100kHz MARK2 10kHz Example SOUR2 MARK1 FREQ 9000 MARK3 1kHz SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the marker selected by the numeric suffix at MARKer Example SOUR2 MARK1 STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the marker signal as follows NORMal When running through the marker condition TTL level is applied at the marker output otherwise 0 V INVers When running through the marker condition O V is applied at the marker output otherwise TTL level RST value is NORM Example SOUR2 MARK1 POL INV 1038 6002 02 3 112 E 13 SME SOURce2 SWEep 3 6 12 4 SOURce2 SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the LF sweep of SOURce2 Sweeps are triggered on principle Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce2 Option SM B2 SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG FREQuency DWELI 1msto1s S MODE AUTO MANual STEP POINts Number SPACing LINear LOGarithmic STEP LINear 0 to 500 kHz Hz LOGarithmic 0 01 PCT to 50 PCT PCT SOURce2 SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG The command sets the blank time Blank TIMe of the sweep The setting is valid for all sweeps i e also
473. orresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el mbito de la comunidad econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n Por eso se debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por consecuencia dafios en personas u objetos Informaciones de seguridad elementales 1 El producto solamente debe ser utilizado 2 En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en seg n lo indicado por el fabricante referente cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de a la situaci n y posici n de funcionamiento trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes El sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se producto solamente debe de ser abierto por convino de otra manera es para los personal p rito autorizado Antes de efectuar productos R amp S v lido lo que sigue trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deber este como posici n de funcionamiento se define ser desconectado de la corriente El ajuste principialmente la posici n con el suelo de la el cambio de partes la manutenci n y la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X reparaci n deber n ser solamente grado de suciedad 2 categor a de efectuadas por
474. ossible Example SOUR ILS SOUR INT2 RST value is INT2 SOURce ILS TYPE GS GSLope LOCalizer The command switches over between the two components of the ILS method The configuration of the signals is effected under the respective node GSLope or LOCalizer GD GSLope Vertical component Glide Slope LOCalizer Horizontal component LOCalizer Example SOUR ILS TYPE GS RST value is GS SOURce ILS GS GSLope The commands to specify the characteristics of the glide slope signal are under this node Whether this signal is output however is determined by command SOURce ILS TYPE SOURce ILS GS GSLope MODE NORM ULOBe LLOBe The command specifies the type of the ILS GS signal generated NORM IL S GS signal ULOBe Upper LOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the SOURce ILS GS ULOBe FREQuency signal component generally 90 Hz of the ILS GS signal The modulation depth for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIR DOWN results from 90 2 0 5 ILS GS SODepth ILS GS DDM 100 and for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIR UP from 90 2 0 5 ILS GS SODepth ILS GS DDM 100 LLOBe Lower LOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the SOURce ILS GS LLOBe FREQuency signal component generally 150 Hz of the ILS GS signal The modulation depth for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIR DOWN results from 150 2 0 5 ILS GS SODepth ILS GS DDM 100 and for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIR UP from AM 150Hz 0 5
475. oubleshooting The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument However it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time 4 1 Maintenance 4 1 1 Cleaning the Outside The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft line free dustcloth Caution not use solvents such as thinners acetone and similar things in any case because otherwise the front panel labeling or plastic parts will be damaged 4 1 2 Storage The storage temperature range of the instrument is 40 to 70 degrees Celsius If the instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time it must be protected against dust 4 1 3 Exchange of the Lithium Batteries Caution The batteries used in the instrument are power lithium cells Short circuit and charging of the batteries have to be avoided at all costs as the batteries might ohterwise explode Do not open discharged batteries They have to be disposed of as hazardous waste The instrument contains a lithium battery for non volatile storage of data in the CMOS RAM The battery is located on the computer PCB Option SME B12 also contains a lithium battery for non volatile storage of the data in the 8 Mbit RAM if the instrument is switched off or if the option is removed The service life of these batteries depends on the operation and the ambient temperature it is 5 years on the average The battery voltages are chec
476. our support needs If you have any comments please email us and let us know CustomerSupport Feedback rohde schwarz com USA amp Canada Monday to Friday except US public holidays 8 00 AM 8 00 PM Eastern Standard Time EST Tel from USA 888 test rsa 888 837 8772 opt 2 From outside USA 1 410 910 7800 opt 2 Fax 1 410 910 7801 E mail Customer Support rsa rohde schwarz com East Asia Monday to Friday except Singaporean public holidays 8 30 AM 6 00 PM Singapore Time SGT Tel 65 6 513 0488 Fax 65 6 846 1090 E mail Customersupport asia rohde schwarz com Rest of the World Monday to Friday except German public holidays 8 00 17 00 central European Time CET Tel from Europe 49 0 180 512 42 42 From outside Europe 49 89 4129 13776 Fax 49 0 89 41 29 637 78 E mail CustomerSupport rohde schwarz com amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1007 8684 14 04 00 Supplement B to Operating Manual SIGNAL GENERATOR SME Correction of Data Sheet Number 757 0358 23 Models SME03 and SME03E Amplitude modulation AM distortion factor at 1 kHz Applies to levels lt 7dBm Model SME06 Instead of the values quoted in the data sheet the following specifications of the SMEO6 apply Amplitude modulation Modulation frequency response m 60 20 Hz DC to 50 7 lt 1 dB f lt 3GHz 20 Hz to 10 7 lt 1 dB f g
477. ource for the time base used are under this node SOURce DM BASic CLOCk MODE BIT SYMBol The command sets the clock operating mode Bit and symbol clock pulse are only different in the case of modulations possessing more than two states i e requiring more than one bit to code each state Hence the command only has an effect on QPSK and FSK4 BIT For each bit a complete clock cycle is executed SYMBol A complete clock cycle is executed for n bits each one symbol symbol clock pulse RST value is BIT Note This command is also used for reading data from the extended memory XMEM which is done either serially from the data list or in parallel from the data list together with the burst list Therefore if all symbols are stored in the data list in a 2 bit code each X and Y only BIT not SYMBol must be selected This implies also that the command DATA XMEM MODE DATA no ATTenuate and BURSI list available is inconsistent with DM CLOC MODE SYMBol when XMEM is used Example SOUR DM BAS CLOC MODE BIT 1038 6002 02 3 36 E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM BASic CLOCk POLarity NORMal INVerted The command sets the polarity of the time base used NORMal The data are accepted with a rising edge external clock or can be tapped at the DATA socket with a rising edge internal clock INVerted The data are accepted with a falling edge external clock or can be tapped at the DATA socket with a falling edge internal clock E
478. out Recommended bit pattern No Sequence Sequence length Start address LENGTH START ADDRESS 1 101 3 88 2 01010101011010 14 74 3 011101100101011 15 59 4 110011010001010 1 Measurement After completion of this test XMEM is set so that the fourth sequence is cyclically repeated and GFSK modulated and appears at the RF Interplay between output gt Check the spectrum at the RF output according to the following table The levels refer to the carrier level with the modulation switched off XMEM and DM coder Offset frequency 72 kHz 0 2 6 8 2 4 6 8 Level dB 3 dB 12 3 Measurement Battery back up gt The unit has to be switched off for at least 10 seconds and then to be switched on again The above mentioned spectrum has to be measured 1038 6002 02 5 42 E 13 SME Test Procedure 5 2 40 2 Dibit Synchronization For modulations QPSK and 4FSK a symbol is coded with two successive bits dibit i e the X bit and the Y bit The X bit is at the beginning of the sequence at the START ADDRESS as per definition To ensure this allocation the DM coder and XMEM have to be synchronized when the modulation is switched on Measurement gt gt gt 5 2 40 3 External Triggering Read in bit pattern No 3 in the XMEM via IEC IEEE bus as described in the previous section Settings at the SME Level 0 dBm RF frequency 900 MHz in menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK SOURCE DATA CLOCK MODE BIT SELECT LIST XMEM
479. output OPU1 at output SME03E at output OPU3 SME03 at output OPU6 SME06 9 362 500 1 MHz 1500 000 000 1 MHz 1500 000 000 1 MHz 1500 000 000 1 MHz 1500 000 000 0 MHz 2297 200 000 0 MHz 3000 000 000 0 MHz 6000 000 000 0 MHz 1038 6002 02 5 7 E 13 Test Procedure 5 2 3 Settling Time Test equipment Test principle Test setup Preparing measurement 1038 6002 02 SME Spectrum analyzer with video output Section 5 1 item 2 Storage oscilloscope Section 5 1 item 3 Controller Section 5 1 item 4 The spectrum analyzer is operated as an edge demodulator with a 0 Hz span A controller transmits starting and stop frequency via the IEC bus The storage oscilloscope is connected to the video output of the analyzer and triggered by the positive edge on the EOI line of the IEC bus If the controller switches over from the starting to the stop frequency the settling procedure is displayed on the screen of the storage oscilloscope IEC bus 10 MHz reference _ A e Controller dEl e SME e mu a e mE RF Analyzer al Video Oscilloscope gt Synchronize the reference frequencies of SME and analyzer gt Establish IEC bus and RF connections gt Connect storage oscilloscope to the video output of the analyzer gt Apply trigger connection to the EOl line p
480. pace X O A space AUTO ON OFF MODulation 1600 FSK2 3200 FSK2 3200 FSK4 6400 FSK4 PHASe A B C D AB AC AD BC BD CD ABC ABD ACD BCD ABCD AUTO ON OFF MESSage CAPCode AO 000 001 to 999 999 999 CATegory ALPHanumeric SECure BINary NUMeric ALPHanumeric SELect CATalog DATA BINary SELect BLENgth CATalog DATA DDIRection MNUMbering MDRop NUMeric REPeats TONE SI SINFormation COLLapse DATE LCHannel TIME CZONe TACTion 1038 6002 02 SNUMeric TONE FOX ALPHA USER1 to 4 Alphanumeric data Name 1 to 16 041 0 1 LEFT RIGHt ON OFF ON OFF string 0to3 0to7 0to7 Year month day 0 to 511 00 00 to 23 59 0 to 31 MESSage STARt ONCE 3 55 Query only Query only E 13 SOURce FLEX SME SOURce FLEX STATe ON OFF The command switches the FLEX signal on all other activated DM modulations are switched off In contrast to ERMES the RF frequency is not changed Every switchover from OFF to ON results in a recalculation of the memory extension data and their entry into the list XMEM if FLEX STATe AUTO is set to ON Every change of a FLEX parameter except for FLEX FCONtent requires a recalculation of data ie after every parameter change STATe OFF has to be briefly activated Example SOUR FLEX STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce FLEX STATe AUTO ON OFF The com
481. pin assignment corresponds to the pin assignment of a PC 1038 6002 02 2 15 Input for external reference frequency with Output SYNC signal with pulse modulation Output video signal with pulse modulation Rear Panel See as well Section 2 11 5 Reference Frequency Int Ext See as well Section 2 6 2 5 Pulse Modulation See as well Section 1 1 1 Supply Voltage Section Section 1 1 3 Switching On Off the Instrument See as well Chapter 3 Remote Control E 13 ARK X AXIS M Rear panel view Fig 2 2 E 13 2 16 1038 6002 02 Edo 1EC625 IEEE488 EXT1 21 1038 6002 02 IEC 625 IEEE 488 EXT2 EXT1 RF IEC Bus IEEE 488 See as well Chapter 3 Remote control interface Remote Control input at the front to the rear of the Cut out provided to relocate the EXT2 instrument i Cut out provided to relocate the EXT1 input at the front to the rear of the instrument Cut out provided to relocate the RF output at the front to the rear of the instrument 2 17 E 13 Display 2 2 Operating Concept 2 2 1 Display x FREQ 100 000 000 0 z 90 0 om 2 FREQUENCY FM1 DEVIATION LEVEL FM1 SOURCE LFGEN1 EXT1 2 MODULATION LFGEN1 FREQ 0 4k lk 3k 15k Hz 3 DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP FM2 DEVIATION FM2 SOURCE LFGEN2 FREQ
482. ple SOUR FLEX MESS CAT NUM RST value is TONE SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanumeric SECure This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the alphanumeric and the secured messages There is one common character set for the two types of messages These commands can only be activated if FLEX MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric SECure is selected 1038 6002 02 3 58 E 13 SME SOURce FLEX SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanumeric SELect FOX ALPHA USER1 USER2 USERS USER4 This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the alohanumeric and the secured messages There is one common character set for the two types of messages These commands can only be activated if FLEX MESSage CATegory ALPHanumeric or SECure is selected FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD to complete FLEX character set USER1 to 4 Four messages that can be freely edited by command AL PHanumeric DATA Example SOUR FLEX MESS ALPH SEL FOX RST value is USER3 SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanumeric CATalog The command queries the alphanumeric and secured alphanumeric messages available It causes a list to be returned on which the entries are separated by commas The command is a query command and thus has no RST value Example SOUR FLEX MESS ALPH CAT Answer FOX ALPHA USER1 SOURce FLEX MESSage ALPHanum
483. quence After the function has been executed the input window is automatically exited The menu cursor marks FUNCTION The EDIT page shows the beginning of the range that has moved forward 1038 6002 02 2 34 E 13 SME List Editor Block function DELETE Function DELETE deletes the elements of the range indicated This does not leave a gap in the list but the remaining elements move forward If the given range exceeds the end of the list deletion until the end of the list is effected Input is analog to filling a list By pressing the RETURN key the input window is exited without a modification being carried out The menu cursor then marks FUNCTION Selection FUNCTION DELETE 100 000 000 0 ever 30 0 cen ENCY SELECT LIST 10 RANGE 2 FUNCTION LATION INDEX FREE 2041 LEN 2055 EXECUTE gt GITAL MOD 0001 OUTPUT 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 Fig 2 13 Edit function DELETE Input window DELETE AT Input of the block of the list to be deleted AT Lower limit INDEX RANGE Number of elements to be deleted EXECUTE 3 Starts the deletion After the function has been executed the input window is automatically exited The menu cursor marks FUNCTION The EDIT page shows the beginning of the range that has moved forward 2 2 4 4 Pattern Setting to Operate the List Edit
484. quency of 10 MHz is available at the REF socket rear of the instrument Signal level Ves EMF sine 1 V The frequency of the internal reference oscillator can be detuned via the TUNE input rear of the instrument Input voltage range 10 V pulling range 1x10 The external detuning is possible in both states of the ADJUSTMENT STATE ON or OFF unless option SM B1 reference oscillator OCXO is fitted If option SM B1 reference oscillator OCXO is fitted the detuning via the TUNE input is only possible if the ADJUSTMENT STATE selection has been switched to ON in the UTILITIES REF OSC menu In the external reference operating mode an external signal at a frequency of 1 MHz to 16 MHz spacing 1 MHz is to be fed into socket REF The setting to external frequency is effected in the UTILITIES REF OSC menu Signal level Ver 0 1 to 2 V The message EXT REF is displayed in the status line in the header field of the display in the external reference operating mode Menu selection UTILITIES REF OSC AA a 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL MODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP SYSTEM REF OSC PHASE PROTECT CALIB DIAG TEST MOD KEY AUX I O BEEPER INSTALL EXT FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT STATE FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT Fig 2 66 SOURCE 1038 6002 02 Menu UTILITIES REF OSC
485. quired skills If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Symbols and safety labels l 4 ion Observe Weight Danger of Warning Giound ae operating indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground terminal sensitive instructions units gt 18 kg shock surface devi evices lO rn E Device fully Te Standby eae Alternating Direct alternating protected by NOE indication DC current AC current DC AC double reinforced insulation 1171 0000 42 02 00 Sheet 1 Safety Instructions Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde amp Schwarz including instruments systems and all accessories Tags and their meaning DANGER This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the user that can result in death or serious injuries WARNING This tag indicates a safety hazard
486. r Example A semicolon is missing after the command Data type error The command contains an invalid value indication Example ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET is within a command line Parameter not allowed The command contains too many parameters Example Command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency permits only one frequency indication 1038 6002 02 7B 1 11 List of Error Messages SME Continuation Command Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Missing parameter The command contains too few parameters Example Command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency requires a frequency indication 109 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than 12 signs 112 Undefined header The header is not defined for the instrument Example xvz is undefined for every instrument 113 Header suffix out of range The header contains an impermissible numeric suffix Example SOURce3 does not exist in the instrument 114 Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent is larger than 32000 123 Too many digits The number contains too many digits 124 Numeric data not allowed The command contains a number which is not allowed at this position Example Command SOURce FREQuency MODE requires the indication of a text parameter 128 The suffix is invalid
487. r 1 are permissible The data can also be transmitted as block data 8 bit data each are combined to form a byte with the first bit date having to be saved in the most significant bit of the first data byte The following examples of commands are equal If the data are to be returned as block data this has to be set in the FORMat system In the case of binary block transmission only lists with a length of integral multiples of 8 can be loaded when the data are returned the last byte is filled if necessary RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA DATA 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 SOUR DM BAS DATA DATA 413aX s a block data in chap Parameter SOURce DM BASic DATA DATA POINts This command queries the length in bits of the DATA list presently selected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR DM BAS DATA DATA POIN Answer 200 SOURce DM BASic DATA ATTenuate 0 1 0 1 This command transmits the bit edgedata the data generator uses for the decision of whether the level is to be reduced or not See SOURce DM BAS DATA ALEVel as well List XMEM DM memory extension can be written into with ATTenuate data if DM BAS DATA XMEM MODE is set to ALL Only numbers 0 or 1 are permissible The data can also be transmitted as block data cf DATA RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA A i715152050750 05543
488. r an RST value Short command Command sequence DM FSK4 STANdard ERMes DM FSK4 BRAT 6 25 kb s DM FS FILTer BESSel 1 25 DEViation 4 68756kHz DM FS DM FSK4 STANdard DM FSK4 BRAT 9 6 kb s DM FSKA FILTer COS 0 2 DM FSK4 DEViation 1 800kHz DM FSK4 STANdard MODacom DM FSK4 BRAT 9 6 kb s DM FSKA FILTer SCOS 0 2 DM FSK4 DEViation 2 0kHz DM FSK4 STANdard FLEX3200 DM FSK4 BRAT 3 2 kb s DM FSKA FILTer BESSel 1 22 DM FSK4 DEViation 4 8kHz DM FSK4 STANdard FLEX6400 DM FSK4 BRAT 6 4 kb s DM FSKA FILTer BESSel 2 44 DM FSK4 DEViation 4 8kHz Example SOUR DM FSK4 STAN ERM SOURce DM FSK4 BRATe 1 to 24 3 kb s 27 0 to 48 6 kb s The command sets the bit rate for the modulation Example SOUR DM FSK4 BRAT 6 25 kb s RST value is 6 25 kb s 1038 6002 02 3 48 E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM FSK4 CODing ERMes APCO MODacom FLEX The command specifies according to which standard the coding between binary data and generated signal is performed Example SOUR DM FSK4 COD ERM RST value is ERMes SOURce DM FSK4 DEViation 0 01 to 400 kHz This command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation Example SOUR DM FSK4 DEV 4 6875kHz RST value is 4687 5 SOURce DM FSK4 FiLTer BESSel 1 22 1 25 2 44 COS SCOS 0 2 This command selects the filter of the modulation Example SOUR DM FSK4 FILT COS 0 2 RST value i
489. ra los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso de los productos hace necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma ingl s Por eso se deber tener en cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas p ritas o debidamente minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de R amp S encontrar la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente S mbolos y definiciones de seguridad a jCuidado Informaciones Ver manual z Elementos de para Peligro de iAdvertencia Conexi n a Conexi n DE de E ys Conexi n construci n maquinaria golpe de Superficie conductor a masa instrucciones a tierra con peligro de con uns peso corriente caliente protector conductora del uso carga de gt 18kg electroestatica El aparato esta 7 c Corriente s Corriente protegido en su potencia EN Indicacion continua continua alterna totalidad por un MARCHA PARADA Stand by alterna DC AC aislamiento de doble refuerzo 1171 0000 42 02 00 p gina 1 Informaciones de seguridad Tener en cuenta
490. reates it i e this command can be used to generate new lists Example SYST MSEQ SEL SEQA SYSTem PRESet The command triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the RESET key of the manual control or as command RST This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SYST PRES SYSTem PROTect1 2 3 The commands to disable certain instrument functions are under this node A list of the functions concerned can be found in the manual control Section Password Input With Protected Functions There are three protection levels which are differentiated by means of a suffix after PROTect RST has no effects on the disabling enabling of the instrument functions 1038 6002 02 3 120 E 13 SME SYSTem SYSTem PROTect1 2 3 STATe ON OFF password The command switches a protection level on or off The passwords are 6 digit numbers They are fixedly stored in the firmware The password for the first level is 123456 ON disables the functions belonging to this protection level A password need not be indicated OFF deactivates the disabling again if the correct password is indicated Otherwise an error 224 Illegal parameter value is generated and STATe remains ON Example SYST PROT1 STAT OFF 123456 SYSTem SECurity The commands setting the security characteristics of the instrument are under this node SYSTem SECurity STATe ON OFF The command switches the security s
491. rection is switched on the LEVEL indication is completed by the indication UCOR User Correction in the header field of the display The RF output level is the sum of both values LEVEL UCOR output level If the offset setting is used at the same time the LEVEL indication value is the difference of the input values AMPLITUDE and OFFSET of the menu LEVEL AMPLITUDE OFFSET LEVEL The user correction is effective in all operating modes if switched on Menu selection LEVEL UCOR AAA AAA 100 000 0000 an FREQUENCY STATE LEVEL ODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP SELECT LIST CURRENT UCOR1 DELETE LIST FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW Fig 2 21 Menu LEVEL UCOR OPERATION side 1038 6002 02 2 47 E 13 RF Level SME STATE Switching on off user correction IEC bus command SOUR CORR ON SELECT LIST Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus command SOUR CORR CSET UCOR1 DELETE LIST Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus command SOUR CORR CSET DEL UCOR2 FUNCTION Selection of the editing mode to process the selected list IEC bus commands SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100 MHz 102 MHz SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 8dB 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SELECT
492. register Setting of this bit implies a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS Bit Master Status Summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE 7 OPERation status register sum bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by polling the OPERation status register 1038 6002 02 3 136 E 13 SME Fast Restore Modus 3 8 3 2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE By analogy with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be queried by means of a parallel poll cf Section 3 8 4 3 or using command IST The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The Ist flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using commands PRE and read using command PRE 3 8 3 3 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with th
493. requency SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel BASE 0 to 8191 MHz This command sets the base frequency of forward channel RST value is 929 MHz Example SOUR REFL25 SI FCH BASE 81 MHz SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation FCHannel ANUMber 0 to 2047 This command sets the assignment number of forward channel This is not the logic channel number Example SOUR REFL25 SI FCH ANUM 204 RST value is 1 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation RCHannel Together with REFL25 SI FSPacing the commands under this node specify the frequency of the reverse channel from the receiver to the transmitter SME The following formula is valid in this case FREQ REFL25 SI RCH BASE REFL25 SI RCH ANUM REFL25 SI FSPacing The preset values for the following parameters are selected such that the default value of 896 0125 MHz defined in the ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as frequency SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation RCHannel BASE 0 to 8191 MHz This command sets the base frequency of reverse channel RST value is 896 MHz Example SOUR REFL25 ST RCH BASE 550 MHz SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation RCHannel ANUMber 0 to 204 This command sets the assignment number of reverse channel RST value is 2 Example SOUR REFL25 S8I RCH ANUM 204 1038 6002 02 3 96 E 13 SME SOURce REFLex25 SOURce REFLex25 SI SINFormation RCHannel SPEed 800 1600 6400 9600 bps
494. ressed during the pulse Example SOUR PULM POL INV RST value is NORMal SOURce PULM SOURce EXTernal INTernal The command selects the source of the modulating signal INTernal Internal pulse generator option SM B4 EXTernal Signal fed externally RST value is INTernal Example SOUR PULM SOUR INT SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the pulse modulation RST value is OFF Example SOUR PULM STAT ON 1038 6002 02 3 91 E 13 SOURce PULSe SME 3 6 11 17 SOURce PULSe Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the pulse generator option SM B4 The pulse generation is triggered on principle with the trigger certainly being able to be set to free run using TRIGger PULSe SOURce AUTO as well The pulse modulation option SM B3 is set in the SOURce PULM subsystem Command Parameter Default Unit Remark SOURce PULSe Option SM B4 DELay 40nsto1s DOUBle DELay 60 nsto1s STATe ON OFF PERiod 100 ns to 85 s WIDTh 20 15 SOURce PULSe DELay 40 1s The command specifies the time from the start of the period to the first edge of the pulse Due to the construction of the instrument this parameter is set to 0 if SOURce PULSe DOUBle STATe is set to ON The old value is activated again as soon as the double pulse has been switched off Example SOUR PULS DEL 10us RST value is 1 us SOURce PULSe DOUBle The commands to check the second pulse
495. rface Bus SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 to 30 The command sets the IEC bus instrument address RST value is 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 1 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial The command to set the serial interface are under this node The data format is fixedly set to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit These values cannot be changed The device represents a DTE Data Terminal Equipment in relation to the serial interface Therefore the the controller must be connected via a 0 modem SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 The commands sets the baud rate for both the transmit and the receive direction RST has no influnence on this parameter Example SYST COMM SER BAUD 1200 RST value is 9600 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR he commands sets the hardware handshake RST has no influence on this parameter ON Interface line RTS is always active IBFull RFR Input Buffer Full Ready For Receiving Interface line RTS remains active as long as the instrument is ready to receive data Example SYST COMM SER CONT RTS ON RST value is RFR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PACE XON NONE The command sets the software handshake RST has no influnence on this parameter XON Software handshake using the ASCII codes 11h XON and 13h XOFF Note This mode is not recommended for binary data and for baud rates above 9600 bauas NONE No software handsha
496. riggering is effected by means of IEC bus commands TRIGger SWEep IMMediate or TRG If SOURce SWEep MODE is set to STEP a step in the case of the AUTO setting a complete sweep is executed EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the EXT TRIG socket or by the GET command via IEC IEEE bus see annex A The action triggered depends on the setting of the sweep mode as in the case of SINGle Example TRIG SWE SOUR AUTO RST value is SINGle TRIGger DM The commands for the autorun control of digital modulations are under this is node These commands are only valid for TRIGger1 TRIGger DM IMMediate In case of basic digital modulations this command immediately starts the processing of the data list of the DM data generator The command acts on the type of modulation presently set using SOURce DM TYPE In case of complex digital modulations FLEX ERMes POCSag the command immediately triggers the action set using TACTion Trigger ACTion in the subsystem of the corresponding modulation It corresponds to the EXECUTE SINGLE command of the manual control in the associated DIGITAL MOD menu This command is an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG DM IMM TRIGger DM SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal The command specifies the valid trigger events See following table for effect on complex modulations AUTOThe trigger condition is always fulfilled In case of basic digital modulations the
497. rn to 0 Example SOUR SWE BTIM LONG RST value is NORM SOURce SWEep FREQuency The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node Keyword FREQuency can be omitted cf examples The commands are SCPI compatible then unless stated otherwise SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s The command sets the dwell time per frequency step Example SOUR SWE DWEL 12ms RST value is 15 ms 1038 6002 02 3 103 E 13 SOURce SWEep SME SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTOEach trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle MANual Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOURce FREQuency MANual command the trigger system is not active The frequency increases or decreases depending on the direction of the shaft encoder by the value indicated under SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The frequency increases by the value indicated under SOURce SWEep STEP LOGarithmic Example SOUR SWE MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts Number The command determines the number of steps in a sweep Instead of this command commands SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear SOURCe SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic should be used as SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts has been adapted t
498. ro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario est comprometido a valorar y se alar areas de trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de exposici n a radiaciones aumentadas de riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos La utilizaci n de los productos requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n en el manejo Debe de ponerse por seguro de que las personas que manejen los productos est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios referente a sus aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo de los productos Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber tener por seguro de que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a la del la red de distribuci n Si es necesario cambiar la preselecci n de la tensi n tambi n se deber n en caso dabo cambiar los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto Productos de la clase de seguridad con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual de producto solamente deber n ser conectados para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente de contacto de seguridad y con conductor protector conectado Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupci n intencionada del conductor protector tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto ya que puede tener como consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente
499. rovided that its pager collapse value is not below 7 With the value 0 the pager receives messages in any frame RST value is 4 Example SOUR FLEX SI COLL 4 SOURce FLEX SI SINFormation ROAMing OFF SSID NID ALL The command indicates Activating Deactivating generation of roaming information in the telegram sent OFF None the roaming bits in the frame information word have the value 0 SSID BIWOOO for all frames each in one phase BIW111 in the first four frames each in one phase NID NID in all frames which comply with the formula specified in the FLEX standard The cycle value is however fixed to the value of START IN CYCLE consists of a network address and a short message vector no BIW and no message body is generated ALL All the information of NID and SSID together If ROAMING is not set to OFF the following additional information is included in the telegram TIME INFO a BIW010 in phases 0 and 2 of frame 0 and a BIW001 in phases 1 and of frame 0 As the SME is not able to differentiate between cycles the contents of the phases does not rotate over both BIWs moreover no BIW001 is sent for 1600 bps because only one phase is present CHANNEL SETUP INSTRUCTION in one phase in each of the first four frames for 1600 bps not in the first frame as there is no space consists of a BIW101 has no address no vector and no message body SYSTEM EVENT NOTIFICATION starting from frame 0 for a collapse cycle
500. s They are provided for service purposes and should not be used by the user Improper use of the commands may damage the module Command Parameter Default Remark Unit TEST DIRect ATTC Subaddress hex data string DCOD Subaddress hex data string DSYNOMUX Subaddress hex data string DSYN1MUX Subaddress hex data string FMOD Subaddress hex data string LFGENA Subaddress hex data string LFGENB Subaddress hex data string MGEN Subaddress hex data string OPU1M Subaddress hex data string OPU3M Subaddress hex data string OPU6M Subaddress hex data string PUM Subaddress hex data string REFSS Subaddress hex data string ROSC Subaddress hex data string SUM Subaddress hex data string RAM Query only ROM Query only Query only BATTery RAM Query only BATTery XMEM TEST DIRect This node contains the commands directly acting on the respective hardware module circumventing any security mechanisms The commands under this node have no short form TEST DIRect SUM Subaddress hex data string The command directly acts on module SUM A subaddress 0 or 1 must be indicated as a parameter The data are indicated as a string an ASCII character string enclosed in quotation marks representing hexadecimal numbers Thus characters 0 to 9 A to F may occur in the character string Example ITEST DIR SUM 0 0010AF1F Query ITEST DIR SUM 0 TEST DIRect ATTC Subaddress hex data string
501. s BESSel 1 25 SOURce DM FSK4 POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the modulation NORMal A 0 from the data source reduces the frequency 1 increases it INVerted 1 from the data source reduces the frequency 0 increases it Example SOUR DM FSK4 POL INV RST value is NORMal SOURce DM FFSK The commands to check the two stage modulation FFSK are under this node An LF signal is FSK modulated and then serves as an input signal for an FM modulation of the actual carrier SOURce DM FFSK STANdard POCSag This short form command sets parameter shown in the table to the value specified by the standard cf table The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table Hence it neither has a query form nor an RST value Short command Command sequence DM FSK4 STANdard POCSag DM FFSK DEViation 4 5 kHz Example SOUR DM FFSK STAN POCS SOURce DM FFSK BRATe 0 05 to 90 kb s This command sets the bit rate of the modulation Example SOUR DM FFSK BRAT 2400 RST value is 1200 b s SOURce DM FFSK DEViation 1 5 kHz 2 0 kHz 3 0 kHz 3 5 kHz 4 0 kHz 4 5 kHz The command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation RST value is 4 5 kHz Example SOUR DM FFSK DEV 100kHz 1038 6002 02 3 49 E 13 SOURce ERMes 3 6 11 4 SOURce ERMes Subsystem SME This subsystem contains the commands to set the ERMES signal ERMES uses a 4FSK modulation The para
502. s case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message displayed In the RF range 93 75 MHz to 130 MHz a different synthesis range is selected depending on the deviation set If the deviation is smaller than 0 625 rad the synthesizer is in the division range with optimal spectral purity If the deviation set is larger than 0 625 rad the extended heterodyne band is automatically selected maximal 40 PM deviation rad 20 T extended 10 TF heterodyne band 2 5 1 25 0 625 7 0 005 93 75 130 187 5 375 750 1500 3000 6000 RF frequency MHz Fig 2 28 Dependency of the PM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set 1038 6002 02 2 59 E 13 Analog Modulations SME 2 6 2 5 Pulse Modulation The pulse modulator can be controlled by an external source as well as by the internal pulse generator In the case of external control the external source directly feeds the pulse modulator The envelope of the RF is identical to the control signal In the case of control by the internal pulse generator the pulse form of the pulse generator determines the envelope of the RF Pulse delay pulse width and period can be set The polarity of the pulse modulation is selectable With POLARITY NORM the RF level is on with HIGH level at modulation input PULSE The input resistance is selectable between 50 Q and 10 kQ 2 6 2 5 1 Pulse Generator As a
503. s effected immediately The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO see annex A in order to prevent unintentional switchover In this case switchover to manual mode is only possible via the IEC bus The LOCAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN control line of the IEC bus see annex A Via IEC bus 2 CALL IBLOC generator Set instrument to manual operation 1038 6002 02 3 3 E 13 Messages SME 3 3 2 Remote Control via RS 232 Interface 3 3 2 1 Setting the Transmission Parameters To enable an error free and correct data transmission the parameters of the unit and the controller should have the same setting To prevent any problems during binary data transmission the RS 232 interface is set for 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit This data format corresponds to the current IEEE P1174 standard Parameters baud rate and handshake can be manually changed in menu UTILITIES SYSTEM RS 232 Call UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB RS232 menu Select desired baudrate and handshake gt Terminate input using the 1x ENTER key 3 3 2 2 Indications during Remote Control The state of the remote control is evident by the words RS 232 REMOTE or LOCAL on the STATUS page The STATUS page is always displayed in the REMOTE state 3 3 2 3 Return to Manual Operating Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel Press the LOCAL key Note Before switchover command processing must
504. s section set the destination address and determine the message data Input value of the address of the pager Every receiver has an own nonrecurring address IEC bus command SOUR ERM MESS IA 0 Selection of the message category TONE Tone only message NUMERIC Numeric message ALPHANUM Alphanumeric message IEC bus command SOUR ERM MESS CAT TONE Input value of the tone transmitted with message category TONE 16 tones 8 normal 8 urgent are available IEC bus command SOUR ERM MESS TONE 1 Input of the character string for a numeric message The SME maximally provides 16 digits In addition to the 10 digits to 9 the signs forward slash upper case letter U hyphen period percent and blank can be used IEC bus command SOUR ERM MESS NUM 12 12 17 2 104 E 13 SME ALPHANUM MESSAGE EDIT MESSAGE BIT ERRORS ERROR BIT MASK POSITION OF ERRONEOUS BATCH POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD MESSAGE SEQUENCE BATCH 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Opens a window to select an alphanumeric message and to create a new one The following is available FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD complete ERMES character string LONG Message completely filling a batch USER1 to Three messages which can freely be edited by means of command EDIT MESSAGE IEC bus command SOUR ERM MESS ALPH FOX
505. s set correspond to the state after SYSTem PRESet or RST The command neither has a query form nor an RST value Example SOUR ILS GS PRES 1038 6002 02 3 71 E 13 SOURce ILS SME SOURce ILS LOCalizer The commands to specify the characteristics of the LOCalizerlocalizer modulation signal are under this node Whether this signal is output however is determined by command SOURce ILS TYPE SOURce ILS LOCalizer MODE NORM LLOBe RLOBe The command specifies the type of the ILS LOC signal generated NORM ILS LOC Signal LLOBe Left LOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the SOURce ILS LOC LLOBe FREQuency signal component generally 90 Hz of the ILS LOC signal The modulation depth 90 2 0 5 ILS LOC SODepth ILS LOC DDM 100 for SOURce ILS GS DDM DIR LEFT from 90 2 0 5 ILS LOC SODepth ILS LOC DDM 100 RLOBe RLOBe Right LOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the SOURce ILS LOC RLOBe FREQ signal component generally 150 Hz of the ILS LOC signal The modulation depth for ILS LOC DDM DIR RIGHt results from AM 150Hz 0 5 ILS LOC SODepth ILS LOC DDM 100 for ILS LOC DDM DIR LEFT from AM 150Hz 0 5 ILS LOC SODepth ILS LOC DDM 100 Example SOUR ILS LOC MODE LLOB RST value is NORM SOURce ILS LOCalizer COMid The commands to set the Comld content communication identification signal of the ILS
506. s subsystem contains the commands to control the amplitude modulation Up to two LF generators which serve as internal modulation sources can be fitted in the instrument options SM B2 and SM B6 Part of their settings is effected under SOURce0 2 Command SOURce AM DEPTh EXTernal COUPling INTernal1 2 FREQuency POLarity SOURce STATe Parameter Default Remark Unit 0 to100PCT PCT AC DC 400 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz 15 kHz or Hz 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Option SM B2 or B6 NORMal INVerted EXT INT1 2 EXT INT1 2 ON OFF SOURce AM DEPTh 0 to 100PCT The command sets the modulation depth in percent RST value is 30PCT Example SOUR AM DEPT 15PCT SOURce AM EXTernal The commands to set the external AM input are under this node SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external AM input The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered RST value is AC Example SOUR AM EXT COUP AC SOURce AM INTernal1 2 The settings for the internal AM inputs are effected under this node INT1 is LF generator 1 INT2 is LF generator 2 Here the same hardware is set for AM PM FM and SOURce0 2 This means that for example the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect SOUR AM INT2 FREQ SOUR FM2 IN SOUR PM2 IN FRI EQ
507. s the polarity of the modulation NORMal 1 from the data source results in a positive deviation INVerted 1 from the data source results a negative deviation Example SOUR DM GMSK POL INV RST value is NORMal SOURce DM QPSK The commands to set the data source for the digital type of modulation QPSK Quad Phase Shift Keying are under this node The key word DQPSk is also accepted SOURce DM QPSK STANdard PDC TFTS TETRa MSAT INMarsat This short form command sets parameters shown in the table to the values specified by standards cf table The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table Hence it neither has a query form nor an RST value NADCNorth American Digital Cellular PDC Personal Digital Cellular TFTS Terrestrial Flight Telephone System TETRa Trans European Trunk Radio APCO25 Association of Public Safety Communications Officers Project 25 MSAT Mobile Satellite INMarsat X International Maritime Satellite SOURce DM QPSK STANdard Short command Command sequence DM QPSK STANdard NADC DM QPSK TYPE 4 DM QPSK BRATe 48 6 kb s DM QPSK CODing NADC Q Q DM QPSK FILTer SCOS 0 35 DM QPSK POLarity NORM DM QPSK STANdard APCO DM DM DM DM DM PSK TYPE PI4Dqpsk PSK BRATe 9 6 kb s PSK CODing NADC PSK FILTer COS 0 2 PSK POLarity NORM IO IO IO IO IO DM QPSK STANdard PDC DM DM DM DM DM
508. s to enter and modify the parameters of the list The OPERATION page has a similar arrangement with all list editors As an example the OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu is shown Menu selection MEM SEQ 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT SINGIE EXT STEP LEVEL ODULATION RESET SEQUENCE DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX SWEEP LIST EM SEQ SELECT LIST CURRENT MSEQ2 UTILITIES DELETE LIST HELP FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEW Fig 2 7 OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu The settings for MODE CURRENT INDEX etc are irrelevant for the general description of the list editors and are described in greater detail in Section 2 10 MEMORY SEQUENCE mode The last three menu lines of the OPERATION page always exist and are reserved for selecting and deleting lists as well as for calling the edit functions and hence the EDIT page SELECT LIST Opens a selection window in which a list can be selected from the existing lists or a new empty list can be generated In this line the active list is always displayed DELETE LIST Opens a selection window in which the list to be deleted can be selected 1038 6002 02 2 28 E 13 SME List Editor FUNCTION Selection of the edit function for processing the lists The EDIT page is automatically called through the selection cf Section 2 2 4 3 FILL Filling a list with ele
509. same effect on different devices The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in detail in Section 3 8 Table 3 1 Common Commands Command Parameter Unit Remark CLS No query ESE 0 to 255 ESR Only query IDN Only query IST Only query ES OPT Only query PRE 0 to 255 ss o RCL 0 to 50 No query RST No query SAV 1 to 50 No query SRE 0 to 255 STB Only query TRG No query TST Only query m CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer ESE 0 to 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated Query ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form 1038 6002 02 3 14 E 13 SME Common Commands ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form 0 to 255 and subsequently sets the register to zero IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification The device response is for example Rohde
510. scilloscope essen 2 137 BXT filter GFSK modulation sss GMSK modulation C Calibration disable ain diee SINDICAR 2 158 3 120 2 158 3 19 level preset ias 2 159 3 19 password hie id 2 158 3 121 pulse generator 2 160 3 20 QPSK 2 161 3 18 VEO SUM sett ees 2 158 3 20 Call instrument 5 2 39 3 14 Capcode of the pager FLEX 2 110 3 58 Carrier frequency deviation with 5 25 Caution 2 170 CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data 2 78 Radio network eessssssssssssss esee 2 86 Center frequency RF sweep Character dala ita 3 8 Checksum XMEM 3 22 4 6 CITYRUF German pager system 2 78 Radio netWorKk 5 e rer ettet 2 86 Cleaning the outside 4 1 Clk me TE 2 95 bit clock 2 92 3 36 riui oum mE 2 92 3 37 2 11 2 79 2 86 2 92 3 36 ERMES FLEX get enini ane ie ure cr eis REFLEX symbol clock CMOS RAM hg ae ei rns 1 2 Coding 4FSK modulation sss GMSK modulation QPSK modulation erint Colon seperates
511. sed during switch on The calibration values can be restored with internal calibration routines These routines are accessible via menu UTILITIES CALIB see section on calibration The ERROR page offers access to long term messages if the ERROR key is pressed 100 000 000 0 12 0 WARNING 221 Settings conflict modulation forces peak level into overrange ERROR 211 Summing loop unlocked Warning 153 Input voltage out of range too low Fig 2 81 ERROR page A list of the possible error messages is to be found in annex B 1038 6002 02 2 170 E 11 SME Introduction Brief Instructions 3 Remote Control 3 1 Introduction The instrument is equipped with an IEC bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 and a RS 232 interface The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit to connect a controller for remote control The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers see Section 3 5 1 This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC bus programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax error handling and configuration
512. selected IEC bus short command TRIG LIST 1038 6002 02 2 145 E 13 LIST Mode RESET LIST gt DWELL CURRENT INDEX LEARN 3 SELECT LIST DELETE LIST FUNCTION 1038 6002 02 SME Sets the starting point IEC bus short command ABOR LIST Input value of the dwell time per step IEC bus short command SOUR LIST DWEL 10ms Indication of the current list index Setting value of the current list index in the STEP operating mode Starts the LEARN function All value pairs of the active list are subsequently set by the instrument with the current additional parameters and the hardware setting data are stored Caution This function must be called after every creating and altering the list or the remaining setting data IEC bus short command SOUR LIST LEAR Selection of a list or creation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus short command SOUR LIST SEL LIST2 Deletion of a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus short command SOUR LIST DEL LISTI Selection of the editor functions to process a list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor IEC bus short command SOUR LIST FREO 100MHz 1 2GHz POW OdBm 6dBm 2 146 E 13 SME LIST Mode The second page of the LIST menu the EDIT page is automatically activated if one of the editor functions of line FUNCTION is selected The list which is displayed as CURRENT LIST in the SELECT LIST line is shown 100 000
513. setting can be used to synchronize two SMEs IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR REFL25 TACT STAR EXECUTE SINGLE gt See description of MODE SINGLE IEC bus command TRG CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source This setting applies to ERMES POCSAG FLEX and REFLEX at the same time however not to the other digital modulations The EXT setting can be used to synchronize two or more SMEs INT The clock required for signal generation is generated internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as the clock signal IEC bus command SOUR DM COMP CLOC INT Note For all bit rates i e for 1600bps and 3200bps also a symbol clock rate of 3200HZ is always used This applies both to the output CLOCK SOURCE INT and to the input CLOCK SOURCE EXT of the clock 1038 6002 02 2 126 E 13 SME Digital Modulation 2 6 3 14 Radiocommunication Service POCSAG POCSAG is a standard which in its various implementations e g CITYRUF SCALL allows convenient paging When equipped with the SME B42 POCSAG SME B11 DM coder and SME B12 DM memory extension options the SME generates call signals complying to the POCSAG standard All essential parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable Notes When POCSAG is switched on all other DM modulations are automatically switched off The RF frequency is not determined by the POCSAG standard i
514. sible at the left hand margin of a menu the menu is larger than the screen window If the menu cursor is moved to the margin of the screen window the covered lines become visible SELECT key The SELECT acknowledges the selection marked by means of the menu cursor RETURN key RETURN returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level The menu cursor is shifted to the left into the preceding column of the menu structure resets the menu cursor from frequency or level value indication in the header field into the menu field to the menu called last closes the display pages called using keys STATUS HELP and ERROR again Settings are accessed in the setting menus ending with the right hand display margin 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY DEPTH 100 0 LEVEL SOURCE INT LFGEN2 ODULATION SOURCE EXT OFF 1 DIGITAL MOD EXT COUPLING AC DC GE OUIPUT POLARITY NORI INV SWEEP LIST LFGEN1 FREQ 1k 3k 15k Hz MEM SEQ UTILITIES LFGEN2 FREQ 27 500 0 kHz HELP LFGEN2 SHAPE SOR TRI NOI Fig 2 4 MODULATION AM menu 1038 6002 02 2 19 E 13 Basic Operating Steps SME 2 2 3 2 Selection and Change of Parameters Select parameter Change setting value via value inputs using rotary knob 1 out of n selection 1038
515. sponds to the value entered in LEVEL ATTENUATION The linear range extends to an attenuation of approx 30 dB MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of gt 800B IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV MODE NORM Input value of the level reduction The level reduction is internally controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via connector BURST A logic 1 in the data list causes a level reduction IEC bus command SOUR DM DATA ALEV OdB Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator AUTO The data are always repeated SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE IEC bus command SOUR TRIG DM SOUR AUTO Starts a single servicing of the data This action to be executed is only displayed and is only effective if MODE is set to SINGLE IEC bus commands TRIG DM SOUR SING TRIG DM Opens a window to select one of the standard FSK modulations see Table 2 5 By selecting a standard the parameters indented below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard If the setting of a parameter is different from the standard SELECT STANDARD CURRENT USER is displayed IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK STAN POCS1200 Input value of the deviation for FSK If the FILTER is switched off the deviation can be set in the range from 0 to 400 kHz In this case the maximum deviation depends on the carrier frequency and is limited to 20 of
516. sse 3 3 3 3 1 3 Querying the Error Status ssssssssssssseeee enne 3 3 3 3 1 4 Return to Manual enne 3 3 3 3 2 Remote Control via RS 232 Interface ssssssssssssee eene 3 4 3 3 2 1 Setting the Transmission Parameters sse 3 4 3 3 2 2 Indications during Remote Control sse 3 4 3 3 2 3 Return to Manual Operating 3 4 34 MESSAGES M 3 4 3 4 1 Interface Message unii ee er eR REST ie EU EE e sce RH ES gh 3 4 3 4 2 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses 3 5 3 5 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages eese 3 5 3 54 SCP Intro cti italia 3 5 3 5 2 Structure Of a Command cocccccccconocccononcnonoccnoncnn nn nn nano 3 6 3 5 3 Structure of a Command Line 3 8 3 5 4 Responses to 3 8 3 9 5 oen eheu eee tete pet e ERR 3 9 3 5 6 Overview of Syntax Elements 3 11 3 6 Description of COMMA d niece roer rati r anni tnra trn 3 12 3 671 1 NOtationiau eec pce ties qeu ep ege e Ee dap ra ee eeu 3 12 3 6 2 Commandqs sse arrancan rra rana nennen 3 14 3 6 3 ABORT Syste Miisan dece cde aa Ne el nda hee 3 17 3 6 4 CALi
517. status register CALL IBWRT generator RST Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator OUTPUT ON Switch on RF output REM y c jc e c RR eek eek Ke kk de e de de cede 1038 6002 02 9D 1 E 11 Programming Examples SME 3 Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands Output frequency output level and AM modulation are set in this example The settings correspond to the sample setting for first users in manual control By analogy to the step width setting of the rotary knob the step width is additionally set for the alteration of the RF frequency in the case of UP and DOWN REM 3 Instrument setting commands CALL IBWRT generator FREQUENCY 250E6 RF Frequency 250 MHz CALL IBWRT generator POWER 10 Output power 10 dBm CALL IBWRT generator AM 80 AM with modulaton index of 80 CALL IBWRT generator AM INTERNAL1 FREQUENCY 3KHZ Modulation frequency 3kHz CALL IBWRT generator AM SOURCE INT1 Modulation source LF generator 1 CALL IBWRT generator FREQUENCY STEP 12500 Step width RF frequency 12 5kHz REM rr RRA RAR RIK IK IK IK IK SER te 4 Switchover to Manual Control REM Switch instrument over to manual control CALL IBLOC
518. string 3 121 TEST DIRect DSYN1MUX Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect FMOD Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect LFGENA Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect LFGENB Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect MGEN Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect OPU1M Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect OPU3M Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect OPU6M Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect PUM Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect REFSS Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect ROSC Subaddress hex data string 3 121 TEST DIRect SUM Subaddress hex data string not SCPI 3 120 TEST RAM 3 121 1038 6002 02 8 16 12 SME List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page info TEST ROM 3 121 TRIGger DM SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal not SCPI 3 123 TRIGger DM IMMediate not SCPI 3 123 TRIGger LIST IMMediate not SCPI 3 124 TRIGger LIST SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal not SCPI 3 125 TRIGger MSEQuence SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal not SCPI 3 125 TRIGger MSEQuence IMMediate not SCPI 3 125 TRIGger PULSe SLOPe POSitive NEGative not SCPI 3 126 TRIGger PULSe SOURce EXTernal AUTO not SCPI 3 126 TRIGger SLOPe not SCPI 3 126 TRIGger1 2 SW Eep IMMediate not SCPI 3 122 TRIGger1 2 SWEep SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal not SCPI 3 123 UNIT
519. subsequences cannot be configured the subsequences of a cycle also only differ in the subsequence number contained The parameters of this section determine how the message subsequence is structured and when which subsequence is sent For each of batches A to P of the message subsequence a determination is possible whether it contains message data an X under the letter or fill data a blank under the letter Operation is analog to the variation of a number with the rotary knob however the characters are restricted to 2 there IEC bus command SOUR ERM SEQ DBAT A B G H 2 105 E 13 Digital Modulation MODE EXECUTE SINGLE gt CLOCK SOURCE 1038 6002 02 SME Selection of the message and fill subsequence ALWAYS The message subsequence is output continuously IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO SINGLE The filler subsequence is output With the trigger pulse switchover to message subsequence is effected for 12 seconds IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR SING SOUR ERM TACT MESS EXT The filler subsequence is output With the trigger pulse from the external trigger female connector switchover to message subsequence is effected for 12 seconds IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR ERM TACT MESS EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the FLEX signal after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input connector After recognition of this signal a message subsequence length 12 se
520. t LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET MODULATION HASE PULSE GEN CALIBRATION DATA FINE DIGITAL MOD PROTECT OSC REF CALIBRATION DATA COURSE LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK SWEEP DIAG LEVEL LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX 1 0 HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 71 Menu UTILITIES CALIB PULSE GEN CALIBRATE gt Triggers the calibration for the pulse generator IEC bus short command CAL PULS CALIBRATION DATA FINE Indication of the fine adjustment in decimal form IEC bus short command CAL PULS DATA CALIBRATION DATA COURSE Indication of the coarse adjustment in decimal form IEC bus short command CAL PULS DATA 1038 6002 02 2 160 E 13 SME Utilities CALIBRATION QPSK QPSK modulation is generated by means of frequency modulation and amplitude modulation The delay of FM and AM signal must be tuned to each other As the delay of the AM signal is subjected to manufacturing tolerances the delay of the FM signal can be adjusted electronically Menu UTILITIES CALIB QPSK offers access to the delay calibration The delay can be set in the range 0 to 10 us in steps of 20 ns The delay is set correctly if the spectrum of the PRBS modulated QPSK signal at the RF output is symmetric The typical value of the delay is 2 60 us Menu selection UTILITIES CALIB QPSK EE LS 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATION DATA LEVEL REF OSC LEV
521. t 3GHz Model SME03A and SME models fitted with option SM B50 Model SME03A and SMExx models fitted with Option SM B50 are equipped with a high speed processor which improves the values specified for the setting times The following specifications are valid Frequency Setting time to within 1x10 for f 3130 MHz and 73 Hz f r f 130 MHz after IEC IEEE bus 3 ms Level Setting time IEC IEEE bus with electronic level setting 2 ms Sweep Selectable step 2msto5s List mode Max number of channels 4000 1 Does not apply to non interrupting level setting ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED 1039 1856 12 13 B E 7 SME Putting into Operation 1 Preparation for Use 1 1 Putting into Operation Before putting the SME into operation please make sure that the covers of the casing are put on and screwed the ventilation openings are free no signal voltage levels exceeding the permissible limits are applied at the inputs the outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or connected incorrectly If these points are not observed the instrument might be damaged 1 1 1 Supply Voltage The SME can be operated at a c systems from 90 to 132 V and 180 to 265 V at system frequencies from 47 to 440 Hz The power supply sock
522. t for 0 and 1 are ineffective in these cases Press the ENTER key or unit keys The value is included in the data set The menu cursor marks the value of the next column In the last column the menu cursor then marks the next line of column MEMORY Press the RETURN key The menu cursor wraps back to the INDEX column The EDIT mode is exited by repeatedly pressing the RETURN key cf Section 2 2 4 4 Block function FILL Using function FILL a parameter e g MEMORY is overwritten with constant or linearly increasing decreasing values within a defined range The input window is exited by pressing the RETURN key without a modification being carried out If the filler range exceeds the end of the list the list is automatically extended The list entry in the example for MEMORY with index AT n is calculated as follows from the information AT RANGE starting value MEMORY and WITH INCREMENT MEMORYTAT n starting value MEMORY increment 0 lt n lt RANGE1 Selection FUNCTION FILL A cn 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY SELECT LIST 10 RANGE 1 LEVEL FUNCTION PARAMETER MEMORY DWELL ODULATION INDEX FREE 2041 LEN 2055 DIGITAL MO 0001 MEMORY LF OUTPUT 0002 WITH INCREMENT SWEER 0003 LISI 0004 MEM SEQ 0005 UTILITIES 0006 HELP 0007 0008 EXECUTE p Fig 2 11 Block function FILL Input wi
523. t has to be set to the desired value by means of key FREQ POCSAG settings can be accessed via DIGITAL MOD POCSAG menu AAA eee eee eee 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY OFF ON LEVEL G MODULATION FSK FFSK ODULATION Q DEVIATION 1 5 2 0 3 0 3 5 4 0 DIGITAL MOD FSK MOD POLARITY NORM LF OUTPUT 4 LEVEL ATTENUATION SWEEP Fl BITRATE LIST E MEM SEQ Fl ADDRESS UTILITIES CATEGORY RIC ALPHANUM HELP SYNC WORD POCSAG INFORUF TONE NUMBER A D NUMERIC MESSAGE ALPHANUM MESSAGE CURRENT USER3 EDIT MESSAGE iB BIT ERRORS M ERROR BIT MASK 0 POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0 y PR MESSAGE GENERATION FILL BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE 0 TIME SLICE 10 sec ODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG ALWAYS EXECUTE SINGLE p CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT RECALCULATE gt Fig 2 51 Menu DIGITAL MOD POCSAG STATE ON Switch on of POCSAG The RF frequency has to be set to the desired value by means of key FREQ An indication appears in the status line PRE stands for preamble MSGx stands for message the number x denotes the current batch stands for filler data see POCSAG standard IEC bus command
524. t settings are loaded the current level settings are maintained IEC bus command SOUR POW RCL EXCL 2 44 E 13 SME RF Level 2 5 1 Level Offset The SME offers the possibility of entering the offset OFFSET of a possibly series connected attenuator amplification element in the LEVEL LEVEL menu The indication input value in the LEVEL header field considers this input see below and represents the level value of the signal at the output of the series connected instrument cf Fig 2 19 The entry values AMPLITUDE and OFFSET in the menu LEVEL or LEVEL in the header line are related to the RF output level as follows LEVEL OFFSET output level AMPLITUDE An offset entry causes no modification of the RF output frequency but only a modification of the display value in the LEVEL field in the header line ie LEVEL in the header line indicates the offset associated level and AMPLITUDE in the menu LEVEL the RF output level The status line indicates LEV OFFST The offset is to be entered in dB The offset setting also remains effective in the ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED operating mode and with level sweep Input value m e OFFSET bes o LEVEL menu O 9 Bolt Y WY E Attenuation gt gt 9000 so08 0 co Amplification RF output signal LEVEL in the header field AMPLITUDE in the LEVEL menu Fig 2 19 Example of a circuit with level offset 2 5 2 Interrupt free Le
525. tal standard a WARNING message appears in the status line if the set LEVEL or the displayed PEP are overranged If the set level cannot be generated as an overrange value ERROR will be displayed Further settings Levelsweep menu SWEEP Menu selection LEVEL LEVEL u AAA E 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE LEVEL OFFSET ODULATION LIMIT DIGITAL MOD ATTENUATOR MODE AUTO LF OUTPUT ATTEN FIXED RANGE 50 dBm SWEEP KNOB STEP USER LIST KNOB STEP DECIMAL MEM SEQ POWER RESOLUTION 0 1 UTILITIES POWER ON STATE PREVIOUS SETTING HELP EXCLUDE FROM RCL ON JOFF Fig 2 18 Menu LEVEL preset setting POWER RESOLUTION is set to 0 01 dB AMPLITUDE Input value of the RF level at the RF output connector IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW 30 OFFSET Input value of the level offset of the RF output level compared to the input value of the RF level indicated in the LEVEL header field Input in dB cf Section 2 5 1 Level Offset The status line indicates LEV OFFST IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW OFFS 0 1038 6002 02 2 43 E 13 RF Level LIMIT ATTENUATOR MODE ATTEN FIXED RANGE KNOB STEP USER KNOB STEP POWER RESOLUTION POWER ON STATE EXCLUDE FROM RCL 1038 6002 02 SME Input value of level limitation This value indicates the upper limit of the level at the RF o
526. tate on or off The command is not influenced by RST and RCL ON The following commands cannot be executed DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON DISPlay ANNotation FREQ ON DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude ON SYSTem KLOCk OFF OFF In the transition from ON to OFF all data existing in the instrument except for the calibrating data are deleted especially all status registers all instrument states and all lists Example SYST SEC STAT ON SYSTem SERRor This command returns a list of all errors existing at the point of time of the query This list corresponds to the indication on the ERROR page with manual control cf Section Error Messages Example SYST SERR Response 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range SYSTem VERSion The command returns the SCPI version number the instrument acts in accordance with This command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SYST VERS Response 1994 0 1038 6002 02 3 121 E 13 TEST SME 3 6 15 TEST System This system contains the commands to execute the selftest routines RAM ROM and BATTery as well as to directly manipulate the hardware modules TEST DIRect The selftests return a 0 if the test has been executed successfully otherwise a value unequal to 0 All commands of this system do not have an RST value Caution commands under node TEST DIRect directly act on the respective hardware module circumventing any security mechanism
527. ted in the following Detailed program examples are to be found in annex D Program Examples 3 8 4 1 Service Request Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react with corresponding actions As evident from Fig 3 4 Section 3 8 2 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The corresponding setting of the ENABle parts of the status registers can achieve that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and ESE Examples cf Fig 3 4 Section 3 8 2 and Program Examples annex D as well Use of command to generate an SRQ gt Set bit O in the ESE Operation Complete gt Set bit 5 in the SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ Indication of the end of a sweep by means of an SRQ with the controller gt Set bit 7 in the SRE sum bit of the STATus OPERation register gt Set bit 3 sweeping Jin the STATus OPERation ENABle gt Set bit 3 in the STATus OPERation NTRansition so as
528. ternal data generator can be synchronized via the CLOCK output of the SME The command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM REC SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM TRIGger ON OFF This command switches the external trigger facility on or off ON The run of the list is triggered by an external trigger signal Each trigger signal starts a new run which starts with the start address OFF The external trigger mode is switched off Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM TRIG OFF RST value is OFF SOURce DM BASic DATA XMEM TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative This command selects the active edge of the external trigger signal POSitive The run of the list starts with the positive edge of the trigger signal NEGative run of the list starts with the negative edge of the trigger signal Example SOUR DM BAS DATA XMEM TRIG SLOP POS RST value is POSitive SOURce DM BASic PRBS The commands to set the pseudo random sequence generator are under this node 1038 6002 02 3 40 E 13 SME SOURce DM SOURce DM BASic PRBS LENGth 9 15 20 21 23 The command specifies the length of the pseudo random sequence according to the following equation Length 2LENGth 1 Example SOUR DM BAS PRBS LENG 9 RST value is 9 Bit SOURce DM COMPlex CLOCk SOURce INT EXT The command selects the clock source for radiocommunication services ERMes FLEX REFLEX a
529. that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled e g for disposal purposes by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 5 f handling the product yields hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation 6 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn life requires increased protection pregnant women should be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be endangered by electromagnetic radiation The employer is required to assess workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the danger 7 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make certain that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to handle operating the products otherwis
530. the DDM value and the value of the instrument current The dB value is calculated according to DDM dB 20 x LOG SOD DDMx100 SOD DDMx100 IEC bus command SOUR ILS DDM LOG 0 Selection between ILS GS operating modes UP and DOWN A change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value UP In operating mode UP the 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant the DDM value is positive DOWN In operating mode DOWN the 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant the DDM value is negative IEC bus command SOUR ILS DDM DIR UP Input value of the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the 90 Hz and 150 Hz ILS GS signal contents The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones IEC bus command SOUR ILS SOD 80PCT Input value of the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the top IEC bus command SOUR ILS ULOB 90 2 69 E 13 Analog Modulations DOWN FREQ UP DOWN PHASE ILS DEFAULT SETTING COM ID STATE COM ID FREQUENCY COM ID DEPTH DDM KNOB STEP CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP 1038 6002 02 SME Input value of the modulation freq of the antenna lobe arranged at the bottom IEC bus command SOUR ILS LLOB 150 Note A variation of one of the two modulation frequencies causes an automatic adaptation of the other modulation frequency in such a way that a frequency response ratio of 3 5 or 5 3 is maintained Input value of the phase between t
531. the noise component of the reference transmitter must be determined and subtracted as well Example Let the reference level be measured to be 12dBm A noise level of 8dBm 1Hz is determined at 20kHz The difference is 90dB in addition to the correction for the second side band 6dB and the amplification switchover 40dB there is a signal to noise ratio of 136dB or a noise level of 136dBc dB with respect to the carrier power If two identical signal transmitters have been used the result must be decreased by 3dB for the uncorrelated noise power of the reference transmitter The final result is then 139dBc The following noise levels should be measured and or not be exceeded Test frequency Noise in 20 kHz ratio 6000 MHz 110 dBc only SMEO6 3000 MHz 116 dBc only SME03 06 2000 MHz 120 dBc only SME03E 03 06 1000 MHz 126 dBc 500 MHz 132 dBc 250 MHz 137 dBc 125 MHz 140 dBc lt 93 75 MHz 129 dBc 5 13 E 13 Test Procedure 5 2 8 Broadband Noise Test equipment Test principle Measurement Evaluation Recommended test frequencies 5 2 9 Residual FM SME Broadband noise is measured using the test setup of 5 2 7 SSB Phase Noise Calibration is effected in the same way as in Section 5 2 7 SSB Phase Noise For measurement the signal generators are detuned until the difference frequency falls into the stop band of the lowpass filter gt 10 MHz A 1 MH
532. the reference oscillator has settled REM First possibility Use of WAI CALL IBWRT generator ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT WAI FREQUENCY 100MHZ REM Second possibility Use of eee gemere A A A a eee OpcOk SPACES 2 Space for OPC Provide response CALL IBWRT generator ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT OPC REM here the controller can service other instruments Sarean E CALL IBRD generator OpcOk Wait for 1 from OPC REM Third possibility Use of OPC REM In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation with a National REM Instruments GPIB driver the setting Disable Auto Serial Poll must be changed to yes REM by means of IBCONF CALL IBWRT generator SRE 32 Permit service request for ESR CALL IBWRT generator ESE 1 Set event enable bit for operation complete bit ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady Initialization of the service request routine PEN ON CALL IBWRT generator ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT OPC REM Continue main program here STOP End of program OpcReady REM As soon as the reference oscillator has settled this subroutine is activated REM Program suitable reaction to the OPC service request ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady Enable SRQ routine again RETURN RE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK ck RA RARA RARA RARA RARA RARA RARA RARA AA RARA 1038 6002 02 9D 3 11 Programming Examples SME 8 Service Req
533. the specified frame contents or only the filler frames are output Example SOUR FLEX FCON X 0 0 0 0 0 X X X A A A X SOURce FLEX FCONtent AUTO ON OFF This command determines the influence of changes of CAPCODE on FRAME CONTENT ON FRAME CONTENT is set so that in all frames evaluated by the reciever and only in those FLEX data are also transmitted All the other frames only contain filler data OFF A change of CAPCODE has no influence on FRAME CONTENT Example SOUR FLEX FCON AUTO ON RST value is ON SOURce FLEX MODulation 1600 FSK2 3200 FSK2 3200 FSK4 6400 FSK4 The command determines the used bit rate and modulation FLEX recognizes four modulations 1600bps 2FSK 3200bps 2FSK 3200bps 4FSK 6400bps 4FSK Example SOUR FLEX MOD 1600 FSK2 RST value is 1600 2FSK 1038 6002 02 3 57 E 13 SOURce FLEX SME SOURce FLEX PHASe A B C D AB AC AD BC BD CD ABC ABD ACD BCD ABCD The command determines in which phase A to D the message is to be transmitted Since each frame lasts 1 875 sec independent of the modulation and more data can be transmitted at bit rates higher than 1600 bps several independent channels phases are bit multiplexed With 1600 bps the message is transmitted for every setting in phase A With 3200 bps the message is transmitted in phase A if A and B are set and transmitted in phase C if C and D are set With 6400 bps the message is transmitted in all the four phases dependin
534. this operating mode being aborted In operating modes STEREO VOR ILS an indication of this parameter is eliminated Instead a selection between STEREO OUTPUT MPX and PILOT is possible see below Selection of the stereo signal at the LF output This parameter is only displayed if STEREO modulation is activated MPX Output of the complete Stereo multiplex signal PILOT Output of the pilot tone IEC bus short commands SOUR STER STAT ON 0UTP2 SOUR 2 OUTP2 SOUR STER MPX 2 133 E 13 Sweep SME 2 8 Sweep The SME offers a digital step by step sweep for parameters e RF frequency LF frequency e FF level In addition to the digital step by step sweep an analog sweep for RF frequency and HF level is possible by switching on frequency or amplitude modulation with an internal saw tooth Setting a sweep is effected in five basic steps which are shown in the following example the setting of a frequency sweep 1 Set sweep range START and STOP or CENTER and SPAN 2 Select linear or logarithmic sequence SPACING 3 Set step width STEP and dwell time DWELL 4 Activate marker if desired MARKER 5 Switch on sweep MODE set to AUTO SINGLE or STEP 2 8 1 Setting the Sweep Range START STOP CENTER and SPAN The sweep range of the RF sweep can be entered in two different ways Either by entering the START and STOP value or by entering CENTER and SPAN Please observe that the two parameter sets influence
535. ting System Call up and termination of operating mode After a RESTORE the database does no longer reflect the device setting which means the displayed values are no longer relevant the desired result is not obtained by a query of setup values normal setting commands may not be executed properly see below Alternative It is therefore recommended either to use the RST command or to store the device setting prior to using the first RESTORE command by means of the SYSTem SSAVe n command and to restore it after the last RESTORE command using SYSTEM SRESTore n The database and the device setting will then match again No other commands are required to activate or deactivate this mode Note Since the module setting depends on the temperature of the unit any temperature variation of more than 5 C should be avoided between storage and call up to ensure the accuracy of the unit If the mechanically switched attenuator is switched over due to a RESTORE command the setting time increases by 15 ms This can be avoided by setting one of the two functions for interruption free level setting OUTPut AMODe FIXed prior to storing the setting Effects on device settings The Fast Restore commands have an effect on almost all device settings see table Device settings stored and called up by Fast Device settings not stored or called up by Fast Restore Restore e Frequency incl reference oscillator e Settings of di
536. ting of Contrast and Brightness of the Display See as well Section 2 2 2 Basic Operating Steps see as well Section 1 1 3 Switching On Off the Instrument Section 2 1 2 Elements of the Rear Panel Power Switch E 13 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIGNALGENERATOR 5kHz 3 0 GHz 5 03 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY EVEL OPERATING ODULATION IGITAL MOD Move cursor F OUTPUT WEEP IST SELECT Next menu EM SEQ TILITIES RETURN Previous menu ELP M D 5 U VERSION 98 N RFSW QUICK SELEC ga oo REVERSE POWER MADE IN GERMANY x 9 8 7 6 5 Fig 2 1 c Front panel view inputs outputs 1038 6002 02 2 10 E 13 SME 2 1 1 3 Inputs Outputs Cf Fig 2 1 C Front panel view Inputs Outputs 4 pa z CLOCK RF 50 w 1038 6002 02 DATA CLOCK EXT1 EXT2 LF RF Input external data signal for digital modulation Input resistance 1 KQ TTL level Output data signal with operating mode internal Level TTL Input external clock pulse signal for digital modulation Input resistance 1 TTL level Output clock pulse signal with operating mode internal Level TTL Input external modulation signal alternatively for AM or FM PM Input resistance gt 100 Nominal voltage Us 1 V Max permissible overvoltage 15 V Input external modulation s
537. tion 3 138 3 8 3 5 STATus QUEStionable Register sss 3 139 3 8 4 Application of the Status Reporting 3 140 3 8 4 1 Service Request Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure 3 140 2 9 4 2 B ae EE tete be tette amete he 3 140 3 8 4 3 Parallel 1 crine edet tede erede Lettere 3 141 3 8 4 4 Query by Means of Commands sse 3 141 3 8 4 5 Error Queue Q ery tee ne e ege aere tind 3 141 3 8 5 Resetting Values of the Status Reporting 3 142 3 9 Fast Restore Mode ee ihren tet nutre nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 3 143 1039 1856 12 7 E 13 Contents SME 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting cccsssseceesseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseseeeseseeneeneeeeeens 4 1 41 MAaintenan Ce em on o 4 1 4 1 1 Cleaning the Outside 4 1 A ote iba um E 4 1 4 1 3 Exchange of the Lithium enne enn 4 1 4 1 3 1 Exchange of RAM Battery ssssessseeene enne nennen 4 2 4 1 3 2 Exchange of XMEM Battery esse
538. tion 2 14 Error Messages Section 3 Remote Control E 13 9 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz 3 0 GHz SME 03 100 000 000 0 z FREQUENCY EVEL ODULATION IGITAL MOD F OUTPUT WEEP IST EM SEQ TILITIES ELP M D S U OPERATING D SELECT RETURN VERSION Move cursor Next menu Previous menu 1 33 QUICK SELECT Fig 2 1 6 Front panel view controls 1038 6002 02 2 8 REVERSE POWER MADE IN GERMANY ES E 13 SME Brightness and contrast of the display be set using the rotary knobs iS 8 QUICK SELECT QUICK SELECT ASSGIN MENU 1 MENU2 The menu quick selection keys permit fast access to Contrast Brightness two menus selected ASSIGN MENU1 MENU2 9 Switching On Off OO STBy ON 1038 6002 02 The On Off switch switches the instrument from the to the ready for operation status Prerequisite The power switch at the rear of the standby mode Stores the current menu as menu1 when the MENU1 key is pressed afterwards or as menu2 when the MENU2 key is pressed afterwards Activates menu1 stored Activates menu2 stored instrument must be switched on STBY LED is illuminated in the standby mode 2 9 Front Panel See as well Section 1 1 5 Set
539. tion SME B11 DM coder GMSK for GSM PCN Global System for Mobile Communications Personal Communication System CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data MC9 French Communication network MOBITEX Mobile data system DSRR Digital Short Range Radio MD24to MD192 Standards according to ETS specifications e GFSK for DECT Digital European Cordless Telephony CT2 Cordless Telephony CT3 Cordless Telephony e QPSK for NADC North American Digital Cellular PDC Pacific Digital Cellular TFTS Terrestrial Flight Telephone System APCO25 Association of Public Safety Communications Officers Project 25 TETRA Trans European Trunked Radio MSAT Mobile Satellite International Maritime Satellite e FSK for POCSAG Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group CITYRUF German pager system FLEX Flexible High Speed Paging System e 4FSK for ERMES European Radio Message System APCO25 Association of Public Safety Communications Officers Project 25 FLEX Flexible High Speed Paging System MODACOM Mobile Data Communication e FFSKfor POCSAG Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group Internal or external data sources can be used A PRBS generator with selectable sequence lengths and a data generator RAM are available as an internal data source Option SME B12 memory extension increases the memory depth to 8 MBit Option SME B12 memory extension can be used to set radiocommunication service ERMES dir
540. tment for QPSK see service manual stock no 1039 1856 24 should be checked and renewed if necessary before the measurement Test equipment Spectrum analyzer Section 5 1 item 2 Test setup Connect spectrum analyzer to the RF output socket of the SME Measurement Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 836 MHz in the case of SME03 06 1513 MHz Level 0 dBm in menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK SOURCE PRBS PRBS 23 bit SELECT STANDARD NADC Settings at the spectrum analyzer Center frequency 836 MHz with SME03 06 1513 MHz Span 300 kHz Resolution bandwidth 3 kHz Video bandwidth 100 Hz A spectrum according to Fig 5 2 must be visible at the spectrum analyzer which adheres to the tolerances in the following table The reference level is at the center frequency Offset frequency Level 0 kHz 0 dB reference 30 to 50 kHz lt 40 dB gt 50 kHz lt 50 dB 1038 6002 02 5 32 13 SME Test Procedure dBm 0 100 835 9 945 836 1 MHz Fig 5 2 Spectrum with QPSK 5 2 34 2 Vector Error NADC Standard IS 54 Test equipment FSEA with option FSE B7 Section 5 1 item 23 Test setup Connect FSEA to the RF output socket of the SME Measurement gt Settings at the SME Carrier frequency 900 MHz Level 7 dBm in menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK SOURCE PRBS PRBS 23 bit SELECT STANDARD gt Settings at the FSE PRESET CENTER 900 MHz REF 10 dBm MODE V
541. to make sure that the transition of sweeping bit 3 from 1 to 0 sweep end is recorded in the EVENt part After a sweep has been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request A detailed example for a service request routine is to be found in annex D Program Examples 3 8 4 2 Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The quick BASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC bus 1038 6002 02 3 140 E 13 SME Fast Restore Modus 3 8 4 3 Parallel Poll In a parallel poll up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to logically
542. tor EXT1 EXT2 M esee ecu HER DE Mixer nal m Lowpassfiter M Oscilloscope IF IF IF ho Auxiliary transmitter 5 4 E 13 SME 5 1 1 5 Test System for GFSK Test equipment Test setup Test Instruments and Utilities Storage oscilloscope Section 5 1 item 3 Second signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Mixer Section 5 1 item 16 Broadband FM demodulator Section 5 1 item 20 RF attenuator pad Section 5 1 item 21 Lowpass filter Section 5 1 item 23 SME 25 FER 00000 el Oscilloscope 5 1 1 6 Test System Extension by Down Conversion Test equipment Test setup 1038 6002 02 Mixer D n gt Lowpass filter PP FM demodulator IF IF IF ho Auxiliary transmitter Second signal generator Section 5 1 item 5 Mixer Section 5 1 item 16 RF attenuator Section 5 1 item 21 RF attenuator Section 5 1 item 26 Lowpass Section 5 1 item 23 Attenuator pad Mixer PP Attenuator pad gt Lowpass filter gt Iis IF IF Auxiliary transmitter 5 5 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 Test Procedure The rated specifications
543. tor sess 2 35 PCN Personal Communication System Radio elwork sire DEOR 2 86 PDC Pacific Digital Cellular 2 78 Radio network sss entes 2 86 Performance test sssssssssssssssssesee eene 5 44 e A tr HH Ld pipere pe 2 62 Phase antenna lobe ESOS iia Rete 2 70 3 71 ILS LOC 2 74 3 74 DIIOUTORO i ENT 2 64 REOUIDUE it rad 2 156 3 81 Phase angle VOR sss nennen 2 66 Phase modulation eese 2 58 3 82 PhiM deviation setting eerie eene 5 26 distortion factor sessi 5 27 frequency responsa 5 26 Physical esses 3 8 Pilott0he ieiuno 2 64 2 133 3 28 3 101 PM COUD IITIQ ioci i re ti dee 2 59 3 82 EA 2 58 3 82 devialion li ici 2 59 Tr quehty aiii 2 58 3 83 DON de 2 58 3 83 modulator sess nnns 1 7 2 58 3 82 POCSAG Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group NA 2 78 Radio nelWork s eie ertet 2 86 radiocommunication ccccccnnnoninononononannnnnnnnnnnons 2 127 3 41 Polarity 4FSK modulation cesses 2 99 3 49 2 55 3 31 BLANK 5 3 27 1038 6002 02 SME FSK modulation 2 96
544. trol address The setting range is 0 to 30 At the point of delivery address 28 is set Menu selection UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB _ SSS A 100 000 000 0 FREQUENCY SYSTEM GPIB LEVEL REF OSC RS232 ODULATION PHASE SECURITY DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LANGUAGE LF OUTPUT CALIB SWEEP DIAG LIST TEST MEM SEQ MOD KEY UTILITIES AUX I O HELP BEEPER INSTALL Fig 2 63 Menu UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB ADDRESS Input value of the IEC bus address IEC bus short command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 28 1038 6002 02 2 152 E 13 SME Utilities 2 11 2 Parameter of the RS232 Interface SYSTEM RS232 Submenu SYSTEM RS232 offers access to the configuration of the RS 232 interface The pin assignment of the interface corresponds to the pin assignment of a PC Menu selection UTILITIES SYSTEM RS232 AAA XO 100 000 000 0 z 30 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL ODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP SYSTEM REF OSC PHASE PROTECT CALIB DIAG TEST MOD KEY AUX I O BEEPER INSTALL GPIB DATA FORMAT 8 Bits RS232 PARITY NO SECURITY STOP BIT d LANGUAGE BAUD RATE 9600 bps HANDSHAKE OFF RTS CTS XON XOFF Fig 2 64 Menu UTILITIES SYSTEM RS2
545. ttings at the SME In menu LF OUTPUT SOURCE LFGEN2 VOLTAGE 1V Vary LFGEN2 FREQUENCY from 20 Hz to 100 kHz gt Read off the actual frequency at the audio analyzer Deviation from the rated lt 1E 4 Read off the distortion factor at the audio analyzer Rated val e 2 aia 0 196 Settings at the SME In MENU LF OUTPUT LFGEN2 FREQUENCY 1 kHz Vary VOLTAGE from 1 mV to 4 V gt Measure the output level using the audio analyzer Deviation from the rated value max 1 1mV Recommended settings 3 mV 10 mV 30 mV 100 mV 300 mV 1V 2V 4V 1038 6002 02 5 37 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 37 2 Frequency Response Test equipment AC voltmeter Abschnitt 5 1 Pos 19 Test setup Connect AC voltmeter to the LF socket of the SME Measurement gt Settings at the SME In Menu LF OUTPUT SOURCE LFGEN2 Vary LFGEN2 FREQUENCY from 10 Hz to 500 kHz Frequency response difference between the highest and lowest level eene ee cete cdd up to 100 kHz 0 3 dB gees up to 500 kHz 0 5 dB Note The setting time is a mere time the computer requires and thus needs not to be remeasured 5 2 38 Pulse Generator Option SM B4 Test equipment Oscilloscope Section 5 1 item 7 Pulse generator Section 5 1 item 17 Test setup Connect the pulse generator to the PULSE socket Con
546. ttings at the pulse generator TTL pulse sequence at 10 MHz The pulse sequence at the oscilloscope must not change Trigger the oscilloscope on the PULSE input The pulse sequence may be offset by maximally 50 ns Repeat the measurements with pulse periods of up to 85s and pulse widths pulse delays and double pulse spacings of up to 1s 5 39 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 39 Multi Function Generator Option SM B6 5 2 39 1 Frequency Error Distortion Factor and Level Test equipment Audio analyzer Section 5 1 item 14 Test setup Connect the audio analyzer to the LF output of the SME Measurement gt SME settings In menu LF OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 V SOURCE LFGEN2 LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN Vary LFGEN2 FREQ 20 Hz to 1 MHz gt Read off the actual frequency at the audio analyzer The values measured have to be precise within the scope of the counter resolution error 0 1 Hz Read off distortion factor at the audio analyzer Rated value up to 100 2 0 1 Settings at the SME Menu LF OUTPUT SOURCELFGEN2 LFGEN 2 FREQ 1 kHz LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN Vary VOLTAGE from 3mV to 4 V see below gt Measure the output level using the audio analyzer Deviation from rated max 196 1mV Recommended settings 3 mV 10 mV 30 mV 100 mV 300 mV 1V 2V 4V 5 2 39 2 Frequency Response Test equipment AC voltmeter Section
547. ue of the frequency for the sweep operation Parameters STARt STOP SPAN and CENTer are coupled to each other STARt may be larger than STOP As to specified range cf FREQuency CENTer RST value is 100MHz Example SOUR FREQ STAR 1MHz 1038 6002 02 3 66 E 13 SME SOURce FREQuency SOURce FREQuency STOP 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz This command indicates the final value of the frequency for the sweep operation see STARt as well As to specified range cf FREQuency CENTer RST value is 500MHz Example SOUR FREQ STOP 100MHz SOURce FREQuency STEP The command to enter the step width for the frequency setting if frequency values UP or DOWN are used is under this node This command is coupled to the KNOB STEP command in manual control Only linear step widths can be set SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement 0 to 1 GHz The command sets the step width for the frequency setting Example SOUR FREQ STEP INCR 1MHz RST value is 1MHz 1038 6002 02 3 67 E 13 SOURce ILS 3 6 11 8 SOURce ILS Subsystem SME This subsystem contains the commands to control the characteristics of the test signals for ILS Instrument Landing System option SM B6 multifunction generator SOURce ILS STATe SOURce TYPE GS GSLope MODE COMid STATe FREQuency DEPTh DDM CURRent DEPTh DIRection LOGarithmic LLOBe FREQuency
548. uency cf data sheet Example SOUR FM1 DEV 5kHz RST value is 10 kHz SOURce FM1 2 EXTernal 2 The commands to set the external FM input are under this node The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM FM and PM are independent of each other The settings are always related to the socket which is determined by the numeric suffix after EXTernal The suffix after FM is ignored then With the following commands e g the settings are both related to EXT2 input SOUR FM1 EXT2 COUP AC SOUR FM2 EXT2 COUP AC A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1 SOURce FM1 2 EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external FM input AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered RST value is AC Example SOUR FM EXT COUP AC 1038 6002 02 3 63 E 13 SOURce FM SME SOURce FM1 2 INTernal The settings for the internal FM generators are effected under this node For FM1 this is always LF generator 1 for FM2 always LF generator 2 Here the same hardware is set for FM1 PM1 AM INT1 as well as SOURceO just like for FM2 PM2 and AM INT2 as well as SOURce2 This means that e g the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect SOUR AM INT2 FREQ SOUR FM2 INT FREQ SOUR PM2 INT FREQ SOUR2 FREQ CW SOURce FM1 2 INTernal FREQuency 400 Hz 1 kHz
549. uest The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective bits of the transition and enable registers are set In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation with a National Instruments GPIB driver the setting Disable Auto Serial Poll must be changed to yes by means of IBCONF REM Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors CALL IBWRT generator CLS Reset status reporting system CALL IBWRT generator SRE 168 Permit service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register CALL IBWRT generator ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command execution device dependent and query error CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for all events CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set questionable enable bits for all events CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits ON PEN GOSUB Srq Initialization of the service request routine PEN ON REM Continue main program here STOP End of program A service request is then processed in the service request routine Note The variables userN and userM must be pre assigned usefully Srq REM Service request routine xem eee DO
550. uest information The commands are subdivided according to two criteria 1 According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as reset of the instrument or setting the output level to 1 volt Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC bus e g for identification of the device or polling the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488 2 They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and selftest Device specific commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency setting A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee cf Section 3 5 1 Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status cf Section 3 5 4 Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in Section 3 5 The commands are listed and explained in detail in Section 3 6 3 5 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3 5 1 SCPI Introduction SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standard command set for programming instruments irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer The goal of the SCPI consortium
551. ulation frequency is out of the permissible range This modulation forces other modulations OFF A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same time as an already active modulation The previous modulation has been switched off 152 Input voltage out of range EXT1 too high The input voltage at the EXT1 socket is too high 153 Input voltage out of range EXT1 too low The input voltage at the EXT1 socket is too low 1038 6002 02 7B 5 E 11 List of Error Messages SME Continuation Device dependent Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Input voltage out of range EXT2 too high The input voltage at the EXT2 socket is too high Input voltage out of range EXT2 too low The input voltage at the EXT2 socket is too low Output protection tripped The overvoltage protection has responded cf Section 2 5 8 162 LF output overdriven The dependency of the LF output voltage on other parameters in stereo operation has caused that the LF output would have to supply more than 4 volts However the voltage has been limited to 4 volts 171 Oven cold The reference oscillator has not yet reached its operating temperature 172 Reference frequency 100 MHz VCXO unlocked The 100 MHz quartz oscillator of the reference frequency has not been synchronized 173 Step synthesis unlocked The step synthesis has not been sync
552. ultifunction generator Option SM B2 LF generator Option SM B2 LF generator Option SM B2 LF generator Option SM B6 multifunction generator The selection of the waveform and frequency of the internal modulation signals can be made in one of the modulation menus AM FM PM as well as in the LF output menu Notes In conformance to the possibilities of the modulation generator options fitted there are differences in the modulation menus for AM FM and PM The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another LFGEN SHAPE NOI and LF sweep 1038 6002 02 2 53 E 13 Analog Modulations 2 6 2 2 Amplitude Modulation SME Menu MODULATION AM offers access to settings for amplitude modulation Notes In the level range from 7 to 13 dBm the specified AM data are only guaranteed for a linearly decreasing modulation depth with a rising level When a modulation depth is set that is too high WARNING is displayed in the status line or the message WARN 221 Settings conflict modulation forces peak level into overrange is displayed after pressing the ERROR key Modulations AM VOR ILS and MKR BCN deactivate one another AM SOURCE INT LFGEN2 and STEREO deactivate one another as well Menu selection MODULATION AM 100 000 000 0 dBm 30 0 FREQUENCY LEVEL ODULATION DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP
553. umber Every message transmitted can be assigned a message number This information is evaluated when received by the pager ON SME sends the number 0 for every message OFF SME sends no number with the message IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS MNUM OFF 2 112 E 13 SME MAIL DROP FLAG BIT ERRORS ERROR BIT MASK POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD MESSAGE GENERATION START IN CYCLE START IN FRAME 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation Switch on off of MAIL DROP flag ON The transmitted message is marked as volatile Thus it is not filed in the normal message memory of the pager but in a special memory location and is not subject to normal numbering The message overwrites the previous volatile one OFF The message is not marked IEC bus command SOUR FLEX MESS MDR OFF The SME allows for providing a 32 bit word of the transferred message with bit errors for test purposes The parameters of this section specify the erroneous bits and their positions Entry of the erroneous bits in a 32 bit field The transmitted decimal number 0 4294967295 is converted internally into a 32 bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits These bits are XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine which bits of this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly Note XORing precedes block interleaving see FLEX standard It is carried out in all phases of a
554. umeric message The following selection can be made FOX The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog ALPHA ABCD to complete POGSAG character set USER to 4 4 messages that can be freely edited by command ALPHanumeric DATA Example SOUR POCS MESS ALPH SEL FOX RST value is USER3 SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric CATalog The command queries the alphanumeric messages available It causes a list to be returned on which the entries are separated by commas The command is a query command and thus has no RST value Example S0UR POCS MESS ALPH CAT Answer FOX ALPHA USER1 SOURce POCSag MESSage ALPHanumeric DATA String The command allows any character string to be entered into one of the alphanumeric messages USER 1 to 4 This message has to be selected first with the command ALPHanumeric SELect RST value is eg empty message Example SOUR POCS MESS ALPH DATA Hello 1038 6002 02 3 86 E 13 SME SOURce POCSag SOURce POCSag POLarity NORMal INVerted The command sets the polarity of the modulation NORMal The polarity of the modulation is set according to standard POCSAG INVerted The polarity of the modulation is inverted Example SOUR POCS POL NORM RST value is NORM SOURce POCSag TSLice 2 120s The command determines the length of the time slice Possible values are 2 to 120 sec A preamble of 576 bits is sent at the beginning of every time slice followed by the
555. ursor and press key SELECT Mark selection EXT using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Mark submenu SELECT STANDARD using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Mark one of the standards using the menu cursor and press key SELECT or Mark parameter BITRATE using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Enter the bit rate using rotary knob or numeric key and press key 1 x ENTER gt Mark submenu SELECT LIST using the menu cursor and press key SELECT gt Mark list XMEM using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Note In recording the memory area is overwritten from the start area and memory address to the stop address START ADDRESS LENGTH 1 Up to 7 bits below the start address and up to 15 bits above the stop address START ADDRESS LENGTH 1 are additionally overwritten with a random value The additional bits must be considered if a new recording is to be effected between recordings already stored gt Mark submenu CONFIG XMEM using the menu cursor and press key SELECT gt Mark parameter START ADDRESS using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Enter the start address using rotary knob or numeric keys and press key 1 x ENTER Enter the start address using rotary knob or numeric keys and press key 1 x ENTER Mark parameter LENGTH using the menu cursor and press key SELECT Enter the sequence length using rotary knob or numeric keys an
556. us test frequencies for recommended setting values see table 5 2 Level 0 dBm Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION AM AM SOURCE INT menu Modulation depth 3096 Modulation frequency 1 kHz gt Measure the phase modulation resulting by means of a 23 kHz lowpass filter and peak weighting at the modulation analyzer Unwanted modulation with frequencies lt 3 GHz max 0 1 rad Unwanted modulation with frequencies gt GHz max 1 0 rad 1038 6002 02 5 21 E 13 Test Procedure SME 5 2 20 Level Monitoring at Input EXT2 Option SM B5 Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 2 Test setup Connect the generator output of the audio analyzer to external modulation input EXT2 Testing gt Setting at the SME Select EXT2 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Gen level under 0 98 0 01 V Upeak indication EXT2 LOW Gen level over 1 02 0 01 V Upeak indication EXT2 HIGH Gen level 0 99 to 1 01 Vlupeak eee no indication 5 2 21 FM Deviation Setting Test equipment Test system 5 1 1 1 Measurement Settings at the SME RF200MHz Level 0 dBm Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION FM FM1 SOURCE menu Modulation frequency Hub 300 Hz to 250 kHz see below Read off the FM deviation at the modulation analyzer Deviation of the deviation measured from the setting value fcre max 3 96 of the indication 20 Hz Recommended setting values 300 Hz
557. ut ast see also Using custom frames CUS1 CUS9 These data can now be manipulated using an appropriate PC program Returning the telegram data If the settings made during readout have not been changed the data can simply be returned to the SME using SOUR DM DATA DATA x bits binary data SOUR DM DATA ATT y bits binary data When transferring several fragments start and length are to be set before Starting ReFLEX25 Set SOUR REFL STAT AUTO OFF in order to avoid recalculation of the telegram when ReFLEX is started Then start ReFLEX25 Digital data at output connectors In addition to the modulated RF the digital data and the clock can also be tapped at the output connectors For the 2 valued modulations 1600bps 2FSK and 3200bps 2FSK the data appear at the DATA connector For the four valued modulations 3200bps AFSK and 6400bps 4FSK the x bit of each symbol is output at the DATA connector the associated y bit at the BURST connector When using the internal clock setting CLOCK SOURCE INT in the menu the symbol clock is output at the CLOCK connector Caution Depending on bit rate and type of modulation a 3200 Hz clock is always output here 1038 6002 02 2 118 E 13 SME Digital Modulation Menu selection DIGITAL MOD ReFLEX A A A ss 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY GMSK OFF ON LEVEL GFSK MODULATION 1600 2FSK 3200 2FSK 3200 4FSK 6400 4FSK
558. utput according to the setting under FRAME CONTENTS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR AUTO SINGLE Only FLEX filler data are output If EXECUTE SINGLE is selected the subsequent frame is output in the way it has been set under FRAME CONTENTS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR SING SOUR FLEX TACT MESS EXT Only FLEX filler data are output In the case of an external trigger pulse the subsequent frame is output in the way it has been set under FRAME CONTENTS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR FLEX TACT MESS 2 114 E 13 SME EXECUTE SINGLE gt CLOCK SOURCE 1038 6002 02 Digital Modulation EXTTRIG SME only starts with the generation of the FLEX signal after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input connector After recognition of this signal the next frame is output in the way it has been specified under FRAME CONTENTS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR FLEX TACT ONCE EXTTRIG ALWAYS The units waits for a signal edge at the trigger connector same as EXTTRIG After recognition of this edge the unit behaves as described under setting AL WAYS IEC bus command TRIG DM SOUR EXT SOUR FLEX TACT STAR The next frame is output in the way it has been specified under FRAME CONTENTS This triggerable action is only displayed and active when MODE SINGLE has been selected IEC bus command TRG Selection of the clock source This setting is also va
559. utput connector If a level above this limit is attempted to be set a warning is displayed in the status line IEC bus command SOUR POW LIM 16 dBm AUTO Normal operation The attenuator switching mechanically switches in steps of 5 dB the switching points being fixed IEC bus command OUTP AMOD AUTO FIXED Level settings are effected without switching the attenuator cf Section 2 5 2 Interrupt free Level Setting IEC bus command OUTP AMOD FIX Indication of the level range in which the level is set without interruption in the ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED operating mode Input value of the step width for level variation using the rotary knob The RF level is varied in the step width entered if KNOB STEP is set to USER IEC bus command SOUR POW STEP 1 DECIMAL Variation step width according to the position of the digit cursor USER User Defined variation step width as entered under KNOB STEP USER Selection of resolution of LEVEL display For level range 99 9 dBm to 16 dBm the resolution for the level display can be set to 0 1 dB or 0 01 dB Selection of the state the RF output is to assume after power on of the unit RF OFF Output is switched off PREVIOUS SETTING Same state as before switch off IEC bus command OUTP PON ON OFF The saved RF level is loaded as well when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key or with a memory sequence IEC bus command SOUR POW RCL INCL ON The RF level is not loaded when instrumen
560. utput level The following connection is true POWer RF output level POWer OFFSet Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but only the query value of POWer AMPLitude Only dB is permissible as a unit here linear units V W etc are not permitted Caution The level offset is also valid in the case of level sweeps Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL OFFS 0 oder RST value is 0 POW OFFS 0 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines the effect of the recall function on the RF level RST value has no effect to this setting INCLude The saved RF level is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the RECALL key or with a memory sequence EXCLude The level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded the current settings are maintained Example SOUR POW RCL INCL 1038 6002 02 3 89 E 13 SOURce POWer SME SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 144 to 16 dBm The command limits the maximum Rf output level in operating mode CW and SWEEP It does not influence the display LEVEL and the answer to query POW Example SOUR POW LIM AMPL 15 RST value is 16 dBm SOURce POWer MANual 144 to 16 dBm The command sets the level if SOURce POWer MODE is set to SWEep and SOURce SWEep MODE to MANual Only level values between START and STOP are permissible As to specified range cf POWer RST value is 30 dBm Example SOUR PO
561. ve cursor SELECT Next menu RETURN Previous menu VERSION 33 QUICK SELECT Front panel view display 1038 6002 02 2 2 1038 6002 03 MAX 50 REVERSE POWER MADE IN GERMANY ES E 13 SME Controls cf Fig 2 1 B front panel view controls 2 1 1 2 2 DATA INPUT Parameter field Parameters RF frequency and RF level can be entered directly by means of the parameter keys alternatively to menu operation Further complete instrument settings can be stored and called SAVE FREQ Opens the setting of the RF frequency via value input or variation by means of a rotary RCL knob The current menu is maintained Return to the menu by means of the RETURN key Setting of the RF frequency also in the FREQUENCY menu Opens the setting of the RF level via value input or variation by means of a rotary knob The current menu is maintained Return to the menu by means of the RETURN key Setting of the RF level also in the LEVEL menu LEVEL SAVE Opens the storing of the current instrument setting Memory selection is effected by entering a number 1 to 50 and is finished by means of the ENTER key RCL Opens the calling of an instrument setting stored Memory selection is effected by entering a number 1 to 50 and is finished by means of the ENTER key Numeric input field Numeric values deci
562. ve deviation INV Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation IEC bus command SOUR DM FSK4 POL NORM Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Selection of a list or generation of a new list cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor Selection of the editor function to process the list selected cf Section 2 2 4 List Editor 2 99 E 13 Digital Modulation SME 2 6 3 10 FFSK Modulation Menu DIGITAL MOD FFSK offers access to settings for FFSK modulation Menu selection DIGITAL MOD FFSK 100 000 000 0 EVEL 30 0 FREQUENCY EXT PRBS DATA LEVEL 1 5 15 20 Z4 23 Bit ODULATION CLOCK POS COUPLED DIGITAL MOD E LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX LE QUIPUT 1 LEVEL ATTENUATION 0 0 SWEEP FE MODE AUTO SINGLE LIST MEM SEO SELECT STANDARD CURRENT POCSAG UTILITIES BIT RATE 1200 HELP DEVIATION 1 5k 2 0k 3 0k 3 5k 4 0k 4 5k LECT LIST se CURRENT DLIST5 LETE LI M FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT VIEV Fig 2 47 Menu DIGITAL MOD FFSK preset setting fitted with option SME B11 DM coder SOURCE Selection of the modulation source FFSK IEC bus command SOUR DM TYPE FFSK SOUR EXT STAT ON PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence IEC bus command SOUR DM PRBS
563. vel Setting In the ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED operating mode level settings are carried out without interruption An electronic attenuation setting is used instead of the interrupting attenuator If the normal variation range of 23 dB is violated the level under overrange warning is displayed In these ranges level accuracy and spectral purity are no longer guaranteed 1038 6002 02 2 45 E 13 RF Level SME 2 5 3 Switching On Off Internal Level Control Menu LEVEL ALC offers access to settings for level control Level control can be deactivated and various bandwidths of the level control can be switched on Switching off level control ALC STATE OFF switches over the internal level control into a sample and hold operation In this operating mode level control is automatically switched on for a short period of time after every level and frequency setting and then the level control is held at the value achieved Switching off the level control is used with multi transmitter measurements to achieve a larger intermodulation ratio Bandwidth setting influences the AM noise of the output signal The bandwidth of the level control has the same effect as a filter of the same bandwidth Menu selection LEVEL ALC LSS 100 000 000 0 30 0 FREQUENCY OFF ON LEVEL SEARCH ONCE p ODULATION BANDWIDTH 100k 500k Hz DIGITAL MOD LF OUTPUT SWEEP LIST MEM SEQ UTILITIES HELP
564. vice setting at the memory location indicated SYSTem SREStore 1 1000 This command loads a device status that was stored using the SYSTem SSAVe command RESTORE One of 1000 available memory locations is selected by entering a numeral least significant byte most significant byte gt This command has the same effect as the SYSTem SREStore command The setting time however is 300 us less It is optimized for highest speed and does not comply with the SCPI syntax regulations Exactly 3 bytes are transmitted including the which is the identifier of this command With the last byte EOI has to be activated as delimiter The memory location is binary coded in the 2 bytes indicated Example RESTORE at memory location 268 gt 010C hex corresponds to the following binary command 00100001 00001100 0000 0001 Y hex 0C hex 01 Binary coded bytes can usually not be written as printable ASCII characters When programmed in C the above command has the following form char sendstring 3 OxOC 0x01 In BASIC the command string to be output is as follows CHR 12 CHR 1 The pros for CHR are decimal numbers therefore 12 for OC hex Since binary coded bytes may also have the value of the LF line feed character which is interpreted as a delimiter switch over to only EOI as delimiter by selecting SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB L TERminator EOI prior to using this command 1038 6002 02 3 143 E 13 SME Status Repor
565. w the limit value guaranteed Dynamic level range exceeded The difference between the maximal and minimal value of a level list is above 20 dBm An exact level setting is no longer guaranteed 120 Signal output ERMES setting mismatch use RECALCULATE gt ERMES settings have been changed during operating mode ERMES However the signal output is still based on the old settings The output signal is recalculated from the current settings by selecting RECALCULATE gt in manual control or ERMES STATe OFF STATe ON via IEC bus 121 ERMES Channel Frequency mismatch The RF has been readjusted and does no longer match the frequency indicated in the ERMES menu under CHANNEL Setting ERMES CHANNEL does not only determine the RF but also influences the structure of the ERMES message Thus the channel cannot simply be changed by readjusting the RF but only via ERMES CHANNEL and RECALCULATE gt Signal output FLEX setting mismatch use RECALCULATE gt FLEX settings have been changed during operating mode FLEX However the signal output is still based on the old settings The output signal is recalculated from the current settings by selecting RECALCULATE gt in manual control or FLEX STATe OFF STATe ON via IEC bus 130 FM modulator VCO unlocked FM modulator VCO is not synchronized 140 AM modulation frequency out of range The AM modulation frequency is out of the permissible range PM modulation frequency out of range The PM mod
566. ware handshake DSR CTS Fig A 2 Pin assigment of RS 232 C connector Signal lines RxD Receive Data Data line transmission from external controller to instrument TxD Transmit Data Data line transmission from instrument to external controller DTR Data terminal ready Output log 0 active With DTR the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data The DTR line controls whether the instrument is ready for reception or not GND Interface ground connected to instrument ground DSR Data set ready Instead of the CTS line the DSR connector is used for instruments with a VAR2 REV3 front module RTS Request to send Output log 0 active With RTS the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data The RTS line controls whether the instrument is ready for reception or not CTS Clear to send Input log O active CTS tells the instrument that the opposite station is ready to receive data 1038 6002 02 6A 4 E 12 SME RS 232 C Interface Transmission parameters To ensure an error free and correct data transmission the parameters of the instrument and the controller should have the same settings The parameters are set in menu UTILITIES SYSTEM RS232 Transmission rate The following baud rates can be set in the instrument baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Data bits Data transmission is in 8 bit ASCII code The first bit transmitted is the LSB Least
567. wing reasons t cannot be processed using the list editor The data are either loaded externally via the DATA socket RECORD or entered via the IEC bus or the RS 232 interface List XMEM cannot be deleted The previous data of a certain memory area are overwritten when new data are read into this memory area e List XMEM can be divided up into several sublists memory areas The memory areas are defined by the start address and the length of the data sequence Their contents is permanently stored For modulation types QPSK and 4FSK it should be noted that a symbol is coded with two bits the X bit and the Y bit If data lists for these modulations are to be stored in the memory extension three operating modes can be selected each storing the X and Y bits in the list in a different way Switchover between the different modes is not possible without a change of the XMEM data 1038 6002 02 2 81 E 13 Digital Modulation SME 1 CLOCK MODE BIT In this mode X and Y bits are stored serially in the XMEM list and MEM MODE 8M 1 are transmitted via the DATA line The X bit can be found at the start address 2 CLOCK MODE BIT In this mode the X and Y bits are also stored serially in the MEM MODE 1M 3 XMEM list and are transmitted via the DATA line The X bit can be found at the start address The LEV ATT level reduction and the BURST channel can be used 3 CLOCK MODE SYMB DM Coder VAR 4 REV 1 or higher MEM M
568. wing values in the telegram are fixed and cannot be changed Base frame management see 3 7 6 10 of the ReFLEX25 documentation pf 0 pn 3 ps 0 2 cs 3 5 ALOHA Time out and randomization interval 3 7 6 20 0 t 0 LT 0 rt 0 Message sequence number 3 9 msn 32 Vector format 3 10 last word only present if response required 1 Values rs 0 rt 0 rc 0 MR 0 additionally for forward channel scheduling fc 0 ff 0 Priority bit in address field is always 0 i e only one tone only call Using the user definable custom frames CUS1to CUS9 The SME permits to output user definable frames These frames must be generated on a host processor e g a PC and transferred to the SME via IEC bus or RS232 The detailed procedure will be described below in the section Reading out Modifying Returning of Telegram Parts reading out being omitted of course if the custom frames are completely generated on the host processor The custom frames must have the following data format Each transmitted symbol of a 4FSK consists of an x and a y bit X and y bits are filed in two separate byte arrays The two arrays are transferred to the SME separately Each byte of the two arrays contains 8 valid x or y bits which permits to implement a 6400 bps 4FSK In order to achieve a 2FSK all y bits must be set to O In order to obtain lower bit rates the bits must be doubled accordingly The SME starts the
569. with a medium potential of risk for the user that can result in death or serious injuries CAUTION This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user that can result in slight or minor injuries ATTENTION This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage to the product NOTE This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention to operating the product but which does not lead to damage These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the associated documentation and the associated product The use of tags in connection with unassociated products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal injury or material damage Basic safety instructions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer Its ventilation must not be obstructed during operation Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products prescribed operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage category 2 use only in enclosed spaces max operat
570. x standard It is carried out in all phases of all message frames i e the X marked frames under FRAME CONTENTS Example SOUR FLEX ERROr MASK 0 RST value is 0 1038 6002 02 3 56 E 13 SME SOURce FLEX SOURce FLEX ERRor WORD 0 to 87 The command determines the position of the word to be falsified The words are numbered from block 0 word 0 to block 10 word 7 of a frame The sync part and the frame information word cannot be falsified The falsification precedes block interleaving in all transmitted phases Example SOUR FLEX ERRor WORD 0 RST value is 0 SOURce FLEX FCONtent X blank spaces A X blank spaces O A This command determines the contents of the 128 frames Each frame is represented by a character If less than 128 values are indicated the output cycle is shortened correspondingly X Flex useful data SpaceFlex filler data Simulated data of another radiocommunication service for OTHER A Emergency Resynchronization specified in the FLEX standard A stands for ASYNC The frame assigned to the pager is calculated from the value of FLEX MESSage CAPCode according to the following formula Frame Integer CAPCODE 16 modulo 128 Notes The SINFormation COLLapse value may cause the pager to respond to much more than merely its own frame As the FLEX signal generation is subject to the trigger system the settings under TRIGger DM determine whether
571. xample RST value for PM1 INT Example SOUR PM SOUR INT EXT2 for PM2 EXT2 SOURce PM1 2 STATe ON OFF The command switches the phase modulation selected by the numeric suffix with PM on or off Example SOUR PM1 STAT OFF RST value is OFF 1038 6002 02 3 83 E 13 SOURce POCSag SME 3 6 11 14 SOURce POCSag Subsystem POCSAG is a standard which in its various implementations e g CITYRUF SCALL allows convenient paging When equipped with the SME B42 POCSAG SME B11 DM coder and SME B12 DM memory extension options the SME generates call signals complying to the POCSAG standard All essential parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable Command Parameter Default Remark Unit SOURce POCSag STATe ON OFF MODulation FSK FFSK BRATe 512bps 1200bps 2400bps DEViation 1 5 2 0 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5 kHz Hz ERRor MASK 0 to 4294967295 WORD 0 to 16 LBATches 0 to 100 MESSage ADDRess 0 to 2097151 CATegory NUMeric TONE ALPHanumeric SWORd POCSag INForuf TONE A B C D NUMeric string ALPHanumeric SELect FOX ALPHA USER1 to 4 CATalog Query only DATA alphanumeric data POLarity NORMal INVerted TSLice 2to120s S TACTion MESSage STARt ONCE SOURce POCSag STATe ON OFF The command switches all of the other active DM modulation settings off In contrast to ERMES the RF frequency is not changed Each time OFF is switched to ON the data
572. xample SOUR DM BAS CLOC POL NORM RST value is NORMal SOURce DM BASic CLOCk SOURce INTernal COUPled The command selects the source for the DATA clock INTernal internal clock generator is used The CLOCK socket is switched to act as an output COUPled The function of the CLOCK socket depends on the function of the DATA socket This means that with an external supply of the data the clock has to be supplied externally with internal data generation the instrument itself generates the clock pulse RST value is COUPled Example SOUR DM BAS CLOC SOUR INT SOURce DM BASic DATA The commands to set the data generator are under this node The bit rate at which the data are output is to be set under the individual modulations The DM lists consists of a DATA BURSt and ATTenuate content The list contents must all be of the same length except for contents of length 1 With QPSK the number of entries has to be an integer in addition This is interpreted as if the content had the same length as the other contents and all values were equal to the first value However this is not valid for list XMEM offering access to the memory extension cf node SOURce DM BAS DATA XMEM SOURce DM BASic DATA CATalog The command queries the data lists available The response supplied is an enumeration of the data lists separated by commas RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR DM BAS DATA CAT Answer D
573. y Thus STEP LOG indicates the fraction of the prior frequency by which this is increased for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is indicated in percent with the suffix PCT having to be used explicitly If STEP LOG is changed the value of POINts valid for SPACing LOGarithmic also changes according to the formula stated unde Example SOUR2 SWE STEP LOG 5PCT RST value is 1 PCT 1038 6002 02 3 114 E 13 SME STATus 3 6 13 STATus System This system contains the commands for the status reporting system c f Section Status Reporting System RST has no influence on the status registers Command Parameter Default Remark Unit STATus OPERation EVENt Query only CONDition Query only PTRansition 0 to 32767 NTRansition 0 to 32767 ENABle 0 to 32767 PRESet No query QUEStionable EVENt Query only CONDition Query only 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 PTRansition NTRansition ENABIe QUEue NEXT Query only STATus OPERation The commands for the STATus OPERation register are under this node STATus OPERation EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus OPERation register In reading out the content of the EVENt part is deleted Example STAT OPER EVEN Response 17 STATus OPERation CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register In reading out the content of the CONDition part
574. y 1 to 16 MHz 3 97 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 97 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 0 to 4095 not SCPI 3 97 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal not SCPI 3 97 SOURce STEReo ARI BK CODE A B C D E F not SCPI 3 100 SOURce STEReo ARI DEViation 0 Hz to10 kHz not SCPI 3 100 SOURce STEReo ARI TYPE BK DK OFF not SCPI 3 100 SOURce STEReo AUDio FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 15 kHz not SCPI 3 99 SOURce STEReo AUDio MODE RIGHt LEFT RELeft REMLeft not SCPI 3 99 SOURce STEReo AUDio PREemphasis OFF 50 us 75 not SCPI 3 99 SOURce STEReo DE Viation 0 Hz to 100 kHz not SCPI 3 98 SOURce STEReo PILot DE Viation 0 Hz to 10 kHz not SCPI 3 99 SOURce STEReo PILot PHASe 0 to 360 deg not SCPI 3 99 SOURce STEReo PILot STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 99 SOURce STEReo SIGNal AUDio ARI not SCPI 3 98 SOURce STEReo STATe ON OFF not SCPI 3 98 SOURce SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG not SCPI 3 101 SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10 ms to 5s not SCPI 3 101 SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP not SCPI 3 102 SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts Number not SCPI 3 102 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic not SCPI 3 102 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 50 PCT not SCPI 3 102 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 to 1 GHz not SCPI 3 102 SOURce SWEep POWer DWELI 1msto5s not SCPI 3 103 SOU
575. y SME03E 03 06 CENTer 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz CW FIXed 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz RCL INCLude EXCLude MANual 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz MODE CW FlXed SWEep LIST OFFSet 50 to 50 GHz Hz SPAN 0 to 1 5 GHz Hz 0 to 2 2 3 6 GHz STARt 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz STOP 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz STEP Hz INCRement Do GHZ SOURce FREQuency CENTer 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SMEO3E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz The command sets the sweep range by means of the center frequency This command is coupled to commands SOURce FREQuency STARt and SOURce FREQuency STOP In this command value OFFSet is considered as with input value FREQUENCY in the FREQUENCY menu Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for OFFSet 0 The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula cf Chapter 2 Section Frequency Offset as well 5 kHz OFFSet to 1 5 GHz OFFSet Example SOUR FREQ CENT 100kHz RST value is STARt STOP 2 SOURce FREQuency CW FlXed 5 kHz to 1 5 GHz SME03E 03 06 5 kHz to 2 2 3 6 GHz The command sets the frequency for CW operation This value is coupled to the current sweep frequency In addition to a numeric value UP and DOWN can be indicated The frequency is increased or reduced by the value set under SOURce FREQuency STEP As to specified range cf FREQu
576. z 3 108 SOURCce0 2 FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid SQUare TRlangle PRNoise 3 109 SAWTooth SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep F REQuency 0 1 Hz to 500 kHz 3 110 SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 F SWeep AOFF 3 110 SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep STATe ON OFF 3 110 SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 3 110 SOURce2 SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG not SCPI 3 111 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency DWELI 1msto1s not SCPI 3 111 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP not SCPI 3 111 1038 6002 02 80 14 E 12 SME List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI Page SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency POINts Number not SCPI 3 112 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency SPACing LINear LOGarithmic not SCPI 3 112 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 to 500 kHz not SCPI 3 112 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 50PCT not SCPI 3 112 STATus OPERation CONDition 3 113 STATus OPERation ENABle 0 to 32767 3 114 STATus OPERation NTRansition 0 to 32767 3 113 STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 to 32767 3 113 STATus OPERation EVENt 3 113 STATus PRESet 3 114 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 3 114 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 to 32767 3 114 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 0 to 32767 3 114 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 to 32767 3 114 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 3 114 STATus QUEue NEXT 3 114 SYSTem BEEPer ST
577. z section of the sum of the broadband noise powers of both signal generators is to be measured at the spectrum analyzer then which corresponds to the carrier frequency offset from the difference frequency up to the difference frequency minus 1MHz Due to the mirror inversion of the spectrum at the zero line the power measured must be halved gt Calibration see Section 5 2 7 gt Increase the detuning to the measurement offset frequency 10MHz recommended offset frequency 10MHz gt Set the preamplifier to 40dB and read the noise voltage at the analyzer at a center frequency of approx 100kHz normalized to a bandwidth of 1Hz noise level gt Subtract from the reference level and add 43dB for the amplification switchover and the mirror image The measured value is the sum of the noise powers of both signal generators If the signal to noise ratio of the second signal generator is not better than the one of the test object by at least 10dB the noise component of the reference transmitter must be determined and subtracted as well In the case of two identical transmitters the correction is further 3dB Corrected measured value lt 140 dBc see table 5 2 Note The measurement of SSB phase noise usually makes a measurement of unwanted deviation superfluous as it is more sensitive Test equipment Measurement 1038 6002 02 Test system 5 1 1 1 gt Settings at the SME

SIGNAL GENERATOR SME02 SME03 SME03E

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents